\

Digitized by tine Internet Arciiive

in

2007

witii

IVIicrosoft

funding from

Corporation

littp://www.arcliive.org/details/elementarygrammaOOmoniuoft

"TBE F.LEMEJVTS

OF THE DEVANAGARl CHAttACTER

^^\.i^^&,%

^^^

rs

<v

^O

If)

r.ajv2t^ srr.

Sir C.WlZkins scrip':

W.KMltnt

CrXundrn.

ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR
OF THE

Jjf*

SANSCRIT LANGUAGE,
PARTLY IN THE ROMAN CHARACTE'
ARRANGED ACCORDING TO A NEW THEORY,
IN REFERENCE ESPECIALLY TO

MUfb

sj^ott lExtracts'in

TO WHICH

'

THE CLASSICAL LANGUAGES:

IS

casg ^rose.

ADDED,

FROM

A SELECTION

THE INSTITUTES OF MANU,

WITH COPIOUS REFERENCES TO THE GRAMMAR,

autd Axr ExrGXiXSB T&AirsXiATZoir.

BY MONIER WILLIAMS,
MEMBER OF THE ROYAL

M.A.

ASIATIC SOCIETY,

ONE OF THE PROFESSORS OF SANSCRIT

IN

THE EAST-INDIA COLLEGE,

LATE BODEN SANSCRIT SCHOLAR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD.

LONDON:
WM. H.

ALLEN &

CO.,

7,

LEADENHALL STREET.

MDCCCXLVI.

pK
642837

(p(^^

LONDON
PRINTED BY WILLIAM WATTS, CROWN COURT, TEMPLE BAR.

PREFACE.
Sir William Jones has said of the Sutras of Panini that they/
are "dark as the darkest oracle ;" and Colebrooke, in one of
his Essays, has given a list of about one hundred and forty
Indian grammarians and commentators who have followed in
the footsteps of the great Patriarch of Sanscrit

aphorisms.
in

Grammar,

throw light upon the obscurity of his

In this endeavour they have succeeded rather

and endeavoured

to

shewing the depth of their own knowledge, than in making

more

the subject

students

accessible to the generality of

and the explanations which they

times more unintelligible than the original

competent

to

some-

itself.

Happily, however, a writer has arisen in our

this subject.

European

offer are

own country

elucidate most thoroughly the difficulties of

Professor Wilson, the greatest Sanscrit scholar

of the present day, whose name

proud to associate with its own,
which he has given to the public
tation by his graceful adaptation

the University of Oxford

in the excellent

is

Grammar

has added to his high repuof the English language to

the exposition of the native system of grammatical teaching.

It

may be

numerous works,

said of all this author's

that, as

they abound in indications of surpassing genius, so they offer

to the student of Oriental

Literature the most valuable in-

formation on every topic of inquiry.

But notwithstanding the advantages thus afforded

study of a language so interesting in
its literature,

and so important in

ests in the East, it is

its

its affinities,

for the

so rich in

bearing upon our inter-

remarkable that the greater part of the

PREFACE.

11

English public are not merely indifferent to

but ignorant of

must

its

character, and even of

its acquisition,

very name.

its

It

be confessed that this indifference on the part of the

generality to a language which

attention

recommends

itself to

their

no considerations of immediate practical utility,

by

ought not to excite surprise. It is even, perhaps, too much

to expect that the study should flourish in the University of
Oxford.

Its

neglect in this ancient seat of learning only

points to a fact which has escaped the observation of those

would-be reformers of the present system of education at

Haileybury,

who

are not for wholly abolishing the study of

so important a language, but

the will of the student

and

would leave
this fact

is,

its

cultivation to

that to

make any

course of study voluntary in a place of public education

is

and that no temptation of

honour, or reward, or present or prospective benefit, and no
amount of facilities or opportunities, and no degree of intrintantamount

to its total abolition

sic excellence

or interest in the subject

any number of votaries

sory upon

itself,

a study which

to

is

will ever attract

not

made compul-

all.

But how does it come to pass, that in the East-India College, where this study is still, with true wisdom, made incumbent upon every one where it is only reasonable to expect
that the classical languages of the Hindus should be culti;

vated with as

much ardour

as the classical

languages of

Europe in the European Universities and where to educate

the minds of the future governors of India with any reference
to the duties they are to fulfil, or at least to imbue them
with any sympathy for the people they are to govern, is
surely to give them some knowledge of the language which
is the vehicle of that people's literature, the key to their
opinions, the repository of all that they hold sacred, and the
how does it come
source of nearly all their spoken dialects
;

to pass, that in this College the study of Sanscrit is not pro-

secuted with greater zest

PREFACE.

^P

Many

lii

causes are assigned for this indifference.

indeed, be anticipated that ignorance

league themselves in a

common

it

and idleness would

of mental

But ignorance and idleness would

and perseverance.

not prevail, were

might,

crusade against any course

more than usual degree

of reading which entails a

effort

It

not in their power to

make use

of argu-

ments that have a considerable shew of reason. To those

who would excuse their indifference by alleging that a knowledge of this language

is

useless to the Civil servants of India,

Such an argument

no reply need be given.

refutation, as

is

unworthy of

proceeding from an utter ignorance of

facts,

and

a stupid contempt for the authority of those eminent scholars,

who have long

since determined otherwise.

do not deny

utility,

its

but affirm that

India have succeeded very well without

To

who
many great men in
it,

there

those

but one

is

No one disputes that such men have succeeded very well without a knowledge of this language, but
no one can tell how much better they might have succeeded,
answer to return.

how much less time they might have attained the same
position, or how much more consideration they might have
or in

and prejudices of the natives in the

course of their career, had the study of Sanscrit formed a

shewn

for the feelings

part of their education.

Our

forefathers doubtless prospered

very well without a knowledge of Latin and Greek

that so

many

beneficial effects are

but

now

found to result from an

acquaintance with these languages, and

now

that so

many

no one would think of

making such an argument an excuse for the neglect of a
branch of education which, as civilization and learning ad-

facilities exist for their acquisition,

vance, becomes every day

But there are some who

Sanscrit on the ground of

specious line
fessed,

more

essential.

rest their objection to the study of

its

difficulty.

These adopt a very

it must be con-

of argument, and one which,

has every appearance of reason on

maintain that the

grammar

alone

is

its side.

They

of itself too intricate to

PREFACE.

IV

men

be mastered by

of ordinary abilities

course of two years at Haileybury

jects are forced

upon

that too

in

their short

many

other sub-

their attention to admit of their gaining

any satisfactory insight into the literature of the language

that they pass their examinations

memory and
;

by a mere forced

that the little they learn

is

effort of

as rapidly forgotten

was rapidly acquired, and only serves to disgust, without

leaving behind any solid or permanent advantage.

as

it

It is

with the especial view of answering this latter class of

work has been composed.

was thought that any system of grammar, however excellent in itself, founded upon the esoteric method of teaching
adopted by the Pandits of India, was certainly amenable to
objectors that the following short

It

An

these objections.

written, which rests

beginners on

its

we have presented
ture elucidating

The

literature.

its

claim of adaptation to the wants of

opposition to the Indian scheme of gram-

For

matical tuition.

elementary work has, therefore, been

it

should be borne in mind that in India

phenomenon of a literathan a grammar elucidating

to us the curious

grammar, rather

better to understand this,

it

observed that the literature of the Hindus

may

is

here be

referrible to

three distinct phases, the natural, the philological, and the

As

artificial.

opposed
this

to

the

first

and

each other, so

it

last of these are

may be shewn

diametrically

that the cause of

sudden transition from the one extreme

to the other

was

the intervention of a rage for philological inquiry.

Nothing can exceed the simplicity and beauty of the writfall under the early period of Hindu literature.
Witness some of the episodes of the two epic poems of the

ings which

Ramayana and Mahabharata;

witness some of the Puranas;

witness the short specimens of the fables of the Hitopadesha

and of the Laws of Manu, given

The
good

end of

taste

this

volume.

and in perfect
and the amount of grammatical knowledge retheir perusal might have been compressed into

style in all of these is plain, unaffected,

quired for

at the

PREIACE.

much

less

space than the two hundred pages which

follow^

these prefatory remarks.

But

at

some period or other not very

far anterior to

the

Christian era, a passion for philological disquisition seems

have taken possession of the Hindu mind.

to

The appear-

ance of the Paniniya Sutras created an appetite for abstract

speculation into the nature and capabilities of language, and

caused a total revulsion in the character of literary composi-

Numerous grammarians arose, whose laboured treawere not intended to elucidate the national literature of
the age, but rather had in view the formation of a distinct
tion.

tises

grammatical

existing

literature,

solely

for

its

own

sake.

Then succeeded the era of artificial composition, when

poems were written, either with the avowed object of illustrating grammar, or with the ill-concealed motive of pompously exhibiting the

depth of the author's philological

research.
It

cannot be wondered

under these circumstances, when

if,

the subtlety of Indian intellect wasted itself upon a sub-

all

ject

such as

this,

grammar should have been

unknown in the

the science of

refined and elaborated to a degree wholly

other languages of the world.

The

highly artificial literature, therefore, of later times,

which resulted from such an elaboration, and was closely

it, cannot certainly be cultivated by the ad-

interwoven with

vanced scholar without the aid of a grammar, moulded in

conformity with the native model.
it

may be

strict

But, on the other hand,

suspected that a treatise of this character will

always be unpalatable, and

may even prove a stumblingthe common class of students,

block rather than an aid, to

who, with no extraordinary powers of mind, and with neither
the time nor the inclination for

mere

abstract research into

the capabilities of language, will certainly be content with

may enable them

and purer specimens of Sanscrit

such an amount of grammatical knowledge as

to

comprehend the

earlier

PREFACE.

VI

would almost appear as if the Pandits of the East had designed to shut out the knowledge of
their language from the minds of the uninitiated vulgar.
They require that the young student shall devote ten years
to the grammar alone, and they have certainly contrived to
provide him with ample occupation during this tedious period of his novitiate.
The arrangement adopted in the best
of their grammatical treatises would seem to have been made
with the express purpose of exaggerating difficulties. Doubtcomposition.

less there are

Indeed,

many

it

many

real difficulties, but there are also

obvious parts of the subject the simplicity of which has been

carefully concealed behind a tissue of mysticism.

com-

plicated machinery of technical schemes and symbolical letters

is

constructed, which

mory of the initiated

become familiar with

may be

well calculated to aid the

natives themselves, or those

me-

who have

the native system by a long course of

reading in the country, but only serves to bewilder the Eu-

ropean tyro.

The young English

student has enough to do

in conquering the difficulties of a strange character,

and mas-

tering the rules of combination, without puzzling himself in

a labyrinth of servile, substituted, and rejected

perplexing himself in his

knowledge which

cess,

is

effiarts to

attainable

by

gain,

more

letters,

and

this indirect pro-

easily

by the usual

direct means.
It is
first

enough

to say of the

really elementary Sanscrit

defects will, therefore,

it is

by those who propose

mere

present volume that

it

is

Grammar ever published.

the
Its

hoped, not be too critically judged

to themselves a higher

assistance of beginners.

To

aim than the

administer to the wants of

the earliest students has been the one object kept steadily in

and subordinately an attempt has been made to exwhich distinguish the study of this language from that of Latin and Greek. The plan adopted will
It has been deemed desirable not
sufficiently explain itself.
Types of
to embarrass the student with too much at once.
view

hibit the peculiarities

PREFACE.
two different

sizes

attracts his eye

to

vii

have therefore been employed ; the larger

that which is of first importance
the
:

smaller generally contains such matter as possesses no press-

The Roman

ing claim to his immediate consideration.

cha-

racter has been applied to the expression of the Devanagarl

throughout the greater part of the Grammar, especially in

of the rules which regulate the combination and

treating

There can be no

permutation of vowels and consonants.

doubt that the

of Sanscrit

opinion which prevails of the difficulty

false

may be

traced to the labour imposed of thoroughly

mastering these rules at the

the language.
to

They

first

form, as

it

entrance upon the study of

were, a mountain of difficulty

be passed at the very commencement of the journey, and

the learner cannot be convinced that,

the ground beyond

may be more smooth

guages, the ingress to which

To

simplify, as

ject has

when once surmounted,

much

is

than in other lan-

comparatively easy.

as possible, this division of the sub-

been the main object

and as an accurate acquaint-

ance with the Devanagari letters

is

not here indispensable,

they have not been introduced, except in cases where any

mind. As he admore sparing use of the Roman character, and towards the end of the volume it has been
entirely abandoned.
For let it not be supposed that, by the
mixed method of printing here adopted, any loose or inaccu-

doubt

is

likely to arise in the learner's

vances, he will find a

knowledge of the Sanscrit character is tacitly encouraged.

Such inaccuracy is a too common obstacle to the sound

rate

acquisition of this language.

at

first

The

student satisfies himself

with an imperfect knowledge of the

Devanagari

alphabet, and, having never conquered this difficulty at the

outset, is ever after

The

hampered by

its

perpetual recurrence.

tabular views which have been given throughout this

work, especially in the chapter on Verbs,

will, it is

hoped,

conduce to the ready comprehension of the more complex

parts of the subject.
They contain some novelties, which

PREFACE.

Vlll

might require an apology, had they not been suggested by a

method of proposing,

strong belief in the falsity of the native

as the general scheme, a system of terminations

which applies

rather to the exceptions, and then, by a needless process of

derivation and substitution, forcing

it

into universal appli-

cation.

In

the

on

chapter

Syntax,

the

laws which determine

the coalition of vowels have not been observed, as being out

of place in a portion of the subject which aims only at the
clear exhibition of inflectional changes.

The

appended

Selections which have been

matical part of this book offer the greatest

early student in his first effort at translation.
are of the simplest character, and every

to the

gram-

facilities to

Those

word

is

the

in prose

explained

by notes or by references to the preceding pages of

Those in verse contain some few difficulties,
the grammar.
but the style is plain, and an English translation has been
subjoined, which may aid the text, as well as tend to shew
either

may not be
The sepaso unprofitable as some have ignorantly assumed.
next,
from
the
and
word
the
use
of
a
mark to
ration of each
indicate the division when the blending of vowels makes

that the matter contained in Sanscrit literature

such separation impossible, will offend the eye of the ad-

vanced Oriental scholar

expected to know which

is

but the beginner can scarcely be

the final or which the initial letter

word which he never saw

of a
refuse

to give the only clue

before.

which

to

is

search for the word in the Dictionary

VVhy, therefore,

guide him in his

and why, by uniting

those parts of the sentence which admit of separation, super-

add

this

unnecessary source of perplexity to the necessary

unknown

from the
The
blending of vowels and the composition of words?
natives of the East ought, in this particular, to conform to a

difficulty,

custom which the

lent

amongst

in other languages, resulting

art of printing has

civilized

nations,

if,

made

universally preva-

at least, they desire their

PREFACE.

ix

languages to be generally cultivated by the people of Europe.

Nor does there seem any reason in the theory which would

make such a conformity incompatible with

the

laws of

euphony.
only remains to add, that in a work, small and unpre-

It

which so many minute points and

marks have been employed to represent the Sanscrit character
tending though

it

be, in

by the Roman, the correction of the press has been a task

of no small labour.

In this labour Professor Johnson, an

Oriental scholar of whose varied attainments the East- India

College has reason to be proud, has cheerfully co-operated,

and

in other matters also has freely given the benefit of his

valuable advice and great experience.

much

of the merit

is

But whilst

to

him

due that may belong to this book on

it must be distinctly understood that

the score of accuracy,

entirely free from the responsibility of its novel strucand arrangement. It is also fair to state that some of
the detail of the following pages has been suggested by a

he

is

ture

careful perusal of Professor Bopp's Sanscrit

at Berlin.

East-India College,
July 1846.

Grammar, printed

CONTENTS.

Chap.

I.

Letters

-.-.-....

Pronunciation

Chap.

II.

Sect. II.

Chap.

III.

Combination of Vowels

to

_
-

Sanscrit Roots, and the Crude Fonn of No^ns

Roots and Nouns

10

18

21

Declension of Crude Nouns, Substantive and Adjective, 28

Sect. I. Declension of

Crudes ending

Sect. II. Declension of

in

Crudes ending

Vowels

in

IV. Numeral Adjectives

Pronouns
Chap. VI. Verbs. General Observations

Chap. V.

Formation of the Base

Consonants

Degrees of Comparison

Sect. III. Adjectives.

Sect.

Combination of Consonants

Formation of the Crude by Affixes

Chap. IV.

Combination and Permutation of Letters

Sect. I.

PAGE.

in the

29
38

46

47

-50

Conjugational Tenses

55

Of Regular Primitive Verbs, 1st, 4th, and 6th Conjugations, 63

Of Irregular Primitive Verbs, 2d, 3d, oth, 7th, 8th, and
9th Conjugations

Formation of the Base

in the

--66

Non-conjugational Tenses of

Regular and Irregular Primitive Verbs of

all

nine Con-

---.73

jugations

Formation of the Base of Causal Verbs, 10th Conjugation

86

Formation of the Base of Passive Verbs

89

93

-----

99

Inflection of the

Base of Regular and Irregular Primitives

Inflection of the

Base of Causals

Inflection of the

Base of Passives

Auxiliary Verbs conjugated at

full

98
-

101

Examples of Primitive, Causal, and Passive Verbs conjugated

at

M\X

104

129

Formation of Desiderative Verbs

Formation of Intensive or Frequentative Verbs

Formation of Nominal Verbs

131

133

CONTENTS.
Chap. VII. Participles
Participial

Chap. VIII.

Nouns of Agency

-.---.
.-----.

Indeclinable words.

Prepositions in government with

Chap. IX.

Compound Words

Adverbs

Nouns

Simply Compounded Nouns

Sect. I.

Sect. II.

Compound Verbs formed

with

Complexly Compounded Nouns

Prepositions

Chap.

150

155

159

170

and

177

206

X. Syntax
in

178

Prose and Verse

Story of Vedagarbha and his Pupils

Selections

from the

157

173

Compound Adverbs

Exercises in Translation and Parsing

Selections

148

Adverbs
Sect. III.

135

Institutes of

Manu

English Translation of the Selections from

Manu

^^

35

SANSCRIT GRAMMAR.

VOWELS.

^M

'^

ri

^(\

XT e

Iri

Initial

f^

au

initial

\i

Not

>

a
\\
V

W.

"^

SIMPLE CONSONANTS.
cfj

A;

X^

T^

Tf gh

"^

Palatals,

"^

ck

'^chh '^ j

^J^-s

"^ n

Cerebrals,

"^ t

"^ th

Dentals,

^M

Labials,

X(

/?

JJ^ph

au

9k

n^

'^ dh

TJT

Fc?

\yc?A

fw

'^ b

}f{bh

T{

rf

at

Gutturals,

^^*

"^^

In

CO

Iri
_

^u

ri

^ sk

1{

y
''

"^ ?^

T.

^*

^/

'>n

of

t?

THE MOST COMMON OF THE COMPOUND CONSONANTS.

^
"ii

"^

kn,

'^

TT P''

T\ gn,

kr,

XJ5 v^'

tT

^''

"^

sA/j,

"5^

shtj/,

'^f

sk,

^Sf

sth,

"^

c/ic/i,

S" hn,

1^

^^'

s/i^%,

^ fW%, Xlf
"^ A*7<w,

^ dm, ^
^ry.

"|R ktr,

/few,

c?/iw,

^
sA,

"Cljr

n^

*,

ntrv,

tth,

T^

A:/,

6/,

A-Zy,

ig"

^
^

?*?'

t/w,

TJ

^
J^

?^?'

*^*'*'

?^-^''

str,

q^

/y,

'^

^
^
It

hy,

^ km,

T^ gl,

|g

M,

^ ^

rfA,

w%, r^ %,

f^q

w-X:,

nth,
?'*/'"'

^Ohn,

/w

5^ wrf/i,

S^'

rj^f w^ry,

"^

o^ bbh,

ly,

J^ sm,

ttw,

"^^

/A-,

?J dgr,

J^

nt,

*6

wfr,

cfe^,

rw, Zq ryy,
nj,

|5fi

'OJ c?%,

c/iy,

^ ^

S7V,

kt,

bhy,

"^

*^^'

rmm,

^^

"^

*^''''

S^ wcAA,

T!?r ^^'

l^chchh, "^jj, i^

^M

rk,

cA,

dg,

^ dbh,

c?a?,

"^ khy,

shy,

T^J sAj/,

i^,

cW/<

*^'''

^ cMr, ^
"^
^

w-^,

rfr,

^ nkh, ^

"^i

/""'

H^

ny,

bdh

3^"

IT

i^'

'^

^ ww,

tt,

'31 vy,

r^ty,

kshy, 1\( gdh,

tw,

f^

tr,

g>,

A;^w,

"^try,

TIfjo_y,

"5^

g dy,

ksh,

dbhy,

^(JJ kshn,

;/y,

^J

drvy.

SANSCRIT GRAMMAE.

CHAPTER

I.

LETTERS.
J.

HE

Sanscrit language

The

nagari.

following

equivalents in the

written in the character called Deva-

is

Devanagari

are the

Roman

letters,

with their

character.

VOWELS, DIPHTHONGS, AND SEMI-VOWELS.

^^^^

T,sU
^'*-

Shial.

Not

P ^

I-al.

Init.

va

IMPROPER DIPHTHONGS
CALLED GUNA.

LONG
VOWELS

SHORT
VOWELS.

c
.

PROPER DIPHTHONGS
CALLED VRIDDHI.
I-^-

i,^,?Ll.

SEMIVOWELS.

InTti^

a
i

^R

>
ar

ai

Hy

aw ^ V ov

ar

^STR

\ r

CONSONANTS.
HARD

CORRESPOND-

CONSONANTS.

ING SOFT.

CORRESPONDING

CORRESPONDING

NASALS.

SIBILANTS.

ASPIRATE AND
SEMI-VOWELS.

NASAL SYMBOL CALLED

ANUSWAKA.

Final
or
called
Medial. Visargah.
Initial

Gutturals,
Palatals,

^
^ ch
A:

kh

^g ^gh T

"g;

chh

^J

^jh

5T

sh

th

S d

sh

\ r

l{

^l

bh

Dentals,

^ t

^th

^ d

^ dh
V dh

Labials,

Hp

Jfiph

^b

Vf

Cerebrals, Z

\h

-^

n-

\h

fKy

"^voriv

ori

;;

LETTERS.

Observe that ar and ar are not distinct

amongst the diphthongs

inserted

That the semi-vowels have been placed in both

wards apparent.

Tables, as falling under the

first,

in their relation to

under the second, in their relation to

word stands

of a

for

the semi-vowels y,

Visargah

v, r,

I,

and that

symbol.

That the vowels

at the

That when n

(:).

it

from

sh, sh, s,

is

found before

Anuswara

end of a word always represents the same

and

be represented by

will

ri

which represent the

ri,

and

be represented by

will

which represents the cerebral

sh,

u, ri, Iri

and the aspirate h

represents the symbol

and n, as distinguished from ft. ri and ^

consonant r combined with the vowels
the palatal sibilant

i,

That h at the end

j, d, d, b.

the sibilants

middle of a word,

in the

but have been

letters,

for reasons that will be after-

sibilant

Lastly,

J,

sh,

that

as distinguished

"q.

ON THE METHOD OF WRITING THE VOWELS.

The vowels assume two forms, according

not

Thus, ik

initial.

,^__vlienL

after

written

is

it is

pronounced.

begin a word, because

Thus, ak

consonant.

mark

under the

inherent in

it

is

written

fsfi;

short

consonant

before the

never written, unless

it

supposed to be inherent in every

written ^n;, but ka

is

written ^; the

k being used to shew that

The vowels

it.

Short a

is

is

final

is

always written

not _ imtial, be^^

which

^,

as they are initial or

but ki

u, u,

and

ri, ri,

not

has no a

it

initial,

are written

under the consonants after which they are pronounced; as ^> ^.

kit, ku ; ^> ^> ^p> krii*

The

given, as
it

Sanscrit
it

is

said to possess another vowel, viz.

only occurs in one word in the langxiage.

in a Table like the above,

for without

it,

:^ I; but, with

we have no
it,

is

to

GUMA.

LONG.

* When, however, u follows t

m.

The only use

of introducing

perfection of the Devanagarl alphabet

corresponding vowels or diphthongs to the semi- vowel

the last line of the Table

SHORT.

thus, ig

shew the

"^ Iri, which has not been

it is

may

be

filled

VRIDDHI.

written thus,

up

thus,

SEMI-VOWEL.

^ ru;

and when

ii

follows

^^,

LETTERS.

ON THE COMPOUND CONSONANTS.

Every consonant
that

it is

supposed to have short a inherent in

is

standing alone in any word, short a must always be

are seen

pronounced after them

but when they are written in conjunction

with

any other vowel,

short

a.

vowel of course takes the place of

Thus, such a word as cR^nnnn would be pronounced

consonants have
vention

of

this

The question then

kalanataya.

arises,

how

are

any vowel

as,

for instance,

And

written ^iiqi.

know when
the word

thus,

viz. 1st,

last,

vfg,

and the

by writing them one

above the other; 2dly, by placing them side by

except the

^,

here we have illustrated the two

methods of compounding consonants,

all,

to

M and nty in

and n(y must then be combined together

is

we

be pronounced together, without the inter-

to

This occasions the necessity for compound consonants

klantya ?

word

so

Hence, when any of the above simple consonants

of a word.

kl

it,

never necessary to write short a except at the beginning

the perpendicular line which

side,

omitting in

lies to

the right.

compound letters are in this way resolvable into

their component parts.
There are two, however, which are not
so, viz. TJ ksha and "^ jna.
The last is commonly pronounced gya,
and may therefore be represented by these letters.
The following
compound letters, being of very frequent occurrence, and not
Almost

all

always obviously resolvable into their parts, are given with a

view to attract the first attention of the student.

He may

after-

Grammar.
i; kta, as in the word ^g^ uktam ; ^ rma, as in the word |^
kurma.
And here remark, that when T. r is the first letter of a
compound consonant, it is written above in the form of a semicircle
when it is the last letter, it is written below in the form
wards study the

list

in Prof. Wilson's

Again,
word ia^ kramena.
Here remark, that ^ sometimes
changes its form to T? when combined with another consonant.
tT tra, as in ini tatra ; ^ chcha, as
in ^T^^IT anyachcha; ? shta, as
in
krishta ; if dya, as in ^TIT adya ; 3f ddha, as in ^f^ biiddhi;
of a small stroke, as gj kra in the

T^ sJicha,

as in WrT^ tatashcha.

WT bhya, as in

as

in

tasya

^lym vyadha

ncha

^: tebhyah ^

sta ;

1^ nda

S"

iT

as in fj^^^Hi: suhrittamuh

dwa, as in ?rR divara

l^ mya
;

tta,

nta.

dbha

Wf khya

;
;

^ sya,
^

as

nka ;

^ vyu,
in

irm

^ nrga

LETTERS.

PRONUNCIATION OF THE VOWELS,

The

following English words, written in the Sanscrit character,

will furnish the best clue to the pronunciation of the vowels.

A
the
"

"Roman";

as in 'd'H^.

and

first

push

"

^,
^,

u as in

";

"chagrin";

a as in ^JTE^. "last";

^^^5^,

syllables of

last

rude

^^,
^,

ri as in

" rill

and

as in

^,

as in

rl as in ^^PpT

";

"so"; ai as in ^5^,
"our"; ar and ar as in the words "in-

"ere";

e as in

"aisle"; au as ou in

";

"invalid";

^k>

as in

ward," " regard."

Since

short

inherent in every

is

consonant, the

student

should be careful to acquire the correct pronunciation of this

letter.

There are a few words in English which

amples

of

But in English

tolerable.

as in fun, sun

vowels

as

by

or by

e in

0,

this

sound

her, vernal ;

by

once apparent.

Every vowel

will afford ex-

temperance,

htisbandman,

by

often represented

is

as in done, son

of the Devanagari alphabet, as

fection
is at

such as Boman,

sound,

its

u,

or even by the other

The percompared with the Roman,

in bird, sir.

in Sanscrit has one invariable

sound, and the beginner can never be in doubt what pronunciation to

give

as in English, or whether to pronounce

it,

it

long

or short, as in Latin.

PRONUNCIATION OF THE CONSONANTS.

The consonants are

is

But

in general pronounced as in English.

always pronounced hard, as in give

in English, but is only

aspirated, and,

th is

when

not pronounced as
rapidly enunciated,

The same remark applies to the

t.
The true sound of th is exemplified by
the word anthill; so also ph, by uphill, which might be written
The cerebral class of consonants only differs from the
dHh^^.
Each
dental in being pronounced with a duller and deeper sound.

hardly distinguishable from

other aspirated

letters.

class of consonants has

be written in Sanscrit

vmfjT.

its

^;

own

nasal

thus the sound ink would

the sound inch,

^;

the dental n would be written in the

nounced as in Ireland

the

word under

word

country, pro-

the sound imp would be written ^ot

So,

Thus
when combined with the

also, three of the classes have sibilants peculiar to them.

the final sibilant of the word inn^

word

cha,

tata^,

must be written inni tatashcha

when combined with

LETTERS.
^hoRT

tlka,

with

must

tarn,

letters, h, y, r,

The ^ h

be written

letters

The

-^

t and 7, and

The

The ^, although partly

so allied to

h,

may

is

^XI'I

The
is

(p.

^ Ms

evidently a dental

and

is

always pronounced like

h,

and so

yet the

mark Anuswara

(*) is the

proper nasal of these

Thus the

on.

But

may be combined

preposition "pm and the participle ^nir>

^R

if

fit^K as

written ;hT WtT;

if

^W

and ^n., ^^Tt.;

in every one of these cases the

written i^rt

and XPT,

Anuswara takes the sound

of the nasal of the class to which the following letter belongs.

^t;^^;

Thus "^k^^

fj^|'i| as if

For the sake of brevity, however, the Anuswara

THT ^STT-

it.*

and must always take the place of any other nasal that

sounded as

and in

to the cerebral

1) has reference to the sibUants, aspirate, and semi-vowels, as well

united in one word, are written ^fH'ri;

,

is allied

allied to

class,

here be remarked, that although the column of nasals in the Table of

with them in the same word.

when

t.

often interchanged with

as to the other consonants

letters,

particular class.

dental, belongs to the labial class

that, in Bengali, it

and, in Sanscrit,
It

its

Bengali these letters are often hardly

in

distinguishable from r in sound.

also each of the

y belongs to the palatal

always coqTipted into j.

is

Consonants

to

combined

So

pronounced from the throat, and therefore

is

the guttural class.

Bengali

tatastam.

plainly referrible

is

v,

I,

when

tatashtika;

Kd1hl

must be retained inm

is,

in

is

written

many

books,

written as the representative of the nasal of any letter, and not merely of the
aspirate, semi-vowels,

and

sibilants.

* In Sanscrit, however, the

like V

when

as in "^7 va,

it

stands

by

letter '^ is

itself,

'SHM vyddha ; like

always pronounced either like

or as the first
ir,

when

it

member

forms the

of a

last

t)

or

compound consonant,

member

of a

compound

consonant, as in "^l^dwara.

^^T3T, "an universal monarch," and 44Hf<f, "properly," are the only

words which

violate this rule.

;;

CHAPTER
Sect.

We

I. COMBINATION and

PERMUTATION OF LETTERS.

are accustomed in Greek and

changes of

Thus

letters.

in,

11.

Latin

to

combined with

certain

rogo,

euphonic

becomes irrogo

rego makes, in the perfect, not regsi but reksi, contracted into rexi
veho becomes veksi or vexi ; crw with

with

and

that, too,

sentence "

(rvyyvci)ixr]

ev

letters

very extensively throughout the Sanscrit language

not only in combining two parts of one word, but

combining

in

becomes

These laws for the combination of

Aa/uTTco, eT^a/iTro.

are applied

yvcifxt]

avis in

comMnation_^^called^ in
Baravir ins terrih

terris

" would require,

Sanscrit,. Sandlu) to

and would, moreover,

if

he

is

be

be written
written

thus,

without

The learner must not

separating the words, Baravirinsterrih.

be discouraged

Thus the
by the laws of

words in the same sentence.

the

all

Bara

not able thoroughly to understand

all

the

numerous laws of combination at first. He is recommended, after

reading them over with attention, to pass at once to the declension
of nouns and conjugation of verbs
for to oblige him to learn by
heart a number of rules, the use of which is not fully seen till he
comes to read and construct sentences, must only lead to a waste
of time and labour.
:

CHANGES OF VOWELS.
1.

Nevertheless, there are

some changes

of letters which

come

immediate application in the formation and declension of

nouns, and the conjugation of verbs
and amongst these, the
into

changes of vowels called

Guna and Vriddhi

should be impressed

on the memory of the student, before he takes a single step in

the study of the

Grammar.

to_ej_ihia-ia^called_the
*

and

ar^ changed

increase.

Similarly,

and Vriddhi au

ri

Gmia

Xo

When

ai, this is

u and u are

and

the vowels

and

are changed

chmag^ej^pr.ajjjtiange in quality

when

called the Vriddhi change, or

often

ri to their

changed to their Guna

Guna

ar,

an
o,

and Vriddhi dr ; and

COMBINATION AND PERMUTATION OF LETTERS.

though

a,

have no corresponding Guna change, has a Vriddhi

it

substitute in

a.

Let the Student, therefore, never forget the following rule,

2.

confused at every step.

or he will be

but a

stitute for a,

the Vriddhi substitute for

Vriddhi substitute for

Again,
is

ri

him never

let

Lastly let

He

him bear

may

in

is

is

mind

Roman

SHORT.

LONG.

ri

ri

Guna,

the Guna, and au

the Guna, and ar the

i,

the semi-vowel of

that the

and

Guna dipthong

and the Guna

of a and

o,

and a and u into

e,

I;

rt.

e is

u ;*

o.

reason for the arrangement of

the

vowels and semi-vowels given in the

here repeated in the

is

e is the

the semi-vowel of ri and

often coalesce into

now understand

will

i;

ar

o is

no Guna sub-

is
;

and n.
forget that

supposed to be made up of a and

so that a and

and

u and u

the semi-vowel of u and u; r

3.

There

the Vriddhi substitute for a

is

and ai the Vriddhi substitute for

first

This Table

Table.

is

character.

GUNA.

SEMI- VOWELS.

VRIDDHI.

a
e

ar

ai

au

ar

RULES FOR THE COMBINATION OF VOWELS.

a word end with a or a, when the next begins with a or
two vowels are contracted into one long similar vowel.

If

4.

the

a,

Thus na

A
long.

asti

ri,

Thus, adhi ishwara,

If a

(fiTff

adhlshwara

^f^O' pitnddhih

word end with a or

short or long, then a and

* In the same

and

nasti.

rule applies to the other vowels

similar

pitri riddhih
5.

become

c,

way

short or

kintu wpaya, kintupaya

a,

when

coalesce into e; a

o.

u, ri,

(fMrif^:).

the Vriddhi diphthong ai

and the Vriddhi au of a or n and

i,

is

the next begins with

t,

w,

and u into o

supposed to be made up of a or d

;;

COMBINATION AND PERMUTATION OF LETTERS.

8
a and

into

ri

hitopadesha

upadesha,

hita

Thus, parama tshwara become parajneshwara

ar.

ganga

gangodakam ;

itdakam,

tava

riddhi/i (iT^ ^fe;). tavarddhih (w^^:).

a word end with a or

If

6.

Guna

letters

o,

e,

when

a,

or the Vriddhi

coalesce into the Vriddhi ai

va

alpa

vidya eva

become

at,

as,

vidyai-

tatkd aushadham, tathaushadham.

a word end with %

If

7.

alpaujas

<yas,

then a or a with e or

a or a with o or au, into au

deva aishwaryam become devaishwaryam

;

the next begins with the

at, au,

short or long,

u, ri,

begins with any other dissimilar vowel,

and

when

the next

are changed to the

corresponding semi-vowel y ; u or u to v ; ri or rt to r : as, prati

uvacha become prafyuvacha ; tu idariim, trviddnhn
mdtri ananda
,

*UMti) become matrananda (*1HH<).

(JTrff

a word end with the diphthongs ai or au,

If

8.

begins with any vowel, ai

is

changed to

tasmai uktah becomes tasmJayuktah

a word end in e or

If

9.

and

Thus,

te

api are written

10.

a word end in

If

e,

vowel except a short, then

but the

is

It so

Thus,

happens that

in coalition with
finals

any

o,

te

any vowel, whether

The

ati

initial

is

first

changed to ay

dgatdh becomes ta agatdh,

i,

when

by the

(it ^sttitt:).

a.

But

in the case of e or

o,

come

as the

the termination to be annexed begins with

or any other, then e is changed to ay, and o to av.

become jayati, bho

ati

become

following Table exhibits

bhavati.

all

the combinations of vowels at

one view.

Supposing a word to end in

begin with

aur,

column (headed

off.

the next begins with any other

supposed to be

vowel but short

initial

o, o,

cut

as the final of a complete word, is never likely to

of roots or crude forms,

Thus, je

the next begins with a short,

usually dropped, leaving the a uninfluenced

following vowel.

Thus,

so api are written so "pi (^^fq).

when

e is

the next

av.

dadau annam, daddvannam.

when

te "pi (Wf^)

when

and au to

remain unchanged, and the

then

o,

ay,

u,

and the next word to

the student must carry his eye

" final vowels ")

till

he comes to

the top horizontal line of " initial vowels,"

till

u,

down

the

first

and then along

he comes to au.

At

the junction of the perpendicular column under au and the horizontal line beginning u, will be the required combination, viz. v au.

^a^
"=

COMBINATION OF VOWELS.

Is

^
s

'Z

>>

8
C

s
c

8
e

8
C

8
e

>5

?i

Ci

8
e

8
e

8
C

V.

Ci

<s

8
B

8
B

IB*

IB

<a

jj

ts

'^

'

f*

**

5i

^
e

<

c*a

s^

&

s>

5i

s>

IB

*<!&

'*

e*

IB^

Ij
&.:
^

5>i

>

;i

%>

%i

V
u

IB^

IB

9
B

<;>

tt)

%>

^
*'

13

*)

5S

^
'S.
V.

?^.

5i

'S.

s>

'S.

&

*.

^
18
IS

IB

IB

lw>

t.
*^.

ea

c>

*.

ii>

>i
*

*^.

s>

<*

'^

'^

%.

-?5

IS
5*J

8i

t.

t.

IS

IS

s>

oa

&

IB

<^

**.

**.

*.

?>

i3

IB

IS

IS

tS

IS

B
8

IB

IB

5?i

X
S

1^
.S

^s

<to

i^a

I'M

le

le

IC

Sop.
to

a^.

t-

.-ji

'C

'-'

"^^

a>

l<w

K.

i>

lw>

l9i>

&
B

IB

"5

-g

la

i>

>i

IB^
l9i>

&

In.

s>

'

V.

IB

IB

-a

>

**

>

5!i

.S

-B

fC3

final

and

01

-^

<>

IS

S>

?!>i

ratio

&

&

s>

IB^

IB

IS

la

IB

IB

IB

IB

IB*

IB

^1?

O '^

CLi

le
5>>

>

K
B

K
e

>i

8!i

Si

le
9>

.$>

IB

S>

<s

IB

sis
"

'C

i ^

5^
IC

IM

18

Ik
v..

Obsei

in

must

it

-1!

z
C

o
S
>>
TZ

l>

Hi

tn

1
>

05

"^^

.
ic

o
>

IS

^
l

S>

5*5

iS^

IS

^
8
IS

a^

K.

V,

IS

'S.

&

^
e

<*

t.

I-)

Cl.

-*";*

g-5

COMBINATION AND PERMUTATION OF LETTERS.

10

Sect.

II. COMBINATION

OF CONSONANTS.

Before proceeding to the rules for the combination of con-

11.

regarded attentively as divided into

sonants, let the alphabet be

two grand classes, as exhibited in the following Table.

HARD OR

If

12.

8 gh

n-

J Jh
d dh

ii

sh

d dh

bh

kh

ch

chh

sh

th

th

ph

any surd
hard

the

next,

karmaknt

SOFT OR SONANT.

SURD.

letter

the vowels.

end a word when any sonant begins the

changed to

is

all

own

its

unaspirated soft

becomes karmakrid bhavati ; vak

bhavatl

asti,

thus,

vag

asti

chitralikh asth chitralig asti.

It

may

be proper here to remark, that in writing a Sanscrit sentence, when

the words have undergone those changes which the laws of combination demand,

they

may

either be written separately, as in the examples just given, or often

correctly

without

(JI'irbd).

The

any

separation

student

is

as,

karmakridhhavati (^^(cK^^ffi)

more

vagasti

therefore to observe, that although in the following

examples, each word will, for greater clearness, be printed separately from the
next,
print

would

it

accord more

them without any

with

separation.

the

there remains no option, but in which words

without separation.

1st,

sound (see examples,

r.

when a

48)

final

of 'the natives

practice

There are two

and

cases,

of India

to

however, in which

must always be written together

initial

vowel blend together into one

2dly, -when either crude forms or adverbs are joined

with other words to form compounds (see Chap. IX. on Compound Words;.
13.

If

any sonant

next, the soft is

end a w

changed to

its

->'-'

oau

If the final be an aspirated sonant letter,

is g, d,

the

letter

or

b,

the aspirate, which

initial letter

of the root.

is

/hen any surd begins the

unaspirated hard.*

and belong

suppressed in the

Thus, ved'abudh

asti

to a root

whose

final, is transferred

becomes vedahhud

Thus,

anti.

initial

back to

COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS.
tad

becomes

karoti

But as very few words

any other consonants than

in

dental

sibilant

purposes

the

that

To

consonants.

and

s,

vog patih, vak patih

karoti;

tat

pasa, kshut pipasa.

becomes d before

g,

See example, rule

12.

becomes

before

for all practical

sufficient

begin, therefore, with

General
14.

end

be confined to the changes of these

attention

CHANGES OF FINAL

vowels.*

kshudh pi-

Sanscrit

the nasals, Visargah, the

d,

be

will

it

/,

and

in

AND

d.

d.

rule.

gh,

kh,

k,

and

dh,

d,

bh, h, y, r, v,

p, ph,

th,

t,

b,

and

all

See example,

s.

rule 13.

Before

the

nasals,

and the

palatals,

letter

final

I,

and d

undergo a change in form as well as quality, as in the following

special rules.

Change of
If / or

15.

the

or

or

to n, before

or m.

end a word when the next begins with a

usually changed to

is

c?

c?

its

own

nasal,

Thus, tasmat na

nasal.

becomes tasmcin na ; tasmat murkha, tasmun murkha.

T A

final

is

Thus, vak

subject to a similar rnle.

mama

(^TB

Hk) would

become van-mama (c||-^h)>

Assimilation of
16.

the

If

or

c?

or

d with

Combino.
li t

or d end a word

'

'f

<

Haritam^ not Haridam

yat

is yatute,

is

not yadate.

or

ch, j,

or U

Thus, bhayat lobhat cha

letters.

taj jJvanam.

with sh.

when the next begins wiih

* Before the vowels of ftrmma/ton*

case of Harit

I.

end a word when the next begins with

or d assimilates with these

becomes bhayal lobMch cha; tadjwanam,

17.

ch, j,

^ sh,

then

remains unchanged; thus, the accusativo

and the

tliird

person suigular of the verb

COMBINATION AND PERMUTATION OF LETTERS.

12

or d are changed to

iat shrutva (in^ '^n^)

ch,

and the

becomes

the final

y By a

or d
when

initial

with

h.

the next begins with

and the

12),

written tad dharati

is

and on the same

similar rule,

by

c?

changed to d (by rule

t is

Thus, tad harati (iR ^rftO

followed

or

Thus,

*A to "g chh.

tach chhrulvd (irswr).

Combination of

a word end in

If

18.

initial

initial

to

h,

dh.

((Tgrfir).

words ending in k

principle, are written

as vak harati (^TR ^lf?T), vag gharati ((tlJMiTff)-

CHANGES OF THE NASALS.

Changes of final

n,

preceded by a short vowel, end a word

If the letter

19.

when the next begins with any

asan atra becomes asann atra
If

20.

the

vowel, the n

is

ch, sh,

t,

a sibilant

class

is

of these

inserted between the

last

initial

becomes asminstu (^ufww);

I.

doubled.

Thus,

tasmin eva, tasminn eva.

letters

kasmin

t,

ch,

or their

two words, according

and the

expressed by Anuswara, according to rule

tu

before

n end a word when the next begins with

aspirates,

to

and

before vowels

(p. 5, y).

is

then

Thus, asmin

becomes kasminshchit

chit

(cRfwf^).

If

n end a word when the next begins with

tT

unchanged, or they
1 st,

the final !{

2dly, the
If T

the

may

may

be changed to

may also be changed to "g

>T
;

ra ;

as,

'^

^TTPT

as,

/,

If the crude

form of a word end in

pound word, or before any

puruxha; and ^TftTT ^1^

into

n, this

the

is

written >{c||v;(^

assimilates with the

is

is

compoanded

^IMjj^; and dhanin, with the

/,

and

written

rejected in forming a

Thus, rdjan purusha

afiix.

is

As, pakshan lundti

placed over the preceding vowel.

is

IJITJ

H^irg^

end a word when the next begins with

mark

^ *A, they may either remain

be combined in either one of the two following ways.

com-

into raja-

afi&x twa,

becomes

dhanitwa.

Change (f'^n, not

final, to "^ n, after ri, r, sh,

preceding in the same

word.
21.

to

the

The

letters

cerebral

T.

r.

jtfftt/i^-r^^/^ /^

r, "^ sh,

Hence,

are cerebrals, and the vowel

if

ri is allied

the letter n (not final) should follow

COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS.
n,

or

r,

V,

in

sh,

form

cerebral

same word, the nasal must be written

the

i!^

even though

n,

13

Thus, the English word carbonic would

or m, should intervene.

be written in the Sanscrit character thus, c|iT%f%^

d^^r^

sative case of
is

^^rftsr

whatever,
rule,

this

is tiU'^tii

of a

dental,

and requires the dental

mental case of ^pn^

^TfRT

is T^JTT%*T

and in further

the words

But the

ftfTT, ft^tnftr.*

or of any letter

or cerebral,

palatal,

compounded with the

if

and the accu-

and the nominative plural of '^^

and the imperative mood of

intervention

in the

k, g, p, b {or their aspirates), h, y,

nasal, prevents the operation of

Thus, the instru-

to follow.

the nominative plural of ^i^^,

illustration of the

same

law,

may

be taken

u^.

-^t:^, j^tT^, HuTlfrf,

Changes of final m.
22.

If the letter ^

any consonant,

nasal,

23.

end a word when the next begins with

be represented by Anuswara (*); or

changed

be

to

corresponding nasal.

this

written either 3T^

is

When

irSkfcT

or Ji^^-^fd.

Almost every nominative

case,

cases of nouns in Sanscrit, besides

final.

to

this

*,

final

to sh, to

h
o,

is

to

ing to the nature of the

changes

therefore, these
let

him master

is

h.

and nearly half the remaining

many

persons of the vgrb, end

when

or the symbol used to denote the aspirate

(:),

And

changed

Thus, griham apnoti, JI^HlM^f^.

CHANGES OF VISARGAH OR FINAL

Visargah

Thus, griham

the next word begins with a vowel, the letter

always written.

in

may,

it

consonants which have a corresponding

before those

optionally,

gachchhati

may

it

r,

liable

remain unchanged,

to

be

to

or to be dropped altogether, accord-

At every

initial letter following.

will

meet the

the following five

single sentence of Sanscrit, or he

rules

student's eye.

step,

Therefore

before he attempts to read

can never hope

make any

to

real

progress in the acquirement of this language.

The

Grammar,

letter
it is

is,

properly, a

compound

of

/c

and

sh

althoiigli, in this

considered as a simple letter, and represented by ksh.

'

COMBINATION AND PERMUTATION OF LETTERS.

14

RULE

A.

Before

a.

WHEN

1^^^

sh.

Before a pause,

b.

RULE B. WHEN
Before

(and

lant

^s

lant

'5T

is

VISARGAH CHANGED TO
aspirate)

it

is

C.

is

WHEN

changed to

D.

WHEN

itself

avoid the

off).

VISARGAH CHANGED TO r?

any sonant (consonant

be the sonant following, in which case, to

coalition

WHEN

IS

two rs,

of

it (if

final

short)

is

is

dropped, and

lengthened.

VISARGAH DROPPED ALTOGETHER?

Final ah, before any other vowel except short

28. a.

vowel of the next word without

Final ah,

a,

drops the

and leaves the remaining a opening on the

Visargah,
initial

^, Visargah

o before all sonant consonants.

IS

the vowel preceding

b.

TT,

VISARGAH CHANGED TO 0?

IS

or vowel), change the final h to r

E.

sibi-

letters.

Ih, Ih, uh, uh, eh, aih, oh, auh, before

RULE

sA ?

the palatal sibi-

sibilants

Also before short a (this a being then cut

Unless r

AND

changed to the dental

allowed to assimilate with these

RULE

b.

its aspirate), to

some looks, before the

Final ah

b.

27. a.

its

when a

itself.

before ch (and

RULE
26. a.

IS

of a sentence, or

sh.*

Also in

b.

at the end

i.e.

word stands by

25. a.

VISARGAH OR FINAL h UNCHANGED?

(and their aspiratee), and before the sibilants

k,

*,

IS

before

the Visargah

coalition.

any sonant (consonant or vowel), drops

and,

if

the initial letter of the next

be a vowel, the remaining a

is

word

allowed to open upon

it

without coalition.

* So,

By

also, before

Z,

a special rule

pronouns

W^ and ^n^,

"Z,

'^\,

Visargah

is

changed

to the

"he," and Jm\, "this,"

tlie

ctrebral sibilant '^; as,

nouimative cases

drop their Visargah before any consonant.

ojf

the

COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS.

15

In the following Table the nominative cases Narah, " a man,"

Narah, " men," and Harih, " Vishnu," joined with verbs,
these rules at one view.

VISARGAH BEFORE SONANT LETTERS.

VISAEGAH BEFORE SURD LETTERS.

Before

Before hard consonants.

Narah

karoti

Narah

kurvanti / A.

'\

a.

illustrate

Before

sibilants.

soft

Before vowels

consonants

Narah

sarati

Naro

gachchhati

c. a.

Naro

Narah

saranti

Nara

gachchhanti

E. b.

Nard adanti

E. A.

D. a.

Harir

atti

D. O.

Harih

karoti

Harih

Narah

pachati

Harir gachchhati

sarati

Narah

Narah pachanti

S A. a.

Narah shaknuvanti

Harih pachati

Harih shaknoti

shaknoti

a. a.

c.b.

Uti

Naro jayafi

c. a.

Nara

dpnoti

Nara, jayanti

E. b.

Nard

dpnuvanti

E. 6.

Harir jayalt

d. a.

Harir dpnoti

d. a.

E. a.

a.

or

Naras

tarati

Naras

sarati

Nards

taranti

Naras

saranti

Naro

daddti

c. a.

Nara'ikshate

Nara

dadati

E. b.

Nard

Harir daddti

D. a.

Harir'ikshate

D. a.

E. a.

"J

Haris

b. b.

Haris sarati

tarati

Narash

Narash shaknoti

charati

ikskante

E. b.

Naro

braviti

c. a.

Nara

edhate

Nara

bruvanti

E. b.

Nard

edhante

Harir

braviti

Naro

ydchati

c. a.

Similarly before the

Nara

ydchanti

E. b.

other vowels and diph-

n. a.

thong*.

'J

Narash charanti
Harish charati

b. a.

Narash shaknuvanti

V b

Harish shaknoti

Similarly before kh,

ph,

th, chh.

6.

r>.

Harir ydchati

E. b.

Harir edhate

a.

d. a-

Similarly before the

Vi argah
nasals,

and before

and before

The

rules

for

Adanti nardh

Nard

rakshanti

E. b.

Atti

D. b.

s.

the changes of Visargah apply equally to

written chetah (a.

is

hecomc

(as in D.

and

rt.) ;

c. a.);

chetas,

6.)

final sibilant

jrrddushkrita.

with krnnta, niddnlntrt

Harih

Thus, manas hara becomes manohara (as in

* In a few compound words a

as pradus kritu

narah

c. a.

and chahshus vishaya, chakshur vishaya

standing alone,

AM

as,

rakshati

CHANGES OF FINAL
29.

before

a pause.

Naro

Hart rakshati

final sibilants.

I,

except

r,

in the last cnse

h,

takes the cerebral form before

Similai'ly, a final r licfore

with pvtra, nishpiifra.

Sec also

r.

k or;;

42, 43,

and

ns,

1.31. 1.

fr,

nir

a. b.

COMBINATION AND PERMUTATION OF LETTERS.

16

30.

is

changed to

'^

when any other vowel except a or

sh

Thus, bhavasi, " thou

a immediately precedes in the same word.

"thou doest."*

art": but karoshi, not karosi,

CHANGES OF FINAL
31.

Again, rules

A, B, D,

kala becomes pratah kala

T.

apply equally to

Thus, pratar

final r.

pratar cha, pratash cha

and the pre-

position

nir before ukta remains unchanged, and before rasa

changed

to rii; thus, nirukta, nirasa.

32.

But

final

sonant r

itself,

unlike

ar,

sonant (consonant

be written

Hence
as

it

much

and

before the

as,

rakshati.

be observed further of

any consonant (except

may

pratar usha

as,

drops the r and lengthens the preceding a

punar rakshati becomes puna

33. It is to

remains unchanged before any

ah,

or vowel);

is

r,

that

it

may

optionally double

that immediately follows

f^

Thus,

it.

'^

ffT^Tl.

appears that the symbol Visargah (:)

a representative of

imperceptible, as of final

h.

final s

and

Indeed,

all

r,

may

when

be considered

these letters are

those inflections of nouns

and persons of verbs which are said to end in Visargah, might

be said to end in

s;

only that, in such cases, the

s is silent,

pronounced with an imperceptible breathing, as in the French

or the English,

island, viscount.

such as parler, the

card, the

sound of r

So again, in many French words,

final r is silent
is

very indistinct

and
;

in

some English, such

and in

all

would be represented in Sanscrit by Visargah

The

followins:

Table exhibits the more

of consonants at one view.

letters

consonant,
also

these cases,
(qj: "qr^:

common

rule,

the

&c.).

Observe, that in the top line of

that whatever change takes place

same holds good before

as

and

combinations
initial

the aspirated consonants have been omitted, because

an universal

or
les,

its aspirate.

it is

before any

Final s has

been omitted, as undergoing precisely the same changes with

final h.

* Also wlicn k precedes

as,

vid with su

is

vitsn ; lint

6,V/f,

bhukshu.

Cf.

r.

112.

COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS.
<

<

_^

iS
Xs

rfS

"3

fe

fa

to

=,

rS

<;

<;

"?

-a

rfS

">

*,

*
^

-s
=c

^
"^^

-S
=,

fe

:S

S>

s>

'e

S:

-*

-^

-^

-^

-V.

-^

-<,

8
,

"^

-8

.^^

^*

.1:

i.

s.

o
K

le

i.

i-

is

IS

ft

IS

Si

ft

Si

IB

S:

(.

IB

-1:

>i3

~a

IB

a,

a.

Sii

S>i

a.
,

i-

a,

a,

<

IB

.h

-B

-B

IB

>-

->

IB

<s

>

Si

ts

'a

a.

ss,

>
-s

-B

^
'

-M

,i

n3

ia

00

c<s

a
^

**

'->

PL,
=

'-^

'-^

-^

>

<>>

.2

-tJ

^
>
r.

f.

>

Jt-

.s

rs

-^

?o

-(-

^u

"B

.b

i.

rfS

-JS

-<

rs

rf!

^
3J

<;

JS

!=!

aj

>.

.1

Oi

IB

4$

-ii

Je

-it

>

:S

IB

IB

-it

'^

*
a
a

"0

a
a

.cT'^

M =2
^ ^

10

il

IB

S
*

IB

C
a

"8

*.

'^
>

>t

z
z
'A

O
o

eJ

>

<^

'H

v^-vw

"a

< O
H
5 O
S 5

"3
-

09

Jt

^
IB

J
<<

fi

<t

"S

"?"

s
'

1 1

Oi

Oi

0*

rQ

<
H

CHAPTER

III.

ON SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS.

Before treating of Sanscrit nouns,

35.

be advisable to

what respect the peculiar system adopted

out in

point

it will

in their

formation requires an arrangement of the subject different from

we

that to which

In Sanscrit

are accustomed in other languages.

nouns, then,

there

this great peculiarity, that

is

\ every one of them has two distinct states prior to the formation
f of the nominative case
viz. 1st, a root; 2dly, a crude form,
:

comin^from
In the

this root.

first

therefore,

place,

us inquire, what

let

is

the root.

number of monosyllabic sounds, which

are called roots.
These are mere artifi c ial inventions, having
only an ideal existence
mere blocks, so to speak, of themselves
qui te usele ss^ from which, however, are carved out and fashioned
There

are, in Sanscrit,

a^

all

the varieties of noims and verbs which exist in the language.

Every one of these roots conveys some simple idea, which appears
under different modifications in the derivatives from it.
Thus,
to

mention a few of the most common

the

idea

" throwing

of

kri

";

" seizing
"; yuj,

" joining ";

" living

m, " leading

jiv,

kram,
"

i,

";

sri,

" going

knowing ";

" dying

";

bhaksh,

bhuj,

"killing";
stha,

drish

da,

joa^,

" standing

vad,

";

(l7t),

" giving

" eating

as,

";

";

";

of

" conquering

" seeing

";

isli,

jan, " producing

pa, " drinking

shru (^), " hearing

sidh, sddh, " accomplisliing "; krJ{lSi),

*.

Except in a few

cases,

"

making "; hH of
bhu, " becoming ";

"";

vach, bru, " speaking ";

";

"falling"; ra*, " dwelling

";

the root kship conveys

" being ";

vrit,
ji,

" doing,"

";

";

gam, ya,
budh,

kam, " wishing

";

"

cooking

mA (f^^),

sprish

''';

dha, " placing

pack,

('^^5^^).

char,

gya
";

";

(fri),

mri,
ad,

han,

" entering

";

" touching

";

"buying"; kup, krudh, "being

where they are used hy themselves as nouns.

SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS.

angry";

"collecting";

chi,

nosh

"smelling";

ghra,

"perishing";

19

"relating";

khya,

"quitting";

rah,

dwish (%i),
(^),
"hating"; nind, "blaming"; dru, "running"; dyut, dtp, bha, shubh,
"shining"; j9m, "purifying"; prachchh (ir<^), "asking"; ap, labh,
"obtaining";

"praising";

shans,

stu,

tyaj,

yat, "striving";

"being able";

straining"; shak {"^^t

"heating";

tap,

yam, "rec?aA,

"burn-

ing"; mtich, "liberating"; muh, "being foolish"; yudh, "fighting";

"growing";

ruh,

nand,

hldd,

laughing";

has,

"being glad";

sna,

swap,

"sleeping";

"bathing";

The student

is

recommended

to

commit

"remembering."
to

memory

the com-

monest of these roots or elementary sounds, as here given.

it

out,

may

appear in the sequel, that from ea ch of them

will

with great regularity,

1st,

a set of simple substantives

simple adjectives ;3dly, of simple verbs.

i'ire'TOiSfGudh,

the

principles,

From

"to know."*

To

bodhana, "knowledge";
bauddha, " a Buddhist "; budha, " wise

For

be drawn
;

2dly, of

for example,

taje,

this root are

formed, on fixed

and adjectives

substantives

following

(^),

"beginning";

rabh,

swar, "sounding"; sah, vah, "bearing"; smri,

hrish

bodha or

"an informer";
buddhimat, " intellectual ";

buddhi, "intellect"; bodhaka,

and the verbs,

"

bodhati,

";

he knows ";

"

bodhayati,

he informs ";

known "; bubhutsate, or biibodhishati, " he wishes ^

budhyate,
And the simple idea /
to know"; bobudhyate, "he knows well."
contained in the root may be endlessly extended by the prefixing of prepositions; as, prabodha, "vigilance"; prabudhyate, " he_^
" it is

awakes."
36.

In the second place,

substa ntive

and

called the crude f&rm^

it

adjective,

Tlie

has been said that the Sanscrit noun,

makes

its

fir st

same may be

appearance in a state
said

of the pronouns,

It will be convenient, in the following pages, to express the idea contained in

the root by prefixing to

it

the infinitive sign

that the sound budh denotes

more than the mere idm

we

of."

knowing"; nor

them from the

from any part of the verb, but rather from a simple

original sound,

in deriving

a mere imaginary word, which

t This

tiling

But the Student must not suppose

are deriving

must he imagine that

infinitive, or

any

to.

state of the

noun

is

the

nouns from

common

it,

source of both nouns and verbs.

will, in the following pages,

be called

ihe.

crude.

SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS,

20

numerals, and participles.

Thus, bodhq, Jbodhana,

the crudes of ^the

hha'oaU^

nom inative^ cases

The student should endeavour

meaning and use of this crude

aA, ancAa^6Aaraw^jrespectively.

to understand, at the

form.

It

native

outset, the

an intermediate^tate between the root and nomi-

is

the naked form of the noun, which serves as the

case,

on which to construct

basis

panchan.

tad,

bodhah, bodhanam,

eight cases, begi nning with the

its

nominatiyej_ In a Greek or Latin jiictionary weUoQk^qrJthe noun~~

under the nominative

its

c rude

state

^5nd here
^noun

we

sah, "he," is

look for

It

is

sentence

Sanscrit

words than simple ones,

of the

noun

the dictionary,

tad.

like the root.

is

but

it

contains,

may

perhaps,

with truth be

also

and

more compound

said, that

not only that form under which

is

noun

that form of the

always used in the formation of compound words

is

under

it

found under

be^istinctly understood, that the crude form of a

let it

the utmost practical utility.

as every

s1;ate

but in Sanscrit

xample

very far from haying a mere ideal existence,

is

It is of

which

case,

as^Toir*^

it

the crude

appears in

the most usual form under which

it

appears in books.

We may

conceive

it

quite possible that

Greek and Latin gram-

marians might have proceeded on a similar plan, and that they

might have supposed a root \ey, from which was drawn out the
nouns Xe^ig, Ke^iKog, Ae/cToy, KUToXoy^, e?^oyog, and the verbs Keya,
KaraAeyu), e?\\oye(ti
so also, a root ag, from which was derived the
:

nouns agmen,

actio, actus ;

and the verbs

from which would come nauta,

ago,

perago

or a root nau,

navis, nauticus, navalis, navigo.

Again,

they might have supposed a crude form to each of these nouns, as

well as a root

as, for instance,

Ke^iKo of Xe^iKog, and navi of navis

and they might have required the student to look for the noun navis
under

navi,

and the verb navigo under nau.

Further than

this,

they might have shewn that this crude form was the form used in
the formation of

compound words,

as in Ae^iKoypoKpo^, naviger.

But

Greek and Latin are too uncertain in their construction to admit

of such a method of arrangement being extensively applied: such,
however,
here

it

cision.

is

the artificial character of the Sanscrit language, that

has been done throughout with great regularity and pre-

SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS.

21

FORMATION OF THE CRUDES OF SIMPLE NOUNS.

Nouns su bstantive and

37.

uncompounded with any

of two or more nouns, the

^ay

It

or, in

of declension

last

only receiving inflection.*

of their crudes

2dly,

two heads

itself^ into

The formation

of their

other words, the enumeration of the different systems

which belong to each variety of crude form.

Observe, that
long,

Compound, are those made_up

other.

simple nouns divides

of

The formation

1st,

cases

are of two kind s, simple

be ea sily understood, from the preceding remarks, that

consideration

the

adj ective

Simple nouns are those wMchjitand aloiiei_and_

and compound.

it

is

not intended that the student should dwell

on the following pages, printed in small type.

at first,

It

be essential for him, however, to read them over with atten-

will

as

tion,

a necessary introduction to the subject of declension in

Chapter IV.

Their importance will not be fully appreciated

till

he arrives at a more advanced period of his studies.

The

crudes of nouns are formed in two ways, either

vowel of which

to the ROOT, the

Guna

It

word in the Sanscrit language

With

is

by adding

certain affixes to

its

crudes of nouns

the derivation of

many

source, either in sense or form,

all

such

and the following rules have only reference

we

its

that, although every single

derived from some root, there are

noun and

certain affixes

the same time, to be changed to

must be remembered, however,

the connection between the

means obvions.t

liable, at

by adding

or Vriddhi substitute, or

already formed.

is

in
is

which

by no

shall not concern ourselves

to those

classes

of nouns whose

formation proceeds on clear and intelligible principles.

38.

First Class.

Crudes

Masculine and Neuter; in a and

Feminine.

in a.

Formed by adding
I.

a,

Guna

to

i.

roots

forming, 1st (nom. -aA), after the Vriddhi of medial a of a root, and the
of any other vowel, a large class of substantives masculine

root div, " to sport," deva, " a deity."

If a

as,

from the

root end in ch or j, these letters

* Compound nouns are treated of in Chapter IX. on Compound Words.

t Thus, u^'M

a jackal," from

" a man,"

srij,

is

said to

" to create ";

shiva,

come from pur, "

to precede ";

" the god Shiva," from

shi,

shrigaloy

" to sleep."

SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS.

22

are changed to k and

from

yuj,

g respectively

as,

from pach, " to cook," puka, " cooking ";

-a,

neut. -owi*), after

"to join," yoga^ "joining."

Forming, 2dly (nom. masc.

-ah,

fem.

sometimes Guna of a medial vowel, nouns of agency

"what swims

";

from

srip,

Sometimes there

oka (nom. -akah, -aka or

-ikd,

great change of the root:

"to

do," karaka,

tives,

and

"a

as,

doer"

Still

tap,

as,

after

as in shiva, "pro-

may

be formed in

I:

this affix.

more common than a

to

fpnn adjectives

"to bum," tdpaka, "inflammatory

131.3.6.);

(r.

-ika of the agents

ana (nom. -anom),

III.

from

131. 1.).

-akam), after Vriddhi of a final vowel or medial

and Guna of any other vowel.

and_,BOunsj)f agency

r.

from shubh, " to shine," shubha,

There are very few adjectives formed with

as, sundarl.
II.

as,

and sometimes the feminine

pitious," sundara, "beautiful;

a,

is

of a final, and

" to swim," plava,

"to creep," sarpa, " what creeps" (see

Forming, 3dly (nom. -ah -a -am), adjectives

"beautiful."

from plu,

as,

Guna

Obs. -aka

";

from

kri,

the feminine of the adjec-

is

tapaka, karika.

Guna

of the root, forming,

1st,

a large class of neuter

substantives: as, from n?, "to guide," nayana, "guidance"; from

M, "to

give,"

dana, " a gift."

Forming, 2dly (nom. -anah, -ana, -anam), nouns of agency and adjectives

from nn7, "to dance," nartana,

shobhana, "bright."
IV. tra

"a

The

"a dancer"

Guna

from shru, "to hear,"

of the root

shrotra,

c.)

may

feminine of the agents

(nom. -tram\ after

vessel";

(r.

131. 3.

as,

from shubh, "to shine,"

be in anJ.

as,

from pa, " to drink," patra,

"the organ of hearing."

This

affix is

used to form neuter nouns denoting some instrument or organ, and corresponds
to the Latin
v.

trum in aratrum, plectrum, &c.

There are other uncommon

-ah, -a,

-am):

as,

aki^vara,

ra,

affixes to roots to

ura,

ira, uka, tra,

form

adjectives in

manuka.

The

o (nom.

following are

examples of adjectives formed with these affixes; chapala,jitwara, namra, bhidura,

ruchira, varshuka, chitra, bhtma, jdgaruka.

Formed by adding
VI.

to nouns,

twa (nom. 4u)am), forming neuter abstract substantives from any noun

the language

as,

from purusha, " a man," purushatwa, " manlmess."

this affix to crudes

ending in nasals, the nasal

is

rejected

as,

In adding

from dhanin, "rich,"

dhanitwa, " the state of being rich."

* Obs. \VTien there are three genders,

the hyphen between them.

it

will

be

sufficient, in future, to place

^"4

SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS.

ya^ forming, Ist (nom. -yam), neuter^abstract^ substantives

VII.

noun taking VTiddhi

Jectives, the first syllable of the

When

sauhridya, " friendship."

before ya

is

affixed

from

as,

as,

afew

and

" various,"

vakJiitrya,

is

rejected

" variety."

Forming, 2dly (nom. ::Mj."2^"ir^M0? adjectives expressing some relationship

noun
place

from dftana , " wealth," dhanya, " wealthy."

as,

from soma, "the moon," saumya, "lunar."

as,

a (nom. -ah, -i, -am), after Vriddhi of the

VIII.

first

of the

o or

first

this a or

i,

When
as,

syllable

In this case the

fern, is^jr?.

When

is

as,

from

the

the Vriddhi

When

in

"sand," saikata, "sandy."

sikata,

affixes

from Vishnu, " the god Vislmu," Faishnam, " a worshipper of Vishnu,"

"fields," collectively,

forming numerous

crude must be rejected

X. eya

forming

(nom.

many

purusha,

the

-am):

-a,

shwastana," future."

Ka

to time.
is

added

vala,

as, tna,

is

"a

as,

first

syllable of the noun,

";

as,

from

from agni, "fire," agneya, "fiery."

from sukha, " pleasure," saukhiya, " pleasurable."

tana

last

is

prefixed to the last two affixes.

affixes to

nouns forming adjectives

^ a (nom.

forming, from grama, "a village," grdmtna,

from*Atea, "to-morrow,"

corresponds to the Latin tinus, and has reference

Maya

to denote

(nom. -mayah, -mayi, -mayam)

made of:

as,

from

loha, "iron,"

is

common

lohamaya,

affix

"made

of

tt^as, " light," tejomaya, " consisting of light," " full of light."

By
xiii.

Vriddhi of the

sometimes added to words to form adjectives and collective nouns,

any word

iron "; from

of the nomi,

added, the final vowel of the

crest," shikhavala, "crested";

This

often redundant.
to

affixes.

firet syllable

without any change of the noun, except the

of the crude remains,

filial

;.

kshaitram,

from parvata, "a mountain," ^ra%o, "mountainous."

Vriddhi

"rustic"; from shikha,

and

"manly

There are other uncommon

XII.

ah,

is

as,

as,

vowel of the crude must be rejected

final

-lyah, -tya, -tyam),

(nom.

Sometimes there

When

The

paurusheya,

rejection of final a:

is

from dharma, " religion," dharmika, " reUgious."

-eyah, -eyi, -eyam), after

adjectives.

"a man,"

1^

XI.

as,

a collective

Vriddhi of the

Before this affix

adjectives.

taken as an abstract substantive

or, as

This applies to the two next

from kshetra.

-ikah, -iki, -ikam), after

(nom.

IX. ika

this adjective is

paurusham, " manliness ";

nominative case,

as,

and the only change

changed to_a before this and the three following

is

Sometimes the neuter form of

required,

is

the

syllable of the noun, forming

from purusha, " a man," paurusha, " manly."

must be rejected:

in , this

as,

to.

Sometimes Vriddhi takes

innumerable adjectives expressing some relationship loathe, .noun.

crude ends in a, no further affix

jcol-

from suhridy " a ftiend,"

the crude ends in a vowel, this vowel

vichitra,

23

a (nom.

-.a),

adding to roots,

with no change of the

root,

forming feminine substantives:

as.

SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS.

24

from jiv, "to Uve" jivd, "

form of a root

to the intensive: as,

This

life."

from pipds, "

as,

from May, "

to cut

By
XIV. ta

(nom>

-ia)^

much,"

(nom.

-I),

forming a large

from masculines in

a,

";

and rarely

adding to nouns,

This

class of

by changing a

may

affix

language, and corresponds to the Latin tas in

I

" thirst

"cutting much."

loluya,

forming feminine abstract substantives

" a man," purushatd, " manliness."

XV.

added to the desiderative

affix is frequently

to desire to drink," pipasa,

from purusha,

as,

be added to any noun in the

celeritas,

&c.

feminine substantives, usually derived

to t:

as,

from nada, "a

river," fern,

nadl;

from putra, " a son," fem. putrl ; from nartaka, " a dancer," fem. nartakl.

Second Class.

39.

Crudes

in

Masculine, Feminine,

i,

Formed by adding

Wi

forming, 1st (nom.

iy

I.

-ih),

a few masculine substantives, often not connected

with their roots either in form or sense

When

as,

from

added to the root dAu, o

this affix is

sitions are prefixed

and Neuter.

to roots.

is

an-k,

" to mark ", agni, " fire."

dropped, and various prepo-

as sandhi, vidhi, nidhi.

Forming, 2dly (nom.

one or two neuter substantives

-i),

as,

from

crt,

" to sur-

round"; wart, "water."

forming?

3^y

(nom.

shuchi, "pure."
SQL"

(nom.

"ii.

ti

This

affix

-tih),

-ih,-ih,-i),

a few adjectives

forming an useful

class

as,

from shuch, "to be pure";

of abstract

substantives feminin e.

bears a great analogy to the passive participle

changes of the root are required before

it

provided the passive participle does not insert

formed from

it,

by changing

substantive can be formed.

ta into

ti.

(r. 125.).

as before this participle

But

i,

this substantive

if t

The same
and, in fact,

may always

is inserted before ta,

Thus, from vach, " to speak,"

tikta,

no such

" spoken,"

" speech "; from man, " to imagine," mata, " imagined," mati, " the mind."

where no
as,

from

is

substituted for ta of the passive participle, ni

glai,

"to be weary," gldna, "wearied,"

corresponds to the

tio

is

ukti,

And

substituted for

^/ont, " weariness."

be

This

ti

affix

of the Latin, added, in the same way, to passive participles

as actus, actio.

40.

Third Class. Crudes

Formed by adding

.^-^
I.

in u. Masculine, Feminine,

tt,

forming, 1st (nom.

-tiA),

and Neuter.

to roots,

often with considerable change of the root, a few

^p

SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS.

two of the feminine gender

substantives of the masculine, and one or

" the sun"; from dhe, "to drink," dhenu,

bha, "to shine," bhanu, m.

Forming, 2dly (nom.

-u),

one or two neuter substantives

Formuig, 3dly (nom. -uh-uh or

-vl-u),

a few adjectives :

This

"thin" (fem. tanuh pr tanwl).

tanu,

roots to

form adjectives

as,

affix

from pipas, " to desire

n. ishnu (nom. -ishnuh, -ishnuh, -ishnu), with

as,

as,

f.

25

as,

"a

from

cow."

madhu, " honey."

from

" to stretch,"

ton,

often added to desiderative

is

" thirsty."

to drink," pipasu,

Guna

of the root, forming adjec-

tives: as, fromA;*^?, "to perish," kshayishnu, "perishing."

There are many other

"ill.

am,

K, ru. nu, dlu}isnu,

these affixes

affixes to roots,

The

itnu, tu.

forming nouns

following adjectives

affiard

-uh, -uh, -u)

examples of

and the sub-

bhlru, trasnu, shayalu, sthasn\, sharTiru, gadayitnu];

stantive gantu.

Fourth

41.

m u (nom.

Class.

Crudes in

tri (^),

Masculine, Feminine, and

Neuter.

Formed by adding

^
tri,

forming

1st

(nom.

-ta, -tri, -iri)^

to roots,

nouns of agency of three genders, the same

change of the root being required which takes

p]jiice

in the first future

Thus, from kship, " to throw," ksheptri, " a thrower

"a

This corresponds to the Latin

giver,"

Forming 2dly
as, pitri,

12.

"a

(i\pm. Jo], a

father,"

(nom.

Crudes in

and

in all genders), if the root

-t,

of.

relationship, masculine

(1,

member

ending in
. vid,

of a

compound

Tliis class of
:

this class,

and Neuter.

end in a short vowel: forming nouns of

"a

doer";

from

thus, karmalcrit, " a doer of work."

fall

";

"to

Roots already

under this

There are

class

also a

formed by prefixing prepositions to roots ending

from dyut, " to shine," vidyut, " lightning

ji,

nouns are never used, except as the

or d, taken to form nonns of agency,

under

to roots,

" to know," dharmavid, " one who knows his duty."

falling
as,

ddtri,

and feminine

Masculine, Feminine,

three genders: as, from kri, "to do," krit,

conquer," yif, " a conqueror."

last

affix tor.

few nouns of

Formed by adding
t

131. 2.).

matri, " a mother."

Fifth Class.

agency

(r.

from da, " to^give,"

as,

from

few nomis
in

or

from pad, " to go," aampad, " success.

SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS.

26

^y

xxfil
I.

vat^nova..

adjectives

as,

-mn^

adding to nouns,
the crude end in o or a,* forming innumerable

-vatl^ -vat), if

from dhana, " wealth," dhanavat, " possessed of wealth."

This and

the next affix are universally applicable, and are of the utmost utility to form

Sometimes vat

adjectives of^pogsession.

viduutwat (violating

r.

ma (nom. -mttn,

ii.

like the preceding

26. 29.

and

added to crudes in * and t: as in tejaswat,

is

14.).

end in

-mafr, -mat), if the crude

as,

from

dhl,

i, 1,

or , to form adjectives

" wisdom," dJamat, " wise "; from anshu, " a ray,"

anshumat, " radiant."

Sixth Class.

43.

Crudes in an and

Masculine, Feminine,

in,

and

Neuter.-

Formed by adding

Guna

ij_mnji (nom. -ma), after

gender

as,

from

kri,

of the root, forming substantives of the neuter

" to do "; kannan, " a deed."

Latin men, in regimen, stamen, &c.

atman, " soul " (nom.

of man

as,

-nia)

as, drisliivun,

or

Tliis affix corresponds to the

two nouns

-ja),

from

" to

raj,

" seeing" (nom.

By

^^

One

in

man

are masculine

as,

and a few masculine nouns are formed with an instead

rdjan, " a king " (nom.

formed with van

to roots,

shine."

few adjectives are

-va, -va, -va).

adding to nouns,

""fiT 4mfla_(nom. r**a), forming masculine abstract

ends in o or , these vowels art rejected

as,

from

substantives.

If the

noun

kala, "black," kuliman, "black-

ness"; from laghu, "light," laghiman, "lightness"; from mridu, "soft," mradiman.'t
If

end in a consonant,

it

with

this consonant,

its

preceding vowel,

is

rejected

a,

and Guna of

as,

from mahat, " great," mahiman, " greatness."

By

-^^-^l
III.

injnom^^jinl,

* Fat

is

-),

A medial ri before a

consommt

after Vriddhi of a final

vowel and medial

not often found added to feminine crude forms.

occasionally; as, oFTinT!^

adding to roots,

as,

simple consonant

from ^p!T, "black,"

is

etifllllH

changed to

ra,

but not before a double

"blackness."

This

affix,

generally added to adjectives, and the same changes take place befoi'e
place before the affixes Jyas and

draghiman, hhuman, &c.

however,

It occurs,

"having a wife," f^l^s^Nif, "crested."

islitlui

(seer. 71. t)-

it,

iman,

is

that take

Tlius, gariman, preman,

SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS.

any other medial vowel, forming nouns of agency of three genders
from

kri, " to do," kdrin, "

By
(nom.

of a crude

is

-int, -i),

-f,

131. 3.)

as,

a doer."

_r
IV. in

(r.

27

adding to nouns,

forming innumerable adjectives of possession.

rejected before this affix

as,

from dhana,

The

" wealth," dhanin,

from mala, "a garland," mdlin, "garlanded"; from

final

wealthy "

"having

vrlhi, "rice," vrihin,

rice."
v.
as,

vin (nom.

from medha,

-vj,

-vim,

-vi), if

the crude end in o or

"intellect," medhdvin, " mtellectual ";

win, " splendid."

This

last

Seventh Class.

example

violates

Crudes in

as,

r.

26.

as,

"to go,"

sri,

saras,

tejas-

and Neuter.

Masculine, Feminine,

Formed by adding

mind "; from

tefas,

adjectives

"splendour,"

and 29.

to boots,

as (nom. -ah), after'Guna, forming neuter s'ibstantives

manas, " the

formmg a few

from

" water."

from man, "to think,"

as,

But

in vedhas, "

Brahma,"

and chandramas, " the moon," masc., and apsaras, " a nymph," fem., the nominative
is -ah.

In place of

as,

the neuter affixes

hu, " to offer," fiavis, " ghee ";

45.

Eighth Class.

from

is

or us are occasionally added

Crudes in any Consonant, except

Masculine, Feminine,

Formed by using roots

Any

root

may

XIZ)

all

other roots, ending in any consonant

prdchchh (nom. TIT? )

div (nom. dyauh);

(nom. f^FS)

',

sprish (nom. sprik)

duh (nom. dhuk)

two other nouns derived from

(nom. Tpno^)
^fl^);

^^h, (nom. bhut)

^^^^

'^fi^, "a
n-

as,

/MJt*A

'^fi^);

as,

^T^,

f.

raj

(nom.

gir (nom. gih)

(nom.

There are

roots falling under this class

have been

class is intended to

pur (nom. pah)

vish (nom. i/)

priest" (nom.

be compounded

bhuj (nom. bhuk)

pipaksh (nom. pipak).

blood" (nom. ^RTo^).

it

affixed,

This eighth

already noticed as falling under the fifth class.

comprise

d, n, s,

t,

able," sarvashak, "omnipotent."

or d, or in a short vowel, having

from

as nouns of agency.

Thus, from shak, "to be

Those roots which end in

as,^

and Neuter.

be used to form a noun of agency, provided

with another word.

chaksh, " to speak," chakshus, " the eye."

f|^);

also

HUII^I,

*'

lih

one or
thirsty

"

"speech" (nom.

CHAPTER

IV.

DECLENSION.
THE ARTICLE.
46.

There

is

no

indefinite

Thus, " a

Sanscrit.*

in

article

man " can only be expressed by the simple noun ^^^^ purushah.
The definite article is usually expressed by the pronoun sa,
The indefinite pronoun thHyri^
as ^ xp^: sa purushah, " the man."
may

kashchit

be used like the English expression

thus, adOyK '^T^: " a certain

"

a certain

";

man,"

General Observations.
As, in the last chapter, nouns substantive and adjective were

arranged under eight

classes,

according to the

final of their

crudes

(the first four classes comprising those

ending in vowels, the

four those ending in consonants), so

will

present

it

last

be the object of the

chapter to give the eight systems of declension arising

out of this

comprised

arrangement.
adjectives

Moreover,
well

as

as

as

every

substantives,

of crudes

class

so

intended

it is

that the examples of a masculine, feminine, and neuter substan-

under each system of declension,

tive, exhibited

model

the

for

masculine,

coming under the same

The learner

will

feminine,

and

shall serve as the

neuter

of adjectives

class.

have already gathered that the noun has three

and that the gender is, in many cases, determinable

from the termination of the crude.
Thus, all crudes in 5, t, and
those formed with the affix ti (r. 39.), are feminine
nearly all
genders,

nouns whose crudes end in ana,

are neuter
ri,

in

all

in

are not reducible to rule.

the

* In

is,

us,

but those in

The nominative

case

modem

Sanscrit cka

"a man."

is

and man,

a,

is,

of these instances a guide to the gender

first

ekah purushah,

twa, ya, tra, as,

iman are masculine

i,

u,

and

however,
as, devah.

very commonly used as an indefinite

article, as

DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN VOWELS.

" a

masculine

deity," is

but ddnam, " a

other cases the meaning of the word

masculine

In Sanscrit,

in

as, pitri, " a father," is

the relations between the words in a sentence

all

by

are expressed

And

gift," neuter.

matri, " a mother," feminine.

and

29

inflections.

great

many

prepositions exist

in the language, but these are very rarely used alone in govern-

ment with any

and nouns.

These are

necessity for eight cases.

cusative
7,

3.

locative

new

8.

instrumental

called,

dative

4.

Of

vocative.

these,

the

1.

nominative

ablative

5.

2.

ac-

genitive

6.

and seventh are

third

The instrumental denotes generally

by which a thing is done as, tena kritam, " done

to the classical student.

the instrument

The

by him."

locative

generally refers to the place or time in

Si^, Ayodhyayam '*m Ayodhya^; purvakale,

Hence it follows
former time "; bhumau, " on the ground."

which any thing

" in

being as prefixes to verbs

chief use

their

case,

This absence of syntactical auxiliaries leads to the

that

is

done

'

the ablative

used, as in Latin

is

The noun has three numbers,

Sect.

sense from, and

restricted to the

and Greek, to express

cannot be

by, with, in, at, on,

singular, dual,

and

&c.

plural.

I. DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN VOWELS,

OR OF THE FIRST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.

FIRST CLASS.

CRUDES IN

a,

MASCULINE AND NEUTER

IN d

AND

i,

FEMININE.
Declined like

deva,

mas.

"w^ nadi, fem. " a river^^ ;

47.

By

far the greatest

"a
and

number

in Sanscrit, end in a in the crude

number

deity
cpTT

'\-

ift^jwd, fem.

ddna, neuter, " a gift^

of masculine and neuter nouns,

form

and by far the greatest

of feminine nouns end in either d or

arranged under the

first class,

"li/e^\

t.

These we

liave

and the examples we are about to

give will serve as the model, not only for substantives, but also

* Obs. That these cases will sometimes be denoted by their

Tlius,

N.

initial

letters.

will denote nominative, I. instnimental.

t Both these cases

on Syntax.

ai-e

used to denote various otlier relations.

See the Chapter

DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING

30

adjectives given at

for all the

For

culine and neuter make a or

sundara or sundart)

So great

make

is

first place,

the importance of this

will

it

first class

of nouns, that, to

terminations.

its

THE TWO FEMININE FORMS.

/

r
DUAL.

(nom.

nadi

or

be advisable to give, in the

the follo^s^ng general scheme of

MASCULINE.
SING.

declined like

is

jlva

the neuter like dana (nom. sundaram).

declension clearer,

its

like

mas-

Thus, taking the

The masculine

feminine

the

in the crude form of the

in the feminine.

adjective sundara, " beautiful."

deva (nom. sundarah)

VOWELS,

as falling under this class.

r. 38.

make a

adjectives which

all

IN

PLUK.

DUAL.

SING.

PLUK.

Nom. ah

au

ah

yau

ah

yah

am

au

an

am

im

yau

ah

Ih

Ins.

ena

abhyum,

dbhydm Ibhyam abhih

Dat.

aya

Abl.

at

Ace.

Gen. asya

ayoh

Loc

Voc.

au

aih

aya

yd

ebhyah

dyai

yai

ayah

yah

anam

ah

ibhih

dbhyah ibhyah

anam

mum

asu

tshu

yau

ah

yah

yoh

ayoh

aydm yam,

eshu

NEUTER.

/
SING.

DUAL.

VLUR.

ani

Nom. ^

The

Ace.

S"^

Voc.

The

rest of the neuter terminations are

like the masculine.

classical

am
student

will

recognise

in

this

scheme many

resemblances to the terminations of nouns in Latin and Greek,

when

is

it

remembered

Latin u and the Greek o

Greek
e/a,

or

Latin b

i-

a,
;

that
;

the Sanscrit a corresponds to the

the Sanscrit

the Sanscirt a or

or in the gen. plur.

to

to the Latin

the Latin a and the

to
;

the Sanscrit bh

and that the Sanscrit Visargah, or

final

li,

is

or

and the

Geek

or

rj,

bhy to the

equivalent to

s.

OR OF THE FIRST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.

31

In the application of the above terminations, the finals of the

crudes must

first

Thus, taking deva, and rejecting

be rejected.

we have dev; and adding the terminations, we have

The four examples are now declined in full.
nom. devah, &c.

the

final,

Masculine Crudes in

48.

^^

N.

^:

devah,

Ac.

devam,

I.

^%T devena,

D.

^^rnr devdya,

Ab.

^'cOrf

devdt,

G.

^^^

devasya,

L.

deve,

V.

^^

deva,

^^

In accordance with

r. 21,

man,"

a, like

^,

devau,

" a deity " (deus).

^^Tt devah.

devau,

devan.

^'41 H^

^^^Twn devahhyam,

^%: devaih.

devahhyam,

^%aK devebhyah.

devahhyam,

devebhyah.

^4Mi devdndm.

^=IMt: devayoh,

devayoh,

devau,

such words as

^^

deveshu.

^^;

devdh.

ni

"a man,"

>rT. " a deer," are written in the ins. sing. i^,

and in the gen. plur.

^^'mig],

vKJILi],

the

^^, "a
^^^, grjrsr,

the cerebral nasal

nJiiUjlf*

taking the place of the dental.

49.

Feminine Crudes in a and

Ac. ifl^lj'Fcam,
I.

fle(4|l

jivayd,

D.

iflm^ jivdyai,

Ab.

sfl^rai: jlvdydh,

G.

jlvdydh,

ift^^ve,

N.

fT^

wac?J,

Ac.

tT^*

nadim,

I.

raT

nadyd,

D.

"TO nadyai,

Ab.

tTOTt

ft^n jlvdhhydm,

T1^

iff^ wat//.

jlvdhhydm,

*I^, "

riverJ*^

jlvdh.

ft^Tf>T:

jlvdbhih.

iflmwK jtvdbhyah.

jlvdbhyah.

jlvayoh,

*(NT5TT

jlvayoh,

afNrff jlvdsu.

nadyau,

nadyau,

tl^iwn nadlbhydm,

Tufh

V.

and

y"tJw a wi

fNn: jlvdh.

nadydh,

nadydm,

jivdbhydm,

if^^xft:

nadydh,

tTRTT

/^/v^,"

^c(t: jlvdh.

L.

like ifNrr, "

yzve,

V.

G.

i,

nadlbhydm,
nadlbhydm,

tfEr:

nadyah.

T^: nadth.

"iT^l^ nadlbhUi.
T^bi^n

nadlhhyah.

nadlhhyah.

nadyoh,

f^hrt

nadyoh,

l^M nadlshu.

rat nadyau.

nr;

nadlndm.

nadyah.

DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN VOWELS,

32

Neuter Crudes in

50.

N.

)
>

Voc.

The

a, like ^TT.

"a

gift^^

{donum,

Scopov).

^T% danam,

^r^ dane,

^Hlf^ dunani.

^TT rfawa,

^T% dune,

^Mlf^ ddnani.

rest like the masculine cfem.

Observe, that since the voc. dual and plural of the Sanscrit

noun coincides with the nom.,

T When
pound

it will,

a feminine noun, likejim,

adjective,

is

in future, be omitted.

taken to form the

Thus, taking the feminine noun vidya^ "learning;"

compound
tive

it

last

member

of a com-

declined like deva for the masculine, and dana for the neuter.

it is

alpavidya, "little learning :"

and when

from

this

this is used as a

is

formed

compound

tlie

adjec-

becomes, in the nom. masc. fem. and neut., alpavidyah, alpavidya, alpavidyam,

" possessed of little learning."

On

when forming

feminine and neuter terminations

adjective ;

the same principle, a masculine noun takes the

the last

member

of a

compoimd

and a neuter noon, the masculine and feminine.

To convince

the student of the absolute necessity of studying

attentively the declension of this first class of nouns, he is recom-

mended
fifteen
tive,

to turn back

to

He

r. 38.

which follow

or nodi ;

all

All the masculine substantives

this declension.

in this list are declined like deva

list

there find given, under

will

heads, the various forms of nouns, substantive and adjec-

the feminine either like jtvd

all

Again,

the neuter like ddna.

same three examples

follow the

all

for

the adjectives in this

their

three

genders.

Again, according to deva masculine, ^7t?a feminine, and ddna neuter,

are declined

regular comparative and superlative degrees of

all

the form punyatara, punyatama

of the form balishtha

(r. 71.)

kurvana,

(r. 134.)

form

kriyarndna

krita, &c.,

(r. 71.)

irregular superlatives

all

present participles of the forms

all

passive

all

past

participles of the

which are the most common and useful of

verbal derivatives

(r. 125. 1. 2. 3. 4.)

all indefinite

all

future participles,

which are of constant occurrence, of the forms kdrya, karamya,

kartavya

(r. 129.)

karishyamana

(r.

all participles

130.)

many

of the second future, of the form

ordinals,

like

prathama

(r.

74.).

Lastly, according to nadl feminine, are also declined thefeminines of

adjectives like tanu

(r. 40.)

the feminines of innumerable adjectives

OR OF THE FIRST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.

dhanavat, dhtmat

like

dhanin, and

(r. 42.),

feminines of nouns of agency like karin

of nouns of agency like kartri

gular

2.)

comparative degrees like haliyas

present

of

nines

(r. 131.

participles

like

medhavin

(v.

131. 3.);

(r. 43.)

the

the feminines

the feminines of irre-

72. 69."!')

(r.

kurvat

33

the femi-

and

123.

(r.

63.)

the

feminines of active participles of the third preterite like kritavat

(r. 127.

and

the feininines of active participles of the second

62.);

preterite like vividwas

ordinals like

Hence

panchama

nouns under eight

small

69.^)

evident, that although

is

it

and

(r. 127.

proportion

of

the feminines of

classes, the

we have arranged

nouns and participles compared

with the

The

first.

student,

Grammar

not to advance a step further in the

he has made himself thoroughly master of this declension.

till

Sanscrit

seven classes contain but a

last

almost innumerable number embraced by the

therefore, ought

many

(r. 74.).

There are a few useful words (or j^irea//// feminine, and not derived from masculines

like nadi

and

such as ^t, "prosperitj^" Ht, "fear,"

putrl, in r. 38. xv.),

"shame," which vary from the declension of f^ nadi;

So again,

f^:,
dat.

ace.

-f^^,

f^

or

&c., abl.

tune," agrees with

^, f^^,

/,

its

nom.

cfif^;

kavih,

Ac.

o|if^

kavim,

chf<^V1

D.

oR^/cawaye,

kavino,

Ab. cB^; kaveh,

G.

kaveh,

L.

oR^ kavau,

V. "^^kava,

^,
qsftt,

i^^Tn,

voc.

^pfNt,

f^ &c.

MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER.

i,

^^

v^mati,

fem.

''the

mind"

water."

like cRf^,

"

poet.''''

efisft

kavl,

cR^TTt kavayah.

kavl,

'cfkiOrf

chfeiMlf

a|iq^:

^^:

^Tj^t, "for-

^TBjftt

o|if^ kavi, masc. ''apoet" ;

Masculine Crudes in

N.

ins.

%Tit &e.,

&c., loc.

^Tft.w7n, neut.
51.

^:,

fif^: or

&c. in making

SECOND CLASS. CRUDES IN

Declined like

nom.

f^

and gen. f^^zn:

y^

sing.

or f^^, abl. and gen. f^T\; or f^nnt> loc. "PjlfTI

i^, "a woman," nom. sing, dual and plur. T^, f?3^,

ace. f^spTj ins. fijnrr. dat.

or f^Tlt.

thus,

kavin.

kavibhydm,

fifM*n kavihhUi.

kavlbhyiim,

chf^MT: kavibhyuh.

knvibhydm,

kavibhyah.

kavyoh,

atTEfhrlt

kavyoh.

c|if^ kavishu.

kavlnnm.

DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN VOWELS,

34
So

also, agni, " fire" {ignis) ;

" to

and nouns formed from dha,

hold"

as, sandhi,

" union."

Feminine Crudes in

52.

K.

?rfin

matih,

Ac.

rf(T

matim,

I.

Jimr

maty a,

D.

fm^ mataye,

nft

G.

mateh,

L.

JTi^

matau,

V.

*(^ Twa^e,

JTf?r>

JTinr:

matt,

infh matih.

JTiift:

jrfffwn

matihhyam,
matyoh,

jrfiltr

/e'Ae ^ift..

Ac.
I.

"^TfijnT

D.

Ab.

mri,
vdrind^

cjl^flU vdrini.

vdrinah,

L.

eHf^fllJ vdrini,

V.

gTft.?^*i

vdrini,

^Xftw

vdribhydm,

vdribhydm,

4\iilfS\l

vdrinoh,

<\\^VS.\

and

(r. 39.),

like X;aw

and

ware,

and compound adjectives ending

are declined like Aa^ in the

masc.

like /waft' in the fem.

like uare in the neuter.

y When a feminine noun ending

pound

adjective,

it

must be declined

Thus the compound

vdrindm.

4\{lM vdrishu.

vdrinoh,

Although there are few substantives declined

vdribhyah.

vdribhyah.

or 'qTX.?*e,

yet adjectives like shu^hi

in

vdrini.

<lftf*Tt vdribhih.

Vfl FljH: vdrinah,

matmdtn.
matishu.

" wa/'er " (mare).

4 fV^r vdribhyam,

crrft;^ varine,

matibhyah.
matibhyah.

jnftn

matyoh.

i,

matayah.

nfirfn: matibhih.

matihhyam,

^riftsft vdrini^

" /Ae min(V''

math

Neuter Crudes in

53.

like

^?ir^ matibhi/am,

Ab. H^: mateh,

i,

The

dat.

may

in

is

taken to form the last member of a com-

like kavi in the masc.,

adjective alpamati in the ace. plur. masc.

also

be matyai ; the ab. and gen. matyah

and vdri in the neut.

would be alpamatin

the

loc.

matydm.

OR OY THE FIRST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.

The same

fem. alpamatlh; neut. alpamatini.

be taken to form the

The

last

member

holds good

of a compound.

Hence, vari serves also as the model for the

in.

neuters of adjectives and nouns of agency in

karin

(r. 66.)

nom.

sing,

sakhin;

ins.

sakhyd, sakhibhydm, sakhibhih;

ins.

in a

member

bhupatind, "

compound word,

of a compound, and

by the

THIRD CLASS.
Declined like

like

M,

Masculine Crudes in

Ac. >TR bhanum,

I-

^TW^

D.

>TT*T^

Ab. >TndJ

But

l>hanuna,

bhanave,
bhJanoh,

G.

L.

>TTft

V.

>Tnft bhano,

bhiunoh,

bhanau,

>TT|[

this

^ffVf

abl.

and gen.

"a master," which,

word

is

almost always found as

" a bone," drops the

; abl.

asthnah,

^^ dhenu, fem.

" a milch cow ";

neut. " honey."

u, like >TT^ bJianu, ''the sun.^''

bhanU,

HT*{^:

bhanavah.

*'T^ bhanun.

bMnubhyam,

>n^f>T: bhanubhih.

bhanubhyam,

VTT^wn bhanubhyah.

bhanubhyam,

M\r^\ bhanwoh,

sakhdyam^ sakhdyau,
Sfc.j

X[f(t pati,

asthi, neut.

hhanu,

^TT^wit

ace.

asthnd ; dat. asthne

bhdnu, masc. " the sun ";

^TT^: bJiidnuh,

And

sakhye,

MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER.

ira madhu,

54.

dat.

sakM, " a friend,"

then regularly declined like kavi; thus,

as, ins. sing,

CRUDES IN
>TTT

is

The noun

king."

vowel in some of its cases

N.

tri,

follows sakhi in the five last cases sing, (thus,

in the other cases, kavi.

patyd, S^c):

final

i ; viz. fifi^

dual and plur. sakhd, sakhdyau, sakhdyah

when not used

ins.

dhanin and

and the neuters of nouns of agency in

sakhyuh, &;c.; loc. sakhyau, S^c; voc. sakhe,&;c.

the last

in, like

(r. 57.).

There are two useful irregular masculine nouns in

a masc. or neut. noun

declension of the neuter of this class follows the analogy

of nouns in

kartri

if

35

bhanwoh,

>TT^H*I

bhxmubhyah.

bhanUnam.

^'^^ bhanushu.

&;c.

DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN VOWELS,

36

Feminine Crudes in

55.

N. '^: dhenuh,

VJ^rfAewrrfl,

D.

Vt^ dhenave,*

^TrvxTT

Ab. ^|^; dhenoh,*

^^

L.

cawJ'"'

\Jf^; dhenavah.

dhenu,

I.

dhenu, " a milch

\t7f dhenfi,

Ac. '^^ dhenum,

G.

u, like

Tjrar;

dhenuh.

dhenubhydm,

UrrfWl dhentibhih.

dhenubhydm,

'^tq: dhenubhyah.

dhenubhydm,

dhenoh,*

^V^t

dhenwoh,

dhenau,*

dhenwoh.

iJHr|*|

dhenubhyah.

dhenundm.

^tre dhenushu.

V. ipf^ dheno,

Neuter Crudes in

56.

madhu,
JnpTT madhund,

lT>r*Tt

G.

madhunoh,

L.

sraf*T madhuni,

V.

Jlt|

madhu

or

JTtft

madhuni.

madhuni.

JJvfH; madhubhih.

madhubhydm,

^vp!^l madhubhyah.

madhubhydm,

^'*f^^

madhunoh.

madhubhyah.

madhundm.

t{Xm madhushu.
V30

madho.

Although there are but few substantives declined

and madhu, yet

is

it

and

and

all

all like

compound

in the masc.

adjectives in

in the fem.

as,

for
all

all

simple adjectives like

and madhu

declined like

tanu makes

its

nom. fem. either tanuh or

as, '^TI,

"a

long,

may also be dhenwai ;

Nom.

vadhum, vadhwau, vadhuh ;

ace.

vadhubhydm, vadhubhyah;

dat. vadhwai,

tanrm.

whose declension must be

wife," declined analogously to ruidl.

vadhubhydm, vadhubhih ;

dat.

bhanu

Many

in the neut.

and plur. vadhuh, vadhwau, vadhwah ;

* The

u,

however, optionally follow the declension of nadt,

There are one or two feminine nonns in u

noticed here:

dhenu

other simple adjectives in

adjectives ending in u, are

dhenu in the fem.

u,

like

important to study their declension, as well

noun bhanu ;
pipasu (r. 40.), and

as that of the masc.

/WM,

(fitdv).

madhubhydm,

t^XT^l madhunoh,

madhunah,

^'^^

madhuni,

jflfyirf

D. 11V% madhune,

Ab.

7nadhu, " honeyr " wine "

H^

HVft madhunt,

N. JTO madhu,
Ac.

u, /e'^e

abl.

sing. dual,

ins.

vadhwd,

vadhwah^

S^c.

the ab. and gen. dhenwahj the loc. dhenwdm.

OR OF THE FIRST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.

vaMwoh, vadhundm ;

gen. vadhwdh,

So again,

loc.

vadhwdm, vadhwoh, vadhushu ;

"the earth," declined analogously

>T,

37

to

y^.

Nom.

voc. vadlm.

and plur.

sing. dual,

bhnh, bhuvau, bhuvah ; ace. bhuvam, bhuvau, bhuvuh ; ins. bkuvd, hhubhydm^
dat. hhuve or bhuvai,

vam,

; abl.

<SfC.

and gen. bhuvah or bhuvah,

loc.

bhu'Mh ;

bhuvi or bhu-

(SfC.

FOURTH

CLASS.

CRUDES IN tp

Declined like r^TK datri, m.

"5.

f.

MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER.

n. ''a giver, fmtpitri,

Masculine form of Crudes in

57.

Sfc.

tri,

m.

'"'

a father."

and

like ^Tff {dator, SoTrjp),

fiTO

{pater).

^
.

^nn

data,

^TilTO datarau,

fWT

pita,

fWiflj

pitarath

rmt.:

^IriK dataram,

datarau,

^Irf^^ datrin.

pitarau,

ftrfT*^

ftnri

pilaram,

I.

^nn

datra,

D.

^T^ ^a^re,

Ab.

^T^: datuh,

'

G.

^[THWlt

datuh,

(^mP*. datari,

V.

^TrTT. c?ator,

Nouns

agency

ace. sing,

and

in

c?a^r/

datrihhih.

^Tffw?:

datribhyah.

datroh,

like joeYri

the nom. dual

datribhyah.

^nnnrt datrlnam.
t^lijH

datrishu.

only differ from nouns

and

plural,

Feminine nouns of relationship

mother," are declined like

" a man,"

and the

where the former has the penultimate

dual,

the latter, long.

y nr,

^Tirf>Tt

of relationship

like

pitrin, 8cc.

datrihhyam,

datrihhyam,

pitarah.

datrihhyam,

^TWh datroh,

L.

Obs.
of

datarah.

^TrlTC

/7i>2,

short,

matri, " a

except in the ace. plural Jmn.

declined like pitri (nom. nd,

is

like

<Sfc.),

but usually makes

TOT in the gen. plural.

The feminine form

nodi;

as,

nom.

^nft,

The neuter form

^.

^liJllO.

of nouns of agency in

&c. (see
follows

^Trftff (see

r. 53.).

tri is

declined like

r. 49.).

the declension of vari ; as,

nom.

ace.

DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN CONSONANTS,

38

II. DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN CONSONANTS, OR OF THE LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.

Sect.

General Observations.

The

58.

four classes of nouus, whose declension has just

first

been considered, comprise nearly

guage.
last

we except

If

four classes of nouns

participles,

to all

and

There

words.

the substantives in the lan-

all

ending in mart and

substantives

as,

the

consist almost entirely of adjectives,

roots, taken to

form the

last

member

compound

of

one general scheme of terminations applicable

is

nouns ending in consonants.

as follows

DUAL.

SING.

Nom.

It is

PLURAL.

au

ah

Ace.

am

Inst.

hhyam

bhih

Dat.

Abl.

ah

oh

Gen.

Loc.

bhyah

am
8U

au

Voc.

ah

This scheme applies without exception to the few substantives,

and to the masculine of the many adjectives and

whose crudes end in consonants.

nom. and

tion of the
tives

of nodi

declension
so

ace. cases, to the

and participles

much

variation,

participles,

also applies, with the excep-

It

neuter of these same adjec-

but their feminine generally follows the

(r. 49.).

The nominative singular admits of

is general enough

that no one termination

to be inserted in the scheme.

Many
learner,

of the

terminations

will

be

already

those of the dual and plural.

especially

familiar

terminations prevail, with various modifications, in

nouns

and

this

to

the

Indeed, certain
all

Sanscrit

prevalence of certain sounds, as characteristic

of certain cases, has led

native

grammarians

into

the error of

constructing a technical scheme of terminations, which they apply

universally

in

the

declension

of

every

This technical scheme does, in point of

noun in the
fact,

language.

correspond with the

:;

OR OF THE LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.

scheme we have given above, as applicable to the

last

39

four classes

but when, on comparing this with the scheme belonging to the

how very great is the dissimilarity

between the two and when it is remembered that the first class
embraces a much larger number of nouns than all the other seven
first class (r. 47.), it is

seen

process

given at

and

if

seems but

combined, there

classes

For surely

of generalization.
it

all,

should be that which

any system of adaptation

any such
any general scheme is
reason

little

if

most universally applicable

is

to be adopted,

is

for

should consist

it

an adaptation of the smaller number to the larger, rather than

in

the larger to the

smaller

we

or

are led into endless alteration

and substitution, and very unnecessary perplexity and confusion.

I

There are two or three useful words

which conform

N.rdh,rdyau, rdyah;

"wealth."
rdbhih,

gdvau^ gdh ;

Go, m.

rdnis).

S^c. (cf.

ins.

k.rdyam^ rdyau^ rdyah;

" an ox or cow."

f.

gavd, gobhydm, gobhih,

ndvau, ndvah ; ace. ndvam, ndvau, ndvan

FIFTH CLASS.
Declined like

m.
59.

f.

CRUDES IN

'e|i^^e|iri

n. ^^one

AND

karmmakrit, m.

who knows

d,
f.

N. ss^TKfT karmakrit*

And

; ins.

ndvd,

nau,

f.

n.

"a

oRWJ^rTT karmakritd,

4it^*W

D.

4|il^M|^ karmakrite,

Ab. cM^ehrit karmakritah,

L.

c(4pe|if|f

Like the nominative.

rdyd, rdbhydm,

" a ship."

ac. grawi,

N. nauh,

m.

Tl*^r4d

V^^f^
f.

dhamimai^id,

n. "wealthy."

and

d,

declined

c<i*^<*iT:

karmakritah.

karmakridbhydm. ^P^oRfjp karmakridbhiii.

karmakritoh,

oM^diiQ: karmakridbhyah.

oh^A^rii karmakritam.

efi^^rU karmakritsu.
'

has the effect of doubling the letter immediately under

Sanscrit character (r. 33.),

type.

karmakriti,

* Although

and

cdJ^diff); karmakritoh,

V.

Strictly,

m.

(Cf. vavq, navis).

S^c.

doer of work";

rai,

MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER.

<^'ckA\ kannakritau,

Roman

S^c.

Masculine and Feminine form of Crudes in

Ac. oM^ehfi karmakritam,

I.

and am,

Thus,

N. gauh, gdvau, gdvah ;

his duty"; Mfrf/^jt dhanavat,

like cM^ohri

G.

in the language ending in ai, o,

the scheme of nouns ending in consonants.

to

it

is

it

in the

unnecessary always to double the letter in the

however, this word should be written karmmakrit.

DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING

40
N.

V'^Pctt^

dharmavid,

V^lff^^ dliarmavidau,

Ac. VJ^ffl^ dharmavidam,

CONSONANTS,
TpSrfN^; dharmavidah.

S^c.

Loc. plur. V^^f^ftr dharmavitsu, by

in'

IN

14.

r.

The neuter form of nouns like karmakrit and dharmavid is,

the nom. and ace. <**^<*ri
^B^lft, oh+^-jftd, V^f^^, "HJlrf^,
,

In the other cases

t|^f^T?[.
60.

All substantives like

resembles the masc. and

it

jt^

marut, m.

fern.

" wind," ^T'XT^ sampad,

f.

" success,"

and "^j^ kumud, n. " a lotus," follow the declension of

thus, nom. marut, marutau, marutah
karmakrit and dharmavid
:

sampad, sampadau, sampadah

61.

The masculine form

and mat,
N.

declined like

is

^TT^rn^

VT^

with the affixes vat

v*f^-

dhanavan,

V*T^?^ dhanavantau,

Ac. v*14Mf dhanavantam,

Voc.

kumud, kumudl, kumundi, &c.

of crudes formed

dhanavantau,

VHMH: dhanavantah.
\|r|c|ii:

dhanavatah.

dhanavan,

The other cases are like karmakrit; as, ins. ^^^{^[x^ dhanavata, &c.
The feminine form of nouns like dhanavat is declined like nadi

thus, nom. dhanavatl, dhanavatyau, dhanavatyah, &c. (see

The neuter form

is,

r.

49.).

nom. and ac, dhanavat, dhanavatl,

in the

dhanavanti; and in the other cases like the masculine.

62.

adjectives

So, also, all

active past participles like

nom. masc. dhlman.

vanta?n, 8cc.
kritavati,
63.

&c.

dMman, &c.
and nom. neut,

After dhanavat

TJ^nr pachat, "

is

ohri<4H

See, kritavan, &c.

voc.
;

" wise," and all

^?|;^ dhimat,
"
he did " (r. 127,) thus,
kritavat,

like

may

cooking "

So, also,

dMmantam, &c., kritathe nom. fem. dhimati, &c.,

ace.

dhimat, &c., kritavat, &c.

also be declined present participles like

(r. 123.),

pachan instead of pachan.

except in the nom. sing., which

Many

of these participles also differ

from dhanavat, by inserting a nasal throughout all the cases of

Thus, nom. pachantt, pachantyau, pachantyah ; ace.
feminine.

the

pachantlm, pachantyau, pachantJh

The

adjective

but makes the

ins.

" great,"
^TfrT mahat,

penultimate

jnahdn, mahantau,

nom. fem. mahatl,

maMnlah ;
fee.

long
ace.

pachantya, &c.
is

declined like

before the

nasal

dhanavat,
thus,

nom.

mahantam, mahantau, mahatah

nom. neut. mahat, mahafi, mahanti.

OR OF THE LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.

SIXTH CLASS.

CRUDES

IN an

41

AND W, MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND

NEUTER.
Declined like ^rrr*rT dtman,

"a deed"; 'H\HH ndman,

n.

64.

"soul"; TJ3fT rajan,m.

va.

"a name"; and ^f7pT

n.

J^nWT atma,
i^WT raja,

atmanau,

^nwnri atmanah.

rajanau,

Iprnrt rajanah.

atmanau,

^TrRr[:

rajanau,

j^rrw% atmane,

yx^

rajne,

j^TTUnT: atmanah,

ttF^ rajnah,

{I
^x^

^rn*Ti:

rajahhyam,

Tr5TK

rajahhyam,

rajnah,

TJ^:

atmabhyah.
rajahhyah.

atmahhyam,

^mtnft: atmanoh,

rajm.

trwftr: rajahhih.

atmahhyam,

atmanah,

j^TWftr atmani.

L.

^nwfir: atmahhih.

rajahhyam,

atmahhyah.
rajahhyah.

^rn^nrt

atmanam.

T3^ rajnam.

rajnoh,

atmanah.

U^: rajnah.

^nTWTT atmahhyam,
Tl"3iwit

G.

n. ''rich."

iJlrWIfl^

rajanam,

'TJrrnT

Ab.

f.

(Cf. rex, regis).

j^lrHVII atmana,

D.

m.

<|llft

J^lrWI*i atmanain,

Ac.

dhanin,

Masculine and Feminine form of Crudes in an, declined like

^TWr^ and TJin^

N.

a king"; e)^\rT karman,

^^

atmanoh,

^IrKU atmasu.

rajnoh,

U5ni rajasu.

j^TTW^ atman,

V.

'tuT^ rajan.
Observe, that

65.

in an, because if

it is

necessary

to,

aw be preceded by

give two examples of nouns

?

or

r,

and

conjunct with a preceding consonant, the noun

rvan,

m.

if this

'*

and gvjH^ drish-

adhroan,

a looker,"

make

in the ins. adhrvana, drishwanu.

or

tj

be not conjunct, then the noun follows ro/aw

* As remarked in

p. 3., this

laghimna.

ins,

by any other consonant than

word

is

or

declension of this noun.

rdjani.

v,

And

if

even although

is

But
;

as,

aw be preceded
it

be conjunct,

usually pronounced ragyah

better illustration of the present subject,

Or

" a road,"

^szrT^

laghiman, m. "lightness";

m.

or be

then declined

Hence,

atman.

like

this yw

is

but, for the

represented by jw tliroughout the

;;

DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN CONSONANTS,

42

noun then

the

also follows

rajan

^T

as,

" the

niurddhan, m.

head";

ins. ^^^ murddhna.

There are no simple feminine nouns in an ; but when masculine
nouns are taken to form the last member of a compound adjective

they take a feminine and neuter form

The feminine form, however,

nimous."*

below.

Neuter Crudes in man, declined

66.

In the former the

and<
I

Ac.

oF^ karma,

karmant,

TT^

namm,

eh^^il

karmana ) The other cases

*

i"

rrai numna.

So

When
tives,

dMman,

karmani.

HlHlf*!

may

'HJH,

vowels.

"young

Thus,

TEf*!

In

'5rT;.

-^^j

instr.

^^hT, ^^lf?T

When rajan

een.
o

plur.

i:

follow the

declension

karman

of

vyoman, ronian, prejnan, that of naman.

member

of

compound

adjec-

HJUll

dog."

Nom.

anomalies the ace.

by the noun

"sgT,

'5SrrTt>

9j|fft

plur. is generally the

c.

before the terminations beginning with

So again,

&c.

" a Brahmicide "

in &c.

instr. ^5Ij^,

is

"a

na- (cf- kvoov),

all these

^ejrl

m.

f.

n. (cf. juvenis)

yuvanau, yuvanah ; acc.yuvanam,yuvanau,yunah; inst.yund,

1^^T

3jc.

-Til;

>

instr. is "^Tflil,

'; nova.'yuva,

yuvabhydm,

as,

karmasu, namasu.

loc.

take the masc. or fem. form.^

Anomalies in an:
ii^'li^i,

masc.

janman, veshman, ashman, varman,

neuters in an compose the last

they

clue to the form assumed

{nomen).

namani.

like the

karmanam, namnam

also the neuter nouns,

but daman, saman,

(r.

111H

oR'^Tftl

vartman, charman, chhadman,

"f

cRi^ and

Ins. i

ace.

like

m is conjunct, in the latter, not.

oM^Tlft

ffR nama

magna-

declined precisely

is

and the neuter follows the declension of kar-

like the masculine,

man

as in mahatman, "

taken

to

'^'^>
^Sl^^twit,

n.

nom. -'^, -'5?^, -'5^;

"aday"; nom. and

W^tfk:

dat.

ace. '^I^:

ace. -'^^J',
,

^Slj^t,

or

&c.

form a compound of this kind,

it is

declined like deva

48.); as, nom. maharajah ; ace. maharajam,S^c.

t As in the sentence, Vedagarbltandma Brdhmana

named Vedagarbha."

asit,

"

There was a Bralimin

OR OF THE LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.

Masculine form of Crudes in

67.

N.

xr^ dhani,

Ac.

'^f^tT

dhaninam,

I.

vf*T*rr

dhanina,

tfftTwn

D.

vf^

Ab. uftnr: dhaninah,

G.

L.

^rf^rftT

V.

vffTT

So

dhaninah,

dhanini,

nouns of agency

also

The neuter form

'l

dhaninah.

tjftrf*?:

dhanibhih.

dhanihhyam,

tlfT*cr:

dhanibhyah.

dhanibhyah.

dhaninoh,

tj.^rn"

dhaninoh.

ifftr^

dhaninam.

dhanishu.

dhanin.

in /w is declined like Mac??

Vf^,

" rich."

dhanihhyam,

dhanihhyam,

^f*fit:

dhaninah.

dhaninau,

Kf%T

^"l^

dhaninau,

X|f<tT?t

dhanine,

in, declined like

43

Vftftr (see

Pathin, m.

"a

like

/feanw.

The fem. form

as, nora. dhanini, karini (see

follows the declension of

mri ;

as,

of nouns
r. 49.).

nom.

vftT,

r. 53.).

path,"

is

declined irregularly; thus, sing, panthah, panthanam,

patha^ pathe, pathah, pathi, pathin; dual, panthdnau, pathibhydm, pathoh ; plur. joanthanah, pathah, pathibhih, pathibhyah, patham, pathishu.

SEVENTH CLASS.
Declined like
68.

CRUDES IN

^f^Jm

as,

chandramas, m.

MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER.

the moon";

^^

Masculine and Feminine form of Crudes in

N.

xiT^m: chandramah,

Ac.

^fi^H4 chandramasam,

J-

'<l^*mi chandramasa,

vjrigH|M{(

D.

'^'fTJ^H^

69.

N. V.

manah,

Ac.

I.

^^'^[ manasu,

manah,

D.

JR^

Ab.

HTOt manasah,

L.

^r^HH

M^^Hm

chandramasah.

chandramasah.

chandramasau^

chandramobhyam,

mind."

-^T^'iflfiT;

chandramohhih.

chandramase, &^c

Neuter Crudes in

rTl

n. '^the

as, declined like

'^i^HHt chandramasau.,

The other cases are like the neuter below,

G.

and ^r{^ manas,

manase,

manasah,

mrftl manasi,

as, declined like

TfTEft

excepting the voc. dual and plur.

manasz,

Htj^

(/xevo?,

H^ffWf manobhyam,

R^:

manobhyam,
manobhyam,

mens).

HhITh manunsi.

manasi,

manansi.

manobhih.

nftK manohhyah.

manohhyah.

TTOh manasoh,

*r*T^

manasam.

manasoh.

iTtT^

mamssu

(r. 50.).

(or -:^).

DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN CONSONANTS,

44

Observe, that the masculine noun chandramas

noun

for the fern,

compound adjectives, and

the nom. and ace. cases.
Nearly

"a nymph," and

apsaras,

that

simple substantives in as are neuter

all

Thus,

compound

taken

is

to
it

" evil-minded "

formed durmanas,

m. and

ins.

f.,

making

and u

for

t*

and

Sfc.

. 146.).

which are declined exactly like

a throughout, and therefore sh

Havishd, Havirbhyam, Havirbhih,

to

8ic.),

derived from

Svcrfxeve^,

Comp. Gram.

s,

Thus, flam, "ghee"/ nom. and

way

In the same

presented by the Greek

in the neut.

There are a few neuter nouns in

30. 27.).

these

they are

(nom. durmanah,

is

(Prof. Eastwick's transl. of Bopp's

inanas, suhstituting
(r.

when

but

and feminine like chandramas.

form the compound adjective
makes in the nom. (masc. and

which a very remarkable analogy

{xevog.

adjective,

fem.) mahamanah, matidmanasau, mahamanasah.

Sv(THvr},

model

form of

in the masculine

also

when manas

mahamanas, "magnanimous,"

is

also the

only differs from the neuter in

it

substantives are taken to form a

declinable

is

for the fem.

for

and r

*,

for o

Hamnshi;

Havih, Havishi,

ace.

and chakshus, "the eye"; nom. and

ace. chakshiih, chakshushl, chakshunshi ; ins. chakshusha, chakshurbhydm, chakshurbhik, Sfc.

Ashis,

"a

f.

blessing,"

dshisham, dshishau, ashishah,

S^c.

makes

in the

nom.

Similarly, dos, m..

ashlh, dshishau, ashishah; ace.

"the arm"; but

in the ins. either dosha or doshna ; dat. doshe or doshne,

nom. pumdn, pumdnsau, pumdnsah ;

pumbhydm,

ace.

SfC.

Thus,

(r.

71.), follow the

ballyas,

" more power-

ballydn, baliyansau, baliyansah ; ace. ballyansam, baUydnsau, baliyasah ;

ins. baliyasd, ballyobhydm, Sfc.

The

The neut. form

like nadl (r. 49.).

Participles of the

2d preterite

voc. sing is baliyan.

is

declined like

(r. 127.),

The

fem. form

is

"to know") and

if

they were

written vividus, jagmyu^ ; and in others as if written vividwat, jagmivai.

nom. vividwdn,

-wdnsaii, -wdnsah ; ace. vividwdnsam, -wdnsau,

dus}m, vividwadbhydm, vividwadbhih.

part, vidwas,

The

declined

manas throughout.

like vividwas (from vid,

jngmivas {irova gam, "to go") are declined in some of their cases as

vividwas.

8fc.

declension of manas, except in the nom. and ace.

nom.

is

pumansam, pumdnsau, punsah ; vas.punsa

Adjectives in the comparative degree, formed by the affix iyas

ful " ;

this last

Puns, " a male "

root vid, " to

vividmhah ;

Thus,
ins. vivi-

know," has an irregular pres.

used often as an adjective ("learned"), and declined exactly like

These

participles are declined like imdi in the fem.

(r. 49.),

and in the

OR OF THE LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.

neut. like the masc., except in the

vid, " to

know,"

nom. and ace, which are vimdtoah,

vividtishi,

student will here observe, that as the 2d preterite of

The advanced

vividwdmi.

45

used as a present tense, so the participle of the 2d preterite

is

is

used as a present participle, the reduplicated syllable only being rejected.

Eighth Class.

crudes in any Consonant except

n,

f,

s,

masculine,

FEMININE, AND NEUTEK.

This class consists principally of roots taken to form the

70,

member

last

only

They are not

compound words.

of

occurrence, except as ending in

in their declension arises

difficulty

with those terminations in the scheme at

from their combination

r. 58., which begin with

Whatever change, however, takes place in the nominative,

bhugbhih
the

nom. rat

And

lih,

(jjz)

and the other

" a licker,"

And

lidbhih, litsu.

nom.
duh,

with vowels, the

duham, &c.

nom. dhuk ;

bhunji;
\

nom.,

The few

principle.

asrij, n. "

sing.

ace.

"51

sh and

Latin woi-ds.

dhug-

it

may

lit,

lihz,

fall

linhi;

and

plur.), bhuk, bhujt,

dhuk, duha, dunhi.

under this

divam or dyam;
ins.

class are declined

makes
ap,

f.

ins. diva^

dyubhih,

The neuter

&c.

on a similar

in the ins. asrija or asna ;

"water,"

is

thus, apah, apah, adbhih, adbhyuh, apam, apsu^ apah

nom. dyauh;

cases,

Thus, ace. bhujam, sprisham, rajam, liham,

blood " (nom. asrik\

divoh; plur. nom. ace. divdh ;

cases, lidbhyam,

consonant of the root, whatever

dat. asrije or asne ; ace. pi. asrihji or asdni:

plural only

raj,

ratsu.

Before the terminations which begin

simple nouns which

But

and in

radbhih,

and the other

ace, voc. (sing., dual,

rat, raji, ranji;

ins. plur.

So again

radbhyam,

and the other

pre-

is

nom. sprik;

ins. bhuja, sprisha, raja, liha, duha,

as follows

is

final

always preserved.

cases,

(f^)

lit

bhyam, dhugbhih, dhukshu.

be, is

dual bhugbhyam ;

sprigbhyam, sprigbhih, sprikshu.

cases,
',

ins.

So again sprish,

bhukshu.

loc.

other

nom. bhuk

":

plural.

Thus, masc. and

served before these consonantal terminations.

fem. hhuj, " an eater

The

v. 59.).

and four in the

cases in the dual,

consonants, viz. three

common

of very

ov d (see karmakrit,

declined in the
div,

f.

" the sky,"

Sfc; dual, divau, dyubhyam^

SfC.

h appear to be nearly allied to k, and often pass into k in Greek and

Thus, from dosha,

"
ten," StKa, " decern

from

y^,

ap8ia, " cor."

46

ADJECTIVES.
Sect. III. ADJECTIVES.

The declension
and, as already

under each
adjectives

of substantives

felling

serve as the model for the

same

under the

Such as do occur belong

third

of nouns

three genders of
in

chiefly

" dear " (nom.

f.

n. priyah,

sadhu, " good " (nom. m.

f,

n. sadhuh,

Kd]ecti\e& formed from substantives are very numerous, as

chiefly to the

(nom. m.

first, fifth,

may
f.

n.

Compound
amples

38. 42.

and sixth

manushah, manushJ, manusham,

f.

";

43. iv.

may

They belong
The following

"
manusha, " human

r. 48. 49. 50.)

shrimaf,

n. shrhnan, shrimati, shrimat, r. 62.)

balin,

bait, balini, bali, r. 67.).

adjectives are

most abundant.

" small-bodied ";

well-bom

and

classes of nouns.

phalopeta, " possessed- of-fruit ";

alpatanu,
"

r.

be added to those already given

" prosperous " (nom. m.

" strong " (nom. m. f. n.

and

to the first

v. 54. 55. 49. 56.).

be seen by a reference to

examples

their

m.

as, priya,

r. 48. 49. 50.)

sadhuh or sadhwi, sadhu,

adjectives

from substantives, are very rarely found

simplest form, not derived

priya, priyam,

of

Adjectives,

class.

in Sanscrit.
classes

that

three examples of substantives, given

seen, the

class,

involves

The following are ex-

durbuddhi, " evil-minded

" all-conquering

sarvajit,

gatachetas, " bereft-of-sense ";

";

sujanman,

";

which are thus refer-

rible to their respective classes.

1st class.

Nom. m.
Nom.

class.

3d

5th class. 6th class. 7th

class.

class.

phaiopetah

durbuddhih

alpatanuh

sarvajit

sujanma

gatachetdh

phalopeta

durbuddhih

alpatanuh

sarvajit

sujanmd

gatachetah

phalopetatn

durbuddhi

alpatanu

sarvajit

sujanma

gatachetah

f.

Nom. n.

2d

The degrees of comparison are formed in two ways;

by adding to the crude ifT. tar a (nom. -tar ah, -tara, -taram,
Greek repos) for the comparative and fm tama (nom. -tamah.

71.
1st,
cf.

When

it

is

remembered that

final

h often becomes

in pronunciation to u, the three genders of this adjective

*,

and that a

is

equivalent

might be written priyus

priyd, priytim ; thus offering a perfect similarity to Latin adjectives in us.

"

ADJECTIVES.
-tania,

-tamam,

Greek TaTo^

cf.

"

" holy,'" ^TpniT. punyatara,

also,

holy,"

first class

by adding

2dly,

^^

(r. 48.

Greek

^^^hn^ baUyas, " stronger " (see

(declined

nouns of the

like

Greek

the

is

r. 6Q.'\),

^f^

class)

first

rejection

becomes

of a final
bal,

however, that

these*

simply excess

thus,

making

balishtha " strongest

laghu,

" light,"

lagJuyas, " lighter," laghishtha, " lightest."

making

/wv)

In general, the only change

Thus, halin, " strong,"

affix.

cf,

(r. 20.'|-).

ishtha (nom. -ishthah -ishtha, -ishtham,

i^ff

laros) for the superlative.

vowel, or of an

So,

49. 50.).

more wealthy," dhana-

tyas (nom. -iyan, -iya^, -lyah,

and

that takes place before these affixes

"

Thus, puny a,
punyatama, " most

"most wealthy"; and dhanin, dhanitara, dhanitama

for the comparative,

lagh,

M*WriH

dhanavat, " wealthy," dhanavattara, "

vattania,

cf.

for the superlative.

more

declined like nouns of the

holy,"

47

becomes
Observe,

do not often imply comparison, but

affixes

and balishtha more usually signify

baltyas

very strong."
But

besides the rejection of the final, the crude often undergoes considerable

change, as in Greek

and

place

its

is

sometimes supplied by a substitute.

mridu, "soft," becomes mrad, making mradiyas,

making garlyas

gar,

preyas, preshtha

j'

(cf.

mradishtha ;

Thus,

guru, "heavy,"

Latin gravius), garifihtha; priya, "dear," pra, making

bahu, "many,"

bhfj,

making bhuyas^ bhuyishtha ;

dlrgha, "long,"

drdgh J dura, " far " dav ; antika, " near " tied; kshudra, "small," kshod; yuvan,

ynv ; prashasya, " good," shra

" young,"

making

var,

variyas, varishtha

Bopp's Comp. Gram.

alpa, " small,"

{Fapt(rTo<:).

kan ; uru

{evpv<;), " large,"

See Prof. Eastwick's translation of

IV. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.

Cardinals.

72.
1

298.

Sect.

^:m eka,

"% dm, 2

f?

tri,

^^ chatur,

which are thus

decUned.

Eka,
minals

"

one " (singular only), follows the declension

nom. m. ekah

ekasyai; nom. n.

*
affix

Prof.

Bopp

ekam

dat.

(see sarva, r.

derives shreyas

being rejected.

m. ekasmai ;

nom.

f.

of prono-

eka

dat

f.

87.).

and shreshtha from shrlmal, "fortunate," the

NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.

48
"

Dmi,

nom

two " (dual

only), is

ace, voc. m. drvau,

f.

declined as

n. drve

dwa

the crude were

if

ins., dat.,

m.

ab.

dmabhyam

n.

f.

,-

gen., loc. dmayolu

Tri, " three,"

N. V. trayah,
Ac.

tribhih,

D. A. tribhyah,

chatwaraht

trmi,

tisrah,

trin,

I.

chatur, " four " (plural only), declined

and

chatasrah,

chatmari.

chaturah,

chatasribhih

tisribhih\^

chaturbhih,

tisribhyah,

chaturbhyah, chatasribhyah,

G.

trayanam, tisrinam,

L.

trishu,

Hsrishu,

The neuter only

diflPers

chaturnam,

chatasrinum,

chaturshu,

chatasHshu,

from the masc. in the nom.,

voc.,

and

ace. cases.

ijg^ panchan, 5

n^

navan, 9

73.

:^

shash, 6

sap fan, 7

^RTT^

^g*^ ask tan, 8

^^I*^ dashan, 10.

Fahchan, "

five ";

" six

shash,

";

ashtan,

" eight "

(plural

only); declined
M.

M.

F. N.

N. Ac. V. pancha,
panchabhih,

Ins.

D. Ab.

N.

F.

M.

F. N.

shat,

ashta or ashtau.

shadbhih,

ashtabhih or ashtabhih.

panchabhyah,

shadbhyah,

ashtabhyah or ashtabhyah.

Gen.

paiu;/iandm,

shannam,

ashtanam.

Loc.

panchasu,

shatsu,

ashtasu or ashtasu.

Saptan, navan, and dashan, and

all

other numerals ending in

an, follow the declension oi panchan.

Ekadashan,
14;

11

droadashan, 12

panchadashan,

ashtadashan, 18
trinshat

(ft^ni^),

15;

trayodashan, 13

shodashan {yi\i^^,

16;

navadashan or unavinshati, 19
30

{^H\\\a) 50; shashti

>

saptadashan,

vinshati

chatwarinshat (^i^Tfi^T?^), 40

(^),

60; saptati

(^nrfrT),

chaturdashan,

70; a^/w^i

(f^^lfri),

17;
20

pancJiashat
('Si^ftfir),

80;

As
(^), 100; sahasra, n. (^J^), 1000.
from dashan, "ten," are formed ekadashan, dwadashan, trayodashan,
navati (^-^fd), 90;

&c.,

so

from

sAa/a, n.

vinshati, " twenty," are

formed ekavinshati,

"

twenty-

one"; dwavinshati, "twenty-two"; trayovinshati, "twenty-three," &c.

But due regard must be paid

to the laws -of combination

thus.

NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
shadvinshati

26

("qfi^rfir),

44

tuslichatwarimhat,

saptati (^TK^nrfir). 73

trayastrinshat, 33

shattrinshat, 36

chatuhpanchashat (^w:t?^T^),

tryashiti (^T^ftfir), 83

49

54

panchasMH, 85

cha-

trayah-

shanna-

vati (^W^fir), 96.

Vinshati

and

(20),

and

the third

trinshat (30), are

Pj^lfri

fH"(yM. " he infixed

(IGOO),

are neut. nouns of the

sing.;

15^

as,

f^IfftJ.

a genitive case

as,

declined like fem. nouns of

classes, usually in the singular.

fifth

twenty arrows."

clined as pronominals (see

Chaturtha, " fourth "

-ah,

-i,

The

the

tritlya, "

";

third

are de-

";

r. 87.).

rerapToi)

saptatna, " seventh

nouns of the

like

";

" fifth ";

panchama,

ashtama, " eighth

";

";

shashtha

navama,

first class

(nom.

-am).

ordinals

the cardinals,
-i,

(cf.

dashama, " tenth

" ninth ";

in

Ordinals.

Frathama, " first "; dmitiya, " second

";

sahasra

"a thousand ancestors": or they may govern

?T^ fMfUlIT (cf. the use of the Latin mille).
74.

(^), " sixth

As, ^rnranr
(lOO),

usually declined

class,

first

Shata

from

by

" eleventh " to

**

twentieth," are formed from

rejecting the final w;

thus, ekadasha (nom. -ah,

-am).

"Twentieth"

formed, either by adding the superlative

is

tama to the cardinal, as vinshatitama

and leaving vinsha (nom.
trinsha,

-ah,

Similarly

"thirtieth."

-i,

or by rejecting the

-am).

So

also

affix
final,

trinshattama or

"fortieth" and "fiftieth."

The

other decimal cardinals form the ordinals either by adding tama,

or by changing

ti

to ta ; as, saptatitama or saptata, " seventieth."

Numerical Sytnbols.
<^

^
2

^
3

Q.

*^o

10

CHAPTER

V.

PRONOUNS.
FORMATION OF THE CRUDE.

Pronouns have no crude

no

is,

distinct

state

which

all

analogous to that of nouns, that

state

from

all

serving as the basis on

inflexion,

the cases are constructed.

The question then arises, what form of the pronoun is used in

compound words.
In the pronouns of the first

the formation of

and second persons, the ablative

cases, singular

and

plural,

and in

the other pronouns, the nominative and accusative cases neuter,

are considered as expressive of the most general and comprehensive

state

of

These

of the pronoun.

of a crude,

office

cases, therefore, discharge the

and are constantly found at the commencement

compound words.
DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

m^

75.

mat, " I,"

asmat, " we,"

for

is

the

t^ken for the crude of the sing.

crude of the

plur.

of

the

and ^rWiT

first

personal

pronoim.
aham, "

N.

'sr^

Ac.

Jit rriam,

^rnr avam, " we two,"

I."

" me," *

inn mays,

I.

'^|c(|M{|

D. Jig mahyam,*

Ab.

JTff

G.

JPT

L.

n^ vmyi.
76.

TOTT

mat,

mama,*

1^

^nwfh

twat, " thou," is

yushmat, " you," for

"^Ji

vayam, " we.

^^M

dvdm, " us two," *

asmdn, "

us."

avabhydm,

^^infvn asmdbhih.

avabhyam,*

'^f^3T

avabhyam,

m-^A asmat.

asmabhyam*

avayoh,*

^WT3R asmdham.*

avayoh.

ClfHI^ asmdsu.

taken for the crude of the sing,

the

and

crude of the plural of the second

personal pronoun.

* The

ace. sing,

may

also be

the ace, dat., gen. plur. 7{i

(cf.

the dat., gen.

Lat. nos).

tlie ace.,

dat., gen.

dual t^

PRONOUNS.
twam, " thou,"

^^ yuvam, " you two,"

N.

if^

Ac.

j^

I.

f^TTT twayd,

D.

7r*4 tubhyam,*

Ab.

i^ twat,

G.

J(^ tava,*

i\<il(\l

L.

^rorfir: yushmdbhih.

yuvdbhydm,*

^reiT yushmabhyam.*

yuvdbhydm,

TT^TcT yushmat.

yuvayoh,*

^miofi yushmdkam.*

yuvayoh.

^TJTTO yushmasu.

in^ tat or ir^ tad, " he," is

plur. of the

yushmdn.*

Jjftljlrl

im}U{[ yuvdbhydm^

imflftwayi.

and

1(4 yfiyam, " you."

yuvdm,

twdm,*

77.

51

third personal

taken as the crude of the sing.

With

pronoun,

this

pronoun

of.

the Greek article.

MASCULINE.

N.

"
"W* sah,

Ac.
I.

he,"

" they two,"

j^

tau,

7f tarn,

tau,

^fT tena,

iTT^t tdbhydm,

^'

(T^ tasmai,

Ab.

rt^HIrl

tasmdt,

G.

iT^

L-

irfWT tasmin,

tebhyah.

^tjf teshdm.

tesya,

^f^ teshu.

" she,"

;ffT

irt tarn,

I.

Tnn

in Mil tdbhydm,

D.

jT^ tasyai,

L.

tetA.

^Yin tebhyah.

tdbhydm.

N.

>

<i^,

fT^BTTt

tasydh,

tasydh,

G.

^:

tdbhydm,

Ac.

Ab.

^<e,"they."

<aA.

"HTftrt tdbhih.

tdbhydm,

fTP^K tdbhyah.

tdbhydm,

tdbhyah.

ffnrt tdsdm.

fC^tasydm,

Neuter, nom.

<e,

ace.

UTT

tayoh,
to/,

T^

te,

wrfJT

^ae;

the rest

the

like

masculine.

This pronoun
pronouns,
nos''';

like

itf ,

"

7/c

sometimes used emphatically with the other

is

ille

and

/^";

Thus,

ipse.

"

^,

iV//

Tfft*^,

";

"

ille

nyc, "

ego"";
ille

It

'^^, "

ipse "; r^

illi

^m^.

" id ipsum."

The

ace. sing,

may

the ace, dat., gen. plur.

also be in

(cf.

the dat. gen.

Lat. vos).

it

the ace, dat., gen. dual

"^
;

PRONOUNS.

52

REFLEXIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

The oblique

78.

cases of ^TWr^, " soul," " self" (declined p.

41.),

are used reflexively in place of the three personal pronouns, like

the Latin

shaya, "
"

Thus, atmanam {me ipsum) anaharena hanishyami,

ipse.

" I will kill

myself by fasting

show thyself

as

atmanam (te ipsum) mritavad daratmanam (se ipsum) nindati,

";

";

dead

if

he blames himself."

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS DECLINED.

The

79.
is

personal pronoun

third

tth^

"he," declined above,

tat,

constantly used in a demonstrative sense, to signify " that " or

" this

and by prefixing

";

formed

etau, ^it

(r. 30.), ^fI'

There

is

ace.

ete"";

it,

the crude, but

"

is

this,''

common pronoun

another

nom.

as,

etam, &c.

common

another very

^ idam,

which

to

more strongly demonstrative

still

ins.

tj^:

^^ etena,

&c.

demonstrative pronoun,

the nom. case neuter,

is

eshah

of

considered to be

is

never used as such.

MASCULINE.

N. ^t} ayam, " this,"

If 4^ imau, "these two,

Ac, 3Jf imam^*

.

imau,

ime, " thes<

imMTi.

'^f||l

I.

^^^ anena,

'^[vqi

dbhydm,

T^^X ebhih.^

D.

^^ asmai,

dbhydm,

"^ym ebhyah.

dbhydm,

Ab ^TOTT^
.

asmat^

G.

^^j( asya,

L.

^urWT as7mn,

N.

Wff^t, anayoh,

anayoh,

ebhyah.

eshdm.

'^yf[

T^

eshu.

FEMININE.

iyam,

^^T

D.

^*i^ asyat,

Ab ^^i:
.

G.
L.

anayd.

ace.

asyah,
asydh,

m.

may

imh.

^3rrlt

be

dbuh.

dbhydm.

^rrfir:

dbhydm,

^SUSV, dbhyah.

dbhydm,

^t{ii\i anayoh.

^m\ asyam,

* The

Jint imdh.

ime,

Ac. ^JTT imam,*

I.

^ me.

anayoh,

^, the ace.

f.

SSf I^t

dbhyah.

asam.

^rr^ dsu.

^1^7.

t This pronoun affords the only example of the old form for the

instr. plur.

of

masculine

PRONOUNS.
nom.

Neut.,

^ idam, ^ ime,

ace.

53
imuni ; the rest

^llf4

like the

masculine.
There
adas
ins.

is

another demonstrative pronoun rarely nsed except in the nom., of which

is

taken as the crude

amund^

nom. m. asau, "this" or "he," amu^ ami;

RELATIVE PRONOUN

The

80.

and

may

relative

in the

t,

ace.

amum;

S^c.

yah, " who,"

pronoun

^ yau,

who^

"

which"

be formed by simply substituting

Thus, crude form yad

tad.

ye

"

ace.

^ yam,

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN

"

"

t/

for

nom. m. "m

whom," &c.

whof' "what?""

As the relative is formed by substituting y, so the interby substituting k for s and t, in the pronoun tad.
Thus,
"
nom. m. w, kah, who
kau, \ ke.
In the nom. neut., how81.

rogative

V ^

and occurs in a few compounds

crude,

Kim

kim and not had.

ever, the interrogative is f^

f^m^

as,

also the

is

"

on what

"

account

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
82.

These are formed by adding the

crude of the personal pronouns;

-a,

-am)

twadlya, " thine

that the gen. case

as,

madly a, "mine" (nom.

asmadlya, " our."

";

of the personal

to express the possessive

affix lya (r. 38. XI.) to

as,

pronouns

is

the
-ah,

Observe, however,

more usually taken

ir^ ^^, "his son."

REFLEXIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

83.
is

^ swaict suus), declined like sarva,

used reflexively, in reference to

stand

for

It often

"my

own,"

occupies the

masculine nouns of the

accordance with

this,

(nom. ^:,

^,

This form

instr. plur.

"perhaps"; kadartha,

W^

of deva

" nseless"

is still

preserved iu the Vedas, and in

(r.

48.) would be

is

retained in a few words

devebhih.
;

abl.

and

loc. sing,

such as

("of what use?"); kadadhwnn, "a bad

road " (" what a road " ).

t But the

^*),

may

"thy own," "his own," "our own," &e.

thus,
place in a compound
'l^fri

* Kad, however, was the old form, and

AacAcAiV,

r. 87.

three persons, and

first

first class.

the

all

m., and nom.

pi.

m.

may

follow deva,

r.

48.

PRONOUNS.

54
" he goes to his

own

The gen. case of atman (p. 41.), or

same signification as, wn*Tft 'T^

house."*

often the crude, is used with the

or ^m^npt

^T^atfir-^

HONORIfIC PRONOUN.

84

bhavat, "

TTf^^

verb,

is

your honour," requiring the 3d person of the

declined like dhanavat

vantau, bJuivantah.

personal pronoun

is used respectfully in place of the second

bhavan dharmam karotu, " let your honour

It
as,

Thus, nom. bhavan, bha-

(r. 61.).

practise virtue."

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

The

85.

indeclinable

affixes

api,

chit,

and chana, added

several cases of the interrogative pronoun, give

Thus, nom. sing. masc.

signification.

"

any body

loc.

";

By

kopi,

ofit^ftl

prefixing

i"

tf,

cfc^H

is

way

In the same

kati, "

"sirf^r^

kasminshchit

ofcfw n^H^

nom.

ace.

how many ? "

(r. 20.);

kashchit, "

ins. kenachit ;

nom.

kasJichana,

"

somebody

somebody,"

dat. kasmaichit

interrogative adverbs are

made

ins.

";

tf cdfvyiff

to the

indefinite

So

plur. masc. kechU.

formed the negative

katichit,

time"; from katharn^

kanchit ;

"SFftjir

them an

"

also

kenapi, &c.

nobody."

indefinite.

Thus, from

" a few "; from kadd, " when ? " kaddchit, " at some

"how?"

kathanchana,

"some how."

WHOSOEVER, WHATSOEVER.
86.

This

is

interrogative.

soever."

expressed by prefixing the relative pronoun to the

Thus, ^:

Or by

ojipaif^,

"whosoever";

repeating the relative;

as,

^Tir

0*0^ rf^

t^ "m,

^ t?.

"what-

PRONOMINALS.
There are certain common adjectives which partake of the
nature of pronouns, and follow the declension of tad (v. 77.). Thus,
87.

* In

modem

Sanscrit nija often takes the place of swa ; as, fJ9|J|^ JlTj^fri.

t Prof. Lassen

cites

a remarkable example from the

^T ,^.^

refers to the dual

two

down

fell

number.

Putram dtmanah

after touching their son."

Anthol. p. 171.

Rdmdyana,

in

which

sprishtwd nipetattth, " they

;;

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

VERBS.
^l|[

sarva, " all

nom. fem.

nom. masc. sarvah, sarvau, sarve ;

":

sarva, &c.

The

sarvam, &c., not sarvad.

these

Eka,

pronominals.

" second ";

"other";

tritiya,

itara,

&c.

dat. sarvasyai,

one ";

alpa,

few ";

nom. and

" first ";

ubha,

dnitiya,

" both '';

anya,

ace. neut. anyat, itarat, katarat).

But some of these are optionally declined

;

is

"other"; katara, "which of the two?" (the three

last also follow tad in the

class

sarvasmai

most useful of

the

prathama,
"

dat.

But the nom. neut.

following are

"

" third ";

55

thus, alpa,

nom.

like

nouns of the

first

plur. alpah or alpe.

CHAPTER VL
VERBS.
General Observations.

Although
by one who
view of

the Sanscrit verb will be found

follows

its

it

through

all its

somewhat

intricate

windings, yet such a general

structure as will be sufficient to answer the practical

may be easily given, and as easily

no part of the grammar so capable as

wants of the general reader

There

apprehended.

is

this of plain exoteric explanation, whilst there is

by the

esoteric

none so obscured

and mystical teaching of native grammarians

none, of which the general principles are so few and so close to

the

surface,

ments, are

whilst

the abstruser truths, the niceties and refine-

multiplied

to

an extent that tends to discourage, or

even disgust the uninitiated learner.

Hence

expounder of Sanscrit Grammar, who wishes

is

to

it

happens that the

exhaust his subject,

here not only compelled to embarass and perplex an otherwise

simple statement, by
tenses,

tiie

diffuse exhibition of various forms,

and exceptions, which are of

student,

but

is

forced,

little utility

and

to the ordinary

moreover, to bewilder the beginner by a

56

VERBS.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

complication of technical phrases, conventional abbreviations, and

symbolical letters, which are as puzzling at the

And

period.

may

they

studies, as

thus

stage of his

that a very false impression

is

it

first

memory

be useful in assisting his

at a later

formed

is

of the difficulty of a language, the broad and useful principles of

which

be the aim of the following pages to disentangle the

will

It

wholly within the reach of the most moderate capacity.

lie

much

subject, as

as

possible,

more

exist

those

importance,

superabundant weight of

many

which
be

will

left

serve to attract the eye of the

which are of general

points

of

than in the practice of

and although no part of the verb

unnoticed, the larger print will

student to

this

grammarians

in the theory of

approved writers

from

unusual tenses and forms,

mystical symbols and

and real

utility

smaller will indicate those portions of the

whilst the

subject which are to be reserved for after-consideration.

Although the Sanscrit verb

offers the

most striking and

inter-

esting analogies to the Greek, nevertheless, so peculiar and artificial

the process by which

is

in treating of

it,

it

to adopt

is

formed, that

it

would be impossible,

an arrangement which would be likely

to fall in with the preconceived notions of the classical student.

There are ten

rence

viz. 1.

the imperative,

4.

an

9.

infinitive

5.

the

first

preterite,

the second preterite,

the benedictive,

10.

mood, and several

present, the three preterites,

to the indicative

and

Seven of them are of common occur2.

6.

the

conditional,

the conditional.
participles.

and the two

3.

the potential,

first future,

Three are of rare occurrence

second future.
preterite,

tenses.

the present,

Of

viz. 8.

7.

the

the third

There

is

also

these tenses the

futures, belong

properly

mood and the imperative, potential, benedictive,

Since,
are more properly moods than tenses.
;

however, these moods do not comprehend other tenses under them,

but are
lead

to

arrange

susceptible

of all times, present, past,

and future,

no embarassment to consider them as

them indiscriminately

tenses,

it

can

and to

with the others in the manner

proposed above.

Although the three preterites are used without much

distinction, yet it should

be observed that they properly express different degrees of past time.

The first pre-

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

VERBS.

terite corresponds to the imperfect of

reference to an event doing at

Greek and Latin

some time

past,

verbs,

and not ended.

57
and properly has

The second preterite

has reference to an event done and past at some definite period.

terite, to

Greek

So, also, the

aorist.

second indefinite futurity.

some one of the

two futures properly express, the

The

auxiliaries

potential

may

third pre-

benedictive

is

its

it

by

The

"may," "can," "would," "should," "ought."

and the potential usually supplies

the

first definite,

generally be rendered in English

conditional is used after the conjunction yadi, "if":

rarely,

The

an event done and past at some indefinite period, thus corresponding to the

occurs, however, but very

The

place in conditional sentences.

a tense sometimes used in praying and blessing.

The infinitive mood generally has an

active,

but is capable of a passive

signification.

Every tense has three numbers, singular, dual, and plural.

There ar e two v oices or systems of infle ction, the one

The form er

Parasma ipada, the other Atmanepada.

called

supposed

is

convey a transitive sense, the action passing parasmai, "to

to

another

"";

veyed by

the latter, a reflexive sense, corresponding to that con-

Greek middle

the,

" to one's self."^

served;

and we

is

very rarely pre-

or intransitive, conjugated

parasmaipada or atmanepada, or both.

the verb

sometimes yield
reflexive

the action reverting atmane,

find verbs, transitive

indifferently in the

however,

voice,

This distinction, however,

its

is

conjugated in both, the atmane

appropriate meaning,

then

and give a kind of

or a sense directing the action in some

sense,

When,

may

way

to

the advantage of the agent.

Passive verbs are invariably conjugated in the atmanepada.

From every
a primitive,

root five kinds of verbs may, in theory, be elicited

a causal,

a passive, a desiderative, and intensive.

If the term voice has reference to the system of inflection,

there can only be two voices in Sanscrit

two

instances, has a

Greek middle

middle sense, yet

it

is

obvious that

and although the atmanepada,

it

in one or

cannot be said to correspond with the

voice, the chief characteristic of

which

is,

that

it

takes a middle

inflection, partly active, partly passive.

The words parasmaipada and atmanepada

par.^ dtm.
I

will often be

contracted into

YERBS.

58

Of

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
met

the two last forms are very rarely

these,

the nouns and participles derived from

them

be but slightly noticed in these pages.

with, except in

and

So,

noun, certain nominal verbs may, in theory, be

few of these, however, are in frequent

Primitive verbs

tions.

by

conjugations, but
1st, 4th,

nine

tenses

number belong

conjugations

the

to

primitive

the

of

There are ten conjuga-

use.

four

first

are

nine

first

either to the

comprising so few

tenses

formed

These

The

only.

according

one

to

Every root has

Causal verbs form the 10th conjugation.

rule.

Very

be regarded rather as exceptions.

apply

conjugations

other

other six

may

from every

elicited.

belong to any one of the

far the greatest

or 6th, the

verbs that they

may

will therefore

also,

a passive form, entirely independent of the conjugational form

assumed by the root

and the student

will

observe,

that

the

passive cannot, in Sanscrit, be considered a voice, according to the

For, in that ease, he would expect

usual acceptation of the term.

a verb in the passive voice to correspond in form with a verb in

way

the active, in the

that audior corresponds with audio, and

aKovofxai with aKot/o), the terminations or

being changed.
in

system of inflection only

But, in Sanscrit, the passive often varies entirely

form from the active verb, whilst the terminations

cases be the

same,

distinct derivative
ciple,

viz.

those of the atmanepada.

from the

may

It is

in both

rather a

formed on one invariable prin-

root,

without the least community with the conjugational structure

of the active verb.

Thus, the root

bhid, " to

divide," is of the

7th conjugation, and makes hhinatti or hhinte, " he divides "; dwish,
" to hate," is of the 2d conjugation,

"he

hates"; but the

invariable

rule,

and makes

passive of both

by the simple

is

dtveshti

formed according

is

"he

divided"; dwishyate,

From

these observations

Sanscrit verb

is

as nothing

Greek verb has three

to

one

insertion of y, without the least

reference to the conjugational form of the active

"he

or dmshte,

is

it is

thus, hhidyate,

hated."

evident that the difficulty of the

when compared with

The

the Greek.

and moods the

more than twenty-one tenses
Besides which, a far greater number of verbs are susand moods.
ceptible of the three voices in Greek, than of the two in Sanscrit.
voices, and about ninety tenses

Sanscrit has only two voices, and not

METHOD OF DERIVING VERBS FROM ROOTS.

59

Moreover, in Sanscrit, there are no contracted verbs, and no

from

difficulties resulting

difference of dialect

and although there

are ten conjugations, yet these have reference to four tenses only,
and, under

some of these conjugations, only two or three common

verbs are contained.

Verbs primitive,

causal,

and passive, may,

simple and compound.

into

falling

like nouns, be divided

may

Simple verbs

be regarded as

under two heads, either as derived from uncompounded

Compound verbs are those formed

by combining roots with prepositions or other adverbial prefixes.
roots,

or as derived from nouns.

SIMPLE VERBS DERIVED FROM ROOTS.

has been already shown that there are a large number of

It

monosyllabic sounds in Sanscrit, called

ideal existence, are the

are in

roots

grammarians

These

number about two thousand, and the theory of

that each of them may serve as the basis on

or

intransitive

2.

a primitive, transitive

1.

3.

a passive

of wishing to the root

sense

frequentative),

verbs

having often a causal and often

causal,

merely a transitive signification

a

which, having a mere

is,

five kinds of

giving

roots,

source of verbs as well as nouns.

which to construct

will

'

heightening the

idea

and

4.

5.

a desiderative,

an intensive (or

contained in the root.

It

be found, however, in practice, that the greater number of

these two thousand roots never occur at

nor, indeed,

in

are

in the

form of verbs,

any other form but that of the nouns

they give origin

verbs

all

to

which

and that the roots in real use as the source of

comparatively very

few.

Of

these

few,

certain particular roots (such, for example, as kri, " to

moreover,
do

"),

as

if

to compensate for the inactivity of the others, are kept in constant

employment, and, by compounding them with prepositions and

other prefixes, applied to the expression of the most various and
opposite ideas.
Nevertheless,

may

be elicited

theoretically,
five

* Compound verbs

from every root in the language

kinds of verbs.

The

first,

will be treated of in the chapter on

or primitive verb,

compound words.

;;

METHOD OF DERIVING VERBS FROM

60
is

formed from the

root, according to the nine different rules for

the

changes of the root, required by the

the

second,

or

causal,

change of the

ROOTS.

nine conjugations

formed according to the rule for the

is

required by the

root,

first

10th conjugation

The

change.

or passive,

third,

is

rative,

by the 4th conjugation, viz.

The fourth, or deside-

in the first four tenses.

formed by

is

the

addition

The

undergoing reduplication.

in

is,

or

of ish

fifth,

by

also

is

formed

like

the 4th conjugation,

a reduplicated passive verb.

fact,

root

the

s,

or intensive,

the passive, according to the rule required

and

may

It

also

formed analogously to the rule for the 3d conjugation.

take

the

shobhay,

1.

shine

See also

"to cause to

Of

shine" or "illuminate";
4.

";

3.

the causal,

the passive,

the desiderative, shushobhish, " to desire

very brightly."

shine

these five forms of verbs, the primitive, causal, and passive,

by the

the attention of the reader will

therefore,

divide itself into

will

of the

the formation

base

same

of these

what

1st,

best writers, and to these alone

now be

The

directed.

two heads.

In the

of primitive

2dly,

In the second place, the

3dly, of passive verbs.

asked,

2.

from

p. 19.

are the only three used

base

"to shine";

be

Thus,

of " shining "

idea

the intensive, sJioshuby, " to

5.

";

the

the primitive, shohh,

shubhy, " to be bright

to

conveying

root shubh,

this are elicited,

Guna

formed according to the rule

for the change of the root, required

the addition of

the

viz.

addition of ay to the root, the vowel of which has taken the

first place,

of causal

inflection of

the

may

be

But here

forms respectively.

subject,

it

the base ?

is

THE BASE OF THE VERB.

The base

of the verb

is

that changed form of the root to which

^the terminations are immediately affix ed,

intermediate
itse lf,

whic h

inflected

position
t he

noun.

and holds exactly that

between the root and the

inflected

verb

crude form holds between the root and the

This great peculiarity, therefore, cannot be too

often or too forcibly impressed upon the attention of the learner,

that, in

the

treatment of Sanscrit verbs, two perfectly distinct

subjects offer themselves for consideration

1st,

the formation of

REMARKS ON THE CONJUGATIONS.

the

base,

word s, an investigation

in other

or,

61

into the changes

_which the root undergoes before the terminations ar^

2dl y, the

affixed

of the base, or the union of the base with

infection

its

terminations^

The

first

of these two subjects of inquiry will be found to be

that in which consists

the

as

the difficulty of the subject

all

terminations

more systematically

to

as far

for,

no dead language conforms

are concerned,

one general scheme, than the one with

which we are concerned.

There a re ten rules or conjugations, according to which the

may be

bases of verbs

But in these we have already

formed.

noted a great peculiarity, and one which has

comparison between the

Of these ten conjugations, the

the

first

four tenses

viz.

Hence

imperative.

these

in a

nine have reference only to

first

the present,
are

much weight

a Greek and Sanscrit verb.

difficulties of

and

first preterite, potential,

called

conju gational

the

tenses.

After passing these four tenses the conjugational structure of the

_^1t1^<^

^'^

if

and in the formation of the bases of

remaining tenses

and are as
t l^ese

forgotten

ent.irf^ly

the six

r oots

all

conform to one general rule,

they belonged to one general conjugation

tenses are called non-conjugational

Hence

The tenth alone

retains

the conjugational structure of the base throu ghout all the tenses
of the verb
tives,

but as this conjugation has no reference to primi-

but to causals

only,

no

confusion

Of the

apparent incongistency.

about 130 follow the

the 1st conjugation,

from

can arise

this

2000 roots, about one half follow

4th,

and about

140 the

Of the remaining roots, not more th an 2 in common use

follow the 2d
not more than 5 follow the 3d not more than 6 the
7th
not more than 4 the 5th
n ot more than 1 the 8th not more
6th.

^_tliaiU:2

the 9th.

Primitive

verbs,

conjugations, will

they

fall

therefore,

which

constitute

be divided into two grand

the

classes,

according as

under one or other of these nine conjugations.

primitive verbs will be those of the

1st,

nine

first

Regular

4th, and 6th conjugations.

Irregular primitives those of the 2d, 3d, 5th, 7th, 8th, and 9th con-

The

contained

nearly

jugations.

first
all

class

the

we call
common

regular, because under

verbs

it

in the language

are
the

REMARKS ON THE CONJUGATIONS.

62

second irregular,
verbs in

comprehending only

as

causal verbs

All

or sixty useful

fifty

all.

fact, constitute

follow

the 10th conjugation, and, in point of

conjugation

this

for

primitive

those

all

verbs

which are said by grammarians to belong to the 10th conjugation,

may

be regarded as causal verbs.

All passive verbs are atmanepada verbs of the 4th conjugation.

The parasmaipada

of the 4th coHJugation

constituted of certain

is

primitive verbs, which have a neuter signification.

There seems no necessity

So that

causal.

it

for creating a tenth conjugation as distinct

would greatly simplify the

expunged altogether from the Grammar, and the addition of ay

sidered, in all cases, as the

mark

jugation, or in the

way of any

way

And

that

nu

is

other conjugational sign, for

the other tenses of the verb, not only in the

retained throughout.

And

of a causal vert.

the sign of a separate conjugation, in the

therefore

many

first four,

make

which are used only

it is

imply
It

mind

not

retained throughout

verbs

given

yet

signification,

ay

is

under the

in a transitive sense.

the subject less complex to consider that the affix

sign of the causal form, merely bearing in

is

the sign of the 5th con-

just as the desiderative ish

many

although there are

causal verbs

were

to the root con-

plain that ay

it is

10th conjugation, which have rather a transitive than a causal

there are also

irom the

subject, if this conjugation

It will

always the

is

that causal forms do ilot necessarily

causality.

may

also

be questioned whether there be any necessity for creating a 4th con-

jugation as distinct from the

passive;.

For

since

it is

found that either a neuter or

passive signification attaches to nearly all the verbs placed under the 4th conjugation,

and that passive verbs are identical with

its

atmanepada

inflection, it

with reason be suspected that the occasional assumption of a neuter

and a parasmaipada
rise to

that

inflection

by a

passive verb,

the creation of this conjugation.

many

And

and puryate, " he

conjugation.

is filled,"

So that

Grammarians only meant

to the root, is also the
signification;

"he

is

by the

that,

feet

bom," from the root jan;

from the root pri) are confounded with verbs of

seems not unlikely,

it

was the only cause which gave

this theory is supported

passive verbs (as,*for example, j%a/e,

may

signification

by making

this

this

4th conjugation,

to say that the passive

form of verbs, or the addition of y

may be used

to express a neuter or intransitive

form that

the only difference requisite to be

made between the two forms

being exactly that wliich might be expected to exist between them

viz. that

REGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS.

the other, the parasmaipada inflection.

the one should take the dtvianepada ;

At any
in

rate this fact is clear that the par. of the 4th conjugation is the

numerous

roots to yield a neuter signification

in the 4th conjugation as neuter verhs,

it arises,

which

For example, yuj,

other nine as transitive.

and that the dtm.

Hence

the form used to yield a passive sense.

is

63

So

push, "to nourish";

also,

form used

identical

many

that

with

roots appear

also appear in

some one of the

when used

in an active sense

" to join,"

conjugated either in the 7th conjugation, or in the causal

in the 4th.

is

when

kshubh, "to agitate";

in a neuter,

MsA, "tovex";

sidh, " to accomplish."

Sect.

I. REGULAR PRIMITIVES,
4th,

1st,

AND

OR VERBS OF THE
CONJUGATIONS.

6th

TERMINATIONS OF THE CONJUGATIONAL TENSES.

Present Tense.
PARASMAIPADA.

ATMANEPADA.
Dual

Dual

Plur.

ami

avah

amah

avahe

dmahe

asi

athah

atha

ase

ethe

adhwe

ati

atah

anti

ate

ete

ante

Sing.

Sing.

Plur.

First Preterite.

am

ava

ama

avahi

dmahi

ah

atam

ata

athah

ethdm

adhmam

at

atam

an

ata

etam

anta

Potential.

eyam

eva

ema

eya

evahi

emahi

eh

etam

eta

ethah

eyatham

edhwam

et

etam

eyuh

eta

eyatdm

eran

ani

ova

ama

atam

ata

atu

atam

antu

Imperaiive.
\

ai

dvahai

dmahai

aswa

etlijdm

adhmam

atam

etam

antdm

Obs., the
is

the

terminations read downward; thus, ami

la t pers.

sing.

asi the 2d sing.

ati the 3d.

REGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS.

64

FORMATION OF THE BASE OF THE CONJUGATIONAL TENSES OF

REGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS.
Obs., that

88.

it is

an universal rule in every conjugation that

augment a is prefixed to the base of the first pret. and that

when this is prefixed to bases beginning with the vowels i, u, and
ri, short or long, it blends with them into ai, au, ar (instead of
Thus the base ^3gf becomes in the first pret.
e, 0, ar, by r. 5.).

the

aichchham, and ridhno, ardhnot.

First Conjugation.

Guna

root be

If

a.

formation

the 1st

of

Thus, from

tense.

^nej^

hudh, " to

bho (bhavami, &c.,

From

lO.-i").

the

preterite

the

for

that the

From m, "to

r. lO.'j').

sarp

srip,

from

kalp

klrip,

is

formed

"to be,"

bhu,

lead," ne {nayami, &c.,

(p.

In the

2.'|-).

base will be that a

only difference in the

first

pre-

is

thus, abodh, abho, ane (abodham, &c., abhavam, &c., anayam,

In the potential and imperative the base

&c.).

same

as

in

is

no Guna of

do not change (pac/iami,

the

root

the

root

Obs.

a,

contain
will

the

long

roots like xf^ pack, " to cook,"

Nor does any change

&c.).

ends in two consonants

It

exactly

is

present {bodheyam, &c., bodhani, &c.).

the

Since there

b.

is,

know,"

From

the base wt^ bodh* (wt^lfk, hodhami, &c.).

fixed

rule

be substituted for the vowel of the root throughout every

person of every

r.

the

conjugation,

base in the conjugational tenses

of the

vowel,

not final

take place

" to blame

as, nind,

as, fiv,

":

nor

if

if

" to live."

be hereafter seen that this prohibition of

Guna

extends to the other tenses as well as to the conjugational.^

c.

Some

roots of the 1st conjugation

form their bases in the

a change peculiar to themselves, which change

tenses.

Thus, from ^?n

*^^>

is

from

sad, atm. "to

* Bopp has shewn that an analogous change takes

(j)vy

(e^iryov)

t Thus, nind
3d

is

becomes

in the

four tenses

"to stand," comes the base fiTO tishth {tishthdmi,

from JPT gam, 'Ho go," Tl^gachchh

the root

first

by

of course discarded in the other

S^-c);

from

sink," sid;

place in Greek.

Thus,

^evyco in the present.

2d

pret.

nininda;

pret. anindit ; in the causal, nindayuti.

in the 1st fut.

ninditd; in

tlie

65

CONJUGATIONAL TENSES.
Tnffhrd, "to smell," f^fj^jighr; from pa, "to drink,'>iw; and from

" to

see," the substituted base

gup,

" to protect "; gopdy.

g^ drish,

"qro pashy ; from yam, " to restrain," yachchh ; from

Fourth Conjugation.
89.

If

but the base

Thus,

from

The

from

iTTT

nrit, " to

from

dance," the base nrity.

From

following are anomalous changes.

hase,jiry;

" to

'Sf,

grow

{aW,"

'ij^ bhrashy

be bom," jay; from vyadh, par. "to pierce," mdhy.

formed the

old," is

"to sport," dlvyj from kram, "to go," krdmy

div,

"to whirl," bhrdmy; from "i^^bhransh, "to

*to

takes place,

formed by the simple addition of y to the root.

sidh, "to succeed,'' is formed the base sidhy

is

ftni

{sidhyami, &c.)

a.

Guna

a root be of the 4th conjugation, no

from bhram,

from Jan,

atra.

See the remarks, p. 62.T.

Sixth Conjugation.
90.

If

a root be of the 6th conjugation, the general rule

no change at
the

base.

all

Thus,

Some

a.

roots,

"to

^^;

ir.

As, from

mriy (f^^, &c.); from

scatter," kir {kirdmi,

b.

f^ dish,

Some insert a

"to throw,"

dhri,

also the base

is

d/ifi,

and a

final

as,

from

a or

" to shake," dhnv; from

is

atm. "to exist," dhriy ; from

ish,

changed
mri, atm.

eR Arl,

"to

<SfC.).

nasal ; as,

horn Up, "to anoint," limp

from much, " to

from

sich,

let go,"

the base munch (ntjifH, &c.);

"to sprinkle," sihch; from

Having thus explained the formation of the base

jugational tenses of the regular primitive,

it will

exhibit the irregularities presented in these

same

* Roots ending in consonants in the 6th

ri ;

that

" to point out " {dishami, &c.).

from ITS, "to ask," Tra[

and ri to riy ; and ri to

die,"

root kship,

also

however, take a change peculiar to themselves

"to wish," the base

to Mv,

the

So

{kshipami, &c.).

is,

takes place, and that the root stands also for

"air,

"to cut,"

in the con-

be necessary to
tenses by about

conj. generally contain either

and these vowels would have taken Giuia had the root

fallen

under the

j,

, or

1st.

IRREGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS.

66

common

fifty

roots

belonging to

we

9th conjugations, before

the

2d,

of the verb, the rules for the formation of which are

student,

Tlie

of

however,

and

3d, 5th, 7th, 8th,

proceed to the remaining six tenses

who

common

to

all.

wishes for a continuous survey

the tenses of the verb will pass over the next section, and

all

proceed at once to Sect.

III.

II. CERTAIN IRREGULAR PRIMITIVES, OR VERBS

OF THE 2d, 3d, 5th, 7th, 8th, AND 9th CONJUGATIONS.

Sect.

TERMINATIONS OF THE CONJUGATIONAL TENSES *

ATMANEPADA.

PAKASMAIPADA.
Present Tense.

mi p
si

vah

or shi p thah

ti

mah

vahe

mahe

tha

se or she

athe

dhwe

te

ate

ate

anti or ati

tah

First Preterite.

am P

va

ma

vahi

mahi

h P

tarn

ta

thah

atJiam

dhwam

tarn

an or uh

ta

atam

ata

yam

yava

yama

wahi

tmahi

yah

yatam yata

tthah

lyatJium

tdhwam

yat

yatam \yuh

ita

tyatam

Iran

Potential.

lya

||

Imperative.

ani

ofca

p ama p

ai

avahai

hi or dhi

tarn

ta

swa or shma atham

tarn

antu or atu

tarn

tu

atam

'

amahai p

dhwam
atam

Obs. The terminations read downwards; thus, mi

1st

pers.

sing.,

i*the

2d

sing.,

ti

is

the

The mark p

the 3d.

placed after certain terminations indicates that certain peculiar

changes, to be afterwards

explained, take

place in the

root before these terminations.

* This

irregular

scheme of terminations corresponds

given hy native Grammarians, as applicable to

all verbs.

to the technical

scheme

Let the reader compare

this

IRREGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS.

67

FORMATION OF THE BASE OF THE CONJUGATIONAL TENSES.

These irregular primitives cause the chief
conjugation

for they not only present

difficulty of Sanscrit

an ever-varying form of

base throughout the different persons

of each

require a scheme of terminations which

differs,

tant points from the regular scheme, and

more

but also

tense,

many impor-

in

especially in this,

that the terminations begin generally with consonants instead of

vowels.

above scheme resembles that of the

In this last respect the

and second

first

and

future, p. 73,

the other non-conjugational

all

tenses, p. 81.

Hence the combination

base with the

initial 5

of the

or

of the final consonants of a

terminations, and of those

of these

an acquaintance with

non-conjugational tenses, requires

the following rules.

Combination of final ch and

Final ch and

j,

blending with s into

with thah, vakthah

with

91.

before

ksh

and

th,

t,

with

j,

(r. 30. note)

si,

vakshi

s,

th,

t,

and

s.

are changed to

thus, vach with

the k

k,

ti,

vakti

moch with syami, mokshyami

much with ta, mukta tyaj with ta, tyakta ; with syami, tyakshyami.
But a final palatal is, in a few cases, changed to ^ sh before t, th
and /, th then become Z, ^: thus, marj with ti, Trff Hj^ with
:

thah, ve^x

?n^ with

ta,

WF;

with

irar

ta,

HBT-

Combination of final dh and bh, with

Final

a.

to d, the

this

>^

dh and

other

to

b,

>i;^

also bear in

mind

before

and both

with the reyular scheme at

him

bh,

p. 63,

and

and

th,

number of

th,

and

s.

are changed, the one

then become dh.

th

and observe how

that the total

t,

Thus,

essentially they differ.

verbs, primitive

Let

and derivative

(exclusive of Intensives and innumerable Nominals), that follow the regular scheme,

Would amount
irregular
if

to about eight thousand, whilst the total

scheme would hardly exceed two hundred

any general scheme

This

is

logical

is

to be

propounded

at all,

number

that follow this

he will then understand that

it

should rather be that at p. G3.

another proof that native Grammarians are altogether wanting in clear

arrangement of their subject.

i

RULES FOR THE COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS.

68

rundh with tah or thah becomes equally runddhah

Final dh and

h.

before

bh,

the other to p.

the root be d or

^ sh,

Final

c.

And

sye, lapsye.

before

initial

Combination of final

the

if

of

initial

sh,

with

sh, TT s,

"5

and

bodh with sye, bhotsye*

as,

th,

t,

changed to

is

th,

take the cerebral form \,\'- thus,

th,

the one

r. 13.),

becomes runatsi ; sedh

si

the aspirate, which has been rejected in the

b,

thrown back on the

final, is

are changed (by

*,

runadh with

Tlius,

with syami, setsyami ; labh with

t,

labh with

labdhahe (^OT^).

take,

to

(^sr.)

with

dh.

s,

sh

'^

and the

^;

te,

and

^^

with tMh, ^FH.

Similarly, final "^ sh,

d.

of

th,

t,

e.

Final

Thus,

^o '^^.

*A or

ti,

Irf?;

s,

are

before

sh,

becoming

sh

IrfW;

"^ith syami, iVWlPH-

/.

(r. 30.

Final

or

changed to ^

%^T.
^.

"q

note)

Final

Final

T^TTTT

before

^,

then become

begin with

coalesces with

the

^h

/A,

Thus, duh

(^) wdth

any other
or

th

-^Z;

(%^) with

leh

Similarly the final of

* There

is

0pe\/r,

//,

^,

by

Prof.

with

with

Thus, fs^ with

t,

f^

si,

</A/,

wdth

tasmi,

of the termination into

:

as,

But

then

n,

g^ with

and

tr^

ta,

and

MaA becomes

dagdhasmi.

but d or

ledhi (%fe);

ff%

and both

g,

with tah or

(^)

either

dhi,
rf^e,

is

th, awrf s.

changed to

is

letter

if

the

its final

rfA ;

and the

^ ^ with
;

with tasmi,

<)<itfi*(

before the termination dhi of the imperat.,

a very remarkable parallel to

noticed

^nfv

fi?///,

radical vowel, if short, is lengthened

future

Thus, chakas with

d.

with

and

dh.

equally diigdhah; dah

ta,

^ftj

si,

the s then

k,

before the termination dhi of the imperat.,

5,

Combination of final

root

with

thah, fS9X.

Similarly with dhwam, P^ i ^*

chakadhi or chakaddhi

th

f^ with

changed to

the dhi becoming fs dhi.

d,

requires the change

th,

and

before the termination dhi of the imperat., are

either dropped, or changed to

h.

thus,

and

before

with

Bopp.

tliis

in the

Greek

rpcipoo,

making

in the

CONJUGATIONAL TENSES.
becomes dugdhi

(^fru)

termination into dh

^ h

Final

i.

and

initial of the root

be d or

to

^^
g,

dhokshi ;

a into Tf

and

-^j

Thus, leh

ksh.

And

with syami, ^r^i^.

the

if

the aspirate which has been changed

thrown back on the

is

with the same

follows the analogy of final

*,

lekshi ;

si

f^ blends

which blends with

k,

becomes

with

final of

(^f^fe).

before

changed to

is

and the

69

Thus, doh (^t^ with

initial.

with syami, V^nft;

^I^

si,

with sam, ^rjsf.

Second Conjugation.
the

If

92.

be of the 2d conjugation, the base

root

by substituting the Guna vowel

those terminations only

vowel of the

for the

that are

marked with p

other terminations the original vowel

Thus, from
present,

iHd, " to

ved

ipidwah, &c.)

from

i,

" to

know,"

from

is

the

{vedmi, &c.),

from

du.

jagarti, jagritah, jagrathX

a.

Those roots of

all

"SHT,

of

the dual

and

(1st sing, emi, cf.

plur.

vid

dwesh and dwisJt^

eijxi

1st pi.

sing,

r. 7.).

and the 3d and 7th

this

the

retained.*

"to awake," ^a^ar and jagri (3d

cf.

^\.

base

dmish, " to hate," the bases

imah,

is

formed the base of the singular

go," the bases e and

</uev)

before

root

of the

formed

is

root, before

conj.

whose bases

end in consonants reject the terminations of the 2d and 3d pers.

sing. 1st

and

ad, " to

pret. (excepting

But the

f).

final

eat,"

of the base

which inserts a before h

is

changed analogously to

crudes of the 8th class in the nom. case (see

sing,

avedam,

avet,

avet.

Adwesham, adwet

p. 27. r. 45.).

&c.

(^tI^).

Thus,

They

also

take dhi for hi in the imperative.^

* Bopp has noticed a corresponding lengthening of the vowel of the root before
certain terminations in Greek.

t The
+

StSayftt, SiSofiev, ei/dt, i/uev.

Roots of more than one syllable,

all roots of
pres.,

and jdksh, " to

r.

91.

eat,"

e.

f.

and

shds^

" to rule," and

the 3d conjugation, necessarily reject the nasal of the 3d plur., of the

and imp.

paras.,

and take uh for an in the 3d plur. Ist pret.

m the 2d conj. optionally take

Cf.

other forms of the base of dwish are seen in

Bhi was

tih

Some

other roots

for rtw /'as, vid, dwish, pa, yd.

originally the only form.

Hence

in the

Vedas

^fy {kKvOi).

IRREGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS.

70

Roots like ad, "to eat"; pa, "to protect"; yd, "to go," having no

h.

substitute, do not

change at

par. "to be poor,"

makes

all

The

nantal

pdmi,

S^c.

marked

root stu, " to praise," and

terminations,* changing

makes suv

speak,"

makes

to

take Vriddhi before the conso-

u,

uv before the vowel terminations.

Hence, the

Similarly, su, atm.

"to bring

before the vowel terminations {svie, suvdte, suvate) ; "3 bru, " to

bravl before the consonantal

Hence, in the

terminations.

But daridrd,

&;c.).

|, p. 69.

some others in

three bases, stau, stu, stuv {stauti, stutah, stuvanti).

forth,"

ydmi,

before ati, uh, atu (3d peTS.'sing. dual, plur. daridrdtif

daridritah, daridrati), see note

c.

S;c.

base daridri before the consonantal terminations not

its

marked with p, and daridr

{admi,

Guna

P terminations, and biniv before

the vowel

par., the three bases, bravi, bru, bruv {bravlti, brutah,

bruvanti) ; and in the atm. the two bases bru, bruv {brute, bruvdte, bruvate).

Rud, "

d.

to weep," besides the usual

Guna

the consonantal terminations except y.

{roditi, ruditah, rudanti).

change, adds

2d

or th

to the root before all

rodi,

nidi,

rud

Similarly, but without Guna, the roots swap, " to sleep,"

Han, "to

shwas and an, "to hreathe," jaksh, "to eat."

before

Hence the three bases

ghn before

antu; andja before hi

anti, an,

kiU," makes

its

base ha

{hanti, hatah, ghnanti;

pers. \vap.jahi).

^ITO

e.

and

" to rule,"

makes

its

to

its final

^RTas, " to be," rejects

f.

the

>

and changes

y,

base f^p^ before

in the

2d and 3d

its initial a,

t,

th

(which then become

t,

th)

sing. 1st pret. {ashdt).

except in the 1st

pret.,

and except before

terminations of the other tenses.

^T?

" to milk," and f^JW

" to

lick,"

form their bases as seen

at

r.

91. h,

i.

Third Conjugation.
93.

the

If

a root be

of the 3d conjugation, the base is formed

reduplication of the

initial

a being the reduplicated vowel for

and in the

reduplicaticJn

being substituted
reduplication

Guna

*
with

root,

consonantal

for

or

terminations"

which begin with consonants.

ri,

and u for u

an unaspirated letter

the radical syllable

change, but only before the

By "the

a,

of the consonant,

an aspirated, and j for

for

of the

by

consonant and vowel of the root,

is

h.

Besides the

subjected to the

terminations, as in the 2d conj.

is

meant those terminations marked

CONJUGATIONAL TENSES.
Thus, from

bhri, " to

>

and bibhri (3d

hu, " to

juhwati,

r. 7.)

the

an

in the 3d

pi.

to fear," bibhe

conj. is

the nasal in the 3d

pi.

bibhritah, bibhrati, r. 7.)

two bases juho and juhu

from bM, "

The 3d

bibhyati).

formed the two bases bibhar

bear," are

sing. du. pi. bibharti,

sacrifice,"

71

and

{juhoti,

^,

the only one which invariably drops

of the pres. and imp. par.,

Before this uh

of the 1st pret.

making

"to give," in the par. drops the a before

and takes uh for

Guna

its

all

except the

base dad^ changeable to dat {daddti, dattah, dadati),

makes

Similarly, >|T, "to place,"

of the imperat.

juhutah,

bibht (bibheti, bibhitah,

from

a vowel, and dhe before hi; but dhat beforej,

th,

its

required.

is

terminations,

and de before the

base dadh before

v,

m,

hi

y, or

or s {dadhdti, dhattaJi, dadhati).

Fifth Conjugation.
If

94.

a root be of the 5th conjugation, the base

adding nu to the root, which

the

converted to the

Thus, from

terminations.

two bases chino and chinu*

roots

is

chi,

The

satisfy ";

and

instead

of

formed by

" to increase ";

may

be dropped before v

shaknuvanti).

shru,

1st conj.), substitutes

i^, "to

ending in consonants, add nuv

nu before the vowel terminations

" to

In

{chinoti, chinutah, chinwanti, r. 7.)

roots ap, "to obtain"; ^r^, "to be able";

^\(^

no before

"to gather," are formed the

ending in vowels, the u of nu

and m.

is

Guna

{shaknoti, shaknutah,

hear " (sometimes placed under the

^ shri for

the root

(^inftfiT, r. 21., ^J^TT. ^p^f^sr).

Roots ending in vowels reject the termination hi of the imperative

as, shrinu, "

do thou hear

";

but apnuhi, " do thou obtain."

Seventh Conjugation.
95.

If

a root be of the 7th conjugation, the base

is

formed by

in-

serting na between the vowel and final consonant^ of the root, before

* This change of nu
lengthening the

v,

as in

to no is supplied in the corresponding

J^evyvvfit,

levywiiev

SeiKw/u, SeiKw/xev.

t All the roots in this conjugation end in consonants.

Greek

affix

w, by

Bopp.

IRREGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS.

72
the

terminations, and n before

from

the other terminations.*

all

Thus,

"to divide," are formed the two bases bhinad and

bhid,

bhind, changeable to bhint {bhinatti, bhinttah^ bhindanti); from

rudh, " to restrain," runadh and rundht changeable to rund {runaddhi,

runddhah,

him ; from

rundhanti); from hins, "to injure,"

91. a.,

r.

bhuj, " to eat," bhunaj,

changeable to bhutvk

Similarly yuj, " to join."

(r. 91.).

Bhahj, " to break," rejects

its

Unas and

changeable to bhunak, and bhunj,

nasal before

na

is

Hence the bases bhanaj

inserted.

and bhanj (bhanakti, bhan-kiah, bhahjanti).

Eighth Conjugation.
in this conjugation is formed

The base

96.

to the

There are only ten roots in

common

not in

Guna

converted to the

root,

Moreover, these nine

use.

tanu,

from

will

extend "

terminations.

all

which are

end

have the same

and nu in the 5th conjugation.

tan, " to

this conjugation, nine of

therefore the addition of o and

addition of no

by the addition of u

o before the

(1st sing. pi. tanomi,

in

n,

effect as

and
the

Thus, tano and

tanumah,

cf. Tavvfii,

But the tenth root in this class is oR kri, "to do," by

the most common and useful root in the language.
This

ravufjLe^).

far

converts the conjugational affix u to the Guna a

p terminations, but also changes the radical vowel ri
Guna ar before these same terminations, and before the

root not

only

before the
to the

other terminations to ur {karoti, kurutah, kurvanti), and rejects the

conjugational u before

v,

m,

^ Ninth
97.

If a

t The
runddhah.

is

inserted in certain

617, Oiyyavco

final

kurmah).

Conjugation.

root be of the 9th conjugation, the base

Similarly, n

Xaii^avtiD

(ist plur.

Greek and Latin roots;

scid, scindo ; fid,Jindo ; tag,

of the base

may

tango ;

formed by

as, fxad, fxavOavoa

liq,

be dropped, bhintah;

is

Xa/3,

linquo, Sfc.

so,

also,

rundhah for

NON-CONJUGATIONAL TENSES.

73

adding na to the root before the p terminations, and nl before all

the others, excepting those beginning with vowels, where only n
is

Thus, from pu, " to purify," are formed the three bases

added.

puna, pum, and pun (punati, punitah, punanti).

some others ending

cut

^,

";

IT?",

" to

spread

"),

"to take," makes

"to know"; WRT>

This root, with

in long vowels (as, dhu, " to shake "; lu, " to

shortens

vowel in forming the base.

its

bases iT^T> Jl^l,

its

nft, in*^ {janati,

r^

(r.

21.*);

and

j^,

jamtah, jananti).

Roots ending in consonants substitute ana for mhi, the proper

termination

thou

";

Sect.

and

of the

2d pers. of the

^S^THj " eat thou,""

imperat.

from ^i^

As, araTO, "take

" to eat."

VERBS OF ALL CONJUGATIONS

THE NON-CONJUGATIONAL TENSES.

III. PRIMITIVE

IN

TERMINATIONS OF THE NON-CONJUGATlONAL TENSES.

ATMANEPADA.

PARASMAIPAUA.

Second Preterite.

ima

iva

itha or tha

athuh

atuh

uh

The

roots

w, ^, y

^,

ivahe

*ishe

athe

e'

ate

imahe
idhwe
ire

oR, >T,

IT,

reject the mitial i

from

these terminations.

First Future.

tasmi

tasrcah

tasmah

take

taswahe

tasmahe

tasi

tasthah

tastha

tase

tasuthe

tadhwe

ta

tarau

tar ah

ta

tarau

tarah

Second Future.

syami

syavah

syamah

sye

syavahe

syamahe

syasi

syathah

syatha

sxjase

syethe

syadhwe

syati

syatah

syanti

syate

syete

syante

Observe, that by reason of

r.

30.

(with note), the

most frequent form of the terminations of the second

future

* The

letter

is

shyami, &c.

S although compounded
.

Li

with the nasal docs^ot prevent the operation

SECOND PRETERITE.

74

FORMATION OF THE BASE OF THE NON-CONJUGATIONAL TENSES.

Second Preterite.

The

98.
is

the formation of the base of this tense

step in

first

the reduplication of the initial consonant of the root with its

vowel, or of the initial vowel

and

from budh, " to know," buhudh ;

tlie radical vowel takes Guna

thus,

the root end in a consonant,

if

before the terminations of the sing, par., but before

terminations reverts to
buhodh,

(bubodha,

bubtidh

bubudhathuh, &c., atm. bubudhe,

if

the other

all

hence, the two bases

dual

in a vowel,

sing, par.,

bubudhiva,
this

vowel

and Guna in the

2d,

the other terminations, both par. and atm., reverts

all

form

to its original

ninl {ninaya,

ninyathuh,

&c.)

and 3d

bubodha,

bubodhitha,

takes Vriddhi in the 1st

and before

form

original

its

r. 8.,

thus,

ninayitha

r.

or ninetha, ninaya,

10.

atm. ninye, &c.)

&c.,

" to lead," the bases ninai, nine,

from m,

so

from

also

chakar, chakar, chakri, (chakara, chakartha, dual chakriva)

ninyiva^
the bases

kri,
;

and from

dim, the bases dudhau, dudho, but in dual, plur. &c. dudhuv^ (dudhava,
r. 8.,

dudhavitha

r.

before

all

or dudhotha, diidhava, dudhuviva,

be,"" is

all

the scheme, that

times rejected in the 2d pers. sing.

rejected in those roots only in

bases krina, knnl, krln

* All Grammarians

but this

By

the sing. par.

assert that there is

roots ending in

to iy before these
:

we

(as

rule, krl,

"jfituftfr.,

rule, the i of the base is

But

r. 4.

or

&c., atm.

base babhuv

an

initial i is

may

some-

be optionally-

shall afterwards see)

"to buy," 9th conj,, makes

its

jjSlUlf'rt).

an optional change to Guna in the 1st

never found.

a special

following

change

is

(rfjllinfrf,

This

which

and according to the Scime

tion of r. 21.,

pers.,

its

the terminations of this tense begin with vowels.

indicated, however, in

is

anomalous, making

the terminations.

Observe, that
It

10.

Bhu, " to

dudlmce, &c.).

hence, from

\ All roots ending in

or

here changed to the semi-vowel instead of

of which the initial consonant

i,

same vowel terminations, that

f^ come

va

is

double,

before all excepting

the three bases shishrai, shishre, and shishriy.

m or m change u or u

excepting, of course, the roots '^,

is,

to

^,
^,
^,
N
o
s>

uv before these vowel terminations ;

in the persons

marked with

*.

'

SECOND PRETERITE.
necessarily rejected in the

it is

the

marked with *

is

75

futures.*

In the other persons

every root in the language,

retained in

except eight, viz. "c^, " to do "; >j, " to bear "; f^, " to hear "; ^, " to
Hence it happens
praise," jr, " to go," &c., all ending in vowels.

come

that consonants can never

sing, of this tense.

any

Its

formation, therefore,

There are certain

however, to be acquired, relative to the reduplication of an

rules,
initial

consonant with

vowel, and an initial

its

regard to the vowel belonging to the

plicated for a, a,

from

not attended with

is

consonantal combination.

of

difficulties

into coalition, except in the 2d pers.

da,

dadau ;

If

If

If

from
e.

t,

or e

from

for u,

redu-

or o

u,

as,

from pu, pupava.

sev, sisheva ;

kh, the

from

as,

tyaj,

ch

is

from

as,

kri,

from khan, chakhana (^^"R)h,

the reduplicated letter

a double consonant, the

tatyaja (iTWnT)

from

hri,

(i444||i) ;

from gam,

as,

_;* :

is

reduplicated

as,

kship, chikshepa (f^^tj).

consonant, the second

pasparsha

is

jahura (Iin).

only

first

with a double consonant, whose

sprish,

corresponding

its

bhid, bibheda (f^^).

reduplicated letter

from ghra, jaghrau (w^) ; from

second a hard

from

i,

reduplicated

with g, gh, or

If with

If

is

with k or

jogama ;
d.

for

a root begin with an aspirated consonant,

chakura (^mO
c.

f rom tri, tatara

unaspirated form
b.

n;

With

is

Rules for the Beduplication of an Initial Consonant.

99.

a.

or

ri,

consonant, a

initial

vowel,

first is

only

is

a sibilant and the

reduplicated

from skand, chaskanda

as,

(^y>^).

Reduplication of an Initial Vowel.

f. If

a root ending in a single consonant begin with

two similar vowels hlend

repeated, and the

and

as,

"to be"; apa from a and ap,r.

from u and ukh: but

* Thus, pacU,

t So in the Greek,
X

Grammarians

4.; the dual ishatuh

in the sing, of the last

" to cook," forbids

piipaktha or pechitha.

So also
rtOaiTTai

nl,

"

a,

i,

or u, tliose vowels are

Thus, nsa from a

into one long one.

two

in the future

cases,

from

and ish; vkhatuh

the radical

or u taking

therefore the 2d sing,

is

either

to lead," nivayitha or ninetha, as above,

from OairTu ;

assert that the shoi-t

is

Tre^nXi/Ka

from ^\ew.

optionally retained in the

first

person.

SECOND PRETERITE.

76
Guna, the reduplicated

becomes

begin with

the reduplicated syllable

ri,

The

dnardha, ofridh.

?t

root

and uv before o (uwkha).

iy before e (iyesha),

If a root ending in a double consonant begin

with

a, or,

an :

is

ending in a single consonant,

^TR^j 3d

thus,

in the sing, iydya, iyayitlui,

is

Anomalous Modes offorming

the

^c, dual

a.

Roots ending in a

1st

and 3d

b.

1st

Hence, the bases dad,

dual, dadiva, tasthiva, yayiva).

ri,

in accordance

and

2d

sing.,

the vowel

sing.,
ri

to ar in the

with

r.

change

98,

c.

dr in the

preceded by a double con-

is

the dual and plur. par., and consequently throughout the atm.
sing,

ri to

instead of retaining this vowel, change

ri,

tasthau,

and before the other terminations retain

changeable to r ; but roots in which ri

sonant, and most roots in long

H4^

yay (?[^ dadau,

tasth,

Similarly roots in ai, as gai (Jagau).

Roots ending in the vowel

and 8d

pret.

da, "to give"; sthd, "to stand"; yd, "to go," &c.)

the terminations, except tha, and substitute au for that of the

all

sing. par.

Tp^ yayau;

(as,

lyiva^ &;c.

Second Preterite.

There are many anomalous ways of forming the base of the 2d

drop the a before

^%

sing, of

sasmdra, sasmaritha, sasmcLra, dual sasmariva, &c.

atm. sasmare,

it

to

ar in

Thus, from smri,

<^c.

Roots beginning with any consonant, and ending with a single consonant, and

inclosing a short a, lengthen the

papdch; from

tyaj,

in the 1st

and 3d

sing.

as,

from pack, " to cook,"

"to quit," tatydj {tatydja, taiyajitha, tatydja, tatyajiva, Sfc).

Moreover, before itha sad in the dual and plur.

par.,

and

all

the persons of the atm.,

if

the initial as well as the final consonant of the root be single, the

e,

and, to compensate for this, the reduplication suppressed.

is

changed to

Thus, from pack come

the two bases ^aj^acA andpecA {papdcha, pechitha or papaktha,papdcha,pechiva; atm.

peche,S^c.);

out
d.

from

labh,

atm. " to obtain "

(cf. Ka/ji^ava,

eXa^ov), the base lebh through-

{lebhe, lebhishe, lebhe, lebhivahe, S^c.).*

Roots of this

last kind, that require

a substituted consonant in the reduplication,

are excepted from the rule (but not bhaj and phal).

ning with v are excepted.

So, also, certain roots begui-

These require that the reduplicated

syllable be u, or

the corresponding vowel of the semi-vowel, and change va of the root to

every termination, except those of the sing, par., the two

long one.

m's

before

then blending into one

Thus, from vadi, " to speak," come the two bases uvdch and uch (uvdcha^

Hchatuh, uchuh).

* The roots

A similar

trap,

rule

is

applied in yaj, " to sacrifice " {iydja, ijntvh, ijvh).

and grath, and shrath, and

iT,

"to pass" (tatdra, teratuh, tenth,

as if the root were tar), and bhram, swan, raj, rddh, bhrdj {bhreje, bhrejdte, bhrejire),

bhrdsh, and

vam may

follow this rule, although not answering the above conditions.

'

FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE.

e.

Gam, "to go"; han, "to

bom";

ghan); jan, "to be

kill" (which forms

its

77

2d pret. as

if

axidikhan, "to dig"; drop the medial

terminations except those of the sing. par.

Hence, from

the root were

a before

gam come

the

all

two bases

the

jagdm, jagm {jagdma,jagmatuh, jagmuh).

f.

xr^, " to siege," and

3J^

" to ask,"

make

their bases iPTr*?

and IPT?,

and ijtj^ (aPn^, "fl^'' '^*)

^'^' "^'^ sleep," makes *jtejn^ and
^, "to call," forms its base like roots in u (juhdva, juhuvatuh, Juhuvuh)
'

"to conquer," forms

g.

base as

if

pret. of

syllable,

Thus, from

do."

first

auxiliaries, as,

comes the base

100.

The

form their bases by adding

some one of the

^^

dm

to the root,

all roots

"to be"; bhn, "to become";

(^^flHl^, or

^^n^^,

with the
datri, "

by Bopp)

results

of the verb,

present tense

a giver " (declined

case with asmi and he,

we have

p. 37.),

efi

kri,

So

give."

also

"thou wilt give."

sing, of the

noun

is

and

ddtdsi

In the

plur. of the

as, " to

and atm. of the

ddtdse, "

am

its

"

"a

nom.

a giver,"

1st fut, " I

thou art a giver," or

plur. the

joined with the dual and plur. of the auxiliary.

1st future

in

is

omitted, and the 3d pers. sing, dual

both voices

is

then identical with

the nom. case sing, dual and plur. of the noun of agency.
data,

tt tri,

Thus,

be."

and combining

and 2d persons dual and

1st

In the 3d person the auxiliary

and

"to

or |^^|^chlO-

from the union

ddtasmi and datdhe, " I

identical with the 1st pers. sing. par.

will

of

The First and Second Future.

future (as noticed

V. 41.)

fsf,

and affixing the

of the nom. case of the noun of agency (formed with the affix

taking

fromgri (Jigdya,jigyatuh, ^-c).

Roots which begin with a vowel, long by nature or position,* and

more than one

2d

its

l|i|T3d

Wq

giver," or " he

will

give

";

ddtdrau, " two

Thus,

givers,"

or

they two will give," &c.

The second

future, in its terminations, stands in close relation-

ship with the present tense, the only difference being that sy

is

prefixed.

* Except
t

The

Latin

rtp,

"

to obtain,"

and roots having an

initial

a before two consonants,

future signification inherent in the noun of agency 4atu, seems implied iu

by the

relation oidator io daturus.

FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE.

78

The

invariable

future

tenses

the root

rule

Guna be

the

of the base of both

the formation

for

that

is,

substituted for the vowel of

thus, from^T, " to conquer," the base Je {jetasmi, jeshyami);

" to hear," the base shro (^liilPfH, ^sfVonfi?).
And the

from shru,

general rule, moreover,

the vowel

that

is,

from budh comes the base hodhi

to

common

occurrence

consonant with the

initial t

hundred

^tftnmftr

unfortunately, howsome of which are of

is

roots,

and the combination of the

and

Thus,

the manifest object of which

i,

prevent the coalition of consonants,

ever, forbidden in about one

very

(^tftnnftT bodhitasmi, &c.

This insertion of

bodhishyami, &c.).
is

root end in a consonant,

the

if

be inserted between the base and terminations.

radical

of the terminations, will require

an acquaintance with the rules already

laid

down

at p. 67.

When

these rules are acquired, there will be no difficulty in the formation

of

The only question

these tenses.

how

is,

distinguish between those roots which insert

are

we

to

and those which

i,

do not.^

The laws about

it

is

to be laid

down

will

determine this point, and

utmost importance that the attention of the student

of the

be directed towards them, as the assumption or rejection of this

inserted vowel is not confined to the two futures, but extends to

many

other parts of the verb

reject

i,

it

insomuch, that

if

the

first

future

as a necessary consequence, rejected in the third

is,

preterite, the atm. of the benedictive, the conditional, the infinitive

mood, the passive past

participle, the indeclinable past participle,

the future participle formed with the affix

agency formed with the

rejected

in

the

affix

and

tri ;

2d pers. sing, of the 2d

tavtfo,

is,

and the noun of

moreover, optionally

pret,,

and decides the

formation of the desiderative form of the root by s instead of

So that the

learner,

if

he know the

first future, will

ish.

pass on with

great ease to the formation of these other parts of the verb, and

For example,
should always look to this tense as his guide.
taking the root kship, " to throw," and finding the 1st fut. to be
ksheptasmi, he

knows that

i is

rejected.

Therefore he knows the

* Unless such substitution be forbidden according to

r.

88. a.

;:;;

AND SECOND FUTURE.

FIRST

the 3d pret. to be akshaipsam

2d future to be kshepsyami ;
atm. of the benedictive,

79

kshipsiya

the

the conditional, akshepsyam

the infinitive, ksheptum; the passive past participle, kshipta ; the

indeclinable part, ksheptwa ; the future part, ksheptavya

of agency, ksheptri

On

chiksheptha ; the desiderative, chikshipsami.

noun

the

other hand,

the

root yach, "to ask," and finding the 1st future to be

taking the

he knows that

yachitd,

the 2d pers. sing, of the 2d pret. optionally

and therefore the same parts

inserted,

i is

of the verb will be yachishyTimi, ayachisham, yachishtya, ayuchishyam,

yachitum,

yuchita,

yachitavya,

yachitma,

yayuchitha, yaya-

yachitri,

chishami, respectively.
It
it

evident that roots ending in vowels do not require

is

may

i,

and

be taken as a general rule that they do not insert

it

there are only a few exceptions, as follows

Boots ending in Vowels, inserting

101.

Obs,

In

2d future

the

following

the 3d pers. sing, of the 1st and

lists

given after each root.

is

a.

Roots ending in u

b.

Roots ending in

and in

as, bhu, " to

as,

n,*

TT/ri,

be

these, inserted i is optionally

rejecting

in the first

it

as,

"^

lengthened

Boots ending in Consonants, inserting

one

in n,

in

I,

in

two

j,

ten

in

s,

in bh, three

one

exceptions

in

^,

in the Primitive.

in m, five

e.

All roots in reject i;

f.

reject

All
i

and

common

t,

th, d, n,

in ch, four

in d, eight

t,

in

in dh, eleven

in

sh,

seven

twelve.

Boots ending in Vowels, rejecting

roots in

'.

(harishyami).

in k there is one exception

common

in p, twelve

nine

"^ sh,

insert i

V,

tarishyati)

{tarita, tarishyati).

All roots, without exception, ending in kh, g, gh,

d.

th, b, y, r,

chh,

{tarita,

in the 2d future, although

(karishyumi),

(hhavita, hhavishyati).

"to pass"

Roots ending in ri short insert

c.

in the Primitive.

in the Primitive.
all

common

shru (shrota, shroshyati)'-

all in ri

as,

da (data, dasyati):

as, je (jetd, jeshyati).

roots in

in the 1st future

u;

as,

as,

hri (hartu, harisliyati).

AND SECOND FUEURE.

FIRST

80

Boots ending in Consonants, rejecting

102.

Of

roots ending in

K, ^1^

pack {pakta, pakshyatih

J, tyaj {tyakta,
V^^

^^

(j^

(ffT,

srij

SO also bhanj, sanj

yuj

vyadh

r. 91. 6.),

(seddha,

sidh

yotsyate)

bhuj;
{atta,

so

sadh

khid

chhid,
r. 91. a.,

{saddha,

so rudh,

yakshyati)

r. 91.,

In D, ad

budh,* 4th conj.

setsyati),

yudh {yoddha,

b.y,

vy atsyati),

(vyaddha,

In

(yokta, yokshyati), so

In DH[> bandh {panddhd,

so nud.

much

prakshyati).

r. 91.,

Jn^ (marshta,* markshyati).

f^VtHPrt);

{totta, totsyati),

r. 91.

(prashta,

tap

so vap,

{tapta, tapsyati),

so lip

kshepsyati),

shop,

swap

ap

bhotsyate,

kshudh,

shudh.

In P,

{apta, apsyati),

lup (lopta, lopsyati)

^t^^ srip

so

satsyati),

{boddha,

krudh,

tud

bhantsyati,

In N, mari} {manta, mansyate), han {hanta, but hanishyati).

{kshepta,

CH.

In

r. 91.).

sekshyatt),

(sekta,

so pad, sad ; bhid {bhetta, bhetsyati),

atsyati),

radh;

1T3C^

sich

so hhaj ; yaj {yashta,

iyakshyati),

iiWfrt).

{shakta, shakshyati,

vach ;

CHH>

In

(mokta, mokshyati).

so

in the Primitive.

kship

{sarptd

or srapta,* sarpsyati or srapsyati), so trip^ drip^ klrip (kalpta,* kalp-

InBH)

syati).

gamishyati),

nam
In

Arraw.^

r. 91. .),
(sfitrr,

so dish

eshishyati),

51

SH,

1^

c?aw;jA

^ SH,

Irs^rfff),

^^rfir),

sah

nadfi),

gah

r. 91. I.),

r. 91. .);

vah

AH

^a;/

ram

(ranta,

6.),

but

{ganta,

ransyate),

mrish

sprish,

so shlish, pish;

krush

ish {eshta,'^

dush

(^tffT,

but

fflvsjjfrt);

or karshta, krakshyati or kark-

? H, dah

In

('^teT, r. 91. ^.,

(dagdkd,

r. 91. h.,

a being changed

nah {naddha,

natsyati, as if

to

0,

from

(^TTT J tna^rl), lih (^5^, ^S^rfw), dih {degdha, dhekshyati,

snekshyatt), ruh (tlTT,

'ft'VT, ft??rfir), c?mA {dogdhJa,

certain

and the 3d

M,

(tashta,'^ taksyati),

(^fter,^ blrt sahishyate),

snih {snegdha,

instead of the

^[^TfiOj so

taksh

krish (krashta

In

^^^rfir), vish (^ff\, r. 91. c, ^^JiPh.

In S, vas (vasta, vatsyati).

dhakshyati,

(^,

<f;7.sA ('^irr

dwish (^Wl,

so push, shush, tush

shyati).

lapsyate, cf. \r]-^eTai, v. 91.

so ya/

{nanta, nansyati),

In

^I'^rfir).

* In

r. 91, a.,

Zw6A (jobdhai^ but lobhishyati).

so ra^A;

so.

labh (labdha,

roots

Guna ar

pret.

?T9T^

these roots

dhokshyati), druhr

containing the vowel

or Vriddhi ar.

r,

('5^ or

optionally take

muJi

(j?JT!

or

^ftrtlT. iftSjlfriX

the vowel passes into ra and r,

Thus, the

1st future of srij is ^fFT for ^'Ij

for <4im%|.

may

^^f^rfir).

in the futures.

THIRD PRETERITE.

81

THIRD PRETERITE TENSE.

TERMINATIONS OF THE THIRD PRETERITE.

FoRM

PAEASMAIPADA

I.

ATMANEPADA.

Terminations of Verbs inserting

isham

ishwa

ishma

Ih

ishtam

It

ishtdm

ishta

ishthdh

ishdthdm idhwam or idhwam

ishuh

ishta

iqhdtdm

swa

slh

stam or tam sta or

sit

stdm or tdm snh

sma

i.

swahi

si

ta

ishata

II.

Terminations of Verbs rejecting

sam

By

ishmahi

ishwahi

Form

Obs.

i.

ishi

sthdh or thdh sdthdm

sdtdm

sta or ta

smahi

dhwam

or

dhwam

sata

reason of r.30. (with note) the initial sibilant almost always

takes the cerebral form sh.

Form

III.

Terminations corresponding

to the

First Preterite.

am

dva

dma

e or

ah

atam

ata

athdh

ethdm or atham adhwam

at

atdm

an

ata

etdm or atam

dmahi

dvahi

anta

103. Formation of the Base of the Third Preterite.

This complex and "multiform"

whole Sanscrit verb,

more

is

not so

much

tense, the

most troublesome and

one tense, as an aggregation of several tenses,

or less allied to each other, all bearing a manifest resemblance to the

preterite,

tlie

all

first

hut none of them exactly assignable to that tense, and none of them so

distinct in its character or so tmiversal in its application as to

from

intricate in the

general group, under any separate

title

admit of segregation

of its own.

Fortunately for the study of Sanscrit, the third preterite very rarely occurs in the
earlier

and better specimens of Hindu composition

and the student who contents

himself with the Ramayana, Mahabharata, Hitopadesha, and

avoids the grammatical

Poem

Laws

of Manu, and

of Bhatti, and the extravagant writings of

more

modem authors, will lose nothing by an almost total ignorapce of this tense, or, at
least, may satisfy liimself with a very cursory survey of its character and functions.

;.

THIRD PRETERITE.

82

All the varieties of this tense are reducible to three distinct forms, adapted to the

The

three schemes of terminations given in the table above.

which belongs

to those roots

jugational tenses

which

insert

most nearly approximates to the

roots,

whose bases in the^r*;

In
is

all

vowel

the prefixing of the

and the

third,

which

some important variation from the root

pret. present

sA,

"ff

sh,

or

^ h, which have

t,

u, or ri

and, in the third, to causals, or verbs of the 10th conjugation.

the modifications of this tense, the

with the

that

is

1st pret., belongs, in the first place, to certain

in the second, to certain roots ending in

for their radical

form

before the terminations of the non-con-

the second belongs to those which reject

first

augment

But

first preterite.

step in the formation of the base

first

a further indication of

a,

its

community of character

besides this there are changes of the base peculiar to

each form.

Form
In the

o.

par.

first

come the two

apavishi,

therefore very

bases

in the atm.

Very few

88. Z0

few follow

this form.

thus, from pu, " to puS^c.

^nrfVf^

r. 8.,

Guna

is

required in both par. and atm.

insert

i,

follow this form.

A medial a is sometimes lengthened; as, from vad, avdd {avddisTiam,

A few roots in a,
and ai, with three in m, viz. yam, ram, nam,

c.

d.

<SfC.).

insert s

e, o,

before the terminations of this form, the final e,

from yd, ayds {aydsisham,,

{ayansisham,

<Sfc.).

4fc.)

The

greater

number

Observe that the

from

o,

so, asSLs

and ai, being changed

{asdsisham,

In the atm. they follow form

Form
e.

t,

may often

th.

f. If a root
kri,

when

follow this form.

be rejected from those terminations in which

This takes place when the base ends in any consonant

dhwam

(jS)

(yg^3(!^

takes

the base ends in any other vowel than a.

end in either a consonant or a vowel, Vriddhi takes place in the

akur

Thus,

2. {ayasi, &;c., aransi, S^-c).

except a nasal or a semi-vowel, or in any short vowel; and

the place of dhwam

to a.

from yam, ayans

(Sfc.) ;

Formation of the Base.

2.

of roots rejecting

initial s

compounded with

from

and

i,

Thus, from hudh, abodh ('^T^Hv^ ahodhisham, S^c, ^^tftff^ ahodhishi, S^c. )

Almost aU roots ending in consonants, which

it is

roots ending in vowels take the inserted

If a root end in a single consonant,

h.

by the Guna

apau and apo (^mfcfi) apdvisham,

lO.T).

r.

(Sfc,

Formation of the Base.

a root end in a vowel, the base must be formed in the

if

by the Vriddhi change, and

rify,"

(r.

form,

1.

akdrsham, S^c), from yiy, ayauj

dual ayaukshwa, ayauktam,

Sfc.)

(^Hmf

par.

as,

ayauksham, S^c,

from rudh {arautsam, ^c, dual arautswa.

THIRD PRETERITE.

83

arauddham, T.dl.a.b.); from dah (adhaksham, ^c, dual adhakshwa, adagdham,

91. h.

I.

.).

But

g.

from

in the atm. if a root end in

unchanged;

is

ayukthdh^

as,

<SfC.)

from

kri, akri {akrishi,

from rudh^ arudh

Form

{arutsi,

3.*

or

ri,

ri,

minations directly to the root

takes place ;

as,

akrithdh, S^c); from yuj, ayuj (ayukshi,

arnddhah, aniddha,

9\. a.b.).

r.

Formation of the Base.

1st pret., as in all cases

with the

the 1st pret. presents

some

from gam, agam {agamam^

8^c.)

from bhid,

confusion can arise from this apparent identity

where these terminations are used

form of its base

difference in the

for the

3d

pret.,

as in agnchchham,

So again, the sixth conjugation, which alone can ever shew a perfect

abhinadam.

and base, never makes use of

identity of root

some

thus,

And no

abhid (^rf>T^ abhidam, S^c).

special rule the base of its 1st pret. is

"to smear"

(cf. a\ei((>oo),

which

form

this

made

alipam in the 3d

is

for its

3d

pret., imless

to differ from the root.

make use

by

Thus,

alimpam in the

pret., is

Certain roots ending in long vowels, as da, "to give,"t

i.

Guna

any consonant, then the vowel

Roots of any conjugation, making use of this form, in general attach the ter-

h.

Z/>,

any other vowel than

S^c); and if in

(i|-^ptl acheshi,

ache

chi,

first.

of the termi-

nations of this form, but reject the initial vowel throughout {addm, addh, addt
dual,

addva; 3d

pi.

aduh; atm.

adishi, S^c,

form

the Ist sing, and 3d plur. (^WT^ abhuvam, abhnh,

abhavishi,
j.

The

form

S^c.

cf. exjTTTov).

k.

3d

make

the 1st pret.,

Certain roots ending in

'JT

"to be," except in

this

form

shas, ashish; nash, anesh,

a medial

i,

u,

scheme ; but whenever confusion

(cf.

asthdm, asthds, asthdt with

two forms are more or

t Bopp remarks that the

to its 3d preterite

or

is

less

analogous to the 1st

ri,

form their

likely to arise

1st pret. of this root

addm, that

eSiSoov

does to

e8u>v.

adaddm

^otj/v, ernj?, lor*;),

Cf. also abhavah

and abhuh with

e(pve^

and

bea,rs

the same relation

So also the relation of adJidm

edrjv

to

and follow form

2.

ertOijv.

e^u?.

Roots like dd, in the atm., change the radical a to

adishi^ adithdh, adita, adishwahi, S^c.

and

aorist.

(3d pret. of dhd) to adadfidm (1st pret.) corresponds to that of

but, in contra-

noticed that this form of the 3d pret. corresponds very clearly with

the 2d aorist of the Greek

that the

foUow

sA, "^ sh, "S A, inclosing

pret. according to tliis third

first

bhii,

3d plur. ahhuvan ; in the atm.

their bases avoch, apapt {avocham, apaptam,

makes asth;

As, "to throw,"

* Bopp has

2.).

roots vach, " to speak," and pat, " to fall,"

distinction to

So

2.t).

S^c.

i,

thus,

BENEDICTIVE.

84
between the

1st

and 3d

preterites, the base

root, the final of the root being at the

Thus from
cf.

f^

dish,

eSetfa, 1st pret.

CONDITIONAL.

"

is

to point out,"

S^c),

for

e,

(r.

91.

to the

e.).

adisham); from dwish^ "to haXe" adwiksh {adwiksham,

S^c, r. 91.

i.).

But

Sfc.)

this class of roots

the termination of the 1st pers. sing. atm. (adikshi, adikshathdh,

and atham, atom,

make

Causal verbs

to

comes the base adiksh (^srf^^ adiksham,&;c.,

from duh, "to milk," adhuksh {adhuksham,

substitutes

formed by the addition of sh

same time changed

for ethdm, etam, in the

2d and 3d dual {adikshathdrn).*

use of the terminations of this form, but the base assumes

a very peculiar reduplication (analogous to the Greek pluperfect), to be afterwards

Thus, from budh, abubudh {abubudham^

explained.

<^c.).

BENEDICTIVE AND CONDITIONAL TENSES.

TERMINATIONS.
Benedictive.

ATMANEPADA.

PARASMAIPADA.

ya^am yaswa

ydsma

siya

slvahi

simaJii

yah

ydstam yasta

sishthdh

siydsthdm

yat

ydstdm ydsuh

sishta

slydstdm

sidhwam (dhwam)
'

siran

Conditional.

syam

sydva

sydma

sye

sydvahi

sydmahi

syah

syatam

syata

syathdh

syethdm

syadhwam

syat

syatdm syan

syata

syetdm

syanta

Obs.

The

initial

tenses, almost

sibilant, in

the terminations of both these

always takes the cerebral form

sh.

Formation of the Base of the Benedictive or Precative.

104. In forming the base of this tense the parasmaipada never admits inserted

but those roots which take inserted

in the futures (see p. 79-

take

it

i,

also in the

atnianepada of this tense; as from hhu, "to be," the two bases bhu and bhavi
(>T^ITO

bhuydsam,

(Sjc,

wfclM)^ bhavishlya,

<SfC.).

A few roots of this kind optionally follow form

'sif^ftl, ^^fter:,

^Q5fe

&c.,

and

^f

2.

in the atm.

as,

f^j?

^raft|, ^i|nn:, ^sf^nj, &c.,

r.

may be
91. a.

?.

CONDITIONAL.

BENEDICTIVE.
a. If

a root end in a, this vowel

deyasam,
b.

S^c.\

If in

c.

from

oC,

ri,

^ and

f^ and

As

ar in the par.

^ (^ijlii,

from da, de (^Tn#

to

as,

Guna

from cAi,

chi ;

from hu,

in the atm. {cheshlya,

<M||^).

^ (f^irn^,

^ri, this vowel

is

{starydsam, starishlya from

changed to ir,in both voices

but before inserted

If in a consonant, there is

in the atm. to

no change in the

unless the root take the inserted

z,

when Guna

bases budh and bodhi {budhydsam, bodhishlya)

But

ydsam^ dwikshiya).

(r.

grdh, grihydsam,

from vdch, uchydsam,

thus,

par.,
is

as,

from

stri).

the base

iftT.

ar (tarishiya or tarishlya).

and no change in the atm.,

required

as,

from budh the

from dwish, the base dwish (dwish-

in the par. certain roots undergo changes analogous to

those in the 2d pret.

8(C.

After a double consonant ri becomes

cpfhl).

also before inserted

{tirydsam, tlrshiyd)
e.

as,

this vowel is changed to ft.ri in the par., but retained in the atm.

the bases

d. If in

to e in the par.

huydsam, ^e.\ and changed

<SfC.,

Similarly

If in

changed

85

but not in the atm. (^I'fO^ ddsiya, S^c).

or m, these vowels are lengthened in the par.

hu {chiydsam,
hoshlya).

is

INFINITIVE.

99. d.f.)

and in the passive

^c;

(r.

112. d.f.).

supydsam

from, swap,

Thus, from
;

from yaj,

ijydsam, ^c.

be remarked of this tense, that the changes of the base before the y of the

It is to

par. terminations are analogous to those before the

passive verbs

(r.

y which

those of the potential of irregular primitives (p. 66.)

in

most cases a

sibilant,

is

the sign of neuter and

Observe, moreover, that the terminations resemble

89. 112.).

and in some, two

the only difference being, that

sibilants, are either prefixed or inserted.

Formation of the Base of the Conditional.

106. This tense, in its formation, lies half

the second future.

base,

and in the

inserting

part of

It

latter part of its terminations

in exactly those roots in

its

from

it

first preterite

and

resembles the second future in

which the future

kship, the base akshep

inserts

i,

and in the

first

(41^1^1 akshepsyam,

S[c.).

INFINITIVE MOOD.

Termination turn

(cf.

the Latin supine).

Formation of
106.

the

Thus, from budh comes the base abodhi (^T^Vftp't

terminations.

abodhishyam, ^c.)

way between

resembles the 1st pret. in prefixing the augment a to the

tJie

base.

The base of the infinitive is identical with the base of the

Thus
where one inserts i, the other does also.

first future, .and

from budh, bodhi ('Ttf^ bodhitum) from kship, kshep (^ ksJieptum).

Moreover, all the rules for the change of the final consonant of a
;

root before the

of the future terminations apply equally before

CAUSAL VERBS.

86
the

um

Hence, by substituting

of the infinitive.

the 3d pers. sing, of the 1st future, the infinitive

See

for the final a of

once obtained.

is at

Thus, tyakta, tyaktwm; prashKi, prashtum (j[^

sodhum Niti), &c. &c.
p. 80.

CAUSALS, OR VERBS OF THE

Every root

107.

form of the

useful

and, moreover,

may be

root, that

or active sense to a primitive

bodhati, " he knows,"

CONJUGATION.

10th

may, in theory, take what

in the language

form

called a causal

sodhd,

practically, this is a

is

most

used to give either a causal

Thus

verb.

becomes in the causal

the

primitive

verb

bodhayati, "

^t^fJjfir

he

causes to know," or " informs "; and the primitive kshubhyati, " he
is

shaken," becomes kshobhayati, " he shakes."

may

This form,

also,

sometimes give the sense of allowing or permitting, as

harayati, " he allows to take "

nashayati, " he suffers to perish."

The Terminations

the conjugational tenses, are precisely those of

These, in

u.

of Causals.

regular primitive verbs,

Of

p. 63.

the non-conjugational tenses,

the second preterite necessarily conforms to the general scheme

in

its

terminations,

inasmuch as the

tense

from

results

itself

the annexation of the 2d preterite of some one of the auxiliaries

bhu or

as,

two

a particular form

kri, to

futures, the benedictive

precisely

and

scheme.

they are those of the third form

Formation cf
b.

The

first

step

of ay to the root
tenses,

in the

and

this

causal base.

In the

the terminations are

conditional,

of the general

those

of the

In the third preterite

(p. 81.).

the

Base of Causals.

formation of the base

affix

is

is

the addition

retained throughout

conjugational and non-conjugational,

all

the

excepting only

the

third preterite, and excepting the benedictive par.

Conjugational Tenses.
c.

nai,

If

a root end in a vowel, Vriddhi

forming, with the

affix ay,

is

required

the base nJayay,

r. 8.

as,

from

nl,

(pres. (ji^^ifH

CAUSAL VERBS.
nayayami, &c.
( ciiK^jlfa

anayayam, &c.)

from

the base karay

kri,

karayami, &e.).

Anomalies.

d.

1st pret.

87

Roots in a or in

insert p, or sometimes

y,

e, ai.

base ddpay ; from pa, "to drink,"

serve," inserts

" to smUe ";

chi,

changeable to a, cannot take Vriddhi, but

between the root and the

pay ay ; from Awe, hwdyay.

The

{pdlaydmi, ^c).

Thus, from da, the

affix ay.

roots

"to go";

i,

Ji,

But jm, "to

pre-

"to conquer"; smi,

" to collect "; and bhL " to fear "; form their bases, dpoy ;* jdpay ;

smdpay ; chdpay or chapay ; bhdpay,a,tm., or

Hri,

bhlshay, atm., respectively.

" to be ashamed," and n, " to go," take Guna, and form their bases hrepay and

arpay.

e.

a root end in a consonant and contain the vowel

If

generally lengthened

is

but not always

as,

from pack, pachay (ifM^lfH

from gam, gamajp

as

a, this
,

&c.)

If it contain

(jlH^lf^* &c.).

any other vowel, Guna takes place (unless as prohibited, r.

from srip, sarpay.
thus, from budh, bodhay {bodlmyami, &c.)

88. 6.):

f.

Anomalies. iiwA, "to grow," forms ropay ; dush, "to

" to kill,"

sphdy

^M toy /

pollute,"

dushay ; hdn,

shad^ "to perish," shdtay ; sp/mr (ipBt.), " to quiver," spAaroy ;

(^^q^'q), " to increase,"

sphdvay.

Non-conjugational Tenses.

The changes
conjugational

of the

tenses

root requisite to form the base

are continued in

all

of the

of these, the ay only

being rejected in the 3d pret. and in the benedictive parasmai.

Second Preterite of Causals.
108.

adding
this

or

The second

am

preterite

formed (according to

to the base of the conjugational tenses,

the second preterite of

kri

is

from badh,

thus,

some one
bodhayam

r. 99.

g^ by

and affixing to

of the auxiliaries as, bhu

{^^*^\^.\^

bodhayumma or

bodhayambabhuva^ or bodhayanchakara).

* Thus, from
read " or

ajdhi,

"to go over" or "read," comes adhydpayati, "he causes to

" teaches."

t Few roots in m lengthen the a. Some, however, optionally do so.

\ It may be questioned whether hhu is ever found added to causals.

88

CAUSAL VERBS.
The First and Second Future
In these tenses the inserted

the

invariably assumed between

i is

formed in the conjugational

as

base,

of Causals.

tenses,

and the usual

Thus, from budh, bodhayi {bodhayitasmi, &c.

terminations.

bodha-

yishyami, &c.).
The Third

Preterite

of Causals.

109. In the formation of the base of this tense, the affix ay

may

other change that

of/) or y, is preserved.

reduplication the

The

augment a

(caus. bases of budh,

is

rejected; but

any

take place in the conjugational tenses, such as the insertion

base
is

a reduplicated form of this change, and to this

is

prefixed.

Thus, taking the bases hodhay and Jdpay

"to know," and ji, "to conquer"), and rejecting ay, we have

bodh and jap ; and from these are formed the bases of the 3d pret, atmbudh and

('SR^ ahuhudham,

ajijap

The

^c, ^Tiftwi ajljapam, ^c,

rule for this reduplication

as follows:

is

The

the Greek pluperfect).

cf.

initial

consonant of the root,

with its vowel, are reduplicated, and the reduplicated consonant follows the rules
given at

r.

99.

but the reduplication of the vowel

peculiar.

is

Rules for the Reduplication of the Vowel of the Initial Consonant.

Causal bases, after rejecting ay, will end either in ay, dv, dr, or a consonant pre-

ceded by
o,"is

a, a, e, o, or ar.

But u

i.

is

reduplicated vowel

The

usual reduplicated vowel for

reduplicated for
is

made

long,

o,

and to compensate

be Guna, changed to

causal base shortened, or,

if it

the causal base nay (from

n^, rejecting

{aninayam, ^c.)

and sometimes

all

these vowels except

also for dv.

In general, this

for this, the long

its

vowel of the

cognate short vowel.

Thus,

ay) makes the base of the 3d pret. aninay

the causal base bhav (from bhu) makes abibhav; the causal base

kdr (from An), achlkor / gam (from gam), ajigam ; pdch (from pach), apipach ; pdl
(from pd\ apipal ; ved (from vid), avivid ; vart (from
(from budh), abubudh; and sdv (from *), asushav.

vowel

made

is

But bodh

vrit), avlvrit.

Sometimes the reduplicated

only long by position before two consonants, the radical vowel being

short

as, shrdv (from shru)

bhrdj^ abibhrqj.

still

makes ashushrav ; drdv (from dru), adudrav ;

Sometimes the reduplicated vowel remains

short, whilst the

vowel

of the causal base, which must be long either by nature or position, remains

unchanged.

Thus, the causal base

chint ; kalp, achikalp.

makes

Jw

In such cases a

(iiova jw)

may

may make

alalaksh ; ydch, ayaydch ; vart (from vrit) avavart,

The

ajijlv ;

be reduplicated for a or

chint^achi-

d;

as,

laksh

^j-c.t

following bases of the 3d preterite are formed anomalously from causal

PASSIVE VERBS.

89

Rulesfor the Reduplication of an Initial Vowel.

If a root tegin with a vowel this vowel

is

the augment a according to the rule, p. 64.

consonant, with the vowel
coalescing,

and the

[dchiksham,

<^c.)

i,

final consonant.

Thus

the root aksh

id\^),

dp^ dpip ;

arh, drjih ;

but the reduplicated form of the

final

between the augment and vowel thus

inserted

is

not reduplicated, only coalescing with

makes achiksh

p. 75. b.

aidid; uh, aujih; ridh, drdidh.

The Benedictive and Conditional of Causals.

The

110.
tenses

ay

base of these tenses does not diifer from that of the non-conjugational
retained,

is

and after

it

the inserted

the benedictive paras., where both ay and

invariably assumed

Thus, from

are rejected.

excepting in

budli,

the bases

bodh, bodhayi, ahodhayi (bodhydsam^ ^c. ; bodhayishiya^ ^c. ; uhodhayishyam^

^'^)-

PASSIVE VERBS.
Every root

a form, however,

construction
all

used, except

little

of the present

plural

take a passive form.

common

It is

the 3d person sing, and

in

and imperative

exceedingly

is

may

the language

in

although a passive

for

in Sanscrit syntax, yet almost

the tenses of the passive verb are expressed by participles.

Our reasons
from

for denominating the

root rather than a

the

passive a distinct derivative

voice

of the

primitive,

and for

considering that the 4th conjugation of primitives results from

by

the occasional assumption of a parasmaipada form*

this passive

verb, have been already given^ (see pp. 58. 62.).

111. Passive verbs are conjugated with the regular atmanepada

bases, apiyy

from pdy {pd, "to drink");

adhyajigap from adhydp

(i,

atishthip

" to go," with adhi)

from /Aap

ajighrip

(*<Aa,

"to stand");

from ghrdp.

* The 4th conjugation can hardly be said to possess an iitmanepada ; or

then

its

atmanepada

is

identical with the passive.

And

it

seema probable that

if so,

tliose

atmanepada verbs, suchasjoarf, "to go," and budh^ "to know,'' which are placed
under the 4th conjugation, are in reality passive verbs; at any
for their

rate, the

forms given

3d preterites {apddi, abodhi) can only bolong to passives.

t That the passive does occasionally take the terminations of the parasmaipada
is

corroborated

Nal. xiv.

fi. ;

by Bopp, who

gives several instances;

as, chhidyet for chhidyeta.

mokshyasi for mokshyase, " thou shalt be liberated."

may be found

in

Westergaard

as, vidyati for vidyate.

Other instances

PASSIVE VERBS.

90
inflections

that

scheme

the

in

is,

the

conjugational tenses they conform to

the atm. at

for

and in the non-conjugational

p. 63.,

tenses to the general schemes at

p. 73., p. 81.,

In the third preterite they take the

according as
require

the

may

p. 84.

two forms

admit the inserted

(p. 81.),

or not

but

the 3d pers. sing, of both forms, the termination

that, in

be invariably

root

and

first

{\) in place of ishta

and

sta.

Conjugational Tenses.

In the formation of these the passive verb

112.

like a regular primitive of the 4th conjugation

made

the only change

this

vowel

final

may

are changed to

or

^Ma)

so also dha, pa, stha,

a. If in i

or

are lengthened

(faiUfi)

but

(okI^^i),

ri,

the base

dtt/

stabhy

/.

from

this

&c.).

vowel becomes

ir

from sanj

or

nasal

from

div, divy.

from ^, the base kriy

as from
smri, smary.

from

kn, " to scatter,"

From

may

tan,

^inr

from stambh,

comes f^p^

(p. 70. c).

from jan, jay or jany

(^ll^f)

or IT^)-

come the bases

tichy,

udy, upy,

vach, vad, vap, vas, swap,

from grah, prachh, and vyadh, the bases grihy

prichhy, vidhy : from yaj, hwe, ve, come ijy, huy, uy.
ushy, supy

Non-conjugational Tenses.

The base
that of

all

p. 74., will

of this tense

primitive

in

verbs.

serve equally

w^ell

Second

&c.),

Preterite of Passives.

the passive verb

The

(ij^i)

is

identical

bases, therefore, as

with

formed at

for the 2d preterite of the passive,

provided only that they be restricted to the atmanepada

The First and Second Future

113.

a nasal,

optionally reject the final nasal, but

as,

first is

from bandh, badhy ;

as,

(^T^), sajy.

then lengthened

From

these vowels

u,

But from pn, pury.

Jan, khan, and

is

e,

(3d sing.

as,

as,

huy

hu,

ri

ft.

two consonants precede

usually reject the

the a

from ji, jiy

final a,

so also gai, " to sing,"" {giy).

M, ma ;

Roots ending in two consonants, of which the

d.

e.

da,

or a semi-vowel preceded by
as,

ar, if

If in

ktry

u,

from

as,

^ri, this vowel becomes

If in

b.

c.

t:

take place, some

conj.

of which are analogous to those of the 4th

at,

in general

is,

^; but before

in the root is the affixing of

changes of a

certain

affix

that

be treated

is to

inflection.

of Passives.

In these and the remaining tenses no variation can occur

PASSIVE VERBS.

91

from the bases of the same tenses in the primitive, unless the
In that case the insertion of

root end in a vowel.

may

take

place in the passive, although prohibited in the primitive, provided

the final vowel

and 2d

1st

of the root be

Thus, from

stitute.

fut. pass,

the base of the

in the primitive is che {clietahey &c.,

may come

Similarly from hu and kri

cheshye, &c.).

Vriddhi sub-

its

may come

chayi {cMyitahe, &c., cJiayishye, &c.), although

same tenses

the base of the

changed to

first

gather,"

to

chi,

and kari

liavi

{Mvitahe, karitahe), although the bases in the primitive are ho and

manner

In like

kar.

long

provided

a,

may

be inserted when the root ends in

of a change to Vriddhi (which is

that, instead

y be interposed between the

impossible),

da, " to

Thus, from

may come

give,"

dayi {dayitahe, &c.), although the base

primitive

da (ddtahe,

is

But in

&c.).

a and inserted

final

i.

the base of the fut. pass.

same tenses in the

of the

these

all

cases

it

is

per-

mitted to take the base of the primitive for that of the passive,

and chetahe or

cJtayitahe

may

equally stand for the 1st

fut. pass.

In the case of roots ending in consonants, the base of the two

futures

in the

be identical with that of the same

passive will

tenses in the primitive^ the inflection being that of the atm.

The Third

Preterite of Passives.

114. In this tense, also, variation from the primitive

ends in a vowel.

For in that case the

insertion of i

may

may

occur

when

the root

take place, although for-

bidden in the primitive, provided the final of the root be changed to Vriddhi.

Thus, from chi

p. 81.)

So

may come the base

of the 3d pret. pass, achayi (achiiyishi, &c., form 1

although the base in the atm. of the primitive

also,

from hu and kri

may come

ahdvi and

akdn

is

ache (acheshi,

although the bases in the atm. of the primitive are aho and

form

2.).

Again,

may be

be interposed between

inserted

final

when

^c, form

akn

(ahoshi^ akrishi,

the root ends in long , provided that y

a and inserted

Thus, from da

may come

addyi

(addyishi, ^c), although the base in the atm. of the primitive is adi (adishi,

* This explanation of the

Bopp,

rests

^r^,
IT^

^^

may

passive, although at variance

on the authority of Panini

t The root
;

^^,
and

(6. 4. 62.),

^7^^

be J4in$ril^,

be H

Trff^,

r*iri

M PhuI
I

Sfc.)-

with that of Wilkins and

and the Siddhanta kaumudl.

may

however, in the passive,

may

2.).

(ahdvishi, akdrishi, form 1.),

be ?[ffrifT%>
,

'<^r||ui,

as well as ^^int.

as well as J4^ril^, 3?^t^.

as well as

^f^;

and

PASSIVE VERBS.

92
But

in all these cases

permitted to take the base of the primitive for that of the

it is

passive (so that the passive of chi

3d

pers. sing,

by Vriddhi and the

gathered

may

where the terminations

"

"; ahdvi,

inserted

it

was

i,

be either achdyishi or acheshi), except in the

ishta

and sta being rejected, the base, as formed

thus, achdyi, "

must always stand alone ;

was

it

akdri, " it was done "; addyi, " it was given."

sacrificed ";

If the root end in a consonant, the base of the 3d pret. pass, will always be

with that of the 3d pret. atm. of the primitive, except in the 3d pers.

identical

where

(^) being substituted for the terminations ishta of the 1st form and sta of

the 2d form, invariably requires before

Guna
3d

of any other medial vowel.*

sing.

3d

pret. will

thdh, akshepi ;

3d

sing.,

from

it

the lengthening of a medial

Hence, from tan, the form of the

and the

a,

1st, 2d,

and

be atanishi, atanishthdh, atdni; from kship, akshipsi, akship-

This 8d pers.

vid, avedishi, avedishthdh, avedi.

pret. passive is not unfrequently found,

sing, of the

even in the simplest writings.

The Benedictive and Conditional of Passives.

In these tenses the same variation
vowels as in the

last

that

Vriddhi take place in a

is,

final

Thus, from chi

after final d.

is

permitted in the case of roots ending in

the insertion of i

is

allowed, provided that, before

may come

the bases chdyi and achdyi {chdyishlya,

achdyishye) ; from hu, hdvi and ahdvi; from kri, kdri and akdri j from

and addyi.

But

it,

vowel capable of such a change, and y be interposed

cheshtya, acheshye, hoshiya, ahoshye,

rfa,

ddyi

^c, the forms belonging

to

the atm. of the primitive, are equally admissible in the passive.

Passive Infinitive Mood.

There

is

no passive

infinitive

mood

in Sanscrit distinct in form

But although the affi^^um has generally an

when joined with

desha

certain verbs, especially with shak, " to be able."

also used passively, in connection

it is

from the

active.

active, it is capable of a passive sense,

In the Hitopa-

drabdha and nirupita.

with the participles

Passive Verbs from Causal Bases.

116. In forming a passive verb

from a causal base, the

"to fall")
also,

is

formed the passive causal base pdty

from sthdpay

(sthd,

(jpdtye, " I

"to stand"), sthdpy {sthdpye, "I

from pdthay {path, "to read"), pdthy (pdthye, "I

inTJI

(^

* This

" to

rests

know"),

affix

gm

(^T^ "

ay

is rejected,

but the

Thus, from the causal base pdtay (root pat,

other changes of the root are retained.

am

am

am

caused to fall"); so

am made

to

stand");

taught to read") from

caused to know.")

on the authority of Panini, the Siddhanta kaumudl, and the Bhatti

kavya (15.64,65.).

<

93
a^

bJD
4)

O
O

.:,

a
<

a'-.g-s.S 3
O

(0

a
en -rt
Oh H
O

OQ

03

-^

CS

tM

-S

'^

o
D d
^

<l^

<U

"

2 IS

e3

a
03

cu

0i

(<

Id

e3

s
c

CO

(N

s c

^
^ ^ O

s o

CQ

i-H

la

s s

tS

-SIS
S CJ

le

3
s.2"S
e c

>

s:

-a

11

50

"53

M -oo
i-i

'^

.^'

S
153

153

Q)

<;>

c
^

1^

^ S S
E.H12
(U
Qj
^

<b

?!
-c;

-..

' i
Qj

ij

S
S

(b

<i>

PA

g
D e ^
^"^

ce

S.

OTEN

S
u

h
Ph

Ph

=;

.a

cS

't!
'

tr

+^

13
.

CO

^^ ^

o-c

-u

<u
.

^2

CO S> 5S
Sh 153-^
4 -c: "^

03

~^

O
^

-^

=^

."is-

g
(

H
H

H
<

<*

t<

0)

T3

+3

.5
:^ pq

(D

S-tf "M

CQ

Pi

C3

<3

153

+*

CO

cS
....

Is
+j

pS +j

-rt

rt

"

g
n

CM

Ji

p^+a

00

<u^

OJ

S
o

fc

03

0)
CO

-2

.4

c s

u
J

CO

a
o a
o
t^

fr9 ;

|c

53

^,

153

5S

53

a o
a So

f^

-a .^

O
'-M

be-"

53

-^

"q*

5!

-S -M

>

e5

3'<

153

5)

^ "O

o a 4; 2
a J5 " CO
o X
^< S 1>
"a'r
I'
a
13

Phm.S
S

13

53

adhwe

ante

-p ,-

ete

E^ ^

CO

5!

amah

atha

anti

ID

-p
bodh

A.

amahe

avahe

ethe

<k

r-i

bjn <u

^^

a^
a

s=! *-

H
Budh Nrit Dish

7^.

nrity dish

bX)0

bJD

4)

<

..I

53

^ 2-s

<L)

<o ,__

s s
153
C 55

1^K
^

+j .J5

"^

12;

153

T3 b='^

-'S 2

^"^

fa

5<

153

%)

o^
^ 03 3

<u

0)

^
09

53

153

5S

< A

;h

rS

153

0^

M
Wh

;^

o
H
u

153

~c:
tn

^
.2-^:5 2
00 to

^ 13

-^

TT to

bfi

^^>S

.<:

O w
> o
O cj S OJ

'73

ft pq

K o g

o
^

OJ

^1.

0.

CS

-^

Ph~C!

S
.2 ^

CO

f*

'^

53

O O

-o

ff

TS

->l

*y

.1^

2 -c -t-i
'
f<

:^ '2
sr>:s

S
e

0)

Ss
-h?

i5j

"O

Ph

H P
<

GO

**-

^
c

^~

S
^
c3 CS

>J

en

"*)

o s.s

-S
+^

<D

pQ

TJ

o >

(U

<i>

'^

^^

153

-Cf

ntam

CO

cu

maha dhwa

(.A

"
IJ

CO

i
c o c

>

0.2

rr o

^
IC3

S 3 R

1J

94

^lll
?;!
-^
"

ft

"53

'S

PLi

ft

rfS

s <
-^
w

A,

s a
a s
w
H^ M,

.s
's -e -S

a a
s

ftt

- -2

<-'-

qjuhw

achinw

avid

a S a
a s
53
g^

i a

ajuhu

aihinu

avid

"^

a a
w s

ajuhu

achinu

avid

Si,

ff

'^

"kS

w - -5 -5
ft

<

.^

o
S S

- -s:
"e
~ s

V.
-

ft

-^ ^

jl

-S -E, "

>!
!

><;

a a
H^

3
a a
s
f^

1 sa
s 5

ft

ts
^
ft

- -S

ajuhw

le

=
a a
a

achinw

-csk,

a a
a
avid

ajuhu

achinu

ft

-<;

-cs^

ft

HO -
s -
ft

'p*^

a a
n a,

achinu

avit

1
ajuhw

5>1

achinw

achinw

S 'a
a s
5r

ji
s

^ -^ o

a,

^<?
Hi

H
m

a,

avid

ajuhu

ajuhu

aihinu

ajuhu

avit

S 1
^ -

V.

ft

'>^

-S:

a S
a
^Cl

a
s
a.

avit

ajuhu

ej

s
a

'a

achinu

"*.*

<*

'1

achinu

"1

1^

a
"a

'a

hinu

a
s

achinu

avit

avid

I'

s a
a s
: -2
a a 1-

P-

53

HO

-S,

.5

1
5

ajuhav

.4i

s a

avid

(1

^ ^ a s i~
li:s - a s
ft

a s
a

s
ajuhu

9J

s a a s a
a s
-<:

achinu

a- a

S a
a

5 1 a g a
a
s
s <
-.>, ^ i<S ^
a,

a 1 a
ajuhu

a.

& a
-5
t> -o

avit

t(

avid

s
a a

I'

<:

*;.

a
s

153

a a

a
a.

achinw

w.

i<5

s 5

s
ajuhw
avid

153

a.

ajuhu

avid

ai

a.

<5 HO

HO
HO

153

a a
-s
? a
s t^ f< a.

<;
s?

SJ

a
s

achino

^1

.s

HO

^
i

ajuho
avet

2 1 o a
S "S

CO
* *0
ajuho

achino

avet

a.

i
~
-S
iJS
a

^g

* a
a

-*

<s

HO

1o

.9

"
13

ft

rfi

-S ^

-^ ^

HO

a.

ajuhav

achinav

aved

^o

1
a a

->

S
a

I'

r\

eS

^
k* >2
ts^

ffi

3^ or

O ^ ^

-^

-^

"t?

H
Z

as

Vid

??^

(C

o t^ CO 05

tf

-^ &4

Hu

Chi

Bhid

Tan
Pr,

2. 3. 5. 7. 8. 9.

|i
-

.2

95
-5

-S

S>

'j

-o

-
s;

S>

.s

S -
-^
!J

<!

3
3 a a 3 a
"e
< an a.
a
s ' -
;i '^ w

3 a
a
Pi

ft,

a
a
^ a sa.
>

S
e
3

"

"a

a "w a
a .a
a
K
a a
a
'^
.fl-

s 1

TS <
S S rfS -a

^ -^

S a
a

a.

>i

^
'^ u

!-(

w.

^
s

3 1 .8

s

-!

a a

"

(S

Ss

a.

r>t

-t.
2 a

s>

3
a

-0

a*
to

s>

3
a

ie
,i>

1
ftj

r*

_a,^

<s

s
S a a
a -c a
-^
o
a.

- - -S

a
3
a

a a
M a
a.
3
a

if

S
a
a

3 '?
- :

s
3 a
a

:i

e
a 'I
w a

1a

153

s>

8
S

sS
S

"S

-s:

111 5

?-t

a.

juhw

chinw

bhind

3 a
a s

a.

3
a a

vid

s
a a
a
a
ri

-
s <: >

s
a

T^

<s

"53

ts

s.^-?

:g

s
a a
a.

'a
>

s '2
a a

'?.

"^

-s

-c s

8 '^

s <S

IS

-5

juliu

a
chinu

vid

:s
Sj

-<

a.

"^3

a a

'S.

s>

1
chinu

vid

"^

:21 1 1 5a

Si

1
5?

'>

s>

^
-a

3 3
a
a
',

a
-3

.g

'1.

I^
Si

i.

-a

a
a

chinu

vid

1
5
<!>

3 a
a a

a.

M
-a <:
w .0

C^ TO

t>^

OS

a u

IIh

S
!

<

a a
a
w

.<?
>c>

r*

'^

'Q

g
"

1,

M a
a.

Si

3 9

a
a

4H

a.

<

'^,

.g

a.

'a

CO

1.

'w

'

1.

u
>

>A

5S
A=^
jS c?
5 En a,

a.

<o

JS

^ W

'

"^

a,

8 1 5
^ ^

'I

f*

a 5
a a
M a.

.a

3*^
J N

a.

a
8
g

a
a a a
a
w
^

^aa

juhu

'a

a,

->

1 1:1 1
^

'1.

a.

a a
a a
a

c 2

a
a

-^s

'^

s
s>

a.

'y

-w

1,

a a
a

a
.a .1

io

'^

S"

Si

juhu

<

a a
a a
a a a
a

le

a.

s 1^
a s

a
a

^ a
s "^

^e^

a a
a.

.s
-?:

"!S

,1

<

s
s
R .

io
13

1.

-TS

'^

lew

qj
Si

a.

s 1 a
P a

"CS -S
-<
s -c^
s 'ii

'tS

a a

^2 S
a

^
N

al

TO c t^ 06 oi

P?
3
h S *
^
^ .2
r'
*j ^^

J"

96
1

to
tnahe

dhwe

IS

eo.

c.

o
CO

-<

CO-

!<5-

to

V).

to

C5-

C'

^^

XS

^^4^

4^.^^
V
M
[3
H

to

c<s<

<

3^

ID

A
M

H^

'

^
e

SS

ei

<

<

a^

<e'

cc.

53

iS

'S

!i

5>i

"*=

0'

as-

^
'

<i'

CO-

<5

Its

^
-'

&S

<*.

*!

2J

-o

e
S

<

C(s.

8
^
S
55^^h<g
StoO

to

iJ^

to

<w

to
So

<i

IM

la

IC><

>#

to

>
09

le

|^t

<

a5

IB

IB

ift

<:
'rrf

%.

"B

^~\
t=^

"i

s
p

'a.

be
es

73

'ra
cu
0)

f^

<;
?

si

o?

to

g
?
V.

to

to

S
H
<

CQ

-4(Neo Ttiftco >o6

ca

0)

oi-

<i)

,o
1

H
*

C4-1

--;
rt

p
'^

"5^

&
50

Si
02

ao

'^

'S

'S

V.

80

IB

'5

"

f^

^ 1
o

V.

'S

'5

'^

to

"O

Ji

'^

K.

"<

-
$:

CO

Tf

CO-

^
-;

to

.^
"
.

in

i>

00

a ^

-"

H a
^^v

J-

<D

t/3

aj

Oi

2
A
+j

^--<

'S

s^

>

s-'

cs

<^
to
f-

,2

"2

B
5i

1^
fcb

IB

-<

IB

"B
is
;S

(M

"

CO

rf

lO

;0

.<5

'

B
8
'g

IB

a.

CO

OJ

bJD
i3

aj

97

cs

la

153

^. u

IN

eo

t^

.0

Z,
1(3

fa

>
H

1 1

"O

.o

CM

Oi

^^^

-^

1-

"<

"

rf

rf

iri

<o

l>

CD

Ci

a.
05

-Q

g
<

^;

-?

If,

IW

IW

i*cs

00.

53

rff
CO.

iJ
<

g 5 W
Ss^
H a^ -?
< %. eo.

J
^ 1
1
w la
!ji

s>,

MS
as-

s^
CO.

-S

H
fl
!5

Z'

so.

?
a
.J

?!

'S
S!i
:
eo.

..s'

e
^

-f

w.

s^
rfj

69.

la
=>i
rf?

w.

%i

"S:

a
K>.

Sf^

.s

s^

So.

S
la

>
-Cf
ec.

'a
a a
?> Ss v
- -
CO.

^
s
la

CO-

CO.

^a

a
e

&. i 5;>
<f CS MS
00-

CO.

0-

/'
to

**

:g .3

5
e

s:r a
Q

IcS

s
-<?
50-

.a
^

+3

^ f^
^

i<i

CO

.^

lb

rH

^a 1a

<a

-<

-6

-^

>o

fO

CO

.*o

sa 5
a
i>l

00

1
1,
a'

ci

s
IW

ft

s
s
IW l
<?

rfS

^ec-

2-

^
1.

J
1

l.

IS

I5^

a
105

/^

^s
^

:s

rH

<N

."2

"H.

s
<ii

tf
4j

-
t>l

ci

a.

98

1^

'^

IC

dhwa

ntam

',

la

to

>
12;

o
H
<

si
e e

Its

to
n
t^

^
C<5'

"e

-r*

"^

.S

f5

-^

C
G.

-
CO

(N

.g

"5*

"S
-o

'^

'a.

IS

?S

a^

OS

a^
-

CO

lO

TT

QO

i>r

rH

'^A

'to

thah

>;

^.

>

<to

"to

<to

^ ^

I
P5

<to

^ %

(U

;>

1^

1^

<to

5>v

CM

'tS

^ m

CO

CO

t-

OJ

CO

to

55

<s

f^

iS

^e

f^

-;
cs

K.

'^,

IC!

to

to

=*1

pq-

OS

"s;
-53

o
e

S.

<2

w
H

>*!

1e

'S

IQ

<i>

IS

^ ^ ^ c^
.^^
5:

CO
to

'ts
<s

-*"

ifj

-<

S
s

<s

CO

IC

(N

i-H

^ ^ ^

'>K

<s
V9'

is"

sc-

"^

"to

a>^

"i

IS

IS

^.

5>i

"

S^i

to

s-

"^
-o

CO. j>

US

"iS

"s

IS

p:

'S

IS

a^
<

S^

"

Sss

fe

e"

1 5

?r

s
s

P^

0>J

<S

is

tS

<
O

C<3-

"to

CO
H^

C(3-

^(Nco Tfinco t-oDos

-o

'tS

'

^o

>

'^

^ ^

"?
to

.^
IS

JCQCO

^inco l>CDOS

5^
<s

lO

IM

55,

e'
OJ

CO

O
C
H
O
w

to

to

H
<

to

S5

'*

to
00

S
<s

^
to

<!
g

|,|

ts

1^

dhwe

to
to

nte

<

^s

IS

5
C

'.S

:S
ICS

12;

'8i:?^

,e

5>5

"

a,

1
i-H

<N

CO

-V

lO

e*

to

cs

'i.

a.

tana

CO

pava

-<

r^

IC3

IS

<to

g
'-S

H.-,

'!.'.
^^ ^

5*i

g
e

J
^

-!;

ya

ATM.

Vi-

e
s

a>i

CO

OS-

ej.

w
H

to

"^

IC3

5>i

<

^ ^?

to

-9

O
o

to

Pi

5J^

"

to

-H(Mco Tj<in<o i>coos

99

>

(4

to

to

<*

to

to

la

to

OS

^*

lO

is;

ffj

(M

-H

CO

09

to

-^

l>

CO

to

to

P.

=^

&

<*

__

__,,

'S,

IS

is

Oi
nanr

chich

didis

1
CO

<M

CO

CO

Tf

t>

00

Si,

OJ

i
>
H

avdhai
asrva

l-H

etham

atam

ai

H
!>

Ph

IS

-!

P3

etam

hH

CO
-5

(>i

CO

"^

lO

i>

CO

OJ

Ph

o
w
<

m
w
w

le

rf:

to

Sj
1^

"e

,Ai

,>5

-.

^.

IS

,;

(N

Tjl

t1 1
CO

CO

l>^

huy

*.

ftf>

1~
"e

r
e*

,&
'S

-S

?i.

01

Pi
Pi

adhrvam

1-1

Pm

<!

-^

^(Mco-<i<io)r>cooi

'1,

13

vidy

H
H

M
H
H

^ le^ ^

la

&5

eran

t8 ^ 1 1
,8.

budhy"

o
H
o
w

edhrvam

emahi

eta

iz;

fc*

rO

eyatam

I*

eyatham

evahi

ethah

eya

amahi
avahi

athJah

etham

anta

etam

ata

to

anrity
auet/y

a/iwy

adishy

abhidy

6.

7.

atany

acA2^

Pi

ffj%

2.

3.

4.

5.

8.

9.

pit!

11
IQ

1
\i

1
S

ll

5a

lO

Pi

to

rf*

<3

10

IB

e
a

to

to

IS

to

to

to

amahe

adhtve

ante

01

hlchap

ll

anart

^ 5^
i

CO

-^

CD

!>.

'i

CO

OS

Pi
p.

vidy

A%

2.

3.

nrity

rfwAy

4.

6.

i>

00

<

100

bio

^
c

'^

^ a
v.

-
IB

tt
cs

rfi

^
IB

cs

><:

00-

Pi

f
CJ

"

'a'

-^

1 1

^1

^
0.

S
3
<i

'S
&,
c^

CO

c.

-I

1 3

-5

II

9)

.Bi

'

o
a

>
'*!
5)

EC

fH

><

S>

*?

9i

**

'B
^
B

s
c

11

<N

rQ

Q{

a.
s^

p
o

'S,

JS'

,
"

.:g

?s

o
c

e
tc

i>.

CO

-s.

ill

,S
13
a,

LS

B^

i^

03

Ti

^
^

<;>

00
t!

ICS

4^
^.

cc

<s-

V).

^U

^
cc-

?
si

ec-

iM
t<5'

s
-S5
CO-

e
4^
O}.

>^

1^

?^

"!:

en

-45

IC

"O

^
^

-<

(M

S
^

<to

"^S

'?

'^

'5*

SS

.^

v>

"te

i?
"O

IS

J>

GO

OS

^
0^

00

'^

ISS

"fc^

"r

<

h^'

<

5^

-.

5>1

le
**

<a

j<;

V.

<n

'^!

IC

se

<>

or

-a

5>

IB

S5

a>

1B
S>i

CQ

U
*

1 1B 1B

c
B

1B 1B

a
B
B

"^

'B

!a

IB

<

IB

va.

IB

1^-

1^

,a>

,g5

rfS

IS

itf'

>:

,1
rfi
00.

,2-

s
B
3
'

>;

desk

"*
in

>

00

0?

a
B
*;

<<

cc.

Q r
N

&
B

><

(r.

1B

s?

ckai/i

CO

5^

B^

ii

a.

1&

B
K

5^

**

-l

1 1

B
g

-<

Z
"

a.

'6
a^

-<!

<a

%l

^
H
b

a,

s^

s
<*

-^
cJ

IB

1
*~

:f

.-S

"B

-C

a
B

IB
a,

AUXILIARY VERBS.

116.

" to

as,

There are three auxiliary verbs of constant occurrence

The first
be "; kri, " to do "; and bhu, " to become."

third to the

The

1st.

and the

second to the 8th,

the

belongs to the 2d conjugation,

two, however, are too irregular to be

first

under any conjugation, and their inflection is therefore

The third, bhu, will follow in its proper place at
exhibited here.
placed

the head of the examples under the 1st conjugation.

101

^m

Root

Cf. the Latin sum^ es, est,

(R. 92. d.
Present.

"

Ist, ^rft*T

asmi,

^in smah.

swah.

^rftr ast,

^gn sthah,

^[f^

mistah.

^jfif'

mim

s^am,

^5jt

" I may

eari.)
I

was."

stha.

santt

^TTO asam,

^T^ dswa,

TSrnrfh aslh,

'^T^ dstam, ^TRcT

^mfhr

'4|%T| dstdm,

sydva,

^irnr i^^ ^irnn syatdm,

dsit,

Imperative.

be," &c.

^PTiT sydtam,

.^IJTt ,J/^>

"

PLURAL.

3d,

Potential.

eo-o-j,

e^iiut,

First Preterite.

2d,

astt,

and the Greek

am."

DUAL.

SING.

PERS.

as, " to be."

" Let

4l|fH asma.
dsta.

dsan.

SSllfl'rl

me

be."

^ETPR sydma.

'?I^nfT o^dni,

'^44jc(

^TTiT i^ate.

jjfff edhiy

^ stam,

^^

^nEtT astu,

^5T stdm,

"^7^ santu.

syuh.

asdva,

asdma.

syj^lH
sta.

Second Preterite.*" I w^," &c.

WW

wrftR m,

^*<^>

Wrftw

^if^UI dsitha,

tgii^vJt

dsathuh,

Wra

-eilOii:

asatuh,

as,

) Cf. rivTov, ij(rrr]p,

This tense

and

is

asuh.

pi. ^(r/xe^, ^o-re.

never found by

kri.

^sa.

'4(144

^UW,

itself,

forming the 2d pret. of causals, &c., see

Root

dsima.

Infin. "sr^

but

of great use in

is

and

p. 77. g.

kartum, " to do "

r. 108.

(r. 96.).

PARASMAIPADA.
Present Tense.
IiI)(H

karomi,

^;

"

kurvah,

"dn^" karoshi,

*^^

csdrif Artro/i,

^^^W: kurutah,

kuruthah,

I do."

^S^, kurmah.

^^^ kurutha.
a%f

ir''

kurvanti.

102

AUXILIARY VERBS.
i^isr<

okaravam^

^niRjt

was

" I

Preterite

doing," &c.

^^^

akurva,

^BT^

akarot.

iSlodDri

akurutdm,

VSI^'^fll

Potential.
cU^'l

'3^:

kurydm,
kurydh,

'<^^'[\ kurydt.

may

c({S)|'c(

kurydva,

'^S([f[

kurydtam,

'^^^'i "fturvan.
do," &c.

^T^Tirt kurydtdm,

Imperative.
Mc(Tfl!f

'^^

karavam.

chakdra,
chakartha,

^el|c|

^d^li chakdrOy

flli^lfU kartdsi,

kurydta.

<(i|\(f

"

kuriita.

'ejU^rfl

kurvantu.

^cM

chakrima.

I did."

chakriva,

'^df!^ chakrathuh,

^^

^r^i7Z ckakratuh,

'^HK chakruh.

First Future.

Q|i%rf^ kartdsmi,

'4rl^lfl

4A<i\H karavdma.

kurutam,

Second Preterite.
'eTeRIT.

kurydma.

" Let me do," &c

^'rli kurutam,

^eC^

4^IH

"^SiX kuryuh.

oK<4N karavdva,
oh^'fl

akurma.

W^S^ akiiruta.

\iMik akurutam,

" I mQ

chakra.

do.

eR^TT^t kartdswah,

eii^l^; kartdsmah.

di^l^vn kartdsthah,

"Sf^fp^ kartdstlia.

^E%T$ kartdrau,

cK^li) kartdrah.

Second Future.

" I shall do."

ojiftxqt^ karishydvah,

eBftxqTTt karishydmah.

ehOjuinH karishyasi,

dh(iym'. karishyathah,

cRfi.ui'vtl

chfiUffii karishyati,

cdQ^Ujri:

'4|oKlV akdrsliam,

^diTt^ akdrshwa,

^njinffi akdrshlh,

^cf'cRi*^

akdrshtam,

^cRrtffi^ akdrshlt.

^rBIt akdrshtdm,

ctifuuilfH

karishydmi,

karishyatah,

Third Preterite.*' I

The Other

GhriUffnl karishyanti.

did.

4|e(i|^

akdrshma.

^JoET ahdrshta.

^d^m akdrshuh.

tenses are, bened. r*Ml', fgwr.,

^HKftw". ^raiftW., ^^RRftWir, &e.

karishyatha.

f^RTiJ^,

&c.,

eond.

AUXILIARY VERBS.
30.

) r.

")

See p. 39. note.

) r. 7-

") r.

103
10. f,

<>)

21.

r.

')

The

eighth conjugation rejects the hi of the imperative, in conformity with the fifth
conjugation,

i)r.7.

r.

94.

^;p.79./

*) p.

75. b.

See the scheme for the 2d pret. p. 73.

')

')p.79.c.

')p.85.

')P-82./.

105.

") r.

c.

ATMANEPADA.
Present Tense.

^
4^'^

kurushe,

4^^

kurmahe.

kurvahe,

kurve,

kurute,

oK^V^ kurudhwe.

od^l'^ kurvdtfie,

kurvate.

kurvdte.

"SftJlJlt

First Preterite.
^9(ifl akurvi,

^'3<^f^ akurmahi.

akurvahi,

^TE^^; akuruthdh,

^ohlllVf'l akurvdt/idm,

^I'cK^S^

J^oh^jd akuruta.

^ra^Tilt akurvdtdm,

SSleli^d

akurudhwam.

ahurvata.

Potential.

kurvlya^
\\

kurvlthdh,

hurvlta,

off^ftT

di^H'f^ hurvimahi.

R^f^f^ kurvlvahi,
4{(r*l l <<T

ai|g(t41lif|

kurviydthdm^

^^Tt4 kurvldhwam.

kui'viydtdm.

'<Ag(U*i

kurviran.

Imperative.

cR^ '

karavai,

'm^^
ohijril

kurushwa,
kurutdm,

karavdmahai.

e(i4c|N^ karavdvahai,

"SfX^rCt^

ofi'^T^ kurvdthdm,

cK^l4 kurudhwam.
3||(j kurvatdm.

kurvdtdm.

^gi'rif

Second Preterite.

'^^

chakre,

<<|chM

chakrimahe.

'vtchc^^ cha]erivahe,

chakrislie,

or %" chakridhwe.

^fhlVJ chakrdthe,

4
'STfli

chakre,

The
2d,

chakrdte,

*c|'j|ilil'

other tenses are 1st

fut.

Vlfipi^ chakrire.

ch^l^^ 2d

fut. ehf<u^

3d sing, ^r^', ^r^:, ^np, bened. "5|^\ cond.

^)r.7.

scheme

<')r.30.

)r.l0.t-

for the 2d pret. p. 73.

'')r.l05.

s)

p. 79.

')r.30.

kj

) r.

p 79

98.

and

ij

3d pret,

1st,

^^fift:^\

r.

See the

7.

p 33 ^

jj

p g^

104

EXAMPLES OF REGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE FIRST

CONJUGATION (r. 88.)
Root

Infio. >Tf^o bhavitum, " to

bhu.

Pabashaipada.
PEHS.

" I

become " or "

hhavdmi,

M'\^\ bhavat/iah,

H^nT

3d, H^flT bfiavati,

^T^fiH bhavatak^

^Jcffrff

" I

was becoming " or "

ahhavatam.,

"^PUm abhavah,

^H<i^

^^T^TT abhavat,

^W^Tft abhavatdm,
Potential.

)T^

bhaveyam,

Vf^

H^iIT bhavetdm,

bhavet,

^(H^*\ abhavan.

" I

vj^

Imperative.

was."

^^TH^TT abhavata.

may become" or "

H^ bhaveva,

vi^. bhaveh,

bhavanti.

>SIM4W abhavdma.

'SW^T^ abhavdva,

'^Vf^ abhavam,

am."

hhavatJia.

2d, )T?f^ hhavasl,

First Preterite.

yTTHH bhavdmah.

bJiavdvah,

^'c(|'c|;

" or " be."

FLURAL.

DUAL.

SIN6.

H^lfn

1st,

Present Tense.

become

bliavetam,

may

be."

vj^

bhavema.

VT^

bliaveta.

H^lH

" Let me become

" or

" let

bhaveyuh.

me be."

W<4ir1 hhavdni,

M^\^ bhavdvOy

MAW

V^

Hnr bhavatam,

VRTT bJiavata.

H4^\ bhavatdm,

MWRt

bhava,

VfWfi bhavatu,

Second Preterite.

"

'^fc|c( babhUviva,

^^fP^VI babhUvitha,

^jT^tjjj

^ilf^ bahhuva,

"^^ffmc, babhUvatuh,

^pt^f{ babhumina.

babhUvathuh,

"

bluivantu.

became," or " I was."

^^T? babhuva,

First Future.

bhavdma.

I will

^VT? babhuva.

^^^m babhuvulu

become," &c.

trf^fTrf^ bhavitdsmi,

M^^AM^l bhavitdswah,

wf^ril^t bkavitdsmaJi.

^r<( A r^ bhavitdsiy

^^P^ril^t bhavitdsthah,

Mf^KT^

Hf^Tin bhavitd.,

^NriliJ bhavitdrau^

Hf^TTRi bhavitdraJi.

Second Future

"

I shall

bhavitdstha.

become," &c.

^r<]tm(H bhavishydmi,

^JP^UINt bJuimshydvah,

^fc(U|m: bham?hydmah.

trf^r^lf^ bhavishyasi.,

Hp^tMVj: bhavi^hyathah,

tTf^KT^ bhavishyatha.

^f^Uirri bhavishyati,

^fMUIri'. bliavishyatah,

irf^tqfVfT bhavishyanti.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.

The other
^nrre',

&c.

88. a.

) r.

tenses are, 3d pret.

cond.
") r.

^w1^,

98.

<=)

&e,

^S^,

o)

p. 79. a.

p. 83.

ftr

smi.

Athanepada.

') p.

all

85. b.

^(fX(^ smayase,

^{i\^ smayethe,

^inr^ smayadhwe.

V^

ipnr^ smayante.

^^

smayete.

was smiling."

asmaydmahi.

^mrqTrf^ asmaydvahi,

'^Vmwi^

^^l|Vj|t asmayathdh^

WIH^^X asmayethdm,

^wm^

asmayadhwam.

^SRJnnr asmayata^

ysi\Hi^^\

^m^if

asmayanta.

asrmye,

asmayetdm,

Potential.

^H^

W^^V^

smile."

^^hT^ smayemahi.
^^s4 smayedhwam.

smuyeydthdm,

Imperative.

MmH*^

T^l^ smayai,

*'

Let

me

Vi{i\il\

smile."

Wm>T^

smuydvahai,

r^r^r^^^

sishmiye,

^14 14 smayadhwam.

"I smiled."
^T^^^?i\H^ sishmiyimahe.

sishmlyivalie,

f^^f^vrf^Si^ sishmiyidhwc.

sishmiydthe,

ff|fi4{fq^ sishmiyishe,

f^f(44'l||v)

fHr*^^ sishmiye,

ftrfisFpjT^ sishmiydte,

First Future.

smaydmahai.

^STTRTt smayantdm.

smnyetdm,

Second Preterite.

smayeran.

\i\i\lA

ml)v{| smayethdm,

smayaswa,

\mm(\ smayatdm,

ff!^'^

may

^^^Iili smayeydtdm,

smayeta,

VPJ^

^T^^f? smayevahi,

smayeya,

^I^VJTt smayethdh,
ilfl^ri

"

"

f^rmflR

sishmiyire.

I will smile."

^fTI^^

smetdswahe,

iHdHMi^ srnetdsmahe.

^^iTJ^ smetdse,

^*)ff|44|v)

smetdsdthe,

V\d\^

^j(j

^'tiTIU imetdrau,

^*ii)1^

smetdhe,

ttjtietri,

'

Second Future.

^1^

"

I shall

smetddhwe.

wXTti smetdrah.
smile."

^TCt^ smeshyase,

^U(m^
Vtv^ smeshyethey

j^V(^ smeshyadhwe.

^HU|r) smeshyate.

^Mu)ri smeshyete,

\HVin smeshyante.

smeshye,

smeshydvuhc,

is

Vi^XH^ smaydmaJie.

;ppj^ smayate^

"

This

the participles.

"I smile."

smaydvahe,

First Preterite.

bened.

smetum, " to smile."

Present Tense.

^i\\^

smaye",

^w

Infin.

given in anticipation of r. 125. as being the most useful of

Root

&c.

^vr., ^TgTT*,

pass. part.

105

^Ufiq^

smeshydmaJie.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.

106

3d pret. ^^fq
)r.88.o.

2 pr.

by

1 sin.,

2 pr.

Jh
<

par.

" conquer.

Pres.

^r^^,

cond.

=)p.79.

30.

meant the

is

du., the 1st

pass, part., the passive

Root

^^^*,

notetandr.

'')p.74.

By

Obs.
preterite

bened.

c.

pass. part. fmjt.

past participle

dm, par.

hri, par.

tyaj, par.

labh,atm..

shubk, atm.

"run."

" seize."

"quit."

"obtain."

" shine."

^trfiT

(lllfH

^5<5

^^i

^W^

t**)

Pot.

^^

1^4

W%4

^^

Imp.

i<*iftif

^ufiir

WSTlffT

l^'

*i^K'

ri(<<N

^
^"

H^'
tmfm'

'Hri^4

ffiMHif^

^H^

1st fut.

2d

z)^\^*<

1 sin.

2 pr.

ftpTFT

du.

Infin.

r.
J)

p.

P) r.

1*1

^1

Pass. part. ftnr

88. a.

) r.

r "

....

fut.

98.

") p. 79.

106.

') r.

125.

vrit,

Root

1"

'')p-77./. p.75.

c,

^^UH

W^

5S'

Frai

)p.74. note

See the scheme for the 2d pret. p. 73.

8)

79./

by

(r. 125.).

^mr

2 pr.

^)p. 79.

t.

^) p. 79. /.

)p.80.

c.

')

e) r.

e,

106.

and 99.

98.

r.

p. 76.

')

atm.

edh, atm.

"be, exist.'

"flourish."

nind, par.

arh, par.

"

" blame."

deserve.''

Pres.

1st pret.

^1^

5Tf^

Pot.

^^

fq^

1 sin.

2 pr.

du.

2d

^^

Infin.

^tt5

Pass. part.

98.

^nTff^

<i<jrri<^

ff^rti^

fut.

fn^^iPH

<5r<|fl

1st fut.

") r.

'

r^t^ifa

2 pr.

c.

) p. 80.

c.

i.

Imp.

J.

person sing, of the 2d

1st

person dual of the 2d pret

1st pret.

nrrfiT

)p.86.

'>)p.83.fl'.

) r.

88. b

'wff'anfiT

ftrf^
Vith note.

<=)

p. 77- g.

") p.

75. /.

) r.

88.

b.

f)

r.

88. b. note.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.

gam^ par.

sad, par.

Root

stha, par.

rfrisA,

" sink."

"remain."

"go."

vah, par.

par. rfaA, par.

" see."

107

" bum."

"bear."

Pres.

triSIiH

1st pret.

Pot.

Imp.

rriaiPH

2 pr.

1 sin.

2 pr.

^^

du.
^

1st fat.

2d

<18lftH

^rwift*T

fut.

^a^ift'

Infin.
c

Pass. part.
'')p.64.
125.

^) r.

and 76.

'')p.76.

c.

0.

^)

the

125.

') r.

and

80.
final

69.

W^,

?H<4IVM:

")

c.

") Cf.

i.

^ blends

with the

root, instead of being

par.

125./

'>)p.75.

') cf. 'ia-rattjv,

c. cf. Xa-T^fti.

) p. 77. e.

c.

and Lat.

") r. 126.

the Lat. veho.

OP-80.
J)

s^ewi.

p. 75. e.

larly saA, " to bear."

p. 76. d.

91. h., is

changed to

^T^T^,

W^,

r.

'HcdViflrl^,

With

avdkshit,

ci.

the Lat. veadt.

pa, par. ghra, par. dhmd, par

Root.

<

" drink.'

Pres.

") p.

i.

')

76.

c.

and 68.

" smell."

" blow."

Thus

o.

a of the

in the 3d pret.

^^41, -smm,
106.

^T^,

gr.

Simi-

) r.

125. m.

See p.82. /.
') r.

k.

Whenever

p. 80.

of the termination into ^, the medial

initial

lengthened by

^mvt() :.

106.

r.

atm. ^snrfe, ^S"^^:, *^4\i, ^<=IUyn$, &c.

See the 2d pret. of the root da, given at full under the 3d conjugation.

a.

") p. 79. e.
") p.

p. 64.

'=)r.

c.

??

fWrT

gai, par. vas, par.

"

sinof."

"dwell."

pHWlfH

1st pret.

^^

Pot.

Imp.

M^iiPn

ftnrrftr

2 pr. 1 sin.
2 pr.

du.

1st fut.

2d

fut.

Infin.

Pass. part.
a) p.

64.

c.

TftfTT

Cf. Latin bibo, bibis,

da, 3d conjugation.

'^)

r.

125.

')

Sfc.

c.

p. 76. a.

See the tense at full under

This root substitutes dham for dhmd.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION.

108
*)

10. i-

r.

Hwe may

agdsam, ^c.

ahwam,
) r.

126.

dadhau.

aJiwah,

Sj^c.

') r.

e.

8.

and

III. in the

Atm. ahwe, ahwathah,

J) r.

126./.

") p.

3d

Sfc,

76. d.

and ai change

Hence, gai in the 3d pret.

of a termination.

Form

follow

analogy of those in a

e follow the

Roots ending in the diphthongs

i)

a before the

these letters to
is

Other roots in

p. 77- /.

(p. 70. a.); as dhe,

pret. rejecting its final

Form

or
')

II.

p. 80.

thus,

ahwdsi,

>") r.

&;c.

126. m.

EXAMPLES OF REGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE

FOURTH CONJUGATION (r. 89.).
Infin. frf^, " to

Root g^ muh.

Present Tense. "

Parashaipada.

H^TPi muhydmi,

be troubled."

am

troubled."

JT?rR^ muhydvdh,

a^TRt muhydmah.

g^r%

mukyasi,

u^VJt muhyathah,

iJ^iif

3'?rfir

muhyati,

n^nn muhyatah.

tj^frfl'

First Preterite.

^m^ amuhyam^

>I<H'^|V(

amuhydva.,

'44^^ri

^M^ri amuhyat^

^ra^nrt amuhyatdm.

^u^'IH

may

amuhydma.

^m^fff amuhyata.

amuhyatam,

"

muhyanti.

"I was troubled."

^STR^; amuhyah,

Potential

muhyatha.

<^M^rl amuhyan.

be troubled."

ij^

muhyeva,

H^ll muhyema.

H^ muhyeh,

u^d

muhyetam,

^i^'if

g^

^^rif muhyetdm,

H^A

muhyeyam,

muhyet,

Imperative.

h^iPH' muhydni,

W^ muhya,
^'^'ri

"

Let

me be

S^^ muhyeyuh.
troubled."

ui^l'ej

muhydva,

^^^ muhydma.

n^H

muhyatam,

S^HT muhyata.

w^nrt muhyatdm,

muJiyatu^

muhyeta.

Second Preterite.

"

n^vj muhyantu.

became troubled."

inrt? mumoha,

imf^ mumuhiva,

uhP^H mumuhima.

mftf^^ inumoMtha,

^HWW^ mumuhathuh,

55? mumuha.

n n^ff^ mumuhatuh,

nn^; mumtihuh.

HTftl^

mumoha.

First Future.
jfrffirrftT* mohitdsmiy

iftf^ril^t mohitdswah,

Mlf^riTMIt mohitdsmak.

jftf^inftr mohitdsh

'flf^fil^l mohitdsthah,

tflf^ril^ mohitdstha.

JRVn^rn mohitd,

H^f^ril^ mohitdrau,

jftf^irnj mohitdrah.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 109

Second Future.
Ift

f^m

*rin$U4RI mohishydvah,

fa mohishydmi,

Mir^<Mm: mohkhydmah.

tftr^KjOH mohishyasi,

HIP^UI'VJ;

mohishyathah,

Htr^UfVl mohishyatha.

Hlft^Ulfri mohishyati,

Hlf^UJ'ffl

mohishyatah.

flf^Uffif mohishyanti.

3d pret.
")

'^rgf \

bened. j^n^', cond. ^nftfi?^,

ifterfW or iflTVrftR, P- 80.

Or

Root

as, par.

aA, par.

" throw."

" perish."

") p.

p. part, g^-

83. k.

or gr^^
") r.

parf,atm. sham, par.

126.

trip, par.

<

"be calm."

" go."

"be pleased."

Pres.

iJuiiPh*

1st pret.

Pot.

Imp.
2 pr.

1 sin.

2 pr.

du.

1st fut.

2d

rfirrPw

fut.

Infin.

Pass. part.

Many

*)

fT?

^rn?r

'R^*

b) p.

See p. 83. k.

75./.

'')

p. 76.

^)

c.

This root

and insert a nasal in the futures ; thus, "^CTft^. t^Trf'T

')

e) r.

p. 80.

125. j.

^)

ksham, shram^ mad.

so,

')

r.

126. p.

sham;

viz.

J) r.

may optionally
*) P- 89.

kram, hhram

126.

i.

'')

for the

roots

(r.

note

3d

pret.

reject

f,

marked *.

which lengthen

89. a.)

dam, klam,

Cf. Tepvoftat, Terapxoiuiv.

par.

bhransh,

Root.

Form

There are seven other useful

the medial o after the maimer of

'^

ftrir

of these roots of the 4th conjugation follow the 3d

(vyava)
par. "fall."

vyadh, par. y2^A,atm.

" pierce."

"fight."

tush, par.

hrish, par

"be content." " rejoice."

" strive."

Pres.

h^^iPh

Pc(U4|(h

^Pit4

1st pret.

Pot.

^^

Imp.

WlP1

f^unPrf

iJWIIPh

{nfH

^Ijm

^TfT^

^^

4^*^

jttjir*!!

5^n%

2 pr.

2 pr.

sin.

du.

1st fut.

2d

fut.

P^P^fir^

f!pJHl

iJP^MlPw'^

fll^lPH

'qWTl

idlM

if^

djjrM-^

^T^fM'i

Tft^W^

^f%Tfw

dtvi<4lPH

Infin.

Pass. part.

2'

3*'

3^

^r^Ml(H

ff^"

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SIXTH CONJUGATION.

110

There are three other uncommon

)
*')

roots

which follow

so ;

viz, sho, ckha, do.

Roots ending in e or o foUow the analogy of those in a and ai in the 2d

see p. 76. a.
') r.

tion.
'')r.

')

Roots ending in o change o to a hefore the

125. g.

) r.

i)P-76<i-

126. n.

f)

89. a.
) p.

80.

p. 76. a.
") r.

125.

and

and 64.

b.

i.

P- 75.

')

pret.,

of a termina-

) p. 78.

note *.

">)Or^7.

EXAMPLES OF REGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE

SIXTH CONJUGATION (r.90.).
Root Wa^

srij.

Infin.

srashtum, " to create," or " let go."

PARASMAIPADA
Present Tense.
srijdmi,

THirf'T

srijmi,

^nrfn

^iffTT srijati.

asrijam,

" I create."

^3(1^: srifdvah,

H-^\H\ srijdmah.

innn

u^fVI srijatha.

srijathah^

^HafjH srijatah,

First Preterite

^Pf^

Only.

^^9jH

^nrftfT srijanti.

" I was creating."

asryava,

41 4411 IH

asnjdma.

^^^nr: asryah,

HH'fiA asrijatam,,

^mafiT

^V^TfT

^fljrlHI asrijatam^

^raifff asrijan.

asrijat,

Potential.

^^
^ijT^

srijeyam,

srijet,

may

create.

9i^cf srijeva,

'M^f srijema.

Vi^A srijetam,

^^

n^'ril sryetdm,

;r^u: srijeyuh.

Imperative.
^aflfi srijdni,

"

dsrijata.

mrr^

" Let me

sH/eta.

create."

srydva,

'WSfTR srijdma.

9a|H srijatam,

WSfiT erijata.

fl^HI srijatam,

\'^*A srijantu.

Second Preterite.
;Ere^ sasaija,

mif^ ^
Tra^

sasatjitha,

sasarja.

^r^rf^r? sasrijim,

^UafUt

sasrijathuh,

^niafW: sasrijatuh.,

"^C^fs^ sasrijima.
Tf(WSf sa^rija.

^raif: sasrijuh.

HI

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SIXTH CONJUGATION.

First Future.
^nsrfw'' srashtdsmi,

^g|t<i: sra^htdswah,

^r?Tf^ srashtdsi,

^'glfJiq:

^TCT srashtd.

^81^

igi?TWt srashtdsmah.

srashtdsthah,

5'CTW

sra^Jitdstha.

^r?TC srashtdrah.

srashtdrau,

Second Future.

\ji'^yi'.

W^lflt

"^l^^, srakshyatah,

sraJcshyati,

^T^nr srakshyatha.

srakshyathah.,

^Vi^fft srakshyasi,

The other

^T^^nTt srakshydmah.

9Vlj4im srakshydvah,

srdkshydmi,

tiVijIlfn

tenses are, 3d pret.

^V!^r*ri srakskyanti.

^rerref ^

bened. ^tMI^

cond.

^W^'

pass. part. Ttw

note *.

) p. 65.
0) p. 85.

")

") r.

e.

105.

Twn, atm-

Root

See p. 80. note *, and

or ^TH?f)

r.

125.

prachchhf mos^.

<

die."

r.

91.

p. 80. note *.

i
much, par.

par,

" dive."

par. "ask."

"let go."

Pres.
1st pret.

Pot.

Imp.
2 pr.

sin.

2 pr.

du.

1st fut.

2d

Tf3rft*T

MRm

fut.

PH

Infin.
e

pi

Pass. part.

) r. 90. a.
cf.

>)

p. 79. c.

the Latin poposdsti.

e) r.

125.

majj and
') r.

") p.

So lajjdmi from

i.

lajj.

125. k.

J) r.

) p.

88.

With

77-/.

the 2d pers. smg. MnPadLVj

So also with TTiftf^ (from tud),

64. b.
") p. 75, y.

fas/.
*)

But

p.

(55.

*)

p. 80.

these roots are sometimes written

This root
i)

tutodisti.

inserts

note *.

11,

a nasal in the futures.

) p. 76.

rf.

r.

90. b.

11^

EXAMPLES OF IRREGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE

SECOND CONJUGATION (r. 92;.).
Infin. ^, "to go."
Infin. ijT^, " to go."
Root ^.
Root Tfl.
PARASMAIPADA
Present.

"

PARASMAIPADA.

Only.

Present.

go.

l||ITI

ITTO yaihah,

'HT'I

TirfiT ydti,

Tmn

Itrftr ydnti.

yami,

4||(h

yatak.,

n^

ydmah.

m^'. ydvah,

TTrftr yasi,

ydtha.

^f^

y^
^^

emi,
eshi,

aydm,

^rm: ay a a,
_^

'^mri ayar,

go."

^;

ivah,

imah.

ithah,

^jft itah,

itha.

yanrt.

l^fnT

i^eVs? Preterite.

First Preterite.
i!|4|l

"

^S[^T^ aydva,

4|l{m aydma.

'4ll4

^Trnr ayatam,

^nrnr ayato.

,
wmiTT ayatam,

<4j4|rtf

ayaw.

aiua,

aiAi,

^^

aitam,

ai^

;^TfX

djyam,

^Tf aiVa.

411^*^ ayan.

aitdm,

Potential.

TTHIT

ydydm,

X(\i\\r\

^TRT: y%A.

ydydva,

irHIii yayatam,

TTTTPT ydydma.

JT^

m^lM

^[inW iydtam, JTJTJf iydta

ydydta.

^TTR iyama.,

iyava,

T^Ti^ iydtam, ynj

iyzfA.

Imperative.
^rr^

yam,

TITit

ydtam,

TjTirt

l^[t{

2d

^nrrftr^*

^
1st fut.

&c.

^ji^ pH ",

fut.

bened. imrrd

3d pret.

cond.

^rn^

^JiFr,

2d

t^TR. &c.

fut. tiviiCn
7TT*)

92.

') r.

t=ai,

r.

88.

J)

The above
positions,

It

or

^^,

) r. 7-

is

in

*)

p. 69. note

a with e=ai^

with dni=aydm.

root

^ i,

desirable

to

76. a.

*.

<) p.

r. 6.,

ai with

^^,I

fut.

i^TrrftT

") p. 79. e.

usual

')

eond.

<) p. 82.

r. 8.

')

rf.

a with

p. 85. b.

compounded with prerules

introduce the inflection of these

3d pret. ^pttj^ (from

am=ayam,

*) p. 75. A.

the

1st

yantu

or

^nCfi^

i/o.

TptT^

bened. ^jqre

" to go," is constantly

accordance with

itdm,

^.

p. part.
) p. 70. 6.

item,

^in

e^M,

root

p. part, ^mr.

i^i,

2d pret. ^JTHI

rilfai

^lim ayam, ^inT aydma.

ayawi,

^MIPh'
^f^

ydtdm,

2d pret. ij^', &c.

&X!,

yama.

of combination.

compound verbs

although the subject properly belona;s to the chapter on compound words.

here,

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.

Thus, with the prep,
pret. ^T^, ^., &c,

1st

"to;"

a,

^nn^, &c.

^,

dual H^,, &c.

wnf^,

&c.

imp.

to ^fn, &e.

pres. ^%fiT, &c.

pot.

Again with apa prefixed

pres. ^1^, ^frr, ^fir;

pot. SH^^'i, &c.

^,

irf^,

&c.

1st pret.

The preposition
gives the sense of " to read," and ^ i
imp. ^qmiPH, ^s"^.

adhi prefixed to the root

113

then blends with adhi into adhiy before the vowel, and adhl before

Hence the

the consonantal terminations.

^nftw, ^nfN^. &c.

isrifl^,

4- i

= adhyai,

^j^cjf^,

adhye
is

r.

adhye

88

^Tttrnrr^n.

changed

ai

&c.

Inf. ^rftr^.

This root takes

"to

Guna

lie

ift.

This

is

t-

thus,

atmanepada.
inserts

and imp.

w^^Nf^

^s^rftr

n^*tf^

Imperative.
5i4inn$

4)^ Ml

f^\
,

Cf.

1st fut. ^lAlril^

',

2d

fut.

cond. ^r^rf^* pass. part,

Keifxai, Ke'i(Tat, Kelrat, KeifieBa,

an exception

to r. 101.

Root ^.

Inf.

e.

^cftl^,

^)

^^l

^rf^, 3d

pret.

p. 86. b.

" to praise."

*) r.

126.

6.

note.

PARASMAIPADA.
First Preterite.

^^l

MHj^*!

'^r^rftrf'T,

^rftnr*-

&c., and see note, p. 45.

Present.
wtf'T

+ e=

First Preterite.

^i41^n;

') r. 10.

II.

before all the terminations, and

Potential.

')

dual

(adhi

and takes Form

down," "to sleep."

%^

2d pret.

^i^ri

In the 2d pret. the root

Present.

bened. ^P^iOm

!iit|

&c.

r in the 3d plur. of the pres. 1st pret.

51

^n^^t,

adhya

thus, ^rfV^Tit, ^rftnrfir^, ^rftnT^t, ^rftnrf'T^. &c.

^rapftfi?, -^miilai :, ^rupft?,

^.

+ a = adhya ;

imp.

^nfti^, &c.

In the 3d preterite the root becomes

Root

r. 8.),

&c.

pot. ^TVjhfhr,

= adhyayai),

i^;

to

+ i=^adhyayi,

adhyai

pres. (atm. only) ^nft^,

1st pret. ^Ufif^ {adhi

")

r.

98.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.

114

i^,

Pot.

&c.

2d pret.

&c.

3d pret. vS^iHim'

^5NtfT,

also

make ^g^

terminations.

'')

^^, ^5.

^cT^rftr),

1st fut. ^EftrTTfw"

^,

2d

fut. wluiifH

&e.

before the consonantal

W^^, &c., after the analogy of

the vowel
) p.

dual Tf^'^

Vedas

(in the

^j^cJiPh

atm. pres.

w may

) p. 70- c.

Imp.

1^"

makes

It

"^.

p. 75. e.

stuv

terminations ; thus,

and rarely stav before

See the table, p. 73.

<=)

'')

79./

p.

82. a.

Root -^

" to say."

^',

Inf.

(p. 70. c.).

PARASMAIPADA.

ATMANEPADA.
Prei'ent.

First Preterite.
1^

^1^

^1"
4^^ri

TMflqlrt^

Impe rative.
^^T^

^iftll

^=N^

i=lH^

1?
1"'
Pot. par. KTit,

The other

1st fut.

grf^',
)

"g^imi;^.

"f;Tr:,

tenses are from

-^^W,

Borrowed from '^^

2d

-^^t ^^qr:,

atm.

w^
3d

fut. ^^irftl,

'')

&c.

the root

as,

pret.

f^,

2d pret. ^fM

^(^\

sing. '^rrW

The

radical

8d

sing.

vowel

^TT?

is

Root

2d dual ^TT^^

Sd dual ^l^rf:

^) r.

^(p. 70.

10. |.

d.)

*) p.

Inf.

76. d.

')

^^, "to

p. 88. J.

) r.

kill.''

First Preterite.

^^f

^M^H

^^?JT

T^:

^^H,

^ar^

"3?^

Tit:

vf^

^t^i

^Tfin

T|FT

^ftr

^ffl

thus,
^^TT?!.

7. 3. 88.

^W.

V^l

3d plur.

Pdnini,

PARASMAIPADA.
Present.
^r.H

du.

For these are sometimes substituted the termina-

here changed to uv instead of av.

In the Vedas abravam occurs.

&c.

p. part. -^li*.

tion of the 2d pret. of a defective root 'ST? with a present signification

2d

125. m.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 115

^^,

Pot.

Imperative.

inrftTT or

fut. ^nTrfw",

^^

&c.

TF5

Or

p. 82.

^.

") p.
r.

c.

125.

Root

69. a.

<=)

p. 77.

2d pret.

80.

2d

fut.

'^rnr

(p. 70. e.).

Infin.

<)

mftnf

Substituted from

^i^ira"

w^rr^H

^T^rnf

^r^iB

^f^

^j^iiff

^r%Ft

^rnrw:

part.

2^11

note

Pot. f^-mt, &c.; 2d pret. ^I^rm;

2d future,

1st future, ^rrftr?nfw;

p. 69.

TO

" to nile."

^j^n^

^nftranfir;

^^

p.

First Preterite.

Imperative.

*)

^rnmi fir,
&c.

'^^Tf>I4^

1st

o.

Present.

*)

miM

^) p.

c.

&c.

3d pret.

part.
")

&c.

inn^, dual irfk^'

J.

r^, p. 68. g.

'')

Or ^l^t,

The

3d pret. '^rf^";

the final being changed to Visargah instead of

termination dhi (corresponding to the Greek

to roots ending in consonants, but

was

f^

(r. 92.)

Oi)

Infin.

if

<")

p. 83._;.

r.l25. n.

" to hate."

ATMANEPADA.

PARASMAIPAD/I.
Present.

First Preterite.

^^H

^rfk^f?

^rfsrfxi

wriTSi;
SHfaM-t^

t.

belongs

originally applicable to roots ending in vowels.

See Prof. Johnson's Mahabharata Selections, p.l07. '^mdipil.

Root

p.

'%F^

ir?mfii

116

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.

Imperative.

fSTT

f^t, fk^im, &c.

f^f^ 1st fut,

Pot. par.
par.

f^

3d pret.

atm.

shP^kI'',

atm. fg^hl,
^^Flfw',

rg Mlvf

^T|

bened. fi^qro", fg^fN"

^fgrfsj;

2d

; ,

&c.

cond.

2d pret.

fut. %^iTf*T^,
'^H^iftH,

i^

'STi^;

p. part. fgr'.
)

p. 68.

e.

") p.
e) p.

p. 80.

68.

d.

83. k.

Root ^^.

<=)

"

')

p. 69. a.

p. 85. e.

Inf.

Or ^r%^:

0)

')

r.

125.

p. 09.

note

*) p.

J.

08. /.

i.

^f^, "to weep"

Present.

(p. 70. d.).

First Preterite.

Pot.

Imperative.

;^?it,

2d pret.

^^,

1st fut.

^ n^rilfa , 2d fut. trf^arrftr, 3d pret.

i

^r^^", bened.
p. part.

")

Bopp compares the terminations

legisti, legit,

legimus,

legitis, legunt.

Rooi

'If-

^?n^, cond. ^rdi^,

^1^.

of this tense to the Latin terminations in

^)

Inf.

Or^T^^t.

^.

")

Or^j^t^hf.

"to milk."

Present.

^b

First Preterite.

'SI^

^^b

'^rvt^"

^rvtoR

'^^'b
^j|nn

legi,,

'')p. 83. A.

^^

^S^

^^4?t

'Hg^n^

^1^

^^^Mi:

^i^y^\

^^'tsr

^i^A

^^'^i

^^^Ml

'^rpiT

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION.

117

Imperative.

<^^w^

'{^^N^

Pot. par.

^tnnfw, atm. ^^tmrt"

atm. ^pfhr

cond. 'STVt^
) p. 69.

|^;

atm.

^?ri",

2d

fut. vtr^TTfir',

atm. ^snft^
^)

i.

p. part,

p. 68. h.

atm.

atm.

g^;

Vt^;

1st fut.

bened.

bened. ^^TT^, atm.

pn^,

'^sfhi''

gnf

p. 69. a.

Y^
^^Hl

|^,

2d pret. par.

3d pret. ^T^*. atm. W^ft^"

^^mi
^^Irtl

^ and S^,

"*)

like terminations

beginning with a sibilant, have the effect of throwing back the aspirate (which has

been changed to g) on the

initial

of the root.

p. 84. note.

*) p. 83. k.

EXAMPLES OF IRREGULAR PRIMITIVES OF THE THIRD

CONJUGATION (r. 93.).
R'oot>|.

hW, "to

Infin.

support," "bear."

PARASMAIPADA.
Present Tense.

"I support" or "bear."

f^^rf^ bibharmi,

f<i|Me|:

bibhrivah,

fgfWH: bibhrimah.

f^Hf^"

bibharshi,

f^vrm

bibhrithah,

r|^Vf bibhritha.

fl*rf^

bibharti,

f^wu:

bibkritah,

f^^ffTf bibhrati.

First Preterite.
^rf^*?t. abibharam,

'^^<4>T^ abibhriva,

^rf%)ra abibhrima.

^fV^T. abibhar,

^fojUil abibhritam,

4ir?*ff1 abibhrita.

'^r<4^

^f^HlTT

Wf^>T^

abibhar.,

abibhritam.,

abibharuh.

Imperative.

f^^l flLI

bibhardni,

f^ tjf^

bibhrihi,

f^H%

bibhartu,

PmHUH

f^WT

f^WjT

bibhrita.

"f^JJH"

bibhratu.

bibhritam,

f^MTft bibhritdm.

Pot. f^>jTiT hihhriyam,

1st pret.

f^^:, &c.

'3^f^^ ^f^>J^:, &c.

pot.

2d pret. par. '^>tr, dual ^pr, atm.

2d

fut.

HftTqTftT\

^r>jpR\ ^>pn:. &c.

bibhardma.

^fift^m bibhardva,

atm.

hI^

p.

pres. atm.

"pT>jfhT

f%J^

f^^,

&e.

imp. fw>^, f^>p5r, &c.

^;

1st fut.

part,

jp

>T#Tfw^ atm. irtr^;

3d pret. ^on^'

atm.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION.

118

i")

Cf. the h&tin fers, /ert^ferifmiSjfertis^/erunt.

vowel

ri is

changed to ar, the rule at

sentence.

r.

'')

21

e)

p. 75. a.

) r. 7.

Or

p.

h)

79./

Since the

wf^>T:.

p. 69. a. applies to this verb.

") r. 93. last

p. 79. c.

')

p. 82./.

J) p. 83.(7.

Root ^.

^,

Infin.

"to give."

(p. 71. a.).

PARASMAIPADA.
Present Tense
l^^fj

^r^rftr daddsi,

^r^

^^rfir daddti,

r^ dattah^

^r^rS^l

^ItC^TTT

^<^

adaddty

i^^Tff

Pot.

imp,).

^;

&c.

pot.

2d pret. atm.

p. part.

^)
*)

?f^,

" Let

me

give."

daddva,

A.^W daddma.

dattam,
dattdm^

^, ^,

^,

(^if^iipH^;

^f^

dadiva,

^^Tff;

dadathuh,

(^rt*

dadatuh.

^f^ ^,

3d

da^te.

^^

dadatu.

&c.

1st

pret.

SHt^n*

pret.

"

gave."

^f^

^5; daduh.

^f?f^, &c.

^^

dadima.

1st

fut.

bened. ^TTw';

par.

^Tirrftl*

cond.

5S^T^;

^^

Cf. eftw/w, p. 69. note *.

Or ^^ni.
p. 85. a.

adadma.

^^.

^^ dadau,
^f^ daditha,
^^ dadau.

fut.

giving."

41(^41

Second Preterite.

2d

was

adadwa.,

pres. atm.

"

^^^d; adaduh.

^^

^,

'^^fif dadati.

^^ii adatta.

daddtu,

^751 dattha.

^*^H\ adattam,

<^t^|'(

"^f^" dehi,

^^ dadmah.

W^ adattam,
Imperative

^^rftr daddni,

give."

datihah,

First Preterite.

adaddh,

dadwah,

^^ffir daddmi,

^I^^ adaddm,

"

Cf. the Latin dedisti.

J) r.

125.

c.

p. 83.

note

Or

t-

^^.

*=)

p. 71. a.

8) p.

79.

") p.
e.

") p.

76. a.
83.

i.

;.
;

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION.

Root

Inf. "MTff

VT.

119

" to place," &c.

(p. 71. a.)

Present

jPe>; Preterite.
b

^TfiT'

^5^.

^m:

^vnftr

vw:

vw

^vrfk

vw:

^vrfiT

Pot.

^Vj;

^, &c.

VTrTTftT

^TVTr;
)
;

^,

p. part,

Cf.

p. 83.

2d

Ti6r,ixi^

i^m, &c.
VTWifH

fut.

p. 83.

'')

TlBrjai.

TiOiji,

) r.

Root

125.

note

") p.

Pot. irai, &c.

*) r.

>)

^) p.

") p. 76. a.

fut.

p. part,

if^H^',

^i^i(h

^nr^N"

"ST^, &c.

i^i

2d pret. if^''

3d pret. ^r^rftr^*;

bened. ^rrnt

p. 85. a.

p. 82. d.

Root

before the consonantal terminations not

vft.

) r.

125.

f^>f^:*

f^>fN:

f^i^TEr

f^>ft^

f|Hlt(

ftwfrf

f^jfhr:

pAiMirrt

radical

vowel

Iff^fij

imp. f^Hinf^,

^ftr^nr

^f<f*/l^

4ifsi*flH

^f%^

'srf^^rhri

'srf^ir^

f^Ttf^,

f^^,

&c.

du. ftfwi^; 1st fut. ^Tnfw; 2d fut. ihirf^; 3d pret.

The

Or

c.

First Preterite.

f^nH^T

")

=)

J^, " to fear."

Inf.

Present.

l^^

This root changes a to

Pot. f^ifNt, &c.

76. a.

First Preterite.

2d

71. a.

marked with P, and drops a altogether before the vowel terminations.

e)

1st

eond.

Inf. ^Tff, " to quit."

1|T.

imp. ^^ fn

^Trnfw;

93.

c.

^nr^

cond. ^TfR^;

^;

atm.

&c,

^JVT^n:,

bened. ^^n^

t.

Present.

1st fut.

2d pret. par.

3d pret. "WsfC

'^r^,

1st pret.

f^^

p. 86. a.

i.

^VTK, ^VT^, VW, VIT, ^>nH, v^,

Vi^, >T^, ^ar^, &c.

^,

imp.

pot. i^irhr;
flit.

^",

imp. ^inftr,

pres. atm.

may be

whenever Guna does not take

2d pret. f^>TnT'

^^^^

p. part. ifhr.

optionally shortened (psffimt) before a consonant,

place.

") r.

93. last sentence.

^^ r.

98.

'')

p. 82./.

120

EXAMPLES OF IRREGULAR PRIMITIVES OF THE FIFTH

CONJUGATION (r.94.).
Root

Infin. ^Ttf,

^rni.

"to obtain."

PARASMAIPADA.
Present Tense.

"

I obtain."

WTSftftr dpnomi,

Wrsrar dpnuvah,

>i||MHt

dpnumah.

^rrsitf^ dpnoshi,

'^UVTV, dpnuthah,

WT^^

dpnntha.

^TSftfff ilpnoti.

'^rnnn dpnutah,

Wnr^f^

i^jr*^ Preterite.

<U\)m dpnavam^
^I^Tl:

dpmh,

iHTH^if dpnot.

was obtaining."

'^|M( dpnuva,

^^TMH dpnuma.

^IMii dpnutam,

2<TMri

dpnutam,

^TTKirt

Imperative.

'^ilMmPn dpnavdni,

"

" Let me obtain."

^nrr^TT apnavama.

dpnutam,

^rr?rff

dpnuta.

^rMc|T dpnuvan.

"tNIMm^ apnavava,

-^IMP^ dpnuhi,

apnuvanti.

'4IIM(i

dpnuta.

WTSfnt dpmtu.

Pot.

^irnn dpnutdm.

3d pret.

apnuyam,

'?TT5^

2d pret. ^^n^"
'^rnr"

")p.76./.

apnuyah,

^IM^I:

dual ^iPuM

1st

>NIM<1H dpnuvantu.

fiit.

^m4

bened. ^|U(|^; cond.

apnuyat,

2d f ixt.

&c.

jjmmrH "

p. part. ^btth.

'=)p. 83. A.

'')p.80.

Root ^n^.

^!J^IIH

^smnf^w";

Infin.

-eiP^lrf

"to pervade," "obtain," "enjoy

ATMANEPADA.
First Preterite

Present.

w^^

"^n^

Pot. ^^cf)n

^nf^rf^^
8)

This

&c.;

P^iau , &c.

root,

^i^M

imp. ^pgt,

VHM^*, ^mP^I^

'sr^^

1st

fut.

'^r<4

^r^,

'HP^ i illV

i^^Pig

^Tr^;*rff

^^<=(Nt, &c.
2d

bened. ^rf^RHi; cond.

2d pret.

^%^'; 3d pret.
Wlf^; p. part. ^iWfut.

although not ending in a double consonant, requires that the redu-

plicated syllable be dn, see p. 75./.

^)

Or ^IT^.

')

Or ^T^.

'')

p. 82. a.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SEVENTH CONJUGATION.

^.

Root

Infin. T(T^, " to

Present

^laifM

T^:
^^:

^ratfir

^Tfff:

^ISH'T

Pot. ^RR'T, &c.

&c.

"^r^i

W^tm

^i^vi,

^r^i^;

^I^T^
^r^TT

^i^^ir

w^RR^

^^i^rti

^sr^^

^^1^

\3

imp.

5i*h"=Jir1,

2d

&c.

2d pret.

fut. ^ra^nfir'';

3d pret.

dual, ^ifti^*,

^r^rnfi";

^s^ifi";

p. part. ^^5.

'=)p.83. A.

'')p.80.

c.

be able."
First Preterite.

1st fut. ^rarfw";

'')p.76.

Root ^.

"to hear."

InfiD. ^fhf,

Present.

i?'m^ Preterite.

^npim

sjqro^

^raflf^

^|iyvi:

5M^

'H^r^ifli

^^nirif

vj^mm

wrtw

9[^d:

^npfnT

^r^ptrtir

^i^j^

^^qpn^

Pot. "5ITO

dual

^r^

imp. ^nsr^rfW,

^n!i,

fut. iiilrilftH ^

1st

121

^rotw, ^nj^rr^, &c.

2d

fut. ^Tl ^Tfil

'sqjWT

2d pret.

3d pret.

mrR
^mA

pass. part. ^nf.

)r. 21.

'')0r5mj.
*)p.79./.

p. 73.

')Or^nWJ.

See the scheme of terminations,

'')

Op. 82./.

EXAMPLES OF IRREGULAR PRIMITIVES OF THE

SEVENTH CONJUGATION (r.95.).
Root f^.

%^,

Infin.

Present. "

cut."

f^HPu chhinadmi,

f^irSl chhindwah,

(^hQv

fijrVJ';''

chhinatsi,

f^flf% chMnatti,

" to cut."

chhinthah^

"

chhindmah.
chhintha.

fsp^fiT

ftpff:" chintah,

First Preterite.

fi&^H',

fs^

was

clJiindanti.

cutting."

^rfgrf^

achhinadam,

siir^;g achhindwa,

wftFH ac/Jiindnia.

^rf^r^"

achhinat,

-nr^tA achhintam,

wfe^iT achhinta.

^fti^ri t achhiritdm,

^srf^RT'T achliindan.

VHTaWrf

achhinat.,

Pot. ftRTT,

&c.

imp.

f^fSf^Tftr,

ftrfvg",

f^fj^, &c.

atm. pres.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SEVENTH CONJUGATION.

122

f5%, I^R^, ftr^. &c.

nftrr^,

&c.

3d pret. par. ^iln#';

pass. part. fg[^

Roots ending in

diately precedes.

)p.80.

^rf?^;

pret.

d may

or

1st fut.

i^nfw*; 2d

atm. ^arfsjfwS ^ft[WT:. ^rfge^,

') p.

')P-82./.

^.

and

t,

when n imme'')Orfgf^.

69. a. or^ftpiT:.

'')r.l25./

)p.83.(/.

^,

Infin.

"to

hinder."'

First Preterite.

Present?j"*ljflM

^isan

^^WK

^4x^

4l<>rUi

^jUlfrM

^^:

<5'^

m..^

^5T^^

^'^:

^^fK

'itj-i

-i^<5v^^

fsUlOE!

^sg

Pot. ^rait; imp. ^pwrfr,

1st pret. ^fjT-y, -^Kjc^i:,

^^;

^d^; atm.
^rd?ff';

1st

atm. -a^jfrH^

R. 95.

';p.82./.

")

8)

&c.

fut.

^ijr^, &c.

pot.

{j-^il*!;

^TgfTfw^

">)

^?Tf ^H^m> &c

>

R. 91.

^5^

atm.
^)

&c.

2d pret. par.

p. 69. a., or ^ST^TUr:.

p. 80.

Infin. iift^, " to join.'

Atmanepada.

^resent.

Pot. par. ^ailt, &e.

atm.

;^,

3d pret. par.

First Preterite.

atm. ^^4|, &c.

atm. ^^t^,

^,

imp. par. ^h^iTh. 5fHr^

J^, ^^nrnt,

1st fut. 'xft^TftT

^T^ftl*, ^JXpPTT..

Cf. the

Present

First Preterite.

i^TDI^;

fut. Oi^jj fa ";

2d

p. 67. a.

^.
.

^^^"l

atm. pres.

p. part. ^if.

p. 68. 6.

Parasmaipada.

^iftif

imp.

p. 83. g.

Root

imp. f^H^,

reject these letters before th

Or ^PedH(| &c.

")

fTgr^;

Root

pot.

2d pret. par. fqi[^; atm. f^ft[^

fut io^nft?*;
&c.

1st

2d

^r^>

&c.

fut. lihpnfiT

&c.; pass. part.

Latinjungimusjungunt.

=) p.

69. a.

2d pret. par.
3d pret. par.

^.

^) p. 82./,

( p.

83. g.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE NINTH CONJUGATION.

Root f^^.

"to injure/

Infin. f^ftrj,

First Preterite,

Present.

Pot. f\^wr, &c.

r^TfirilPw ";

2d

imp. n^^fuPri

According to Carey fj|*Tf^.

^sft^

^ft^

^f^

^f?^

^n^i

^^

&c.

2d pret. firf^';

1st fut.

3d pret. ^rf^f^i^"; pass. part, f^ftnr.

fut. f^ftrorfir;

^)

Or

^rf^

')

p- 75. c.

J) p. 64.,

For examples of verbs of the 8th conjugation the student

ferred to the auxiliary verb

the tables, pp. 94

123

97.

kri, at p. 101,

and the verb

These are the only two roots in

note

is

re-

Hr|[

EXAMPLES OF IRREGULAR PRIMITIVES OF THE NINTH

CONJUGATION (r. 97.)
Infih. ITT^, " to know.""

Parashaipada.

Present Tense.

" I know."

^\^\Ch jandmi,

l[jl^mjdnlvah,

"^(Twftm jdnimah.

^lw\\C^jd7idsi,

^\w([yil jdnlthak,

'^{jfft^jdnitha.

"^fimfft Jdndti,

-Sfj-jftir.Jdmtah,'

lfU{fiJtjdnanti.

First Preterite

" I

was knowing."

^nrnn ajdnam,

^nrnfr^ ajamva,

^nrnrrt ajandh,

^HjH^A ajdnltam^

VMvllHlff ajdntta.

'^IHHIff ajdndt^

^^Hlril qjdmtdm,

SSHTlvfrf ajdnan.

Imperative.

^alltOH ajdnima.

" Let me know."

^lf\\^^jdnd,ni,

-^(^^[^ jdtMva,

"Sdl^m jandma.

lfjt{tf% jdnlhi,

"^^r^tk janitam^

IfT^^jdmta.

in*11rf jdndtu,

irnftrrt jdnltdm,

3tl1*H

Athanepada.

Present.

-"

in

this con-

jugation that are ever likely to occur.

Root ^.

t-

jdnantu.

know."

n% jane,

STXtft^ Jdnivahe,

lf[tftvi^jdnimahe.

9||*f)^ jdnlshe,

alHlQ jdndthe,

IfTrft^ jdnldhwe.

911*0^ jdnite.

WRT^ jdndte,

"^fT^a jdnate.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE NINTH CONJUGATION.

124

First Preterite.

"

was knowing."

ajani,

5S1in<fNrf^ ajdravoM;

^TlfrfNf^ ajdnimahi.

^nrrffNlTJ ajdnlthdh,

'^nrnrniT ajdndtham^

^nn*f^^ ajdnidhvmm.

^nrrsfhr ajanlta,

'gnfnrnn ajdndtam^

^rSfTTiI ajdnata.

^nuftr

Imperative.

" Let me know."

-^f^jdnai,

JTIHN^ jdndvahai,

iffrft^ jdnishwa,

'^ I

afMIH^ jdndmahai.

HT V|i jdndthdm^

ill'tOui

^\AM

'^HTfri jdndtdnu,

Pot. par.

wnfW, WRhn:,

2d pret. par. IT^"

2d

fut. ^hji Ph

"

) p. 76. a.

")

^rrfHnr^, &c.

dual *rf5R. &c.

3d pret. ^r^rrftw"
p, 79.

c)

g.

Root

atm. ^1^14, ^m1vii:, &c.

atm. i%

atm.

'STgrftr

Infin.

xr^.

1^,

p. part. gjir.

"to take."
First Preterite.

^1^

^PI^jN

^ji^Ih

^T^rn

^'i^lrt

^'i^^rt

^'i^K

^'I^f^

^'i^l.

Imperative.

Pot.

Jj^1i(i,

iPrr^", ^*in$vi

') p.

77-/.

')

fut. ^rnrrfw"

1st.

p^ 82. d.

Present.

of the Siddlianta

jdnidhwcan.

jdnatdm.

&c.

2d

1st fut. J^^^|^l^H

2d

3d pret.

p. part.

This root lengthens the inserted

>t|J

j^lN

<=)

i.

Kaumudi, but Carey and Wilkins

pret.

dual wnfi^", &e.

This

is

fut. jj^lmifa

^T^.

on the authority

give "eiJ^f^M.

AU agree in

making the atm. ^xn^tf^.

Root

Infin. ^f^i^,

"?r^.

"to

eat."

First Preterite.

Present.

^Viiln

^PsN:

s^*i:

^rrat

^rr^N

^sTOTftr

^n^.

^jylvj

^mi:

^Nijyld

^mlif

V^lPri

'^rotrr;

^P^fnT

^TTOTiT

^T^

Pot.
fut.
)

^rwW. &c.

^%ri
R. 97.

ftH

last

2d

imp. ^r^rf^, ^5IM*> &c.

fut. ^r^luiipH;

paragraph.

")

p. 75. /.

fflril

2d pret.

^hi^h

^rnff

3d pret. '?rr%4"; pass. part,

'

p. 82.

c.

1st

ssif^lri.

EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE NINTH CONJUGATION.

Root ^.

^,

Infin.

" to buy."

First Preterite.

Present.

aliu iftt

"^NfNn

*l^ni

jfl^iflri:

^hnfffT

sS

fff

Pot. "aSNfNt, &c.

f%^;

f^^rfim or

3d

pret. ^l^q"

Cf.

imp.

tfllUlfH

^)

ire/.^ajua*.

dual f^f^ffi^^';

CL

eireppav.

^ or m.

Root

*l*iri

'^rgRNft^

^tflnjlH

^ar^Nrn

^jfliiflil

^srsRhsftir

^r^Nrnr

^raSNrhrt

^^iu|^

aWtff

^prrftr

^^uIvj;

^|#5i

^*iiifir

'^^JiftiT:

^icjiufif

m^

imp.

jitra. irei^',

wdt^lPH
)

&c.,

')

p. 75. 6.

") p.

&c.

This verb
there

is
is

r.

74. t-

")

P- 82./.

^kii*^*i

^h^mi

^<^*!flcl

^Sf^iulrt

^^^U^

-il<!^AUlril

^<jJ<U^

^^;

atm. pres.

2d pret. par. ^^5^R^

1st fut.

also of the

^5rf5QTTftT'*

or itrQufftT

6th conjugation

1st pret. ^rerftj;

dwft.'q,
;

&e.
2d

dual

pot.

riWPl.^'

fut. {sjPl.mifa

''

^,j*uir*<,

^iHilAfil,

WWrfir, ^E5^t>

trropvvfu,

aTopm, &c. ; and

p. 76-

>)

e.

<=)

p. 76. 6.

')

p. 79. 6.

p. 82. a.

126. d.

EXAMPLE OF CAUSALS, OR VERBS OF THE TENTH

CONJUGATION (p. 86. 107.).
r.

Root ig^

or

^jft^'.

a striking resemblance to the Greek

imperf. iaroppw, earopwi, &c.

t)

iwrftr;

^"^st^

ws^nn

3d pret. ^rerrfts"; pass. part.

when

imp. w^mPd

fut.

First Preterite.
^^Tsjhr:

2d

Infin. ^trftj. " to spread."

4!cj<!f)m

Pot. k^i^i\\

2d pret. fs(m^^

Present.

^^mfH

&c.

1st fut. ^rf ftn

^.

pass. part.

125

drish.

Inf.

<*|ir*li[

Pauasmaipada.

" to cause to see," " show."

Present.

"

cause to see."

^fpITT: darshayamah.

^ ||*< T (H darshaydmi,

^flWR:

darsfuiydvah,

^Irqftr darshayasi,

^|Wi:

darshayathxih,

^fl^VJ darsJiayatJia.

^fpcrfw darshayati,

i^^H

darsfiayatah,

^ffrf^

darshayaiUi.

EXAMPLE OF CAUSAL VERBS.

126

" I was causing to see."

Imperfect.

^<||^N

^(^'fl^ii odarshaT/atam^

darshayeyam,

<^||l)4

darshayeh,

(^|)I|:

darshayet,

^|)l)(1

"

^ST^fnTfT adarshayan.

may

cause to see."

^fWTW darshayeva,

^flM^ darskayema.

^^l^teT darshayetam,

^^^

^ffl^Tlt

Imperative.

^'

darshayetdm,

(^^4||c(

|<|l^ darshaya,

(^'|J4|f|

<?|nif darshayatu,

(^ fibril

^fnTrT darshaydma.

darshayatam^

^mi(

darshayatdm,

"

I caused to see."

^fTTRTftr^ darshaydmdsiva,

^ll^T'Hlf'HVf darshaydindsitha,

^fnTPTW^

darskayitdsmi,

gli r^ri l fa darshayitdsi,

<^|lfiT ri 1

darshayitd,

^fnTWlftnT darshaydmdsima.

daj-shaydmdsathuh, ^fnTWra darshaydmdsa.

^^jPHHWKl darshaydmdsatuh, f^^M\H\m darshaydmdsuh.

First Future.
^^rfirrrrfiET

darshayata.

^^fc^if darshayantu.

^|)mmf(^ darshaydmma^

darsJiaydmdsa,

darshayeyuh.

to see."

darslwydva^

Second Preterite.

darshayeta.

t^fl^flj

" Let me cause

^fnnfT darshaydni,

^If'MWm

adarshaydma.

^T^fnTW adarshayata.

adarsluiyatdm,

'4{<^|l^fli

Potential.

-H^^mH

adarsJuiydva,

^t^|i4 adarshayam,

^T^pH adarshayah,
^^^TI A adarshayat,

"

I will cause to see."

^frftniT^I darshayitdswah,

^frftfin'E'K darsJiayitdsmaJi.

^^^(f^itTWfl darshayitdsthah,

^^TftTfTTOT darshayitdstha.

^^Uitfl^ darshayitdrau,

^ftftnTTG darshayitdrah.

Second Future.

" I will cause to see."

<^rx(mi(H darshayishydmi,

(^Itf^UlN: darshayishydvah,

^flP^tmH: darshayishyd,mtM

^IffxTBlftl darshayishyasi,

t^flf^UIVj: darshayishyathah,

^^Hmvf

c^tfr^Ulfil darshayishyati,

^frftpTtn darshayishyatali,

^llfqufftf darshayishyanti.

3d pret.
pres. ^fi^,

or

^|ni^,

t^^Ufi,

<|l^l!4,

^|j^,

^frf^

^l^ftftl^;
') or

^g^''
&c.

^1^^; bened. ^'5^';

2d pret.

3d pret. ^<{]g^,
p. part,

&c.

cond. ^r^frftrar;

1st pret. 'g^ft^

^fpn^;

-^i<<{lg^lvj T:

1st

&c.

darshayishyaiha.

fut.

Atm.
imp.

pot. ^i^q^i;

2d

^frftnnt;

bened.

^|yn<tfl<i

109.

110.

fut.

cond.

^f^^

^ Im i ijctiH, rfara/^ayanc^feara,

After this model

may

p. 87.

r.

108.

be conjugated

") r.

all

') r.

causal verbs.

'^)

r.

125.

r.

127

128.

EXAMPLES OF PASSITE VERBS,

Root ^.

^,

Infin.

"to be given."

Present "

^^Hd

adiyatlidh,

adlyata,

am

(p. 89.

r.

111.).

(p. 90. r. 112.).

given."

(()l4H^ diydvahe,

^NtT^

'^l)v) dlyethe,

^Nt^^ diyadhwe.

^t^

^Hf^

dlyete,

First Preterite.

^jAq^j

"

diydmahe.

dlyante.

was given."

^j^hrnTf^ adiydvahi,

^T^hTRf^ adlydmahi.

^^l^virt adiyethdm,

'ST^hlS^ adiyadhwam.

'^({i^dit

adiyetdm,

Potential.

^'^

may

^T^hpir adiyanta.
be given."

gt^^rf^ diyevahi,

^^H?i_ diyemahi.

^4|VJ|t diyethdh,

^^l^miq] diyeydthdm,

^t^l4 dlyedhwam.

^t^

(fi^^lrll

dlyeta,

dlyeydtdm,

<{ii<l.H

diyeran.

Imperative. " Let me be given."

^hrR^
^hr^

diyaswa,

^i\A\ diyatdm,

dtydvahai,

^Nl?

^TCJlt diyetdm,

^M*A{ diyantdm.

^f^^
'^

^^Tn

dadishe,

dadivahe,

First Future.

l^rftnn^

"

^TftnTT^

ddyitahe,

Second Future.

^T^

da^e, or

^T^rnt

(^ifllU^ ddyishye,

^n^Pq

a</t?A,

yPrivnt adithdh, or

l-dli^lfi^ai: addyishthdJi,

wrniflflaye," it was given,

^TfTm^

"

I shall

ddyishydvahe,

ddtdsmahe,

r[\m
<^

P^j

"I was given."

H\ ddsydmahe, S^c.

m W^ ddyishydmahe^c.

^ftfUff^ adishmahi.

^^

*r^mfi adishdthdm,

^fftff

^^iP^mviJ addyishdthdm,

-^j^prftTt^

j 'ar^MTHI adishdtdm,

^fHTTcT adishata.

Cii^Ct. addyishmahi.

adidhwam.

addyidhwam.

^.,
adaytshdtdm, ^J^lVJvnf addyishata.
*

^<^ll*4mrt'l

Sfc.

^[fvfjrm^ddyUdsmahe,Sjc.

^I^rjfTqpK^ addyishwahi,

%^).

be given."

nf^Kir^ adishwahi,

or

('^r^lfUPq addyishi,

dadidhwe (or

dadire.

^^A^

ddsydvafi,

^rftmrat

dadimahe.

I shall be given."

ddyitdswahe,

TTiird Preterite.
j

i^f^SEJ'

<MI^^ ddtdswaJie,

da<aA<!, or
j <^l(<l^

<^f^*i^

daddthe,

^^Tn daddte,

dade,

dlyadhwam.

" I have been given."

Second Preterite.

<^f(^l(

^>\\H^ diydmahai.

(()^V|1 d^yethdm,

EXAMPLES OF PASSIVE VERBS.

128
Bened.

or

^[^Hxi

Root

Present.

Inf.

^rftrtfhj,

Mm

be made " or " done "

First Preterite.

fw^

fgi^

Potential.

" to

cond. ^RfTf^ or ^r^ftr^-

"I am made."

f?KK^

fmk

&c.

f^ fm^
may be made.'
Mm^\

f^t^

^rsh^vii

^rfgRu^

^srWirf

^r^fc^^ii

" Let me be made."

f^PT^

r**ifl

fmsk

fwnn

f^an

l^nnn

First Future.

4^1^^

(^utrt

^^

^W^

was made."

"I

^r*Mji:

Second Preterite.

^^

^rfgpnr

Imperative.

" I

(p. 90. b.).

'

or

^iflill^

Second

efc^lW^,

&c.

chlPMI^^ <*lftHIW^,&c.

fut. Rftw

or

aWfiLu),

&c.

Third Preterite.

^(^

^Jc^nP^ or ^ehifijMr^

ij<jmn$ or ^ToFrfi^Hf?

itic|Vji:

or

-ychif^ai:

^|mvir or ^ToRrfisFif

^r^

^Tofirft,

"

was done,"

-iicjmdl

or ^curiPM

Bened.

The

it

^^ or

gsrftshl

or

cond.

or

SHchpLu^

or iHcdifu?

^dkHA or

'srarftsTiri

^et,

r*.Mri

^tehifiu).

following is an example of a passive verb from a root

ending in a consonant.

Root
Pres- ^3^,

" I

Tp(.

am

^aTprjn:, ^^iinr, &c.

2d pret. 55^, j^i^M,

2d

fut.

li^,

fitting," 5511%,

pi^,
^5^, &c

pot.

&c.

be

fitting."

^Wfi> &c.
imp.

1st fut.

-^t^, &c.

TThSR^,

^Tf^f^, ^WTVlt. &c.

Infin. t^H, " to

1st pret. ^ij^^,

5^, ^iim,

ift^,

^fl^hlfi

JWirt, &c.;
'ft^. &c.

3d pret. ^^a;^, ^i^^NK

bened. JT^hr, &c.

cond. ^i(\^, &c.

'rtftr,

129

DESIDERATIVE VERBS.
Although this form of the root rarely appears in

119.

of a verb, yet

Some

character

nouns and participles derived from the desidera-

uncommon

not

tive base are

its

explanation,

(see p. 23.

of

therefore,

its

xiii. r. 40.,

structure

and

p. 141. *.).

indispensable.

is

Moreover, there are certain roots which take a desiderative form,

without exactly

yielding

volitive

signification

and

these, as

being equivalent to primitive verbs (amongst which they are sometimes classed),

may

jugups, " to blame,"

kit;

occur

"to bear," from

Htiksh,

Inbhdts, " to abhor,"

the

in

tij ;

For example,

writers.

best

from the root gup

chikits, " to

cure," from

man;

mlmans, "to reason," from

from badh.
The Terminations.
the terminations of the regular scheme

Desideratives take

a.

and their inflection either in the par. or atm.

at p. 63.,

mined by the practice of the primitive verb.

budh, taking both inflections in the primitive,

may

may

deter-

take both in

the desiderative {bubodhishami, &c., or bubodhisfie, &c.)

taking only the atm. in the primitives,

is

Thus, the root

and

labh,

take only the atm.

in the desiderative {lipse, &c.),

FORMATION OF THE BASE.

Conjugational Tenses.
b.

and

The
if

from

Thus,

The
the

the primitive (see p.

in
i,

then simply

kship,

&c.)

(f^^'^Tftr chikshipsami,

inserted

the root rejects

affixed.

is

consonant and vowel of the root are reduplicated,

the root inserts

if

affixed

initial

in the primitive,

" to

but

rules laid

down

at p. 75.,

that

is,

o, a,

i,

* And

the vowel
z,

if

ri,

n,

e,

" to

vid,

is strictly

base

is

"^ sih

chikships

know," taking

in conformity with

and that of the vowel of the

analogy of causal third preterites

initial

(p. 88.)

(generally, however, short) is reduplicated for

or ai

but the vowel u for

the root begin with a vowel the reduplication

of the same tense

then ish

xdvidish (tM^f^^rrf'T vividishami, &c.).

reduplication of the consonant

consonant follows the

throw," the

from

79.),

changeable to

s,

thus, from ash, nshish,

and with

ish

w, u,

still

and

o.*

Thus,

follows the analogy

added, ashishi^h.

See p. 89.

;
;

DESIDERATIVE VERBS.

130

from pack, pipoksh ; from

didriksh

drish,
yuj,

yuyuksh

jiv, jijivish

gai, jigas

from

from

but

of ish or s to the

annexation

generally determined by the assumption or

is

of inserted

may

vowel

radical

from

been said that the

reduplicated root
rejection

sisevish

see,

from

from pu, pupmh.

has

It

c.

from

yach, yiyachish

When

the primitive.

in

ish is affixed, the

be optionally changed to Guna.

general

in

Thus, from mud, either mumodish or mumudish.

d When

* is affixed to roots

of lengthening a final

from
tn,

from

chi, chichish;

When

titlrsh*

or

shrit,

as,

From

roots

to tr ; thus,

kri, chikirsh ;

from

tlie

consonant combines with the

rules laid

down

from dah, didhaksh

in pp. 67. 68.

(p. 69.

i'.).

form their desiderative bases anoma-

give," dits {ditsami, " I wish

" to

da,

b)

(p. 68.

The following

lously.

from

final

accordance with

from yudh, yuyuts

e.

has the effect

it

or

ending in consonants, the radical

vowel remains unchanged, but the

initial sibilant, in

ri

shushrush; from

roots

to

ending in vowels

and changing

w,

ap, " to obtain," tps

from dha,

from

dhits ;

to give ")
" to conquer,*"

ji,

from han, " to kill,"

from IT^, f^jl^af^ from ^tj, ^f^
jighans ; from aj^, f^T^
from ^rsR " to be able," f^^ from ^jh " to obtain," f^j^ from

from

jiglsh ;

chiklsh, as

chi,

well as chichish

W.

"ft???;

m^,

'ftn^.

NonConjn^ational Tenses.

The

second preterite

is

dm

formed by affixing

to the desiderative base, as already

formed, and adding the second preterite of either one of the auxiliaries
(see p. 77. g- )

In

all

Thus from pac/t, the 2d

the remaining tenses

it is

pret. pipakshanchakdra, " I

an universal rule that inserted

the desiderative base, whether formed by s or

ish,

atm. pipakshishiya,

(formed with

3d

ish

&jc.

from

<Sfc.

(fonn

1.

p. 81.);

2d

bened.

condit. apipakshishyam, Sjc.

may make

^^

t,

^vrt

Thus,

fut.

pipakshishydmi,

par.

pipakshydsam,

^-c. ;
S^c.

So, also, taking vividish

tnd), the 1st fut. is vividishitdsmi ;

TJ

hhii.

be assumed after

2d

fut. vividishishydmi

pret. avividuthisham^ &^c.

* But the root

or

except in the bened. par.

1st fut. oi pipaksh, 1st pers. sing, pipakshitdsmi, 8[C. ;

3d pret. apipakshisham,

kn

wished to cook."

and

"S,

g|r

131

INTENSIVE OR FREQUENTATIVE VERBS.

even

is

less

used than the deside-

In the present participle, however, and in a few nouns,

rative.
it

form of the root

This

120.

may sometimes

to the radical

shine," " to
shine,"

appear

idea,

and

(r. 38. xiii.

be beautiful," or " to lament."

comes the intensive form

shoshvhhy and shoshubyamuna

Thus, from Mp, " to

dedtpy, " to shine brightly,"

the present participle dedipyamana (see

There

gives intensity

It

124.).

especially in the case of roots signifying " to

from

r. 124.)

from

so also

rud, rorudy

and

shubh,

and rorudyamana.

two kinds of intensive verb, the one a reduplicated

are

atmanepada verb, conforming,

neuter and passive verbs, to

like

the 4th conjugation, and usually found in a neuter or passive signification

the other

reduplicated parasmaipada

The

analogously to the 3d conjugation.

form ever likely to

first

formed

verb,

of these is the only

ot-cur.

The Terminations.

The terminations may be

scheme

at

either those of the atm. of the regular

or the par. of the irregular scheme at

p. 63.,

p. 66.

the former being adapted to that form of intensive which results

from a reduplication of the passive

the latter to that form which

bears analogy to the 3d conjugation;

FORMATION OF THE BASE OF THE ATMANEPADA FORM OF INTENSIVES.

Conjugational Tenses.

The

general rule

is,

that the initial consonant and vowel of the

passive base be reduplicated.

The consonant being

with the

Guna

according to the usual rules

(p. 75.),

the radical vowel, whether

be long or short.

passive

it

base dty (of da, " to give ")

{jehlye,

&c.)

from

from

sftry,

testiry

comes the intensive base ded/y

from pUy, popuy

pdpachy from pach

reduplicated
ri,

then art

msmary from

smat-y

is

if

from

vidy,

substituted in the reduplication,

a medial a,

as ydydchy from ydch, seshevy from ser, lolochy

is

Im), jehiy

btidhy, hohudhy.

If the passive base contain a medial a, long a

as

Thus, from the

from hly (passive of

{dediye, dedlyase, &c., see p. 127.);

vevidy

reduplicated
substitute of

e,

or

o,

from lochy

the same are

:

if

a medial

substituted in the reduplication, as durhirishy from dr'iahy, pari-

sprishy from sprishy.

INTENSIVE OR FREQUENTATIVE VERBS.

132

If a passive base contain fi^ri, this becomes

from fspt

(pass, of oR, "to

"to wander";, the

in the intensive base;

^Q^

with

If the base begin

do").

initial at is repeated,

a, as in

If the passive base contain a nasal after short a, this nasal

passive bases Jajn/, jalpi/, dasJiy, bhajy,

and some

m;

aspanlpady; and {rom chary

from ghrdy,jeghrly

is

often repeated; as

is

from bhram, bambhramy.

may

others,

insert nasals,

Thus jahjapy,

instead of lengthening the vowel in the reduplication.

inserts

^^7T

and the radical a lengthened, thus atdty.

from gam, jan- gamy (^l^u), &c.), " to walk crookedly "

The

as

aty (from ^tZ,

Pady

S^c.

formed chahchury ; from kany,JeghnJy;

from dhmdy, dedhmiy.

Non-Omjugational Tenses.
In these tenses intensives follow the analogy of passives and reject the
Since, however, the base of the second pret. is

formed by affixing

am

affix

polysyllabic forms, p. 77. g-), and since, in all the other tenses, inserted

all

assumed, a coalition of vowels might arise were

cases in

formed the 2d

<SfC.

; dediyitdhe,

^c,
4:c.",

not allowed to retain the

affix.*

adedlyishi,

retainhig

S^-c. :

Sfc. ;]

adediyishye,

2d

Similarly in the other tenses

it.

is

but from dediy,

1st fut. dedipitdhe,

8d

fut. dedipishye, S^c, dediyishye, S^c. ;

bened. dedipishtya, (^c, dedlyishlya, ^c.

is

in all

Thus, from dedlpy

pret. (1st pers. sing.) dedipdhchakre, Sfc. rejecting

dedzydnchakre,
S(C.

it

which a vowel immediately precedes that

?/.

(as usual in

pret. adedipishi,

cond. adedipishyey

Sfc.

FORMATION OF THE BASE OF THE PARASMAIPADA FORM OF INTENSIVES.

Conjugational Tenses.
121.

The

base

is

here also formed by a reduplication similar to that of atmane-

pada intensives ; not, however, from the passive, but from the
root pack,

pdpach

root.

from vid^vevid; from drish, darldrish ; from

Thus from the

kri, charikri.'\

Moreover, in accordance with the rules for the 2d and 3d conjugation (pp. 69. 70.)
the radical vowel requires

Guna

before the

Hence the two bases veved and vevid

<5fc.

/ 1st pret.

terminations of the scheme (p. 66.).

(pres. vevedmi, vevetsi, vevetti ; dual, vevidwah,

avevedam, avevet, avevet, avevidwa,

* In passives

this coalition of

Vriddhi, as of chi to chdy, of

final

vowels

hti

a to ay, as of da to day^ see

is

to hdv,

r.

avoided

by

according to

tlie

pot. vevidydm^Sjc.j

imp.

the change of a final vowel to

and of kri to kdr ; and by the change of

113.

t In the par. form of intensive, the reduplication

or,

Sfc.

general rule dardrish, charkti.

may

also be daridrish, charikri,

NOMINAL VERBS.
vevedani, veviddhi, vevettu, veveddva, vevittam^

133
Again, the base will vary in

&^c.).

accordance with the rules of combination at p. G7., as in budh (pres. bobodhmi,

bobhotsi, boboddhi,
(r.

92. c.) long

bohudhwah,

is

And

&;c.).

in further analogy to the

often optionally inserted before the consonantal

(pres. vevedimi, vevedtshi, vevediti ; dual, vevidwah^

vcdlh, aveoedlt, avevidwa,

Lastly,

y or

iy ;

when

S^c. ;

S^c.

2d conjugation

terminations

1st pret. avevedam, ave-

imp. vevedani, veviddhi, vevedltu.).

the root ends in a vowel, the usual changes take place of

of u and u to uv ; and of ri to r

and

to

as in the roots bhl^ bhu, kri (pres. 1st sing.

bebhemiy bobhomi, charkarmi ; 3d plur. bebhyati, bobhuvati, charkrati).

Non-Conjugational Tenses.

The
and

second preterite follows the usual rule for polysyllabic bases (p. 77.

dm

affixes

from

bhi,

Thus from vid

with the auxiliaries.

bebhydmdsa.

In the other

Guna change

3d

Sfc. ;

in the futures, but admits Vriddhi in the

pret. avevedisham,

;
is

a root ending in a vowel forbids the

fut. (1st sing.) vevsditdsmi, S^c, bebhyitdsmi, S^c. ;

shydmi,

fir),

veviddmdsa

tenses, excepting the bened., inserted

invariably assumed, and before this inserted

usual

(1st pers. sing.),

2d

^c, abebhdyisham,

bebhiydsam ; cond. avevedishyam, abebhyishyam.

fiit.

3d pret.

vevedishydmi,

SfC. ;

Thus,

1st

bebhyi-

8[C.,

bened. vevidydsam, ^c,

This rejection of

Guna

from Forster, but admits of question, especially in the case of roots in m or

is

taken

fi.

NOMINALS, OR VERBS DERIVED FROM NOUNS.

These are formed by adding certain

122.

They are not

of nouns.

there

is

no

three heads

in very

common

limit to their formation.

1st,

transitive

afl&xes to the

crude

use, but, theoretically,

They may be

classed

under

nominals, yielding the sense of per-

making or using the thing or quality expressed

by the noun 2d, intransitive nominals, giving a sense of behaving
like, becoming like, acting like the person or thing expressed by
the noun
3d, desiderative nominals, yielding the sense of wishing
for the thing expressed by the noun.
The latter are rarely found.
forming, practising,
;

The Terminations.
All

a.

p. 63.

the nominal

but

it

verbs

make use

of the regular

scheme

at

should be observed that they are rarely found con-

jugated in any other tense than the present.

Formation cf
b.

the

Base

of Transitive Nominals.

These are formed from nouns in the way that causals are

NOMINAL VERBS.

134

formed from

roots,

vowel or

final

final

by the addition

must be rejected before

" cloth," is

" he

armour" (^^Wfir varmayati)

" to

propose

as

may undergo

"

from varman,

'"

(3d sing,

" to

put on
,

before the affixes lyas and ishtha

are required before this nominal

";

vastrayati,

^r^^^rfir

armour," varmay,

from TPtm, "authority,""' nmi!]^

Whatever modifications adjectives

authority.''

draghay, " to lengthen

Thus, from vastra,

annexed.

this affix is

formed vastray, " to clothe

clothes ")

But the

of ay to the crude.

consonant, and preceding vowel of the crude,

affix

thus,

(p. 47. f.),

" near,"

from antika,

the same

from dirgha, " long,"

neday, " to

make

near," &c.
In the Mitralabha (Prof. Johnson's

by adding the terminations

nal verb formed

" I peck," from

edition, p. 97-) there is

'^^i^,

an instance of a nomi-

noun;

directly to the

thus, 44id|fH,

" a beak."

Formation of the Base of Intransitive Nominals.

The

c.

case,

final of

and ay

the crude of the

noun

is rejected,

act

the part of a wise

" a

tree," drumay, " to

man

" (3d sing. vf^Uril^ri)

be like a tree " (^HWd)

king," rdjay, " to act the king " (o^lNrl).

has a neuter or passive signification, and

the atm.

It

when derived from nouns

" black,"
f^\\i{

to

from druma,
from rajan, " a
;

nominal usually

generally restricted to

expressive of colour

" to blacken "

This
is

*'

however, in an active sense, especially

found,

is

as in the last

Thus, from pandita, " wise," panditUy,

affixed.

from

as,

g^

(<|iU!l|i|i)).

Formation of the Base of Desiderative Noviinals.

d.

These are formed by

however, of this
to change

'^

affix is to

^.

r to

(3d sing, g^fhrfir)

affixing

y to the

change a

final

Thus from

final

vowel of a crude noun.

a or a to

putra,

"a

e,

to lengthen a final

son," putriy,

The
i

eflFect,

or m, and

"to desire a son"

from^a^i, " a husband," patly^ " to desire a husband " (Mifl^fir).

tN^I; from rdjan, rdjly (r. 20. TOnominal verb may also be formed by adding hdmy

So also from ITT^,

A desiderative
kam, " to desire

" ) to

the crude of nouns

a son " (3d sing. U-4c|i|Ujrri)

desire

wealth" (Vti^fri).

or

by

(derived from

thus from putra, putrakdmy, " to desire

affixing sy ;

sa from dhana, dhanasy, " to

CHAPTER

VII.

PARTICIPLES.
This

a subject in

is

some

respects perhaps the

We

that has hitherto engaged our attention.

show, that however complex the structure

chapter to

in the last

of the Sanscrit verb,

commencement

most impoi*tant

have endeavoured

and however repulsive to the student at the

of his

studies,

this

complexity

is

one rather of

theory than practice, and one that hardly extends beyond the pages
of the grammar, and
fined

The cause
best

itself

We

writers.

tenses

purer specimens of Hindu literature.

of this has been

verb expends

provided the attention be con-

is little felt,

the earlier and

to

shown

to be, that the difficulty of the

on tenses that are rarely

are

now

to

if

ever used by the

show that the necessity

for these

superseded by participles, the use of which prevails to

is

an extent wholly unparalleled in any other language, even in

These participles often discharge the functions of

the Greek.

the verb

and are constantly found occupying the place of

itself,

past and future tenses, and

more

especially those of passive verbs

insomuch that an instance of a passive in any other tense than

present

the

or

therefore, of

the

this

idiomatic

position

imperative

rarely

occurs.

The

consideration,

portion of our subject bears most closely upon

structure

of

the language

and so prominent a

do these verbal derivatives hold in the construction of

sentences and

collocation of words,

that an accurate knowledge

of the

mode

affords

the best insight into the peculiarities of Sanscrit syntax,

of their

formation and the nature of their duties

and elucidates many of the

difficulties

of idiom in the cognate

dialects of India.

may

be desirable to premise that the most important of these

participles

are not derived immediately from the verb, but from

It

common

therefore,

source

with the verb,

has not been mixed

viz.

the

root.

The

up with that of verbal

subject,

inflection.

PRESENT PARTICIPLES.

136

although in the very

the participle

instance,

first

and in others which

follow,

deducible directly from a tense.

is

PRESENT PARTICIPLES.

Pahasmaipada.

Formation of the Crude.

123.

These are the only participles that have any

The crude

conjugational structure of the verb.

4;he

with

affinity

formed by

is

substituting at for anti, the termination of the 3d person plural of

the present tense, so that the peculiarities of conjugation necessarily

(3d plur. pres. of tj^,

frMM ghnanti (3d

^,

go,""

3d

"
Thus, from pachanti, " they cook

appear in the participle.

1st conj.),

plur. of han, 2d conj.),

"going"; from

chinroanti (oth conj.),

illf^, ^rnr

chinwat ;

fxirciii

apnuvat ; from rundhanti (rudh, 7th

(^, 8th conj.),

(p.

cooking

";

" they

nrityat ;

from

from apnuvanti (5th

conj.),

(4th conj.),

rundhat ; from kurvanti

conj.),

as, " to

darshayat;

125.),

**

from irf^

from punanti {pu, 9th

kurvat ;

again from santi (3d plur. of

darshayanti

ghnat

/jacAaV,

irova juhwati (3d plur. of Am,

from nrityanti

conj.), "^^fi^juhrvat;

tj^

comes

be

"),

conj.),

sat

from the

So

punat.

from the causal

desiderative

ditsanti

(p. 130. e), ditsat.

a.

It has

been remarked

(p. 62.

and

under the 4th conjugation

the passive.

This theory

maipada present

may
is

be considered as so

corroborated

participle derivable

"being seen"; from

^^,

and that

^fhlif

by the

all

the neuter verbs placed

many examples

of this form of

a paras-

fact of the existence of

from a passive base.

may

verb

p. 89., note t-) that the passive

sometimes assume a parasmaipada inflection

Thus from

g^

^^lld

" being gathered."

Declension.
b.

This in general conforms to

du. pi. masc.

M-iifl,
c.

'q^'q;^

pachan,

r. 63.

pachantau,

M-Mt^fj

Thus,

from polysyllabic

neut.

roots,

sing,

fem.

all

verbs

tt^,

mi41,
M-iifl, ^iftr.
But in irregular primitives of the 3d
tr^rw:;

xj^, nom.

mH: pachantah

and

all

conj.,

and

other verbs which reject the nasal

from the plural of the parasmaipada

(see p. 69. note),

the nom.

sing. masc. is identical

with the crude, and ends in at instead of

an; and the nasal

moreover, rejected from the du. and

is,

pi.

;;

PRESENT PARTICIPLES.
masc, and from the fem.
3d

nom.

conj.),

fem. bibhrati,

bibhratyau,

and shasat (from

must

It

d.

du.

sing.

masc. bibhrat,

So

bibhratyah.

They

^rPff).

bihhrat (from

Thus,

pi.

137
,

" to

bibhratau,

bear,"

bibhratah

also jagrat (from ifFr)

also drop the nasal in the dual neut.

be taken as a general

also

that all other

rule,

irregular primitives of the 2d, 5th, 7th, 8th, and 9th conjugations

conj.^lflmom.

But

although they retain

2d

ad,

fem. adatJ, &c.

is

universal,

riot

in the

it

nom. masc. adan,

conj.),

and rundhat (from rudh, 7th

masc. rundhan, rundhantau,

rule

this

adat (from

Thus,

adantah ;

ademlcitL

the feminine,

nasal in

the

reject

masculine.

fem. rundhatt, &c.

&c.,

for kurvat

(from

es,

8th conj.)

is

kurvantl in the nom. fem.

PRESENT PARTICIPLES.

Atmanepada.

Formation of the Crude.

124.

The crude

is

formed by substituting amana for

ante, the

termination of the 3d plur. pres. of regular primitive and passive

verbs

and by substituting ana

for

ate,

3d plur. pres. of irregular primitives.

amana or
pachante,

from

the termination of the

Causal verbs take either

more frequently the latter.

pachamana ; from friVn^ {stha,

ana, but
tI^*TT*T

HiM^IH; from f^SWT^

^TTtr^ (4th conj.),

from the causal darshayante

frequently, darshayana

(p. 126.),

{lip,

Thus, from
1st conj.),

H^^

firSTR;

6th conj.), fc^uiHIH

either darshayanmna, or,

more

from vedayante, vedayana ; from the de-

siderative ditsante, ditsamana.

a.
^VTI"

But from "^^ bruvate (^, 2d conj.), "^[^nST bruvana

from
{dha, 3d conj.), ^yTT; from chinwate (sth conj.), chinwana
;

5^

from

(7th conj.),

^tf^ (9th conj.),

^HH-

^WT;
The

from ^|r^ (8th conj.),

'^TRT, "to sit" (2d

root

^ffnir;
conj.),

from

makes

for ^TTlTfT.

'^Iffln

Declension.
b.

These participles are declined

neut.

like

nouns of the

first class,

Thus, pachamana, nom. masc. pachamanah, fem. pachamana,

p. 31.

pachamanam.

PAST PARTICIPLES.
Passive Past Participle.
125.

This

is

Formation

of the Crude.

the most useful derivative in the language, and

is

.:;

'

PASSIVE PAST PARTICIPLE.

138

of constant occurrence.
in

tti8,

and, like

it,

corresponds to the Latin participle

It

often supplies the place of the past tense.

In

neuter roots, especially those which imply motion of any kind,

used actively, and often stands for the perfect tense active

is

f^^ uf^:

"

he entered his hole

And

village."

in

xrM

";

^TW:

cases this participle

all

"

may

it

as,

he went to the

be used to supply

the place of the past tenses of the passive verb, the agent being
placed in the instrumental case, and the participle agreeing with
f^^lftr, "

by him the bonds were cut."*

Moreover, it may be used with the auxiliary verbs 'gnr and vr,
" to be," to form a compound past or future tense, as the Latin

the object:

participle

am

gone

urrft

";
";

"

Hf^mfri,

'c^ri'ir^,

"

it is

he

have obtained

will

done."

Lastly,

gender for a substantive

in the neuter
"

Thus, unft^fw* " he

used with the auxiliary sum.

is

has obtained
*'

^WTtf^

as, ThT

it is

^TiftsfFT,

sometimes used
"

^,

as,

";

gift ";

^rff

an excavation."

may

This participle
as

1st,

be regarded as falling under four heads

derived from roots

3dly, as derived

2dly, as derived

from desiderative bases

from causal bases

4thly, as derived

from

nominal bases.
Derived from Boots.

1.

a.

In general the crude

the root
if

from fv^

as,

the root end

in

is

formed by adding

ri,

by adding na

scatter," oBb kirna, " scattered."

Some

(t^)

rejecting inserted
b.

Roots

it

is

to Hindustani.

exceedingly

The

from

as,

a,

i,

directly to

thrown

and can never occasion any

t In a few instances
fip^nr, " standing."

common

";

cR krz,

and

u,

of those in d,

or
" to

some
r, and

ta.

in Sanscrit,

in this

and has been

particle ne in this latter language corre-

sponds most clearly to the Sanscrit , which

case,

(tt)

ending in vowels do not admit inserted

* This kind of construction

transferred from

roots in

by two consonants, with some

i, also take na instead of

in at preceded
j,

ta

kship, " to throw," Jcshipta, "

difficulty if it

is

the usual sign of the instrumental

be regarded in this

this participle has a present signification

light.

as, vftiT,

" fearing,"

;;

PASSIVE PAST PARTICIPLE.

may admit

they

participle, although

it

in the futures* (p. 79. a.

but attach ta or na directly to the root

ji,

jita

from m,

^,

-sjiT;

lu,

Inna.

from

nlta ;

UTO

in,

from

from

c But in certain cases the

thus, some roots in a change a
from
"to

quit,"

ta

from

as,

and

sition fqr, ffrtrw

Roots in

d.

na

(?ir)

by

from ^,
call,"

na

changed

stha, sthita

"to

DJm,

place,"

pa, " to drink," piia.

Some

(^Ht)-

and

titJ!!

is

grnr

Hd,

roots in a take both

^ with the

from

rl to tr

from w

prepo-

before na, which passes into

"to pass,"

ifhSf

But

" passed."

root dhe, " to suck," becomes dhz before ta

hu (^)

Roots in

/.

;*

from

as,

daridrita.

from

from

f^T%nr.

as,

before ta

"g^, "full."

The

e.

tit,

^ n change

r. 21.

to

c),

^;

bhu, bhuta

Una; from ^,

li,

give," datta

M before

becomes

from

b.

from

yg, t/ata ;

vowel of the root

final

daridra,

da, " to

becomes hita ;
na and

from

mita;

rm,

from

as,

shru, shruta ;

(r. 21.)

139

" to weave,"

ve,

(Tir).

ai generally change at to a, before

hme, " to

mlai, " to

na or ta;

as,

"to meditate,"
from ^
fade," 4-^M mldna ; from
from %, "to rescue," ^TTff or "^rnr.
mnr; from ^, "to purify,"
But from J^, "to sing," ^fhr; from %, "to waste," lafm.
change o to i ; as, from so, sita ; from '^ft, "fifrff.
g. Roots in
,

^;

h.
(p. 79.

Those roots ending in consonants which take the inserted i

take this vowel also in the past participle.
rf.) generally

In such cases ta
patita, " fallen ";

root,

^,

and

if

Grah

and never na ;

u or

may

these vowels
nfllT.

i.

is affixed,

ri

take

as,

precede the

Guna

as,

lengthens the inserted

from

final

from

pat, " to fall,"

consonant of the

dyut, dyotita

i (jjfhr,

"taken").

Roots ending in consonants which forbid the inserted

be combined with
ever form,

ta,

agreeably to the rules at pp.

therefore,

the

final

termination /a of the 1st future

^,

When

however, makes ^(f^rl, and

xi

may

be

the

" expanded "; parltta

";

must
What-

before

same form

will

the

gene-

well as TUT.

qfciii as

prepositions are prefixed to datta^ the Initial

atta for arfa^te, " taken

67, 68.

consonant assumes
(p. 80.),

from

da may be

rejected

thiia,

j9ra</a for pradattUy "bestowed"; vydtta for vyddatta^

for paridatta ; sutta for sudatta, the

and u being lengthened.

;;

PASSIVE PAST PARTICIPLE.

140

be preserved before the

rally

many

in

restoring the

vowel to

some of the examples

mukta

W;

UST,

seddha, siddha
lopta, lupta

lubdha

fk?;

JTtsT,

or

f;g";

/ Most
stead of

buddha

boddhja,

^;

'5fT,

KS\,

^, ^(p.

^TTT;

^;

^'t'^,

na ;

^'^;

ad,

anna ; from
and

(r. 30.

bhid,

%W{,
ttst,

r3';

rsrT,

dST, ^2-

(p. 68. A.);

i,

take na inr.

15

as,

bhinna ; from t^,

21.)

change j to g before
So from tnasj, rejecting

na,

roots which admit

lobdha,

^YT, J^',

JR.

from vij, vigna from ruj, rugna.

magna; from lasj, lagna.

as,

Some

^ft^;

fwv;

jft^,

Those roots ending in j, which take

*,

I.

TTTT, TT?;

ifftST.

Jp;

Jntr,

kshepta, kshipta

labdha, labdha

%nrr,

^;

^r?T,

forbidding the inserted

d,

with the preposition f%, fc(M^

the

be able," gives

and are combined with na, agreeably to

from pad, panna ; from

k.

Thus, taking

will

yuddha ;

W;

itw\,

^^vr, ^'v;

5^;

?ftniT,

he

yukta

yoddhJa,

^, f^;

68. h.);

roots ending in

ta,

and, if necessary,

a,

will sprinkle,'' sikta, " sprinkled "; mokta,

he

tyakta, tyakla ; yokta,

f^;

^;

i^FT,

shakta, "

sarpta, sripta ; kcdpta, klripta

%CT,

at p. 80

sekta, "

";

final

original state.

its

so that,

be derived from the 3d sing,

by shortening the

radical

shakta, " able

may

participle

this

cases,

1st future

of the

of the past participle

ta

in the futures, forbid

it

in this

as, x^, in 1st fut. vflTTT, in part. ^; so ^^, ^ffm, but

participle
wir (with a prefixed, '^n^, " pained") ^, ^ffrTT, but g^; T^, J(^m,
;

but

See also

J(^.

p. 109.

m. If in forming the passive base

the v or

(p. 76. d.),

semi-vowels u or
ticiple
gjg-

thus,

n.

"to say," ukia

from

in^,

^.

or in the 2d pret.

changed to their

takes place in the pass, par;

from

Similarly,

vap,

up fa

from fi^,

from

^,

^ ^
or

other changes which take place in forming the passive

p. 90. (/./.)

^ar^,

sonants, of

which the

^^,
>jr^:

but not

are preserved before ta

And when

f^.

1^; from

first is

?^, >J7;
if

^rf^iT (except ^7^^

0.

vach,

(p. 90, /.),

root are

]g;.

Some

base (see

from

from

from ^i^,

from 1^,

y contained in a
same change
i, the

is

thus,

from ^TT^.

f^

a nasal, this nasal

is

rejected

as,

from

from ^r^, ^ns; from ts^, ^rpi; from h^,

as, from ^;iR, ^rft^; from n^,

inserted;

making

Roots ending in

the root ends in two conjunct con-

J^ftm).

or n reject these nasals before ta;

as.

PASSIVE PAST PARTICIPLE.

from gam,

" to go,"

tan, tata

from han, hata

gata

khan, khata

from yam, yata ; from ram, rata

them

but retain

" to

From jan,

from swan, swanita.

if i is

be born,"

as,

from

the a being lengthened.

Those roots ending in m, of the 4th conjugation, which

p.

before

ta,

and change

a), krunta

(r. 89.

dam, ddnta

From

The following are

FBT^, " to swell," is

pakwa ; from

^,

causal affix ay

formed

^iftw

anomalous

quite

"to dry," WBoR; from

rejected, but

is

Thus, from kdray, karita; from

observed

is

from

Similarly,

klanta.

from

from pach,

"on^, Tfhr or "orR.

" to cook,"

"to be drunk," '^^,

Tlft^,

the inserted

always assumed.

/ is

sthJdpay, sthjdpita

the

these,

from veday,

vedita.

Derived from Desiderative Bases,

3.

adding

In

lengthen

from kram

from sham, shanta

2.
Derived from Causal Bases,
forming the passive past participles from

In

to

ta

a desiderative base, the only rule to be

the invariable insertion of

from

chiktrsh, chiJdrshita ;

t.

thus,

from kam, kdnta.

q.

s.

affix y, also

w as in the futures

from bhram, hhranta

r.

r.

to

from ksham, kshanta ; from klam,

from vam, vanta

from

from

inserted

formed jata

is

lengthen a medial a before the conjugational

it

141

as,

from

pipds, pipdsita

Ips, Ipsita.

4. Derived from Nominal Bases,

There are in Sanscrit certain participles, which are said

be formed by adding ita to nouns.

"

r^lfv^fcJiiT,

These

may

loosened

from

" crooked,"

ff?r,

to

f^ifvi^, " loose,"

f^Tfw, " curved."

be regarded as the passive participles of the transitive

nominal verbs

PH^^fri

f^rftr^T^fw,

kind of adjective
in use,

";

Thus, from

is

whence the

found,

it

may

(r. 122. b.)

and whenever

this

indicate that a nominal verb is

participle is derived.

Declension of Passive Past Participles.

They
49. 50.),

all

follow the declension of the first class of

and in

nouns

(r. 48.

this exhibit a perfect similarity to the declension

of the Latin participle in

tus.

Thus,

krita,

nom. masc. fem. neut.

kritah, krita, kritam.

* Since h

is

equivalent to a and

to m, the

nom. might be written

-ttu, -td, -turn.

142

ACTIVE PAST PARTICIPLES.

126.

These are of two kinds

1st,

from the

derived

those

passive past participle; 2dly, those derived from the second pre-

These

terite.

modern

(especially in
tators), to

The former are much used

and in the writings of commen-

rarely occur.

latter

Sanscrit,

kritavan, " he did that

tense

thus, tat kritavan

They may
form a compound

tat kritavati, " she did that."

";

and

also be used with the auxiliaries as

perfect

Thus, tat

supply the place of a perfect tense active.

asti,

bhu, to

" he has done that

tat

";

kritavan bhavishyati, " he will have done that."

Formation of
a.

the crude

from

the Crude,

In the case of those derived from the passive past participle,

is

easily

krita, kritavat

formed by adding vat to that

(^iT^)

from dagdha, dagdhavat

from

uktavat; from bhinna, bhinnavat ;

In the case of those derived from the 2d

b.

pret., either

But

when

as,

of one syllable only; as from ten (p. 9G.) tenivas;

to the base

is

&c.

added

to

base in the

vividwas;

(p. 96.),

the base in the dual and plur. con-

sists

There

is

when the

from vivid

from

jagmivas.

from ukta,

vas or iims

Vas,

chichi (p. 96.), chichivas.

ivas,

sthapita, sthapitavat,

the base of that tense, as formed in the dual and plur.

dual and plur. consists of more than one syllable

Thus,

participle.

an atmanepada participle of the 2d

pret.

homjagm

(p. 77.

c),

formed by adding ana

thus, vividdna, chichydna, tendna,jagnid7ia.

Declension.

Those

127.

declined

r. 62.

formed

from

thus,

kritavat,

the

passive

past

are

participle

nom. masc. fem. neut. kritavan,

kritavati, r. 49., kritavat.

Those formed from the 2d

pret. are declined in the last

paragraph of

vividwas, nom. masc. fem. neut. vividwdn, vividu^hl, vividwah ;

nom.

Those formed with ivas do not

chichivdn, chichyushl, chichivah.

the fem.

thus, tenivas,

nom. masc. fem. neut.

jagmivas, nom. jagmivdn, jagmushi, jagmivah.

declined like nouns of the

* Similarly the

first class, p.

instr. case

masc.

is

inst.

masc. tenyushd.

thus,

chichivas,

retain

tenivdn, tenushi,* tenivah ;

The atmanepada

in

and

participles are

31.

tenushd.

ference of opinion as to the rejection of

tenymht, and the

p. 44.

and

i,

There seems, however, much

dif-

and some Grammarians make the fem.

143

INDECLINABLE PAST PARTICIPLES.

may

These

128.

be classed under two heads

affixing j^H two, to uncompounded

bhutwa, " having been "; 2dly, as formed

roots

by

as,

as formed

1st,

from

bhU, " to be,"

by affixing ij ya to roots
compounded with prepositions or other adverbial prefixes as,
from anubhu, anubhuya, " having perceived "; from sajjlbhu, saj;

jibhuya,

These indeclinable participles

"having become ready."

are of the utmost importance, and some of the chief peculiarities

of the syntax of the language are to be traced to the frequency

of their occurrence.

The

made

use

sparing

pronouns,

conjunctions,

composition of relative

Sanscrit

in

and connective

particles,

is

partly to be

attributed to the continual appearance of these indeclinable participles,

by means

may be

which the sense of a whole clause

of

suspended, and sentence after sentence strung together without

The sense involved

the aid of a single copulative.

rally expressed

by

in

them

thus, tat kritrva (wff ^|Rt). "

that," " after

when he had done

" by doing that."

done that," " having done that,"

gene-

is

the English " when," " after," " having," or

"by

";

he had

See syntax.

Formation of the Indeclinable Participle from Uncompounded Boots.

When

a.

the root stands alone and uncompounded, the inde-

clinable participle is

This

affix

ciple, r. 125.,

formed with

t^j twa.

closely allied to the ta of the passive past parti-

is

insomuch that the rules for the annexation of

The forma-

the root apply equally to the indeclinable affix twa.

generally involves that of the

thus, kshipta, " thrown," kshiptfoa, " having thrown ";

tion,

therefore,

other

'

of one

participle

^,

done," ?pT, " having done

^iftr^

^T

there

ta to

"^((S,

is

w^
"3!^

W^rn
figir

";

't^

(from

so

fOT,

jj^ht

vt),

f^f^.

ftflHI

Tftrir,

^,

W?, ?fT;

^^i^ t^
;

And where

is

"^^t

^IRT;
;

^,

inserted

often an optional change of the radical vowel to Guna, as

* There are one or two instances in which an uncompounded root takes

^r^, "having reverenced." Manu, 7th Book,

146.

I. 4.

Mahabh.

3.

8017-

if

as,

INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES.

144

in the passive participle

and

dyut ;

h)

(r. 125.

Guna

always takes

instances in which the inserted

b.

i is

There

(jlfMrtl).

a few

are

admitted before twu, although

and, vice versd, as ^(kA, "^JJ.

penultimate nasal is not always rejected before two, ; thus,

rejected before ta

from

from

thus, dyutitna or dyotitwa

Tl^, TH,

but

lagna, lajjitma

as,

mr,

or

tliT

the

rejection

the

in

indeclinable

participle being generally optional.

The

c.

causal^verb,

which

rejects its characteristic ay before the

Thus,

ita of the passive participle, retains it before itwa.

"

made

to stand

sthapiia,

(from the causal base sihapay), but sthapayitwa,

'"

" having

made to stand."
The only important

d.

variation from the passive participle

occurs in those roots which take na for ta

from

from

'^, fl^, but wfrTrT (or iilHl);

f^, fs^,

but

from

hut ;5w;

^t;t.

from H^,

PsiT^i;

it,

rftlr,

but vr^ or

distinguishable from f^RT, " having placed," from

Formation of

When
word,

The

is

ya

is

>T5RT;

from

^i^^,

Vt).

Boots.

compounded with a preposition or indeclinable

indeclinable

affix Tl

but ffhlT; from

Compounded

the Indeclinable Participle from

a root

the

Thus,

to nwa.

but f^i^, "having quitted" (not

^Ht.

igi,

HTrf,

In such

(r. 125. a.).

no corresponding change takes place of twa

roots

cannot be

participle

formed with

trva.

then used, and the rules which regulate

its

annexation to the root are some of them analogous to those which

prevail in other cases in

formation of neuters

mood

which y

is affixed

passives (p.

(r. 89.),

see the rules for the

90.),

and the benedictive

(p. 85.).

But

a.

if

a root end in a short vowel, instead of any lengthen-

ing of this vowel,

(root f^),

t is

ashritya,

from T^,

"Tfjpr;

interposed

as,

from

ashri, " to

"having taken refuge";

from

^^w;

ii:^,

from

take refuge

from fnf^,
f^r:^,

"

fTftsrw;

The

ftr.^.

lengthening of the radical vowel by coalition does not prevent this

rule

as,

If

b.

from

from

ati {ati

^^cflj)

long

If

in

But from

from

^ n,

atltya.

%),

a root end in long

vihd, vifmya

c.

with

a,

I,

or

u,

no change takes place

upakrl, upakriya
this

from

vowel becomes

^ijn, 'ot^^.

as,

vidhu, vihhuya.

Ir ;

as,

from ^TW^

INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES.
Final diphthongs pass

d.

qPt-^l^t j

from

with ^i^,

e.

^c(f*|

ap),

is

-^\\\^

root end

change takes place

and

tlft:^, nftjarnr

w^^rn

prapya

(also

But from

from ^n%, "^TT^.

from

but

^r^

from

from

as,

generally rejected

adverbially, " vio-

from 'STlf^^

'^^^

a consonant the general rule

in
as,

%4i^|^

from samasanj,

as,

from pramanth, pramathya (used

"")

If

/.

'^rfWamr

penultimate nasal

samasajya
lently

^rftr^

into a

145

from

from vlksh

nikship, nikshipya

and

(vi

ikslt),

is,

that no

from prop (pra

vlkshya.

But some roots ending in am and an may optionally reject

the nasal, and interpose t between short a and ya ; as, from
g.

nirgam, nirgatya or nirgamya

khan instead of interposing

t,

Jan and

from nihan, nihatya.

lengthen the a

from utkhan,

as,

utkMya.

The changes which take

h.

place in certain roots before the

from

ftppr;

vyushya.

from avyadh avidliya ;

4(|i|!^;

-^lUt^,

^TO.

lengthens

its

vowel before ya

as,

f^r^Si

In affixing ya to causal bases the characteristic ay

i.

rally rejected

:*

as,

from prahodhay, prahodhya

from f^n^,
from vivas,

of the passive (p. 90./.) are preserved before j/a; as,

(TRtl)

gene-

is

from Trar^

H?n^; from TEF^^, ^n^."^

Adverbial Indeclinable Participle.

There

is

another indedinable participle yielding the same sense as those formed

with two, and ya, but of very rare occurrence except in the Bhatti kavya.

noun derived from a

equivalent to the accusative case of a

and

formed by adding

is

am

to the root, before

which

affix

root,

Thus, from m,

It is retained in

H|c|njiq
1"

"

affix

ay

some few instances;

having imagined

";

payam,

from pack, pdcham ; from kship, kshepam

It often occupies

^^<i|4t(,

the last place in a compound

as,

04^1411 U|,

2. 20.

aa in

"having calculated";

"having narrated."

There are one or two instances of compounded roots formed with twd;

^gf H l(fi'om ^). K^rn.

(p. 86. c).

" to lead," ndyam, " having led "; from pa, " to drink,"

from han, "to kill," ghdtam.

<

used adverbially

changes of the radical

vowel take place, similar to those required before the causal

"having drunk"; hora hwe, hwdyam

It is

aa,

Especially in the case of causals, as f^T^^ftlT^.

FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.

146

and in the following

the expression V*4^l|Iil, "having totally exterminated";

passage from Bhatti

"The
creepers,

watere)

descendant of Kakutstha, smiling softly, repeatedly bending

would pluck the blossoms

down

the

descending to the streams, would sip (the

on some variegated rock, would recline in admiration

seating himself

(of the scene)."

These

imply repetition of the

participles generally

above, and in this sense are themselves often repeated ;

action, as in the passage

dayam, ddyam^ " having

as,

repeatedly given."

FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.

amongst the most common and useful of all
and may be classed under three heads
1st, as formed

129. These are

participles,
vi^ith

the

ir^ tavya

affix

as formed with

These

ya.

Ti

2dly, as

ought to be eaten
vackya, " to

from

";

in the

the bird

as,

bhuj, " to

may

then

They sometimes denote

it

":

and as the passive

place of a past tense, so the future

supply the place of a future tense passive

t^

Tr#

iTiTfiT

IT^

niT 4<<in^rt*M:,

"If

shall be eaten by me."

Formation of Future Passive Participles with the

a.

3dly,

and most commonly

Thus, from

Hj^cq, " about to be eaten

following sentence,

falls,

ible,

fitness.

" dicendiisJ'^

past participle supplies the

passive participle
as

vach, " to speak," vaktavya, or vachamya,

be spoken,"

simple futurity

aniya

or bhojaniya, or bhojya, " edible," " eatable," " that

eat," bhoktavya,

or

and

able

denote obligation or propriety and

^snfhl

yield a sense corresponding

affixes

and the English

to the Latin dus

formed with

These are formed by substituting tavya for

affix
ta,

ic^ tavya,
the termina-

Thus, from -^rt

the 3d pers. sing, of the 1st future.
"
"
will
throw,"
to
be
thrown "; karta,
he
ksheptavya,
kshepta,
^\\<n
" he will do," kartavya, " to be done "; from bhavita, " he will be,"
tion

of

bhavitavya, " about to be."

consonants rejecting

same take

i,

place before

{relinquendus)

dagdhavya, &c.

UST

And

the case

in

of roots ending in

whatever changes take place before

TT8^

tavya (see p. 80.)

;

^fFI

^B*M

thus,

tyakta,

boddim, boddhavya

ta,

the

fyaktavya
,

dagdhd,

FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.

147

Formation of Future Passive Participles with the

This

b.

added

is

affix

change than the Guna of the radical vowel.

from

from

changed

is

'^

g>l#ti

(r. 21.)

a;

to

as,

from

^,

^q|nfN; from

?iT5r,

from

%^,

^Islrfl^

from

t^, ydHlxr;

from

(r. 21.).

<*^iiflil

from

";

Before this

as before

affix,

a,

or in

from

If in

d.

i,

a,

this
" to

from

ya

before

Sometimes

/.

but

place,

participle
participle

if

o,

stu, stutya, "

from

bhU, bhavya ;

the analogy

(p. 144. a.),

laudable

from shak, shaky a

rarely

if

from

chi,

e to ay,

from

ji,

however, oftener passes into

of the indeclinable

so that the crude of the future

Thus, from ji, jit^a,

";

from

"

conquerable ";

kri, kritya, " practicable."

a root end in a single consonant with a medial

If

g.

as,

not distinguishable from the indeclinable, except by

sometimes takes place

as,

Guna

and sometimes

formed with ya
is

the final

is

as,

from

from grah, grahya

sahya;

sah,

a labial

as,

a,

Vriddhi

but not always

from hadh, badhya

from gam, gamy a

and

from

labh,

labhya.
h.

from
i.

j.

may

with a medial

If

bhuj, bhojya

from

If

with a medial

final ch

as,

may

ri,

or

lih,

u,

Guna

generally takes place

as,

lehya.

no change takes place

be changed to

and ^

to

from Tf^, ?^^.

and other changes

as,

^
some of which are similar to those before the y of
from pach, pakya ; from vach, vakya ; from bhiij^

take place,

passives

interposed, after

t is

e (cf. p. 85. a.)

^TRI from plu, plavya.

vowels take Vriddhi as, from ^, oSttI.
a root end in a short vowel no change takes
'^,

the absence of a preposition.

from

to av,

thus,

The Guna

from

as,

changed

o is

a vowel)

(as if before

y;

end in

be measured," " measurable";

If in ri or ri these

e.

ya.

affix T{

If a root

vowel becomes

vowels take

these

u,

conquer," jayya.

av before

i^nMfl<<

diphthong

dhyai, dhyeya, &c.

or

u,

t,

others beginning with y, cer-

all

measure," meya,

But the Guna

cheya.

" to

" to

heya

ha,

changeable to

ai, o,

e,

from ma,

as,

chi,

bhu, bhava-

TTpfl^.

?t,

become necessary.

tain changes of final vowels

any other

final

Formation of Future Passive Participles with the

c.

wfhi aniya.

Thus, from "N

" to gather," '^^nfNf chayaniya, " to be gathered

niya

affix

directly to the root, without

k,

NOUNS OF AGENCY.

148
bhogya

from

from grah, grihya, as well as grahya from vad, udya

from shas, shishya (p. 90. d. /.); from khan, kheya.

yaj, ijya

k.

Many

of these latter are used as substantives, and there are

examples of substantives formed with

other

(fern.), "

a wife," from

w "to

this affix

as,

)TT^

support," &c.

Declension of Future Passive Participles.

They are

Thus, kartavya

nouns of the

declined like

all

nom. m.

milarly, karaniya

f.

first class,

pp. 31, 32.

kartavyah, kartavya, kartavyam.

n.

Si-

and karya.

PARTICIPLES OF THE SECOND FUTURE.

Formation

of the Crude.

These are not very common.

130.

as belonging to

either

They are

of two

kinds,

parasmaipada, or to the atmanepada

the

the former being formed by changing anti, the termination of the

3d plur. of the 2d

amana.

fut.,

into at

karishyat and karishyamana

the. passive
"

the latter by changing ante into

Thus, from karishyanti and karishyante, "they will do,"

2d

ejifjOTcT

fut. vakshyante, "

chfi^uiHUll),

"about

to

do"; from

they will be said," vakshyamana,

about to be said."

These

participles, in the

pers. plur.,

by the

affixes

mode

of their formation from the 3d

and amana, resemble present

at

parti-

ciples, r. 123.

Declension of Participles of the Second Future.

a.

Their declension also conforms to that of present participles.

Those of the parasmaipada are declined according to

and those of the atmanepada according

to p. 137.

p. 136.

b.,

b.

PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY.

131.

These have been already incidentally noticed in Chap.

III.

As, however, they partake of the nature of participles, and are of

some further mention of them is necessary

They may be classed under three heads
in the present chapter.
2dly, as formed from the 1st future
1st, as formed from the root

great practical

utility,

3dlv. as

formed from the causal

base.

NOUNS OF AGENCY.
The crude

1.

ing

of the

first class is

149

formed from the root by

affix-

before which Guna, and rarely Vriddhi, of a final vowel

a,

required

from

as,

" to

ji,

jaya

conquer,"""

Medial vowels are generally unchanged

from

vada, "saying";

"to vex,"

tud,

am, or an, are dropped;

from gam, "to go," ga

from

as,

" conquering."

from

vad,

"vexing"

tuda,

"to give," da

da,

"going"

(jj),

as,

"being born" (see their declension,

38.

r.

to say,"
final a,

"giving";

(^),

and

1.

*'

and

" to

from jan,

is

("STt),

be born,"

ja,

These

p. 31.).

nouns of agency are constantly used in poetry as a substitute for

the present participle,

one compound

yamvada
in

sometimes governing the same case as

thus, puranjaya

tejaskara, "

sarasija, " lake-born."

light-making "

from manas and

29.);

from bahu and

city-conquering "

pri-

"speaking kind words"; jalechara (sT^'^r) "going

(fjr*i<<0>

the water "

"

(i^iyii),

The word which they go-

vern often remains in the crude form

r.

this

but always united with the word which they govern in

participle,

{s

hri,

from

as,

and

tejas

kri,

remaining unchanged, in violation of

manohara, "mind-captivating"

much"

bahuda, " giving

da,

from

(r. 29.);

and ^,

iHlrKr^

^snw^, " self-knowing."

The crude

2.

of the second class is

sing, of the 1st future of primitive verbs,

^ ri
and

vowel

for the. final

identical

formed from the 3d pers.

by

substituting the vowel

the nominative case being therefore

a,

with the 3d pers. sing, of that tense (see

Thus, from bhokta, "he will eat,"

r. 41.),

(nom. bhokta); from

TitSJ>

from

yachita, yachitri ;

"he

^ETteT,

will fight," i(ts,

Tft^,

p. 77. r. 100. p. 37.

bhoktri,

"a

"an eater"

fighter"; from

This noun of agency

&c.

is

sometimes, but rarely, found as a participle governing the case

of the verb
32.);

^tST

as, ^raT

^nm^h

3.

The crude

a.

By

d.)

^TR,

"

speaking a speech " (Draupadiharanam,

"bearing the Ganges" (Ratnavali,

of the third class

adding in to the

is

formed

root, before

p.

1.).

in three ways.

which

affix

changes take

similar to those required before the causal affix ay

place
c.

killer"

as,
;

from

from

kri,

shi,

karin

(ofilft?^),

"

a doer"

skayin, " a sleeper"

from han,

y being

(r. 107.

gfmtin, " a

inserted after roots

* Implying, however, habitual action, and therefore sometliing more than present time.

INDECLINABLE WORDS.

150
in

a,

from pa, pay in, "a drinker"; from

as,

(see their declension,

hais often, like
is

in

the

r. 43.

and

iii.

"a giver"

da, dayin,

This noun of agency

p. 43.).

the sense of a present participle, and

first class,

then always united with the crude of the word which

one compound

captivating"

b.

It

(r. 29.).

verb, being

compound

thus,

from manas and

sometimes,

as, gramevasin, "

By adding aka
kri,

karaka

han, ghataka

nandaka

stha,

which

is

sidh,

nl,

from

from nand,

r. 38. ii.

also often joined with the

as,

nay aka, "a

sddhaka

from kram, kramaka

e.f.);

and p. 31.).

crude of the

as, odiulfiiqefi, " ef-

very rarely found governing the case

^K, " kissing the buds'' (Ratnavali, p. 7.).
By adding ana to some few roots ending in consonants, after

of the verb

It is

as, ^^c^lfrf

changes similar to those required before the causal

nand, nandana,
5rE(,

changes take

affix

"doing"; from

grahaka; from

governs in one compound word

fecting the business."

c.

governs in one

(r. 107. c. d.

stkapaka (see their declension,

This participial noun

it

doer,"

ivova grah,

from g^, ^^oB

from

noun which

"a

(oBRcli),

leader," "leading";

it

dwelling in the village."

to the root before

place analogous to those before the causal ay

from

governs

governs the case of the

united with the word which

still

also,

it

manoharin, " mind-

hri,

"rejoicing";

from

^,

f^^'COr,

^ftVT, "cleansing" (see their declension,

CHAPTER

affix

as,

"vitiating";

r. 38. iii.

and

from
from

p. 31.)

VIII.

INDECLINABLE WORDS.
Adverbs.
132.

Adverbs, like nouns and verbs,

and compound.

The

latter

may

be divided into simple

are treated of in t^e next Chapter

on Compound Words.
Simple adverbs

may

be

classed

under four heads

1st,

as

ADVERBS.
formed from the cases of nouns
3dly, as of uncertain derivation

151

2dly, as

formed with

affixes

4thly, as prefixes to other words.

Adverbs formed from

Nouns.

the Cases of

The following cases of nouns are used adverbially

as,
a. The jjomiyiatiye or accuaatix:eBeuter of any adjective
"much";
"quickly";
^T^, -ftpr,
^, "truly"; ^,
5^, "fitly";
:

^,

T^^, "near";

"lightly";

f^r^,

m^,

^grTTir,

"exceed-

>pt,

^r^^, " certainly "; frRf " constantly "; ^rgr^, " strongly."
The nom. or ace. neuter of certain pronouns as, iTff " therefore "; ^, "wherefore" "when"; fm\, "so long as"; in^,
ingly

";

" as

long as

";

fcRJ^,

"

why

"

The nom. or

substantives and obsolete words

ingly

";

fTJT,

"

by name,"

^,

fMj "long ago";

ace. neut. of certain

" secretly ";

15:,

as

" that is to say

"pleasantly";

";

errt

^iHIrl,

oRR, " will-

"^j " repeatedly

now

"

"by

fT#,

";

";

night " inoctu).

The

h.

"

virtuously

Tt:, "

^,

"

f^^,

nstrumental case of nouns and pronouns

";

above

";

vf^., "

southwards

below

The

wherefore."
" for

"

^T^f^hT,

The

d.

The

";

^rsRWrn^,

^trift,

^,

-l\^m, "quickly";

iTWTi^,

as,

f^, " by
^5^, "now."
";

as,

|<^|tt^,

"therefore";

<kkk*\

"without cause," "unexpectedly";

^^TTcT,

of a few obsolete nouns; as,

"for a

case of a few nouns

^,

TT^, "at night";

nouns

";

";

therefore

"P^njH",

" afterwards."

T?JTfr,

locative

" suitably ";

Tfj^rrr,

"at a distance";

^tn^,

"from the north": and

long time

"

H^,

";

case of a few nouns and pronouns

ablati ve

"wherefore"?

slowly

^p^jry, " in a short time

";

day"; f^^qr, "fortunately";

c.

^,

"

vf%,

as,

" northwards

"g^^sr,

instr. case of certain obsolete

a long time

"forcibly";

";

";

and obsolete words

"far off"; Wl^', "in the forenoon";

" in front

";

<fohi|^

" at once

";

W^,

as,

^IJT^,

" instantly ";

" within."

Adverbs formed with

133.

f<n(^ chit, ^rftl api,

of time and place,

when

and

'^tf

chana,

Affixes.

may form

affixed to interrogative

Indefinite

adverbs

adverbs
as,

from

oR?^, "when?" o|(in*l(|^, omHi, and SR^p^, "sometimes"; from

and^, "where?" ^pi^, wf^, gjf^, girfTI, " somewhere "; from
^rnr, "whence?" ^irf^gT^ and ^ri a*i "from somewhere"; from
<

ADVER'BS.

152

"when?" o|in^r>M(f^, "at some time"; from ^, "how?"

"somehow or other" (of. r. 85.).
Tra tas (changeable to in or ift, r, 29.) may be added to any

eirff,

ofiVfijH)

a.

noun, and to some pronouns, to form adverbs

"with

from ^nf^, ^rrf^,

proper crude of the pronoun

(the
^JiT:

effort";

TjX\

"

This

hence."

>

as, in J{W., "

employed

times vaguely
"

behind the back

";

"^

b.

there

"
"J^r,

^rar^, " in

places";
c.

'^n

"so";
cE^,
d.

"

^,

<i|n

gives

similarly,

";

sense

the

of the

other
first

near

relations

place

some-

it is

Win,

as,

UHrHfi: , "

";

on

all

to."

where

as,

";

"

^nr,
"

^itf,

^oR^, " in one place";

here

";

inr,

everywhere

^^T^,

" in

";

many

"in every way";

Manner

as, iniT,

^rarai, " otherwise ";

"thus."

when

adverbs of Time from pronouns, &c.

";

"

cfi^,

when?"

^eS^, "once

";

as, Tf^,

f^nJl^,

"con-

^j^, "always."

:q|(;i,

VT, dha,

thence

tham, forming adverbs of

"^

^ da, forming
";

inr,

"

"

there," " in the next world."

"as";

" then"; tr^, "

e.

where

^h^,
thd and

"how?"

stantly

"

^IFRn,

^nsT,

from thee ":* but

the

^rfiTin,

? "

another place";

TTVTT,

iTir:

forming adverbs of Place

tra,

";

";

" in

from

often equivalent to the ablative

express

to
,

ir^),

j^w., "

";

THnrfr:

sides"; ^PTin, "in front

"

me

from

is

as,

from the beginning"; from w

usually

affix

prepositions with and /row, and

case

"

forming adverbs of Distribution from numeral adjec-

"in one way"; f^VT, "in two w^ays "; "^hfT. "in
ways "; ^nnn, " in a hundred ways "; TTfF^, " in a thousand
ways "; '^?>?T, " in many ways."
/. ^?r vat may be added to any noun to form adverbs of Simi"like the sun"; from tj%, q|'cf(f,
litude :^ as, from W^, mk^ A

tives; as,

;jKTn,

six

" as before."

g.

"^

dantly
"

";

shas,

forming adverbs of Quantity

^T^T^H, " in small quantities ";

by hundreds and thousands

";"

wr^.

"
,

K'tV^l, "

as,

<4^^|:

singly

";

"
,

abuur

^nrffpr^,

by degrees."

* These are the forms generally used for the ablative case of the personal pronouns, the proper ablative cases *r?T
the crude, in compound words.

i^TT being

never used except as substitutes for

A6VERBS,

153

Adverbs of Uncertain Derivation.

Of Affirmation. 'gj^, i^, fsfi^s. ^^, "indeed "; ifffiT, "even."

Of Negation. '^, ^, irf^, "not." m, ^T^{ are prohibitive;

134.
a.

m ^,

as,

"

do not."

augment being

c.

much

Oi

d.

Quantity.

^HefN,

^:

^t!^,

"for the most part";

" falsely ";

ftian,

(cf. a)Kt^?), "

Of Time.

/.

d<IHT,

afterwards

h.

do not "

(p. 102.).

"whether.^"

g, rfg, f^fi^,

like ";

";

5^.

^,

v^,

" so ";

foRPg^, "

how

quickly

"thus";

^,

vain

"gtiiff,

"formerly";

|TJ,

"

ever

";

^T^,

little ";

";

Y"^'

^r^,

"

VHRT,

"separately";

enough

";

^Rfjrfif,

" silently."

^tjt,

^ra^, "instantly";

";

"again";

^^,

"to day," "now";

^sriT.

"

^^.

"repeatedly."

"variously";
" in

g>IT,

";

^[''^'

" so,"

"JTrfTr.

T'T,

"then";

ynT?r, " at once

g.

<*f;dif

"exceedingly";

^, ^,

Oi Manner.

e.

"

ourtT:,

rather."

"once"; ^TO^.

"

rejected, as

Oi Interrogation. f^,
Of Comparison. ^, "

b.

W^

often used with the 3d preterite, the

is

T ^TTJ.

IS^J^,

TTT^,*

^^tSTTrT,

^,^

*A*H.Tii,

"now";

"before";

" after death

";

trt..*

" never."

Oi Place.'^, "here"; g|, "where?"

Of Doubt. f^jifi^, -tifMHIH, " perhaps."

"without."

"^fi^w,

Adverbial Prefixes.
135.

^ a prefixed to

tive or negative force,

and the English

possible

cally substituted
a.

^rtTT ati,

b.

^T

c.

as,

CtBRT,
It is

un

as,

a,

the Latin

" possible," xS<^|<w, "

as, ysPJi, "

end

";

" excessively," " very

^i*fi,

in,

im-

";

" endless."

as, ^rfrnr^l^, "

prefixed to imply " diminution

a.

pale."

^[^

is

^ Aa or ^ ku,

^STJ^,
d.

im,

in,

from ^T^,

from W^p^, " touching " (pres. part.), ^^^l r^, " not
When a word begins with a vowel, 'W*^ is euphoni-

";

touching."

what

nouns and even to participles with a privacorresponding to the Greek

" a

^ dur,

";

as,

very great."

W^T<^

"

prefixed to words to imply " disparagement

coward

";

^^^,

";

" deformed."

prefixed to imply " badly," or " with difficulty

"badly done

some-

prefixed with the same sense.

"- (cf. p. 15. note);

^Jfe,

"not

opposed to ^, and corresponds to the Greek

easily

";

broken."

Jt/<r.

These, however, admit of derivation, and a few others less obviously.

as,

CONJUNCTIONS.

154

mr

fVft.

e.

f%r

armed "; but not

/.

vi are prefixed

negative

or

vative

and

sense

" well,"

a with a pri-

";

f^^I^. " un-

and corresponds

to

" easily ";

In this sense

done"; ^wiT. "easily broken."

the Greek

" very," " excessively ";

imply

to participles.

prefixed to imply

su,

like

fn^cJS, " powerless

as,

nouns

to

ev.

as,

It

opposed to |^,

it is

also used for

is

" well

as, ^g^p,

^rfiTi

to

" very great.""

^m^,

CONJUNCTIONS.
Copulative.

136.

not

can never, therefore, stand as the

It

et.

It is not,

tence.

the

cha, " and," " also," corresponding to the Latin que and

and second words, but

first

may be

the sentence, being only excluded from the

a.

f^, "for," like

admitted to the
b.

an

xff^,

%i^

inceptive

Jirst

word in a sen-

however, like que, necessarily interposed between

first

" if

";

is

admitted to any part of

first place.

always placed after

word, and never

its

place in a sentence,

^^,

particle.

" then," "

TTiT^,

"

now," used very commonly as

upon

that,"

"

then "

(r. 133. a.).

" again," " moreover," used very

^r*ra, "ftra, ^mM> ^rcg, ^rftR,
" also."
monly before quotations.

com-

^,

Disjunctive.

137.

va, " or," corresponds to

placed after
sentence.
inrf^> "

'^,

ft;^, " but ";

although

"; riviifM, "

a correlative to the last;

Tjf^,

"

the Latin

and

ve,

word, being never admitted to the

its

the former

placed after

nevertheless," " yet,"

iHvieji,

fchHT,

whether," " whether or no."

often used in poetry

is

w ith no other

"or

first

always

place in a
its

word

sometimes used as

else";

tr, ^,

is

t^T,

"or not";

%, are expletives,

"g,

object than to

fill

up the

verse.

PREPOSITIONS.
138.

Of

all

the internal evidences of the antiquity of Sanscrit,

there is none more decisive than the sparing use w^hich this language makes of prepositions, in expressing the dependence of one
These aids to sjmtactical combination are
word upon another.

always to be regarded as a result of

modem

refinement, incom-

PREPOSITIONS.

and simplicity of the most ancient

Thus, even the Greek, which of all others is the most

with the

patible

languages.
copiously

155

sternness

with these

provided

made comparatively

auxiliaries,

small use of them in the days of Homer, and imitated the Sanscrit
in expressing a variety of different

of its nouns.

from

result

rigid rejection of

this

this inflection is

formed,

of the cases

much ambiguity may

any other aid

tion of sentences than nominal inflection

even

by some

relations

cannot be doubted that

It

to the construc-

but when, as in Sanscrit,

but sparingly used, and long compounds are

consisting of words joined together in their crude state,

any case

the last only taking

a verb

often

is

and when even the assistance of

denied to guide the reader to the nature of the

dependence of these words upon each other

we are forced to
admit that this language would gain much in ease and perspicuity,
;

were more abundantly supplied with such important elements

if it

of syntactical arrangement.

But

not the reader imagine that no prepositions exist in

let

Sanscrit.

be found by a reference to

will

It

r.

they

165. that

exist in great abundance, but only as inseparable prefixes, qualify-

ing the sense of roots, and the nouns and verbs derived from roots.

There are only three, out of

ever used in
^rg anu

all this list

government with nouns

and of these the two

of prepositions, that are

ufir prati,

viz. ^TT a,

and

last are never so used, except as

postposttiong.
o-

a,

generally signifying " as far as," " up to," governs the

ablative case

Manu "; and

as, ^rra^'^TT^,

rarely the accusative, as ipTR

dred births."

men

It

SHl^iiift:

But instances are not common

ufiT prati,

generally

irftr,

"

" at,"

signifying

against," governs the accusative

>l^

^nTTh. " up to

";

of

" for

a hun-

words in regi-

with this preposition.

h.

"

"as far as the ocean

with regard to justice

";

as,

iT^

sometimes has the force of apud ;

nfif ,

Trftr,

as,

"

with

regard

" at the

" against

it nfiT,

"

to,"

Ganges

";

an enemy."
me,'" " as

apud

far as regards me."

c.

^rg

is

occasionally found governing the accusative;

as,

71^.

" after that."

The

preposition

^,

however,

is

not separated from

the

word

PREPOSITIONS.

156
which

governs, and

it

may

INTERJECTIONS.

be regarded as forming with

it

a kind

compound, especially as instances are not uncommon

of adverbial

of other prepositions united in composition with the neuter form

or accusative case of nouns

l?fiT5peJ,

" face

to face ";

the Ganges " (see

"

^rftranl,

"

ufriH^^

as,

upon the shoulders

upon the tree

";

"

^T^T^,

";

along

171. 6.).

r.

ADVERBS USED FOR PREPOSITIONS.

139.

There are certain adverbs used for prepositions in govern-

ment with nouns, but generally placed

after

the nouns

which

they govern.
a.

'^w, " besides,"

governing

^IFn^, "

ablative case.

up

and sometimes

accusative

the

to," " as far as,"

sometimes found with

the accusative.

^,

h.

TffT^,

"with," "along with," governing the instrumental.

f^^, " without," with

sometimes the ablative.
c.

d.

erf^

"
.

out " and

TT^rfrr,

instrumental

the

" inde a," "

or accusative, or

from a particular time,"

with the ablative.

e.

^,

^%',

lift:,

^, ^,

"on account

fHftr%.

"for the

of,"

sake of," with the genitive, or more usually with the crude form.
TTft., "

above "

(cf.

"below";

ysn^mni^,

VTte.p,

with the genitive.

super),

^nfhr,

^nRrglr,

"near";

THT^, &c., "in the presence of";

^nsfidir,

"without," "except";

genitive.

'^TTft.

and

M<yi(^,

^Pfr^,

^ohi^iiri^

"after";

"within";

inl^,

all

sometimes .doubled

^sni^ are

So

'Bnrff

"from";

or

^,

"before";

governing the
thus, ^tp&qft^,

INTERJECTIONS.
140.

>?^:, >Tt,

^, are vocative

\,

sometimes expressive of contempt.

'HT:,

^,

^,

^l^, "surprise";

"approbation";

^%,

j\,

'ft,

less respectfully vocative,

fvsR

^t^,

"salutation."

expresses

^, ^i^t^,

"

abhorrence

"grief";

or
";

^,

:
.

CHAPTER

IX.

COMPOUND WORDS.
Compounds abound

in Sanscrit to a degree wholly unequalled in

any other language, and

ciples

it

becomes necessary to study the prin-

on which they are constructed, before the learner can hope

understand the simplest sentence in the most elementary book.

to

In the foregoing chapters

verbs,

nouns,

we have

and simple adverbs.

compound

verbs,

We

treated of simple nouns, simple

have now to treat of compound

and compound adverbs.

Observe, that in this chapter a dot placed underneath marks

the division of the words in a compound.
Sect.

I.COMPOUND NOUNS.

The student has now arrived

141.

which the use of the crude

in

pp.

20

and

its

noun becomes most

state of the

This use has been already noticed at

strikingly apparent.
19,

at that portion of the subject

formation explained, pp. 21

pound nouns (with some few exceptions) the

In

27.

all

r. 36.,

com-

word alone

last

admits of declension, and the preceding word or words require

be placed in the crude form, this crude form admitting of a

to

plural as well as singular signification.

Native grammarians class compound nouns under

five

heads

tatttjuvsua, or those composed of two nouns,

of which (being in the crude) would be, if uncompounded,

the 1st they call

the
in
*'

first

a case different from, or dependent on, the

moon-light " (for ^*^km IWT, " the light of the

-^. '^*

"skilled

* Observe, that in

in

arms"

this chapter the

(for

nom.

^i^
case,

last

moon

^^T^.)

as, ^fP^lWT

")

^I4g<<*^l<i;

^rfw^rfxrw:, -HT,

-*,

and not the crude, of a substantive

terminating a compound will be given, and in the instance of an adjective forming

the last

member

examples

ai*e

in

of a

compound, the nom. case masc.,

chiefly taken

fern.,

and neut.

The

from the Hitopadesha, and sometimes the oblique cases

which they are there found have been retained.

COMPOUND WORDS.

158
"

gems

with

adorned

" (for

The

^ftm).

irfiirftR

2d,

B-vtrAMBWA,

or those formed by the aggregation into one compound of two or

more nouns
in

either

(the

the

word

last

dual,

plural,

according to circumstances,

being,

or

ceding word or words being in the crude), when,

would

they

"master and pupil""

as, 'l^'P^lu^,

HTJERnftn^tflFn , " death, sickness,

"

if

pre-

the

uncompounded,

be in the same case, connected by a copulative

all

conjunction;

and

neuter singular,

and sorrow "

(for J]^:

(for JTOJ

f^imsa)
^HohHl)

''irrfv:

UJCLYA, or

hand and foot " (for tnfisr: ^n^)The 3d, KAZtnxASBAthose composed of an adjective and substantive, the

adjective

being placed

mHum^,

pounded,
as,

"a good

^npf^cK,

things " (for

as

The

when,

state,

uncom-

if

fto

^|<l**nr<U

^ft^:);

"all

sixnau, or those in which

compounded with a noun, either
form a singular collective noun, or an adjective as,

to

crude state

its

4th,

is

fsr^, "three qualities"

(for

^nft jpsni);

The

ing the three qualities."

5th,

any number of words associated

of

crude

its

disposition" (for

vljifiu ^^qrftr).

a numeral in
so

in

first

would be in grammatical concord with the substantive

it

as, ht1H*t:,

-m,

-H, "brilliant as the

"liable to death, sickness, and

fT^,, -W,

bahwrxhi,*
to

-W> "possess-

or those formed

form an epithet

moon";

sorrow";

to a

JTOSr^nfv^ft^:

W^^fl^^:,

noun

-'SBT,

-^, -^,

-^,

"well-

disposed."

Such then,

in brief, is the native division

compound words,

of

a division leading to some confusion, from the incompleteness and

want of

comprehensiveness in the

sufficient

definitions,

and the

absence of sufficient distinctness and opposition between the seve-

* These names
give

some

either furnish examples of the several kinds of compounds, or

sort of definition of

of the 1st kind (for

"conjunction";
object," (efi*^)

ofiJ^VTT?Tt is

fw^l

is

i.e.

rice."

There

is

Thus, WPT^^t,
5'rg'i is

"liis servant," is

an example

a definition of the 2d kind, meaning

a definition of the Sd kind,

i.e.

"containing the

an example of the 4th kind, meaning "any thing to the

value of two cows "; ^^T^tf^J

much

them.

if^ XT^t)

is

an example of the 5th kind, meaning

" possessed of

a 6th class of compounds called 'SrstnfhTT^I avyayibhdvah,

"the indeclinable state"; but these will be noticed under the head of compound

adverbs.

COMPOUND NOUNS.
members

parts or

ral

examples given, that

regarded as another

159

For

of tlie division.

name

of the 4th class

The

of the 5th class of

of other nouns

such compounds as

compound

of

the

definitions

to

often be

the

and that the second

to understand

it difficult

compounds

not be comprehended under

loss to refer a

may

for this reason referrible to the 5th.

is

moreover, finds

student,

definition

from the

plain,

when they take

for the first three,

form of adjectives declinable in three genders

species

it is

the 5th class of compounds

And

it.

and

^If^^^^lc^

why,

if

the

they are epithets

be, that

further,

ifia^fMif should

he

often at a

is

from the inadequacy

the cases included under each

to its proper head,

express

all

class.

In
to

following

the

a different

pages

subject

the

method, although

it

discussed

is

according

has been thought desirable to

keep the native arrangement in view.

Compound nouns may be regarded either

compounded.
The latter have reference

as simply or comto a class of

plexly

com-

pounds within compounds, very prevalent in poetry, involving

two or three species of simple compounds under one head.

SIMPLY COMPOUNDED NOUNS.

These

142.

sponding to
scriptive ^

will be divided

Tatpuriisha)

(corresponding

(corresponding to Drvigii)

This

vrthi).

compounds,

to
5th,

by

terminated
;

c.

Dependent in case (corre-

Aggregative {jDwandroa)

Karmadharaya)

3d,

De-

Collective

4th,

Relative (corresponding to Bahu-

last includes, a. Relative

Aggregative compounds

pounds

into, 1st,

2d,

form of absolute Dependent

substantives

Relative

b.

form

Relative

of

form of Descriptive com-

Relative form of Collective compounds

e.

Relative

form of substantives in composition with certain adverbial

prefixes.

d.

* As, for instance, such a compound as

^u

;i

^|j|i; ,

-^, -^, "any

thing black

and white."
t As being composed of an adjective or participle preceding a substantive, and

always descriptive of the substantive.

word of similar import.

gested

by

Prof.

Bopp

calls

them " Determinativa," a

The names "Dependent" and "Collective" were

Prof. Bopp's " Dcpendentia "

and " CoUectiva."

sug-

DEPENDENT COMPOUNDS.

160

dependent compounds, or compounds dependent

in case

(tatpurusha).
Accusatively Dependent.
143.

These comprehend

all

word (being

relation of the first

compounds

those

which

in

the crude) to the last

in

is

the
equi-

They are generally composed of a noun in the first member, and a participle or noun of
agency in the last; as, i^^Tinn, -TIT, -TT, "one who has obtained
heaven" (equivalent to ^ff irrff:) "ftnr^T^, "one who speaks kind
words "; ^J^. "one who gives much ""; ^ng^^TrT " one who bears
valent to that of an accusative case.

arms.''

nouns of agency the accusative case

Before the

a.

subduing";

poetry;

in

especially

retained,

as,

^srfbjJT:, -TT,

-m, -A, "heart-touching";

^<^4j^*h:,

" fear-inspiring " (see

131.

r.

-A,

is

often

"enemy-

>Tii^:,

-n, -i.

1.).

InMrumentaUy Dependent.

Or

144.

those in which the relation of the

first

word (being

in

the crude) to the last is equivalent to that of an instrumental case.

These are very common, and

a substantive in the
last;

^ftwrf^Tn,

as,

jftf^);

first
-TTT,

are, for the most part, composed of

member, and a passive participle in the
"beguiled by avarice" (for ^Ft^
-Tt,

^<gj.Mrgri; > -ITT, -if, "

covered with clothes

";

TTSTS^^rn, -in,

-if,

"honoured by kings"; fWT^Hr:, -TT, -^, "deserted by {i.e. destitute of) learning "; j:^t#:. -%T, -%," pained with grief "; ^Ti*np:,
-in, -1^,

(for

"done by one's

a.

^nf^WTr^SfT.,

-^,

-:jT

"like the

sun"

Sometimes, but rarely, this kind of compound contains a

substantive or
"

self";

W^^, ^I?^).

money

noun

of agency in the last

acquired by science

"; ^i^'^ijaficO, "

member; as, fWT^nt,

one who lives by arms."

Datively Dependent.
145.

Or

those in which the relation of the

last is equivalent

clothing";
^|j|ri ).

to that of a dative

This kind of

first

word

as, 'qiXviH c|<=^, "

to the

bark for

"come for protection" (for \\m\^

compound is very rare, and is generally

^KUljilri;, -iTT,

supplied by the use of

-"it,

(r. 139.

e)

as,

^rorrr^

^TTTiTt.

DEPENDENT COMPOUNDS OR TATPURUSHA.

161

Ahlatwely Dependent,

Or

146.

last

those

equivalent

is

" fallen

from the

than you " (for

which the relation of the

in

word

first

as, UliW?:,
that of an ablative
kingdom " (for Us*^!^ >jf:)
>T^^:

to

>?^^)

" other

the

to

-it, -#,

>t^54, " fear of you."

Genitively Dependent,

Or

147.

last

those in which the relation of the

equivalent

is

common

of

dependent compounds,

all

may

and

expressed by a similar compound in English.

most part composed of two substantives

4^^^

(for

rj^ij

"

misfortune";

^5^,

(loc. c.)

(inst. c.)

";

of the

^froTT^,

^^pw:,

tain-torrent ";

"^T^l^, "

shore

bow-string

brow "

"

iftt,

"acquisition of wealth

g")<*.g"4

";

";

" a couple

fchH^, "

";

f#^^:,

of shlokas

rMri^'*<i

" a

j^^ ^<imi^
l

^rWT^^;, "our
speech

father's

Sometimes an adjective

a.

in

the

b.

^ qtiH

" the best of

men

";

f^f^^jrfin,

"

"for his

"thy deed";

gate

death

of

";

a mother's joy."
degree,

superlative

compound

used

as, "sn^i^nr:

men."

In a few instances the genitive case

" lord of

fools

surface of

ri-nflmN

" the

substantively, occupies the last place in the

or

"on whose

hundreds of

sons"; J^jaf^,
"

";

momi-

"state of

P^Mj^^ll,

^TjT^, " the

";

rnipF^

horse-back

ftrftTT^, "

"

on what account ?"

" with

iji^^^il,

";

" fulfilment of wishes ";

sea-shore

^i^f^,

the earth"; ^f^r^rfir., "lord of the earth";

support" (date);

"

'^vj^ua,

be

are for the

"

fl^^ifll,

"separation of friends";

on account of virtue
;

sea ")

the

to

generally

They

" brick-house ";

iT^:, " his words

as,

word

first

These are the most

that of a genitive.

to

is

retained

as, fr^TTwifTT:

" lord of day.",

Locatively Dependent,
148.

Or

those in which the relation of the

sky; IT^TT^, "sport in the water";

village";
a.

q^ti^iti:,

^{:^y[',,

It is

"born

in^J^TTft,

to

the

-'^,

-'fi

" sporting in the

"a

dwelleiLiu a

in the water."

very usual to retain the locative

nouns of agency

word

first

equivalent to that of a locative case

as,
" sunk in the mud " (for tr^ ir^)
J|iKl|f?r^Td
last is

as, HFf^TTft,

"a
Y

case, especially before

villager";

^n^^

"going

in

AGGREGATIVE COMPOUNDS OR DWANDWA.

162
the

water";

(see

r. 131. 1.).

"^tftrgftTT:,

-TTT,

"ornamented on the breast"

-"ff.

Dependent in more than one Case.

149. Dependent compounds do not always consist of two words.
They may be composed of almost any number of nouns, all
depending upon each other, in the manner that one case depends

upon

another

sentence

in

thus,

beyond the range of the eye "

" passed

^?7ff^^Trftrg!Tff:

^T^^

(for

"standing in the middle of the chariot";

4.vi.HU4.4Jii:,

TIT^Wlft^in, "skilful in censuring the

means

-irT,

-^.

fslM^M^ wfrTafPfT:)

WlrfyR-^lUN*!^-

of rescuing those in

danger."

AGGREGATIVE COMPOUNDS (dWANDWA).

This class of compounds has no parallel in other languages.

150.

When two
it is

to

or more persons or things are enumerated together,

usual in Sanscrit, instead of connecting

aggregate

them

them by a

No

one compound word.

into

copulative,
syntactical

dependence of one case upon another subsists between the

bers

of

Dwandwa compounds,

words which,
other

if

must always

connection

than

exists

and no

which

that

mem-

consist of

uncompounded, would be in the same case

grammatical

ordinarily be

since they

would

expressed by the use of the copulative conjunction

and

in English, or

the

chief difference

this

dependence

in

And

in Sanscrit.

between
case

this

it

class

of the words

should be observed, that

and the

last

turns upon

compounded on each other

insomuch that the existence or absence of such dependence, as

deducible from the context,

which the student

head or to the

is

in

is,

some

cases, the only

guide by

enabled to refer the compound to the one

other.

Thus,

Jj4$.r^r<M.^1iii:

may

either

be

Dependent compound, and mean " the servants of the pupils of

the Guru," or an Aggregative, " the Guru, and the pupil, and the
servant."

And

Jrnr^frfinTf

may

either be Dependent, " the blood

of the flesh," or Aggregative, " flesh and blood."

however,

This ambiguity,

can never occur in aggregatives inflected in the dual,

and very rarely occasions any practical difficulty.

There are three kinds of Aggregative compounds

1st,

inflected

,
,

AGGREGATIVE COMPOUNDS OR DWANDWA.

the plural

in

in the dual

2d, inflected

In the

gular.

two cases the

first

163

3d, inflected in the sin-

crude of the

final letter of the

word terminating the compound determines the declension, and

its gender the particular form of declension
in the third case it
seems to be a law that this kind of compound cannot be formed
unless the last word ends in a, or in a vowel changeable to a, or
;

in a consonant

may
may

which a

to

invariably neuter, whatever

be subjoined

and the gender

be the gender of the

is

word.

final

Inflected in the Plural.

When

151.
last

more than two animate objects are enumerated, the

Yama, and Arka

the plural;

in

inflected

is

" (for

^rfJT^, t^x 'sr^:)

^[i^:

Lakshmaiia, and Bharata

as, ^^iri<j.M*<l^i:, "

";

Indra, Anila,

<l*<';cja*i4l.*<<jrii:.

Hi|.^IM.fM^.5l<*Jli:

"

Rama,

" the deer, the hunter,

The learner will observe, that although

the compound is inflected in the plural, each

the serpent, and the hog."

member

the last

of

members has here a

of the

may

signification

constituting the

and foes"

(for

compound
fir^Tir,

^T^^)

vj J lUoh^.oiii oiltcJS'H

tures, herons, ravens, kites, jackals,

So

a.

when more

also

rated, the last

some or

may be

all

W^**4IH.*<^"lUli:,

words

of the

" friends, neutrals,

thus, (H-^jt^l^lH^^N'^: >

d(^llHi:,

and serpents";

tigers,

But a plural

singular acceptation.

often be inherent in

H }\\H \}^^\fm\\

"lions,

"dogs, vul-

and crows."

than two inanimate objects are

inflected in the plural

enume-

as, V*^lQ<+iH,*riHfi:

and beatitude" (forv^:, ^j^, eRR:,

^Tqim^^.^RTfT " sacrifice, study, and liberality " (for ^iRrr.

"virtue, wealth, enjoyment,

JtVcj:)

SHm^iH

In some of the following a plural signification

^T*t).

herent;

as, 3M41c^.Mic?ind,

"flowers, roots,

"of the unborn, the dead, and the

5#rart); ^^r7?^.:^TRT:, "eyes, mind,

and

So

also

when

merated, in which
flected

in

(for

b.

plural signification

the plural;

ramparts and trenches

^T%^, ff:^)

wsnin^. tttrt,

and disposition";
and

ClJ|.!^n*.Mrwi-

afflictions."

only two animate or inanimate objects are enu-

as,

"sons and grandsons";

"

in-

fruits"; ^nmrRir^r^nJlt.

fodlish "

TI^T^nT^5WTTftT, " sickness, sorrow, anguish, bonds,

b.

is

^n^"^TniTfT.

^e(HjU(T:, "

is

gods and men";

Mi(i)rMMi:> "falls
";

inherent, the last

and

is

in-

^-mm^'^t:

rises"; imiiTTTlftjTr.
" (for
*j^-e:%^, " in pleasures and pains

"sins and virtues."

"

DESCRIPTIVE COMPOUNDS OR KARMADHARAYA.

164

Inflected in the Dual.

When

152.

of which a
in the dual

^^57|zff

"

only two animate

singular
as,

signification

tPToTS^n^,

" a deer
jpTTUn^,

";

each of which a singular signification

the

dual;

inflected

is

tPT: ^TT^TO:);

and a crow."

4f<JI^1,

vsm^fi)

";

in

inherent, the last is inflected

hunger and sickness

(for

is

"affection and

as, ^rgrFijqTptr,

^PrUm^ "hunger and thirst"

'srqTFT:);

"

inherent, the last

is

So also when only two inanimate objects are enumerated,

a.

in

are enumerated, in each

"Rama and Lakshmana" (for

moon and sun

the

objects

enmity"

(for

wgrpn,

"^ fww);

(for

"^^awt,

WHnTnrn'lt, " by standing and sitting

JT^^rf^, " honey and ghee

^ff^p^, " plea-

";

sure and pain."

In aggregating two nouns of relationship, formed with the

b.

first is

placed in the nominative case instead of the crude

as,

affix IT (r. 41.), the

HIHlPMif^, " mother

and father."
Inflected in the Singular Neuter.

When two

153.

ther

or more inanimate objects are enumerated, whe-

singular or plural in their signification, the

be inflected as above,
neut. gender;
foSTftr,

'^^^:,

as, ij^m^i^c^Mh^,

"

last

"grass, food,

vS^Vn

"a

"s '^TTSTR^T^, " a

^filjyj,

either

water, and fuel" (for

day and night"

quarters and countries " (for

"sons and grandsons";

may

or in the singular number,

f^5[r..

(for

^^r?:,

nf^.)

^^)-

Sometimes two or more animate objects are thus compounded

a.

as,

V|<:|

^"i,

"elephants and liorses"; especially inferior objects,

dog and an outcast."

In enumei'ating two qualities the opposite of each other,

b.

common

is

r. 152.,

"flowers, roots and fruits" (for ^umfiii,

^T^WT^tcf^^^

Mic^Slffi);

^, T?^, Jj^

f^^,

r. 151. a. b.

to

form a Dwandwa

compound

of this

kind,

it

by

doubling an adjective or participle, and interposing the negative

as,

'gri^, " moveable and immoveable " (for

"SPTT^, "good and

able"

(for

fiT^

evil";

^rflR ^);

ftnnfiPT^,

^w

'^T''^

"in agreeable and disagree-

^lgy, "seen and not seen";

chrilgil,

"done and not done."

DESCRIPTIVE COMPOUNDS (kARMADHARAYA).
154.

In

describing, qualifying,

or

defining a

substantive by

,;

DESCRIPTIVE COMPOUNDS OR KARMADHARAYA.

165

means of an adjective or participle, it is common in Sanscrit to

compound the two words together, placing the adjective or participle in the first member of the compound in its crude state
as,
;

"a good man"

umiilHt,

f^ fift)

(for

jl[^

eM^

wife" (for ^M^if) ^mtr)

"a holy

" polished

speech

act";
";

member
" a

H^rMlricJi)

man "

last

member

"

Ht\^

ijj^M:)

"a

j-hhmI

JTfTO^;

as,

'

" great,"
,

in the first

not

i^rU^'M:

a great crime " (for

H^mirieji> "

" a

im^,

^Slf^,

king,"

compound,

a noun of the 6th

road";

Hl,l*0-

H^,

a great family."

of a Descriptive
as

^^^STe^*.

"the infinite soul"; i(m^[fiR,

holy acts " (for ^xnnf*T efi'^tTftl)

(for

a noun of the 1st class (see

vfvft^,

compound

the substantive

of declension
like

(for

H^I.4<JJ, "

When

b.

men "

of a Descriptive

great

Hn^l)

^J4j4^t:, " a troubled ocean";

substituted for the crude

is

JT^T

fvpUl

old friend"

xSHdlrl,

"^innF^lrTftr,

j^iT^TOWt, " of the best

a.

f^rfM, "an

ftnWT'^T*, " a dear wife " (for

" a beautiful

(for ^CT^t iPT:)

taken to form the

note

*.).

proper form

and

class (p. 41.),

p. 42.

"the eye";

is

loses its

it

'^jf^,

declined

is

" a friend
";

"the night," and some

ijf^,

other words undergo a

similar change in inflection, and

nouns of the

1st class;

as,

long night."

When

filil

m^C,

"a dear

friend";

become

f'llnj^,

"a

member

of

Dependent or Collective compounds the same holds good; as

in

c.

Numerals

these latter words form the last

in their crude state are

the place of adjectives in the

class;

as,

-eiri^^ i :

d. Adjectives,

compounds;

sometimes found occupying

member

first

of a

compound

of this

"the four castes"; "q^RraTt, "five arrows."

used substantively, sometimes occupy the

as, tiCH.VlT'^flli:,

"a

very just man";

last place in

Descriptive

m.HI5il, "a very wonderful

thing."
e.

Compounds expressing comparison

two substantives, the

as,

last

fall

being generally the

under

this class,

Mi}'M.M^^:> il^M^lf^i^:, TJ^'^^^:, equivalent to

* Feminine nouns are rarely compounded

tion tliat
adjective.

ftnn and

'^iTcnrt are the

t But

in this

IT^

is

"an

illustrious

way and
;

man."

there can be no ques-

proper crudes of the feminine form of .the

AVhen the feminine of an adjective

give place to the crude

and are composed of

name of an animal denoting su|>eriority

as, 4il(H<i)3l{t>

retained in a Dependent

is

used substantively,

it

does not

"a wanton woman."

;

as, H^(^|<S|^:>

"

i^'coui-sc to

the great."

COLLECTIVE COMPOUNDS OR DWIQU.

166

COLLECTIVE COMPOUNDS (dWIGu).

155.

numeral

compounded with a substantive

often

is

a collective noun of the neuter gender

ages"

(for

^^nftr)

^^i^Tft.

"three days"

Sometimes the

form

frf^,

the Latin triduum); f^TJ^, "three nights" (inr

(cf.

being substituted for TtN");

a.

"the four quarters";

"^jff^.

to

thus, "^i^^M, " the four

final

W^.

"three years"

vowel of the substantive

is

triennimn).

(cf.

changed to

as, fHr^jtc^,

" the three worlds."

RELATIVE COMPOUNDS (bAHUVRIHi).

156.

The greater number of compounds in the preceding four

by substantives, the sense of each being

divisions are terminated

in that case absolute

may

be used

and complete

relatively, that

is,

All such

in itself.

compounds

as epithets of other words, the final

substantive becoming susceptible of three genders, like an adjective (p. 32. \. p. 34.

].)

and

it

cannot be too forcibly impressed

upon the student that the terms Relative and Bahuvnhi have

refe-

rence to the adjective use of those compounds only which have a

substantive in the last

member.

This

is

so
is

much
to

as a distinct

show that

all

and complete in

regarded,

compound words,
which

subject, the object of

compounds, which are in themselves absolute

and are terminated by substantives, may

and in the relation of an epithet to some other

sense,

be used adjectively,

word

view of the same

to be

not

therefore, as a distinct division of the subject of

in the sentence.

We

have given the name

relative to

com-

pounds when thus used, not only for the obvious reason of their
being relatively and not absolutely employed, but also

because

they usually involve a relative pronoun, and are sometimes trans-

by the aid of

lated into English

this pronoun,

resolved by native commentators

into

and

are,

pounded words by the aid of the genitive case of the

Thus, JT^nrst

is

moreover,

their equivalent

uncom-

relative (ttw).

a Descriptive compound, meaning, "great wealth":

may be used adjectively in relation to 5^^ as, fr^TV^: "T^^,

" a man who has great wealth ": or to
as, ji^tvTT ^, " a
woman who has great wealth," and would be resolved by com-

and

mentators into

compounds

irtm

as, "

or

T^^qr: Tf^ >rt-

high-minded,"

In English

" left-handed,"

we have

and the

similar

like,

where

RELATIVE COMPOUNDS OR BAHUVRTHI.

the

terminating the compound

substantive

is

167

converted into an

adjective.

Relative

Form

of Dependent Compounds,

Many Dependent compounds

157.

those

(especially

are

that

instrumentally dependent) are already in their own nature relative,

and cannot be used except in connection with some other word in

But, on the other hand, many others, and espethe sentence.
which are genitively dependent, constituting by

those

cially

the largest

by declining the

relative

"

moon-shaped"

(p. 34.

"j-.),

"the shape of the moon";

^<^hhn:

like";
*'

elephant-footed

-'tTT,

-f^,

-^*

";

JTRnrom:,
" founded

the

to

amomrt

Ticq fciMti:,

'^.);

-^,

on wealth

hand";

the

note

-"^m,

";

"

-m,

owS.Mi^Jm:,

ij<uOlilVij:, -Tf^,

-Tf ,

-t,

-fir,

-"ftsi,

cR^^^^,

(r. 154. 6.);

"fHTJ^^*,

T^^f(wnf^ (agreeing with

J^l^^fHI. -^ar.

or

named Vishnu-

"lotus-eyed "

Narayana";

"called

of a lac";

-'^,

^F^T^fir:, -fin.

P^tuy^l^.HIHI. -TT, -T, "

^k,^ Mirm;> -ftut,

-^

be

manner

" splendid as the

"terminated by death";

(p. 42.

may

from the absolute compound ^r^T^fiK,

"whose form is god^|^^m:, -ift, -^^,

-^Hf -^,* "headed by Karna";

sharma "

instances

the

sun"; ^P^.M^;, -^, -t*

"
-^,*
ending at the sea "; JronpffJ,
^rnnpiT:, -^l,

-'^,

These

itself.

final substantive after

The following are

of an adjective.

far

of this class of compounds, are in their nature

and yield a sense complete in

absolute,

made

number

VTTfT),

-^ -^.
" money

-^, "having a club in

"having arms

on the subject of flowers,"

the

in

hand";

" relating to flowers."

These examples are not distinguishable from absolute dependent

compounds, except by declension in three genders.
a.

and

Many
if

of them, however, are not found, except as relatives

used absolutely would yield a different sense

means "the
" the kings

face

of Karna," but

headed by Karna."

of the spy," but

when used

p. ^2.

T.

TH^ may he

thus,

ec^r^

So

relatively to TJlfT^n.
also ^^TT^^ signifies " the eye

relatively to Tln. " a king

means of his spies," the nom.

b. The substantive ^nf^,

* See

when used

who

sees

by

case masc. being then ^K*i^:.

"

a beginning,"

suhstituted for

Tn^

in

when

compounds

it

like

occurs

in

^HmMI^-

dssr

;;

RELATIVE COMPOUNDS OR BAHUVRIHI.

168
the

member

last

relatively

sense

of a compound of this nature, is always used

some word expressed or understood, and yields a

to

equivalent to et cetera.

the plural or neuter singular;

It
as,

is

necessarily found either in

^^s^T^, " Indra and the others"

(agreeing with the nom. case ^ru: expressed or understood, "the

gods commencing

with

Indra ")

(agreeing with

others "

named things

Agni was the

first

eyes, Sec." (agreeing with ^fr^jmftff, " the

the eyes

When

").

"the

^g[gf#,

taken

^^ifWiyin^, " the

" the

by

understood,

"by

of which

that

Indra

the

is

first";

Belative
158.

and death

";

-eKi,

number

may

devan

is
;

used for

is

of things

be prefixed

the

as,

first

Form

word

>

as, ?[r*TTf^

" the

")

class of things

gods of

sometimes the substantive

or

--SB,

^rfcj

as, j^>^i^i: thtt.

is

the

" gifts,

whom
as,

Jfurftf',

(f Aggregative Compounds.

Aggregative compounds are

as, TUliomfM.^flcii:,

commencing with
either agrees with

of things of which liberality

class

and sometimes ^n?r

":

" the

'(^i^,i({irH,

&c." (agreeing with some

liberality,

Sometimes wrf^

first "}.

iti*

above-

those

devan, &c." (agreeing with "g^f# understood,

sentence

aforesaid

<Hir<^1l, "

&c.

and the adverb

word

it

or with a

aforesaid,'' understood,

collectively,

")

senses

used in the neut. sing,

Agni and the

" of

understood,

^;afanTt

of which

" of

<e|jf^i({iii,

sometimes used relatively

"that which

is liable to

sorrow, sickness,

especially in the case of adjectives or participles

as,

^^Cr;^, -W' -^' "black and white"; ^nngf^, -"RT, -"R, "bathed
and anointed"; i^T;3TTfn?^, -^. -^. "city and country"; ^HTT^.,
-TTT,

"done and done badly";

-if,

evil "

(r.

153.

6.).

Examples are

^jHpM:,

still

-n, ->T,

"good and

more common under

the

head of complex compounds.

Belative
159.

this

greater

Form

number

of Descriptive

of

Compounds.

compound words may be referred to

Every style of writing abounds

head than to any other.

* Sometimes cram
beginning thus."

is

prefixed;

as,

^^JTT^H^

W^jnnf^, "lamentations

RELATIVE COMPOUNDS OR BAHUVRIHI.

The following may serve
"whose strength is small" (p.

as examples

with them.

-fm, -f^,

"whose strength is great" (r. 154.

whose glory is great" (r. 68.69.);

"

(p. 41, 42.);

"^^nTTftjT:, -WT, -if,

169

34. f.)

a. p. 32. f.)

^gM^^lf^

H^I.<lcJJ:

-W' -^'

Jl^i.Mi:, -in:. -W,,

-Wl, -W, "high-minded"

H^lrifl,

"of noble demeanour"; Mr^lid^f^:,

" of wise intellect" (p. 34.

-^*, " having
f.) ; ftnwT^:, -4t,
a dear wife ";* ^^|<(4,fl<^Mt> -"JTr. -t. " not to be reconciled."
-fSl>

-%.

a.

in

Although a passive participle

an absolute sense,

this

is

not often prefixed to a noun

kind of combination prevails most ex-

tensively in the formation of relative

compounds

as,

min4I(^:

"
-q5T, -^>

whose time has arrived"; fW7[f^nn, -^. -"^t "whose passions are subdued"; ^rnfl^iTT:, -TIT,, -1(1, " whose mind is composed";

-^. -^, "whose hopes are broken"; ^ri.Us^j:, -WT, -iJf,

is taken away";
ssifHri',(^3|T:, -in:. -W,, "whose
glory is boundless"; cB?ToKTt:, -TT, -A, "whose desire is accomplished," i.e. "successful";
^Hrviri.^llM:. -^. -^ "by whom
the shastras have not been read"; fHcl.<f(^M:, -"TT, -^, "whose heart
HH|^i:>

"

whose kingdom

is

pierced."
Relative form of Collective Compounds.
160.

The following are examples

pounds used relatively:

" tri-ocular ";

-'ft, -"4,

substituted
-WT, -f^,

for

fg'MJ^:,

-Tjff,

P^;*[^ :, -iff ,

Dwigu com-

-^. "three-headed"

^^)\ ^g^.. -^,

" quadrangular";

of Collective or

-^, "two-leaved"; f^Tj^T^^l,

(^

-^. "four-faced";

^iri^^lC

-TJ,

-t,

being

^j^jKtrsr:,

" hundred- gated ";

^^f^:, -Jn, -?f, " possessed of the four sciences";

" thousand-eyed."

^r^^rrej:,

-'^, -^,

Relative form of Substantives compounded with certain Adverbial

Prefixes.
161.

This includes a class of compounds possessing no corre-

sponding absolute form,^ and composed of an adverb prefixed to a

substantive.

By

far the greater

number

of these are formed with

* Occasionally the feminine of the adjective appears in the compound;

Hrfi m<S ;,

"having a sixth wife."

t Unless they be regarded as the relative form of Ayayibhftva compounds.

as,

COMPLEX COMPOUND NOUNS.

170

the adverbial preposition

-^,

-VT,

"angry";

^,

" with," contracted into

"possessed of kindred"

-"^l, -55,

-^, -^,

"energetic";

fllH><: ,

companied by

ministers "

"fruitful "

-^, -^,

;Brq;^.,

(r. 54, 55, 56.);

"joyful";

^n^n, -mi*

-T^f .

;h

(p. 32.

as, ^tr^tv:,

.)

''5^.

THl^., -r^, -M,

^ET^rf^:, -'^, -^,

"strung"

(as

"ac-

a bow).

following are examples of other adverbial prefixes

^i^.I^v:,
"
"
of
weapon
various
with uplifted
-^, -^,
";
TRTTTaFTC "tT, -t,

The

aPHmfC -Tn, -it, "where dwelling"? giTPm, -^m, -t^,

"where born"? ^n^ft:, -H^:, -fW, "fearless" (p. 33. f.); imrfw.,

forms";

" of that kind."

-VT, -'^,

COMPLEX COMPOUND NOUNS.

We

162.

have now to speak of those complex compound words,

or compounds within compounds, which form the most remarkable

feature

in

Sanscrit

poetical

composition.

might be

Instances

given of twenty or thirty words thus compounded together, but

these are the productions of the vitiated taste of

more modem

times, and are only curious as showing that the

power of com-

pounding words
style the

may

often be perverted to the formation of a

most extravagant and

ridiculous.

But even in the best

specimens of Sanscrit composition, and in the simplest prose writings,

four, five, or

even six words are commonly compounded together, in-

volving two or three forms under one head.

It will

be easy, how-

ever, to determine the character of the forms involved,

propounded in the preceding pages

has only to study attentively the examples

a.

rules

we

are about to give.

Instances of absolute complex compounds, whose sense

be taken as examples

is

The following

complete and unconnected, are not very abundant.

may

by the

in proof of which the student

oRi^spnTral^^^iTT^HTftT, "

good and

evil

(occurring) in the revolutions of the interval of time," the whole

being a dependent, involving a dependent and an aggregative

^"^ITTfiPI^yTar^, " the general

and the overseer of the forces," the

whole being an aggregative, involving two dependents ^rtcHUPd.;

iTtiTTPiJ,

" the protection

from sorrow, enemies, and

whole being a dependent, involving an aggregative

"

perils,"

the

^r^^ftftjTJ^^T^,

the disregarded words of a friend," the whole being a descrip-

tive,

involving a dependent.

COMPLEX COMPOUND NOUNS.

171

But the greater number of complex tiompounds are used

as epithets of some other word in the sentence
as,

b.

relatively,

Tf^SinraTrnTt.

-t.

-ft.

"whose

teeth and eyes

were decayed,"

the whole being the relative form of descriptive, involving an aggregative

^c|i,Hld4lj^M1o

-"TT.

"having a white garland and un-

-!.

guents," the whole being the relative form of aggregative, involv-

ing a descriptive

" done in a former birth,"

^|.1t^.e(iri:, -ITT, -if,

the whole being the relative form of dependent, involving a descriptive

r^aHM"l.J^:,

-^,

-^,

"advanced in learning and age,"

the whole being the relative form of dependent, involving an ag-

gregative

^f^iT^^Wrft^hrtj

"having fresh garlands, and

-"TT, -t.

being free from dust," the whole being the relative form of aggregative, involving a descriptive and dependent;

^rftr^cfij^.f^Ki:,

"whose head was moist with unction."

The substantive ^rTftj, " a beginning," often occurs

-U:, -U,
c.

plex relative compounds, as in simple relatives

(r. 157. 6.)

^njnBTftoBT^: " parrots, starlings, &c." (agreeing with

,

com-

in

^ftpn

thus,

" birds

beginning with parrots and starlings "), the whole being the relative

form of dependent, involving an aggregative

war, &c." (agreeing with ^t# understood)
-^, "possessed of houses, temples, &c."

example

and other

'J^^^^TTTTlf^;^^,

Similarly,

WTO

-^,

in the

qualities ").

Long complex compoxmds may be generally

d.
last

^rff^i^T^jf^, " peace,

(agreeing with irsn. "garlands possessing the

4^H.J|Hii(i:

best odour

word and proceeding regularly backwards ;

*i^.*fc.^Kfarcjiri^ci;ir<*<jil<jMM.^gnricfc^^<<|

^^:

translated

by beginning

as in the following

-^T, -^, "causing pleasure

music of the voice of the cuckoo, blended with the

hum

at the

IC^.^MoK/HoM^-

by the

emitted by the swarms of

joyous bees."
e.

<||rHch or ^ly, as

occupying the

posed of "; thus, ^fftlty

last place in

I.V[q(^iriic(iT^<M.iriraji

horses, cliariots, infantry,

a complex

^^, "a force

relative,

denote " com-

consistuig of elephants,

and servants"; UM^nH^^c^ri dUiiH^^i) cM^cft, "the two

actions consisting of the good

and

evil

done in a former birth."

Certain Anomalous Compounds.

f.

There are certain compounds which are too anomalous in their

formation to admit of ready classification under any one of the

preceding heads.

Amongst these may be

placed those compounds

ANOMALOUS COMPOUNDS.

172
expressive

of comparison

or

likeness,

Karmadharaya or Descriptive

the

-5RT,

cloud";

Vi;1Wt^:, -^T> -U,

-'t,

^r^f^f^j^f^^nr^.,-'^,
tlf^Jfftl^^STiftirjIT^K,

g.

"spread

out

There

-^, -^, "tremulous

is

as water on the leaf of a

common anomalous compound formed by

^BTRTnlt, " another place ";

readily assignable to
all

any

idea of life";

"; *

^,

TjaTpfftST

fn'n"fnjfw. " other births."

" along with another

The following examples,

class

placing

" other ";

" another,"

as,

king

";

are not

also,

iM^ir<4ri4ri^, " a fighter

who aban-

"accompanied by the

^TlAt/^iO^:, -"m, -4,

^glfj^l, " never before seen."

Compound Nouns formed from Boots combined with

163.

mountain";

like

the last two examples are complex.

";

Sarasa

adjec-

these

"unsteady as a trembling drop of water";

-q^,

^iR after another word, to express

dons

the

In

class.

as,

i<ifi|UHl ,

lotus

under

^qr^^^r., -W'~'^' "fickle as a shadow";

"like foam"; '4(|^<.^t|lM:, -*n, -^, "dark as a

placed last;

tive is

usually included

In the next section

it

will

Prepositions.

be shewn that the combination

of roots with prepositions prevails

most extensively

in

Sanscrit.

From roots thus combined nouns of the most various significations

may be formed thus, from 5, " to seize," with f^ and ^(^, is
;

formed ^W^:, "practice," from ^, "to do," with ^fPT, ^^hl4.>

" imitation."
Hardly a line can occur in any book that does not
afford

an example of

this kind of

Sect. II.
164,

compound.

COMPOUND

The learner might look over the

VERBS.
list

of 1900 simple roots,

and very well imagine that in some of these would be contained

every possible variety of

idea,

and that the aid of prepositions and

adverbial prefixes to expand and modify the sense of each root

would be unnecessary.

But the

real fact

paratively very few Sanscrit roots in

is,

common

that there are

use

com-

and that whilst

those that are so appear in a multitude of different forms by the

prefixing of one or two or even three prepositions, the remainder

* So ^NlP^ri)^: in Nak, translated by Bopp, umbra geininatus.

COMPOUND VERBS.

173

are quite useless for any practical purposes, except the formation
of nouns.

Hence

compound verbs are of more frequent occurThey are formed in two ways 1st, by
with prepositions 2dly, by combining the auxi-

that

is

it

rence than simple ones.

combining roots
liaries

"to do," and ^, "to be," with adverbs, or nouns con-

"SR,

verted into adverbs.

Compound Verbs formed by combining

Prepositions with Boots.

Tlie following list exhibits the prepositions chiefly used in

165.

combination with roots

^fjT

"across," "beyond";

a/i,

by," "transgress" (pres. 'ar^fH, &c. p.

"upon," "over";

^ff^ adhi, "above,"

"preside"

(p. 107.

^Brf^, "to

lie

(p. 107.);

^^

(p. 113.);

"to stand over,"

^rftl^, "to climb upon'';

"to go over towards"

^rfv^PT,

^Nt, "to go over" in the sense of "reading"

anu, " after

";

the sense of "

^BT^^. " to follow

as,

performmg";

^jeji,

pass

112.).

as, ^rfviT,

pres. ^fnfrfVlOl)

upon"

i^, "to

as, ^rfinTT (p. 112.);

<eij^, "

";

(p. 113.).

to follow,"

" to imitate"
(p. 102.)

in

^RT^,

"to assent."
WJiR antar, " within
ceal"

Wf

apa, " off," "

and ^,

as,

"

away

up";

"to be within"

(r. 31.).

^jmn^, ^TT^,

as,

(from 5yq

"to lead away"; ^Mc^h

VHHtfl,

'

" to bear away."

It also

implies detrac-

" to defame."

^rftr api, " on," " over,"

shut

ano)

(cf.

place within," " con-

^nfr|,

walk in the midst"

vaiMcj^,

";

^nnf

as, ^nfflT, " to

"to go away";

p. 112.),

" to abstract

tion

" to

^Jpinsi^,

"to vanish";

pass,

in

(p. 119.),

(p. 104.)

"(cf. inter)

^rfxnr^,

only used with

m and

i?^

The

initial

"to bind on."

as,

^rfw,
is

" to

generally

rejected, leaving fii>n, fq*!^.

^ifin abhi,

"towards"

"to,"

wards";
(p. 107.)

^rftrm^.
;

"to

>M^*^^^, " to

^I^ aua, " down,"

"off";

(cf. ctt/)

run

as,

^BR^,

V7fi,

also implies

despise "

(p.

12a)

^!r5Tm,

towards";

"to cut

It

as,

^wt, "to go to-

^rfHff^r,

"to behold"

address," " salute."

"to look down";

off."

^rmt,

"to descend"; w%^^,

"to throw down," "scatter";

disparagement;

" (p.
^i^fBTT. " to insult

1 1.).

^R^.

as, ^T^r^,

"to

COMPOUND VERBS.

174

" to " " towards,"" "

a,

" to

^n^,

go towards

"to go up," "rise"

(tt^

and ^,

g^,

up";
to ^n

"to

lift

4fMri

"to leap up";

" to raise

of motion

"

towards "
as,

"i^,

(jf. v-no),

from

^^

^^,

fspui^, "

down ";

rHfcj^!^,

" to

";

not alter the sense

nir,

" out

go out";

"

go within,"

return," " desist

fffrgsiT,

with
as,

^,

TiT^l., " to

wait upon,"

" to lay down," " deposit

With

In

signifies

it

some

cases

it

";

" to

does

" to kill."
fJT.^ (r. 31.), " to

f^T^,

"to cut up"; fq^rf "to come to an end,"

,

iEsch. Choe.)

^, 2d conj., it

";

changed to

(cf. irapa),

signifies " to retire

(pres.

" around "

combined with

as, mjOil, " to

overcome "

q<ji

fif

(cf.

towards " (pres. i|^)

run away,"

" to

retreat,"

and

itapa-

When joined

^TO^, " to be defeated."

" to
^, 1st conj. atm.,

pari,

as, fipp(

f;pft^^. " to

fHfHH and

" to hear."

ffT^,

in the sense of " defeat

with

^^>

encamp."

" back," " backwards "

viKOLUi,

up."

With f^, "to determine."

"cease."

WS para,

(r. 15.),

lift

^fi? to roots

to suppress ";

as, f^FSPl^ (cf. note, p. 15.),

";

fall,"

^ and

joined like
";

" to

In

" to

tn^^,

down."

close the eyes "; fif8fM, f^THT.

"qft.

prefixed

" to stand up."

"to bend down,"

grrn, " to approach

" to sit

f^,

from

" to root

as,

g^Jtft^ (r. 15.),

When

r. 17.).

as, '^7rT,

action

up";

fly

up "; T?^^,

from Tm, "to keep down,"

";

^,

(r. 16.),

^t, "to

" down," " downwards," " under " (opposed to Tit)

" to fall

and f^,

(ti^

the

reverses

it

up

ttpa, " to,"

with

Tftai^, " to cut

causes the elision of s

it

cases

ftiRL

With

take."

"to extract"; Tftr^ and

Ti^,
up"

some

ftf ni,

reverses the

^^

as,

(pres. '3^infiT, 1st conj.)

r. 18.),

" to open the eyes ";

7^

come

it

^rr^, " to

";

up," " upwards " (opposed to f^)

ut, "

TS

"to give,"

?[T,

" to practise."

^,
gru;^

wif^, " to enter ";

mount up.'' When preas,

" to

^n?5?^,

" to
"^(Tm,

^T^,

as,

";

^, "to go," and

and

fixed to JTT

action

up " (Latin ad)

with

when

r being

f) ).

(cf. irepi,

per)

as,

qft^g,

ffft^,

" to

sur-

nQw^, qftil*!^, " to go round "; ti^^, " to look round,"

" examine "; yft.!-!^, " to turn round "; qfijqic^ " to run round."

round

";

When
qOlMh.

prefixed to

With

>j,

it

signifies

"to adorn," and

is inserted,

"to despise," and with ^, "to avoid."

It

some-

COMPOUND VERBS.

175

merely gives intensity to the action

times

as, 'ifijin^, " to

abandon altogether."
IT

pra, " before," " forward "

proceed

pro,

(ef. irpo,

pra)

as,

" present
";
Jpn^, " to set before,"

";

BVrr^, " to

" to

ir^,

run forward "; HWr^

"to be superior," " prevail "; iff^, "to foresee."
a

its final

nasal

by

r. 21.

inp^, " to

as,

fight against ";

return

TlfiT^

";

The

back again

" to
inft,

go towards " (pres.

" to

";

counteract

";

^,

it

drops

r influences a following

bend before," "

" towards," "

ufir* pratiy " against,"

begin

With^M,

In combination with the causal of

as, i^MMrfH, " I send."

" to

to set out," " advance "; jp^,

"to deceive."

Tt^,

nrp^,

salute."

";

as,

TT^fir)

" to

ufirf^,

nfk^,

" to

nfriJiH^,

" to

beat

back,"

nfirr^, "to answer"; irfil^ "to recover"; uPriHl

" to lead back "; TrfinT^. " to re-salute." With
^, " to promise ";

"repel";

with
f%

vi,
*'

"to arrive

11^,

at," "obtain,"

" apart," implying

dispersion''"'

(Latin

" separation,''' "

dis, se)

f^^,

as,

" distribution,''''

distinction,''''

" to

wander about

";

fr^^,

"to vacillate"; 1^, "to roam for pleasure"; f%^, "to dissipate "; f^, " to tear asunder "; f%>n^, " to divide "; ftrf^,
" to distinguish."
Sometimes it gives a privative signification

as,

f^^, "to

With

f^,

disunite";

Sam, "with," "together with"

as, f^^T^t^,
(a-vv,

^jSi, "to sell."

Sometimes

"to change for the worse."

apparent influence on the root

"to forget";

has no

it

" to perish."

con);

^rf%, ts^^,

as,

"to

ir^fy "to join together"; ^[jp[, "to meet together ";

"
With ^ it signifies
to Kappen "; ^rf^, " to contract.
^mr^,
" to perfect," and
^ is inserted, ^^ It is often prefixed

collect";

without altering the sense

166.

Two

"to open"

as,

^^i^, " to be produced."

prepositions are often combined with a root

(fV,

^); ^, "to assemble"

TlftPR^^,

"to prostrate one's self"

(u, Ti^,

with root

(n, f^, r. 21.);

l^, "to

* The

^); irg^, "to answer"

final of the prepositions,

forming certain nouns

as, tqi^,

raise

up"

^).

Occasionally three prepositions are combined

predict" (u, f^,

(w{, WT, with root \);

as,

infNlR,

ufrr, tjft,

x;^^,

^T,

tfhtiR.

(ijfff,

is

as, ir*n^>

TiT,

" to

^.

optionally lengthened in

COMPOUND VERBS.

176

In conjugating compound verbs formed with

augment and reduplication do not change their

prepositions,

167.

the

are inserted between the preposition and the root;*

^, with

pret. of

T^, with

1st pret. of

2d pret. of 5, with

f^,

as, t|%!i4, 1st

with Ttj

^,

nfinniR, 2d pret. of

and

if

Grammarians

168.

when

dmf^l^j, 1st pret. of

ijft;

with

ample, the root

restrict certain roots to

enter," with

" to conquer," with f^,

-ftr,

fVr,

-''iHrria ,

irfir

3ftl5r^,

Tf^.

particular voices,

combination with particular prepositions

in

position, but

for ex-

as,

and the root

f^,

" to

atmanepada; but no certain

are restricted to the

rules can be propounded on this subject

and in the two epic

poems especially, the choice of voice seems so entirely arbitrary
and subservient to the purposes of metre, that many atmanepada
:

and even passive verbs, are occasionally permitted to

primitive,

take a parasraaipada inflection.^

Compound Verbs formed hy combining Adverbs

These are of two kinds

169.

adverbs with

and

>j^;

^T^,
ctO^t^ ,

" to

adorn

";

"to eject";

" to deprive ";

^nsfi.

VTH|1^> irr^, " to

170.

a or
from

from

wrf^FSR, " to

5^.

formed by combining nouns

2dly, those

used adverbially with these roots.

Examples

^Jrojfhfi,

fini.

note, p. 15.)
N^rnog,

mMi, " to revere

";

become manifest," &c.

z;

as,

from

"to blacken";

final

" to become pure

(cf.

"to place in front" "follow";

" to entertain as a guest";

changed to

"sirajr,

of the first kind are>

make manifest "

In forming the second kind, the

a, is

^ and >T.

by combining

those formed

1st,

with the Boots

";

tetst*

or, in

final of

a crude word being

TRlfr^,

"to make ready;"

a few cases, to

or u are lengthened

^,

from

* There are a few exceptions

^T^.

as,

a,

as

from ^"N,

" to lighten."

to this rule in the Maliabharata

final

fi|ill<

'^^^J^'

ri is

as in -^Hf^^^.W

(Prof. Johnson's Ed. p. 33.).

t Thus,

'irff

" to strive,"

and j([^

pada verbs, are found in the paras.

p. 89.

notet-

maipada verb,

On
is

" to beg

for,"

which are properly atmane-

Instances of passive verbs have been given at

the other hand, ffr^, "to rejoice," which

found in the atm.

is

properly a paras-

In

COMPOUND ADVERBS OR AVYAYIBHAVA.

changed

to

rJ; as, from

i^

final as

becomes either

mind

or

";

asi, as,

t,

m^,

as,

Jrnfhj^,

from

^nT^, *4*<*0*J^ " to

f^njT, f^rilfft^T* " to place

from

formed from crude nouns in

" to
AisHf,

The

a.

esteem as a straw

this

kind

are

following are other examples

^cT^4^, " to stiffen

";

be of good

on the head."

But the greater number of compounds of

a.

"to become a mother."

^cfif^twr, " to

";

mind on one object."

Sometimes Wi?;. placed after a crude noun, is used to form a
b.
compound verb of this kind; as, from i^, "water," W5yfrri|i, "to
fix

the

reduce to liquid

";

from HW*^, " ashes,"

>4^f(1i|;,

" to

reduce to

ashes."
Sect. III.

COMPOUND ADVERBS

(corresponding to

AVYAYIBHAVA CoMPOUNDs).

Compound adverbs are formed by combining

171.

adverbs, pre-

nouns in the singular number

positions, or adverbial prefixes with

neuter gender.

The greater number are formed with the adverbial

a.

tion

saha, contracted into

" angrily ";

^7T^=TTnT,

from ^n^,

" prostration

;ff

sa

from oFtq, "anger,"

^n^, " respectfully "

as,

" respect,"

of the limbs,"

As, however, the neuter of

all

preposi-

^isi^md,

may

adjectives

^(niRtTt,

from

" reverentially."

be used adverbially,

compound adverbs may be regarded as the neuter of the

fifth form of relative compounds (r. 161.).
b. The following may be taken as examples of compound ad-

these

verbs formed with other prefixes; ^j,3<^^ "according to seniority";

ITW^, " over every limb "; lffif^HT, " every month "; Tivfi f\|fu, " ac,

cording to rule

";
^nnT^rf^, or xrT^^[^,
"
*<v|i;<jw,
happily "; t^k^, " before the

for

^^,

cf. p.

165. b.)

^re^,

"

"

according to one's power

";

eyes" (wBJ being substituted

";
frft^ " without

undoubtedly

distinction."
c.

nouns

Some
;

of the adverbs at

r. 139.

thus, 4(l<^c|iHH)q, " near the

may

child ";

be placed after crude

T5|T^, " for

the sake

of protection."
d.

kind of compound adverb

lengthening the
the last to i;

as,

final of

the

first

from ^?^, "a

is

formed by doubling a noun,

word, and changing the

stick," ^mr^ft^,

A A

"mutual

final

of

striking."

SYNTAX.

178
e.

Complex compound adverbs, involving other compounds, are

as, ^ .^^.r^fttr^? " not differently from one's

sometimes found

own

'

house""; W*r><i.r4H*< **<r;Hg'

riMVij

" regardlessly of the

curving

of her waist bending under the weight of her bosom."

The
"today"
/.

iprfir

indec. part. ^nTI, "

(^5rerRl),

placed

is

9|HH*Tf7, "

in the

having begun,"

sense

"from

of

adverbially after words, in

is

joined with ^ir,

time forward."

this

same sense

the

as,

from birth upwards."

CHAPTER

X.

SYNTAX.
Strive as we may,

it is

impossible to free the orthographical and

Grammar from

etymological part of Sanscrit

intricacy and

a certain degree of

But admitting, as we

complexity.

do, this

com-

plexity in the early part of the subject to be greater than

ordinarily found,

we

at the

same time

affirm, that, in

gregate calculation, the preponderance of

When

of the classical languages.

difficulty is

to him,

letters

and the

nouns and verbs, the path, in Sanscrit, becomes easy

and he passes with the utmost certainty

quaintance with the subject in

or Latin.

the ag-

on the side

the student has once thoroughly

mastered the rules relating to the combination of

inflection of

is

At the point

point in the

to a complete ac-

Not so in Greek
bearings.
where our labours end, at that
and the young
labours begin

all its

in Sanscrit

others do our real

however versed in the declension of nouns and conjugation

of verbs, finds, when he enters upon the syntax of these two lan-

scholar,

guages, that he has hardly passed the threshold of his studies.

is

in the syntax of

ship

lies.

It is

Greek

It

and Latin that the true test of scholar-

here that an almost interminable

opens before the grammarian, and

difficulties

field of

assail

inquiry

the student,

demanding, for their complete mastery, a more than ordinary degree of mental application and capacity.
hand, the subject of syntax

is

In Sanscrit, on the other

reducible to a few plain rules, and

SYNTAX.

179

The almost
might almost be merged in that of compound words.
government
in
prepositions
with
nouns removes
entire absence of
one fertile source of difficulty and such is the extraordinary pre;

valence of compounds, that the student

insight into their formation has

who has properly expounded

who has acquired a thorough

little else

to learn,

this portion

and the writer

grammar has

of the

already more than half completed his investigation into the laws

which regulate syntactical combinations.

We

the present chapter, to collect together

the most useful rules

for the

connection and collocation of uncompounded words, pre-

we have done

supposing, as

throughout, that the student

quainted with the general principles

Much

all

shall endeavour, in

of the

attach to the rules propounded,

scrit literature consists

of syntax are

when

it

subject

may

vagueness and uncertainty, however,

is

ac-

before

us.

be expected to

remembered that San-

is

almost entirely of poetry, and that the laws

ever prone to yield to the necessities of metrical

composition.

may

Observe, in the present chapter on Syntax, that the subject

be made as clear as possible, each word will be separated from

the next, and vowels will not be allowed to coalesce, although such
coalition be required

by the laws

of combination.

pounds are introduced into the examples, a

will

mark the

in general,

division

selected

of the words.

Whenever com-

dot, placed

underneath,

The examples have

been,

from the Hitopadesha, or the Mahabharata,

with the view of serving as an easy delectus, in which the beginner

may

exercise himself before passing to continuous translation.

CONCORD OF THE VERB WITH THE NOMINATIVE

172.

CASE.

The verb must agree with the nominative case

and person, as in the following examples

^n^

in

cRTj^Tftr

number
" I

must

j^ ^R^^, "do thou attend"; ^ ^^rfiT, "he gives";

we
two say"; ehMlril "31^, "the pigeons said"; Tnn T^
f;^:,
king and minister went": i|N-^ ^^^T^ fIfr: "as
"the
^ WTj:,
long as the moon and sun remain "; ^^ f^Tinnf " do you two reperform;''

^TRt

"

flect ";

^[iPT

honoured";

moon

wmiri

"do ye come"; ^nSRT:

^ifir xpnr:,

rises"; ^gs^fw "Jiq,

^iT^.

"the wind blows";

"good men are

^^M^A

"the flower blossoms."

^T^IT^:.

"the

SYNTAX.

180

When

a.

a participle takes the place of the verb,

number and gender

with the nominative in

THT, " she

went

fW:, " the king

b.

was

Sometimes, when

with one only ;

c.

Very

as,

" the
"; "ITT^T^ ^^^itfi,

^^Tj;

placed between two or

omitted

the place of the verb,

and number

W^

U'-4

MoTlPllril

is

Rrn^,

it will

tH

as,

"

'^^*T,

we two have

ly

"

it

must agree

ttw:, "

he went";

two women spoke

more nominative

as, r<ij:

TTUT

cases, it agrees

which connects the subject

Avhen,

an adjective stand in

if

follow the rules of concord in gender

**

wealth

difficult

is

of attainment

But

finished eating."

if

ti^

vm-q^f,

";

a substantive

number

stand in the place of the verb, no concord of gender or

need take place;

";

bonds were cut."

wife and son were awakened."

liis

often the copula, or verb

with the predicate,

atTMH Pw P^^iPh* " the

killed ";

it is

as,

"successes are the road to

misfortunes."

CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE SUBSTANTIVE.

An

173.

when not compounded with

it,

substantive in gender, number, and case;

jt^^ j:^, " great pain

man ";

pronoun, qualifying a

adjective, participle, or adjective

substantive,

mentioned countries

";

";

ij^ i^sT^J

"^Hilir fir^rftBT,

*'

must agree with the

as, ^rra:

tp^:,

"a good

'^f^, " in these before-

three friends."

CONCORD OF THE RELATIVE WITH THE ANTECEDENT.

The Relative must dgree with the antecedent noun

174

gender, number, and person

but, in Sanscrit, the relative

almost invariably precedes the noun to which

it refers,

in

pronoun
and this

noun is then put in the same case with

and the pronoun ^: generally follows in the latter clause of the sentence as,
^?^ nGW W%: ^ i<^MIl^, " of whatever man there is intellect, he is
strong."
The noun referred to by the relative may also be joined
the relative,

with w.
as, T[^

WJ^

as,

TTW ^%:

JiPrisiiri

^Tjwrf^

Td ^^m^; or may be omitted altogether,

" What you have promised, that abide by";
m^i^j^i, "

By

young ones were devoured, an inquiry was

set

wrf^f^

those (birds) whose

on

Wi^ ^\t^^

^: (TrP^fiT:, understood)

ftrimErr

foot."
a.

The

Relative sometimes stands alone, an antecedent

pronoun being understood, from which

it

noun or

takes its gender and

num-

"

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.
ber;
is

as, TfrfttT

(TTRTiT^

j<Wc(|,^

understood) t^it ftrw lBTm:, "there

not a happier (than that man) of

with a friend

";

v^ f^ ^

181

-^ ^^Tfw, "

whom

there

What

is

is

conversation

the use of wealth (to

him) who does not give ?

b. Sometimes, though rarely, the antecedent noun precedes the
relative in the natural order
is

not a wife in
c.

and

(TI<4H'

strative

and

TT^ff^nf^, "

whom

T^ WP^ '^^

as,

>T#T

*r ^^^ififj

"

She

the husband does not take pleasure."

stand to each other in the relation of demon-

iir^ri

relative

MNfil

as,

As many products

iT^

ifN^

W^

rtNPtl

'5R'RT3B^

as belong to that island, so

many

are to be brought to us."

and

Similarly, dl^^l

d.

"

As the event occurred,

f\\t\\

as, Tfl^l^T

so they related

it

to

71^ ^r IT^

*rviri<4d:.

him."

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

Under

this

head

it

is

proposed to explain the construction of

substantives, without reference to their connection with particular

adjectives, verbs, or participles

and for

this

purpose

it

will

be

desirable to exhibit examples under each case.

Nominative Case.

substantive simply and absolutely expressed

nominative case;

in the
"

the

poem

a.

Two

as, f^i^xi^^:,

must be placed

"the Hitopadesha

";

hPiJ^I^M.

of Bhatti."

nominative cases in different numbers

in apposition to each other

as,

"^inrrfcr

may

be placed

^P^n, " grass as a bed."

Accusative Case.
b.

Substantives are not found in the accusative, unconnected

with verbs or participles, except as expressing duration of time or

See

space.

r.

180. 181.

Instrumental Case.

The most usual is

that of the instrument or means by which any thing is done
as,
^j^ (-gr^), " by me it was said "; ^an^ (^n^ ^TlHiid:), " by the fowler
a snare was laid "; ^(^ m* ^H " by the study of the Vedas ";
175.

This case yields a variety of senses.

isi'il^m, "
a.

It

has

own eye."
the force of " with " in expressing other col-

with one's

also

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

182
lateral ideas

as, 4i(^1^fll ^irtr, "

vying with the

flMimt, "conversation with a friend

beasts

";

"

"ftrj^ ^ft'^tjsr,

strong
^*

tf^i^, fiiHi>4,

intended

is

as,

fintljr

";

equality with

with the knowledge of (his) father

when accompaniment

cially

";

espe-

";

ir^, " the

f^i uli!]

master with his pupil."

this case are " through,"" "

The other senses yielded by

b.

reason of";

as,

'hM^|,

by

'^ ^nro^, "on

"through compassion";

account of that transgression."

^TWT^
d. The

iHT

to," "

"According

c.

" according to

"

manner "

in

by

^ W tj)tT>

" in

'

^t^

"they both

(fjR^nr:),
ti^J^Mr^i

^r^m

(-T

mind ";
with

the

" there is

The

m ^),

g.

h.

f^1>iRT,

together

"in

price for

"they

So, also,

five

is

done

may

is great difference

inft^nf

";

as,

Tnflnt

" there is

be in the instrumental;

Similarly,

between two things;

be joined

use for a straw."

puranas he becomes a slave

";

as,

'^^fiw. ^%t.

Trn!ir5ft3qFT^;^^

(^

'T

life."

Tg^n VH^ill

T?^

^rJflt.,

between you and the ocean."

expression " under the idea that "

of the substantive "^fs

may
-^^m

as,

not obtained at the price of the sacrifice of

difference

The English

^^^

ir%*T "eFI^* " there is

fight for great rewards."

is

j^^ttt

intimacy";

beings in glory

all

of " want," " need,"

which any thing

(Alinr (^1Hh)> " for

way";

form."

for inquiry "; fRIT

";

this

great

in

in, at]

#5a:m, " at

must not even be imagined in the

expressive

no occasion

^*q7t), " fortune

" there

" virtuously ";

instrumental of the thing wanted

THJ^

Mi^jOr:
(jj

It/,

a king surpasses

human

no need of me as a servant
/.

done, as denoted in

is

or by the prepositions

fl>)^

"

^K%^), " such a deed

41I*1M.^M4U> " in

^nWT, " by birth."

";

>|i5ftir,

dwell

^rfw^) ^ifW,

Substantives

e.

";

^#fT> "at ease";

pleasure";

(ypV'

affix

abundance

"according to rule";

fciPUHT,

opinion

which any thing

English by the adverbial

as,

as,

";

my

as,

m\n

is

expressed by the

<i^[, " under the idea that he

was a

inst. case

tiger."

Double Instrumental.
i.

idea,

Sometimes when two substantives come together, expressing parts of a common

they are both placed in the instrumental, instead of one in the genitive

^ch^; "T^T. c||^i^, "an odour

<^cj>H

5^t).

is

Similarly, ttTH

emitted

by the bakul-plants by

SMIHill^^imi^ ^tinfiT5I^ xJn^Hl^^;,

her to revive by her attendants by sandal- water."

as,

their flowers" (for

"he caused

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

183

Dative Case.

This case

176.

of very limited

is

irrespectively

tions,

func-

its

influence of verbs, are restricted to

the

of

and

applicability,

the expression of the object, motive, or cause for which any thing
done,

is

" for

the

or

self-aggrandizement

of calamity

renown."

^r^
When,
";

following

are

'^ uPriMrlM,

as

the

in

the counteraction

arms and books

to

(lead)

denoted by this case, the verb

f^

"^([^

fm.flfl']'?

seldom

is

The

itself.

*^

TT^ftr

'JW^*

admixture of poison, then even nectar (leads) to

is

JM^^H f^Twt
not to

irritation,
"

is

"

example, the result or end to

last

examples,

other

where there
";

";

as, ^snwi^rfSr^,

but appears to be involved in the case

expressed,

death

^4mrMffiahKIM> " for

^ ^n^

which any thing leads

"

which any act tends

result to

inKt^rni

\\\*^^, "

tt

conciliation

advice to fools (leads) to

YST^ffRT

TTWH

^^iTlm*!

*T

'3T>T^,

that old husband was not to her liking."

a. It will

be seen hereafter that certain verbs of "giving" and "relating," govern

Substantives derived from such verbs exercise a similar influence

the dative.

^TSTW

"the giving to another"; ^piR%

c|T^,

Words

b.

ch'V|H,

"the

as,

as,

telling to another."

expressive of salutation or reverence are joined with the dative

'lUI^II^ T'K, " reverence to Ganesha";

oji^l^ ^, "health

to thee."

Ablative Case.

The proper

177.

"

from

fJT^:

mouth
a.

as,

";

l^yttrn^^

tnnt> " falling

("^tv:

the ablative case

of

force

TW^fir), "

is

expressed by

from avarice anger

arises ";

^^TfT. "

from the

from a mountain

";

'qRTOI

of the spies."

Hence

relative ideas

this
;

case

passes

to

as, SMI^IilH^ r<*nil

>

and

like

of,"

"in consequence of";

as,

the

slaughter of cows and

men

the instrumental

it

the expression of various cor-

" a portion of (from) their food ";

very commonly
jf)

Hamuli

":

signifies "

WVTli;^,

fiM^l..H^^llri

by reason

"on account

(^

fVp^),

"

of

he

blames his son for entering inopportunely"; ^T^^rm^, " through fear
of punishment"; ^wnjnE^^^Tnr, "by reason of my good fortune."
b. " According to ";
as, JTf'^rr^iTTH^, " according to the advice
of the

case

to

minister."

express

reason of

the

Abstract nouns in j4 are often found in this

some of these ideas

unsteadiness

of his

as, ^fl^f^Jnri^rRrrn^, "

mind."

Especially

in

by
the

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

184

writings of commentators;

as,

^^^prnsrPrTiT

"according

what

to

be said hereafter."

will

of";

expresses " through the means

It also

c.

^SH^:, "caught in the

as, ^PTT^nn^

mentality of the jackall

alleviation

of disease is

through the instru-

toils

^ ^WjfWRTf

";

or " instrumentality

""'

" the

^nf^ H^),

(^n^:

not effected by the mere knowledge of

the medicine."

The "manner"

d.

ablative;

as,

;{H

wonder"; T^5T^

which any thing

f{^>

^^i.4!f,

done,

by the

"tearing up

own

pleasure"

This case also denotes "after";

e.

is

is

as,

or

roots";

(cf. p.

e|iH^^|H, "with

by the

ablative affix

162. a.).

^Illi^fclJIHM

"after separation from the

body"; H^^.ufrl^'MHIfi, "after the imprisonment of the Chief";

" since his

by the

occasionally expressed

"with diligence"; ^^fTiT. "forcibly";

^^3TfTt, "at one's

as?

iTOj

in

n^ 41

J[

HHlrt

>

arrival."

/. In reference to time, " within "; as, finT^TfT > " within tliree fortnights."
g.

Nouns

expressive of fear are joined with the ablative of the thing feared

M^J^ W^, "fear

of death"; ^Tjft

h4, " fear

as,

of robbers."

Genitive Case.

This and the locative case are of the most extensive ap-

178.

plication,

and are often employed, in a vague and indeterminate

manner, to express relations properly belonging to the other

The

true force of the genitive

case appears most frequently

";

>T%

her husband
slave of
a.

^\*^\\

";

b.

It

am

is

substantives are to be con-

as, "ftr^^

" ^^^ he^t

^nJ^

^T^ 5 ^Qw,

as, ^rfi:

^fra^ W^

" one's

"

speech of

of a

man

woman

is

is

not the

contented mind

often,

own
fsfi

V^^^

";

riches

^rw ^^^(1 HT^tr,

in possessing such a wife."

however, has the force of "

life is

dear to one's

a hundred yojanas

gain)";

" the

" all
^T'JF ^^T^ HIHW,

rally used to supply the place of the dative

"

^'^j

ornament

frequently expressed by the genitive case alone,

who has a

belong to him

happy

S^'

f^

man, but the slave of wealth."

Possession

without a verb
"

^?T?f

i{ 'ni{^^

equixalent to "of," and this

when two

nected, so as to present one idea

a friend

is.

cases.

is

self ";

to,"
;

T *riiH.S|rH

not far to one borne

ngi^TTTW 'Sif^f^,

"what

is

and

is

very gene-

as, ITTOT ^Ir(V ^>ft?T:,

unknown

gi.^l^*1HW ^WTT,

away by
to the

thirst (of

wise"?

f^

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

^PM^

T^t;. "

^nr^

king "?

women

It is

?nrt:, "

^^

man" ?

committed towards the

what can

this

"in" or "on";

man
as,

do to us ?"

^^hurt f^TSTTTn,

^^ ^T^^t4y "dependence on me."

";

even equivalent occasionally to "from " or "by," as usually expressed by

the ablative or instrumental;

as, tT cfi^qif^

accept a present from any one";

by us ";

have

oflPence

not unfrequently of

" confidence in
d.

what

^nm^ ^WlJk

ftp^

And

c.

V[^:, " what does a lamp show to a blind

McM^I^Pri

nrr

fjfi

185

xpth

TJ^ ^P^rft

^^niTTofi

tf iPTrf'tf

(<jm^H Jl^l^lri), " one ought not

(^^

TTTi^)* " the wood

f^5<ST: , " he

is

blessed from

is

to

to be abandoned

whom

sup-

pliants do not depart in disappointment."

two things

Difference between

e.

^^X, " there

,

expressed by this case

is

as, |)u| ^^oh^fll.

great difference between the master and the servant."

is

if?^

Cf. p. 182. g.

Locative Case.

The

179.

has the force of " in," " on," or

collateral

and analogous ideas

confidence

IfVj*<^^*jH(mi

you

in

"at the

";

"on

f^,

xn^, "in the village";

night";
*'

it

many

pressive of

diversi-

and frequently usurps the functions of the other

Properly,

cases.

most

locative, like the genitive, expresses the

relations,

fied

first

desire of eating";

as ex-

thus, ^jr^, " in the

i^

the back";

" rain

^T^^WcOrt ^f^,

" at,"

Pmhii^ :,

on desert ground ";

t^hj^ trftTift w:, "a

tree planted in the earth."

a.

Hence

it

passes into the sense " towards

^, " leniency towards an

"compassion towards

wards friends ";

enemy

all

fl^ri.^lri^

as,

"^m

as well as a friend ";

creatures";

^m^

";

"iff,

"

IJT^

^ fil%

'

^l.[fl^

^,

^^r^ ^rf^rati "upright toa hundred good offices are

thrown away upon the wicked."

b.

Words

signifying

" cause," " motive," or " need," are joined with the locative

^rrq;^ t^*.. "*^6 ^^^^ ^^ ^^^ modesty"; Vl^m^Jj^^*, f^lj^ >T^f^ PHt^lH
"your speech was the cause of the war between the two princes"; UlvmiiHNt

as,

^ rtlH
TJ^chTq ]

cHili)

f^^int, "the absence of a suitor

f^ u4^3i^ " what need

,

or occupation;

Words

Also, words signifying

of a boat."

ijd f^:

the cause of a woman's chastity

am

This case

^ ff[^,

";

employment

"engaging in the acquisition of wealth."

derived from the root yuj usually require the locative

TiT^tm "
c.

^lyrff^

as,

is

as, T{t{

T^^J^^J^m

of service in preserving the kingdom."

may

yield other senses equivalent to

"through

my

faults";

STTC M<.< K
I

B B

*U I *1

"by

reason of," "for," &c.

^T^^JNi^.

"a

spy

is

as,

for the

SYNTAX OF NOUNS OF TIME AND PLACE.

186
flake of

examining the territory of one's enemies ";

forhattle"; AiM H

W^JPJl,

cRT pvlfll ^IT]^ t!^> " *'hat

advice";
(f.

grah

in taking"

is

t^^is is

the time

^SHTT^. " disregard for

anxiety ahout dying in battle?"

used in giving the meaning of a root

It is also

41 (^<4 "

Trgf

"affection for her"; ;jq^^|

3^5 TTT^Tn

as,

"

>

Ae

root

conveys the idea of " taking."

i.e.

SYNTAX OF NOUNS OF TIME.

When

180.

reference

"in three years";

an instant";

fsgiRn

When,

a.

to

case

" for

1^ TT^,

all

used in

this

a long time
^^^JTif ,

sense also;

traded for twelve years

";

" for

as,

^^[

[m "^k^

trift^

f^^.

vj Tjf^

when

TT

on the third day

^bt: nf^r^rfnT

<

.^

When any particular period or

as, ecf^fvy^
locative may be employed

w 5^*

PiljTtj

is

";

xiPt

w^

";

^rrarft:

sometimes

"having

^fl^,

few days."

epoch
fi^^^j,

generally

is

"

referred

^gfrff

the

to,

on a certain day

or sometimes the accusative

;"

iri

is

one month

a hundred years

" for a
ehfriM^J.fcfM^:,

";

6.

"

?rre, " for

The instrumental, however,

eternity."

"in

cj^^^ili:,

duration of time, the accusative case

two months

wni, " to

time"?

"in

jiyH,

"in process of time."

chlc<&M^I^4!J>

";

^r

as, "Nfin.

"in twelve months";

"in how long

?RT%T,

as, ^l^raBjEl^, " for

any particular division of

to

usually required

is

^^^iPht. n%:,

hundreds of years";
used

made

is

time, the instrumental

^w\, "

";

as,

on the night

the ambassadors entered the city, on that night a

dream

was seen by Bharata."

NOUNS OF PLACE AND DISTANCE.

181.

Nouns expressive

to Carey)
"

Krishna

may
is

of distance between

be in the nominative

a hundred

two places (according

as, ^Bmr:

Kos from Somanath."

expressed by the accusative

as, "^1^ fJlftii

"SKt^TT:

Space

^iHIvjIil^,

may

" a hill for a

also be

Kos

";

or

tn^, "

having gone for a Kos."

by the instrumental
as, ^^T
The place in which any thing is done may be in the locative as,
;

f^^JTR, " in

Vidarbha."

SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES.
Accusative after the Adjective.
182.

The only

adjectives

governing an accusative are those

formed from desiderative bases

as,

^n^

"firtftf^:

" desirous

of

SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES.
going home

g^

";

" desirous of

'SMhg:,

187

obtaining a son

";

(ji|f{

ftfl^, "desirous of seeing the king/'

Instrumental after the Adjective.

Adjectives

a.

or

wealth";

^a^

used

participles

want or possession, require

UHI^^:,

this case

"possessed

expressive

adjectively,
as,

of

^Nt. " destitute of

"-avfHf

^rfWT "g^

of riches";

tjt:

" a jar full of water."

also of " likeness " or " equality

So

b.

" there has

T xr|U4rrf,

igfft

one

him

like

never been, nor

in this world

Brahman

that of killing a

";

";

d^.^i^l

in^:

^httt

";

as,

^^T TTg^ ^5^

will there ever be,

any

VJ^, " a crime equal to

msft, " a wife as dear as life ";

These are also joined with a

wrf^T ^"5^, "equal to the sun."

genitive.

Genitive after the Jdjective.

Adjectives signifying " dear to," or the reverse, are joined

183.

with the

genitive;

as,

"husbands are dear

fsf^r:,

"women

dislike

nobody";

"dear

ftPK,

TT^rt

to

kings";

to

women"; ^

iftgt H^fiT HPt^^lll,

^*^ \

fkX^^

"he

H^t.: ^pfNrr
\

^fTPTt.

detestable to

is

his ministers."

Adjectives expressive of equality often require this case as

a.

well

as

instrumental;

the

"like him";

aj^J^Mt,

oh^H> " nobody

is

'l*^w

others

easy to all

is

^^n*1l

''''capable

^j^^ ^wt.

" equal to all";

^i5T:,

"like the

moon";

TTPI

TPR

W^:

equal to him."

So also other adjectives;

h.

thus,

men";

as, 1|<^I4^^|:

U^Ml

TTWTW tP^:,

Tf^fK, '^Tljt,

''^v3orthy

"giving advice to

of happiness";

Tf^TH

of toil."

Locative after the Adjective.

184.

"

power

^nsrr:

who

Adjectives or participles used adjectively,

expressive

" or " ability," are joined with this case

as, ^Ufftf

" horses able for the

is

journey

";

a match for a great enemy";

JT^fir

^r^

^^\[i^\

of

T^

T^ THTT.

" a king

^rw

'i'^;**y^,

i\ifii^

" unable to build a house, but able to demolish one."

a.

So also other adjectives;

'''wise

in trifles";

adverse to

you

"

as,

^r^M

o(,^f^'t> ^''skilled

in

arms"; ^Sr5^^ TH^.

r^f^ ^ST^T^Rt 0^4.^ "m l^Fft, "is your master attached or

^tj5llf<M Hn^l<^C

" neglectful of his dependants."

,;

SYNTAX OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE.

188

SYNTAX OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE DEGREE.

Adjectives in the comparative degree require the ablative

185.

case

life ";

TH^wft^fiT T^xnfft, "

xn^

as,

J^^prlrrff

5^TTC ^I^' ^Jt^

even than one's

a wife dearer
f^Wli ,

" there

no pleasanter

is

touch in this world than the touch of a son

";

" the protection of one's subjects

than aggrandizement

JT^ JftfyddC

M*1T^

is better

" there

^STftcT,

m^<1M

Jiaii

^rn

i.iij4!J

";

man

not a more wretched

is

*rfw^ ^^^^^^hnft, "mind is more powerful than strength."

Sometimes they govern the instrumental; as, in^: ftnnit;,

than I";
a.

" dearer than

life ";

rT

"
^Rftjf -^gM,*<N^ri< >jf^,

^^fm ^^m

nobody upon earth more unfortunate than

When

b.

used

as,

it is

there

intended to express " the better of two things " the genitive

?[5R^

WnflX.

^^

^T^ITO

is

I.''

may be

" of these two countries which

is

the

better?"

The comparative,

c.

expression " better

in

and not

"better abandon

iT^fwt.

such an action

^^

";

Sanscrit,

as,

";

life

than

is

resolved

often

ITTTT'lftjm'ft "T

T#i tj^

^<f

"

that silence should be kept than a speech uttered which

d.

The

-grrt

as,

superlative degree

is

fs^ wt J^ ^1m

^2%

<*^fiB

and not) engage in

(literally,

eurnj rf '^ 4"<hh

J'T^

the

into

it

is

is

better

untrue."

usually joined with the genitive

-Mrtm^^t

^j^

^. ^: w|r^

JiO^^i

"a Brahman is the best of all bipeds, a cow of quadrupeds,

a Guru of venerable things, a son of things possessed of touch ";

^i;,

but sometimes

with the locative;

men "; and even

powerful of

^S'^t: ^lljHg'lliT, "

.

Comparison

is often

i^^fl|^,

/.

is

the best of

"mrTRf

as,

^I^

all stores."

expressed by an adjective in the positive

noun

in the ablative case

as,

nf% in'mT

" there is not a happier than he."

Many words

are in their nature comparative and require an ablative case,

^, ^r^, ^nI, ^RRfT, Waj^, ^, tf^^

q^.^ ^Wliw "^ " it is better not to touch mud

especially
'

^Rt.

"the most

t^tg ^sTcSTaTJ,

with an ablative

a store of grain

degree, joined with a

as,

H^UIIrt

WT^, "who
''what grief

"poverty
is
is

is less

^iVofi,

-girT

than to wash

desirable than death";

opt

HT

as, 5ij|Q5Hlft^
it ofiF";

"ftr^T^

able to rescue me, other than a friend?" fsg^ ^53i?

greater than this?"

'^ t^rfif^

WJi|^

r<:fdi(|fr

^TfrjH

WTO
WiH

"^Tif
'^t.

"one ought not

to

speak differently from what one has heard"; fTrfiT^yT^ ^f|(^T> "at another time

"

SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.
than the present

^l^

";

^niR'

TUJITT^

W^, "there

from any other quarter than from death";

hundred yojanaa ";

something

less

Numerals

g.

is

no cause of fear to

^9fi.^l'f(IH^ ^rf>Ni,

^R:

f^fif^

^g-*< l ri

<^ | d)<^>rf ;

189
man

"more than a

" intelligence of a lover

is

than a meeting."
if used partitively

"a hundred thousand

may

take the genitive

as,

-^HIMr

!^lri,44^IJlf^>

of the horses"; and, if comparatively, the ablative; as,

^ " a fine the double of that which is in dispute."

f^^T^TfT fsry^

SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.

The

186.

chief peculiarities

already been

the syntax of pronouns have

in

noticed in Chapter V., pp. 50

It

55.

remains to

one or two remarks with reference more especially to the

offer

and interrogative.

relative

In the use of these pronouns a very peculiar attraction

a.

to be observed

that

is,

when

often

is

a relative or interrogative

either

pronoun has been used, and an indefinite pronoun would naturally

be expected to follow, the relative or interrogative are repeated,
as
"

in

the

may

whatever

ti^

examples

following

ift

be the disposition of

Tj^, "whatever

" whatever excellencies belong to

any one

ever corresponds with any thing'';

(e. e.

whom ?

";

"xi^

any one)

ttpi

%^ f^ WW{

";

t^

grm: ^rf^,

^T5^^, "

what-

'STOnnfht, "

what

by any one).''
187. The relative and interrogative are sometimes used together
an indefinite distributive sense
as, ^nftf "FrfW ft^rrftr, " any

book

in

whom

pleasing to any one";

is

Pmr

oR^qf^) vrrm

(for

^iTPT

is to

be read by

(i. e.

friends whatever

rogative

^^

as,

or

";

more

usually with

oR^^fq?^, " to

f^

affixed to the inter-

any one whatever."

The neuter

of the interrogative is often joined with the

instrumental to signify " what is the use of ? " " there is no need
a.

of

as,

";

" of
tice

^tNt

fsi li^

what use
virtue,

of

is

what use

kept in subjection

make

^ Vi^ 'STR^

scriptural

this inquiry

?'''

foj

is

fsPT

knowledge

^nT*RT

^^

ftf^f^T^

one)

who

does not prac-

(to

H^,

a soul (to one) whose passions are not

^ ^r^

U^T> " what business have you to

* Sec, on this subject, Bopp's Comp. Gram. (Prof. Eastwick's Translation),

vol.

ii.

p. 637.

190

SYNTAX OF VERBS.

As already shewn

b.

by the use of the

cessary

pronoun

(p. 166.), a relative

compound

relative

may
"a

The

moon-beams."

tlie

sometimes rendered unne-

thus, f{J(Q xift^ahi inri.^'^T

"a

valent to ffTT^ ll^i^r xir>^cM;^riirH ^J^fijT,

vered by

is

when

relative,

is

equi-

whose palaces were

city

by a

followed

sil-

pluperfect tense,

sometimes be expressed by the indeclinable participle; thus, fti^ 'ajrv "^r^*

lion having killed a hunter," or " a lion

who had

killed a hunter."

SYNTAX OF VERBS.
Nothing

188.

verb to

be

is

more common

in Sanscrit syntax than for the

omitted altogether, or

is

verb

'KT^^

fmrj^^

^.

" as

from the context.

supplied

more especially the case with

thus, ^qr^ ^^iWiH
xfT^ iT^

This

the copula, or substantive

*i^\ri^

^'^{^ ^FT^ ^TT^

long as the gods have existed in Meru, as

long as the Ganges upon earth, as long as the sun and

the

so long have

sky,

we

(existed) in the family of

^R.^^^ "Trfi^. " discrimination

moon

in

Brahmans "

;*

wisdom."

(is)

Nominative, Genitive, and Locative Absolute.

These cases are used absolutely with

189.

minative
"

my

is

frequently
Himri

wWtt

die ";

" there

as,

'Sirq^

men

^snTfrgrot

'^ntnrrfhTt, "

looking on."

^rflcuPH

v^

" the

as,

am

rifarj^

^rfir,

Hence

" it

it is

"grnRT*^ '^rfiw,

calamities

impending

The

locative very
,

"

he living

^T^, " the night being ended

";

genitive

danger (being) distant."

is

noun

When

";

more
ij^^ril

commonly;
live,

as,

he dying

"WSfit T'Tnipfft,

Sometimes the verb

present participle of ^RT, "to be,"

mhnih:

The

ciple is thus used absolutely with a

inn

^^ ^

happy."

f^ ^:

being no other expedient."

^ H^,

as,

"the

riPwH^
I

very rarely thus used

friend having arrived, I

The no-

participles.

is

omitted

the passive parti-

in the locative case, the

often redundantly added; as,

being so done."

evident that the genitive or locative absolute often

takes the place of the particles, "when,"" while," "since," "although."

190.

Nominative Case after the Verb.

Verbs signifying " to be," " to become," " to appear,"

* The writer of these pages

Bengal Civil Service.
is

that on

is

indebted for this couplet to Mr. Seton Kan*, of the

It is in the

which they found

" to

mouth

of all the Kulin

their claim to precedence.

Brahmans of Bengal, and

SYNTAX OF VERBS.
be

called,""

or " to be esteemed,""' and

denominatively,

may

"she appears sorrowful";

ufrtmrri,

appears like a desert

tice ";

Tgift

r^riJM^^n ^^

";

them

Tj*n

Brahma

V^

^ifvnfH?^, " a

woman gathers

flowers

king

Jus-

is called

Verb.

after the

as, f^TS ^rar%

Nnlfif

"jwirftr

";

" the

tTTQ",

^^ ^yi^S man gave up

unnn^ T^ S'l^*
"one should avoid wine"; ir^ "|i^, "speak

";

^^^,

the ghost"; JT5

^ f^TTnT^

called Hitopadesha."

is

universe

created the

used

as, Tiin TTsrnn^S^:

of his subjects";

Transitive verbs generally govern this case

191.

verbs

i^^Tjnf nfrwrfk, "the village

" this (book)

Accmative Case

^vr:, "

other passive

take a nominative after

Wnr, "let a king be the protector

191

'

'

the truth."
a.

goes

So

also verbs of "

to

the

b.

";

";

^Jjrfir

Ti^*, "

'^^

as,

of pilgrimage

place

into the ocean

motion

for " he

The

";

man

" rivers run

as,

^rrfw

"
flHrilH "^ffd

"

>nfir,

he goes to

he goes to equality"

becomes equal."
following are other examples

tainahle"; f%?rt

f"(Hi|ii

mounts his horse";

cfiT^TfriT

"he should

^i||tqu

^^fil, "he desires what

think on

wisdom"; ^tgn ^TT^T^fk* "he

'^^fnt., "they began the business";

''grieve not for the departed "; ^i.<^liirMMi^H ^T^fif "

of the universe "; Mlriah'n^l. ^t^> " he

d.

" the holy

Verbs of motion are not unfrequently used with substantives

fame " for " he becomes famous";

c.

he wanders over the earth."

supply the place of other verbs

to

ift^ gffT:

'!^'. iHg<f tj^fiT,

lies

dovm

JirflH

^rrfjf ^Tff,

TT

unat-

^^T^J,

he deserves the sovereignty

in a cave of the mountain."

There are certain verbs which take a redundant accusative case

a substantive derived from the same root;

is

as,

^(Tf^ ^|r^,

after

them of

"he swore an oath";

"he dwells"; ^%it ^f^, "he conducts himself"; efHR ^^^, "he

speaks a speech";

*T^fir Tf^,

"he

raises

a cry''

(cf.

the Greek expressions

\070i', x^'P'^ X^P^"' &c.).

\e7ft)

Double Accusative after the Verb.

192. Verbs of ''asking" govern a double accusative;

seeks a boon of the god"; "ipt Tr3TTt

Of "speaking";
a.

J^ q |\<<
f^T^

as,

Causal verbs;
|

(H

^^R

Xm\A (^HH
as,

7^

^firf^
fi|Tt,

""Brmnrrfir

UlQ^^,

^Hri^ri,

>ftnrftT

^JJ^,

"the

Gum

^ '^

to

'TT^^. "he

money from

"he addressed a speech

^^, "he

"I cause you

as,

"he begs

the king."

to the king."

causes the guest to eat food";

know what

is

for

your interest";

teaches his pupil the Vedas";

ITT

'pt

SYNTAX OF VERBS.

192
li^^l^Pri

"he causes her

" she causes her son

" learning

The

b.

leads a

to sit

man

on her lap "

(literally

into the presence of a king."

following are other examples

chooses a

^Hmfri^ ^rfWf^f^:

ff

god for her husband";

man

(Hades)

^^ParilfH

Ti ^T^r^ f^^J^riril

loc.

"he

'jVif

them

sent

" they inaugu-

^^

'

^^HlP*!

^T^f^Tjfl'fiT

blossoms from the trees"; irnT nrf^Tlft^ ^nTTfTT^,

Yama"

^XTTrRir,

and water"; TJ^w ^^W{ ^Rl^^fri,

" her hip ") ; f^ren tTt
'fT ^^H^fri,

fruits, flowers,

rated him general," more usually joined with an ace. and

"she

TT^TWra

to enter the house"; MK;b.M"i)<<4

" he presented the kmg's son with

tjfif '^TTrfir,

"she gathers

to the abode of

prf^, "his own acts lead

eminence or the reverse."

to

Insfrmnental Case after the Verb.

Any

193.

may

verb

be joined with the instrumental, to express the

manner of the action as, ^raj efT^ j^iiifif,

by reason of the wind "; ^%: "gSi^, " he plays

instrument, or cause, or
" the flower fades

with dice
rain

its
a.

";

";

^rft^lrit "^l.

^^

In this sense

iftwfir

many

"

fH^mnfri, " the cloud puts out the fire with

he

lives happily."

causals take

an instrumental;

as, irt

ThSI^T. >?^nTRnr

" he caused her to eat sweet-meats."

b.

After verbs oi" motion" this case

is

used in reference either to the vehicle by which,

or the place on which, the motion takes place;

as, ^v)'r(

chariot"; ^I^tf V^lfil', "he goes on horse-back";

TO^ 4JNK

road";

^m^
c.

f^l

oh^l

"he

IPTrfWj

Jfirftsr Jlxadfrl)

"he goes

on his head";

navigated the ocean in a boat."

is

^^K*

^^

placing,"

carried or placed

^^H

41

i^rl

<^c., it is

as, sj^fif

"the dog

found with this case in the sense of placing;

his son

Similarly,

on his head."

The

as,

is

used in reference to the place

T^^,

jt%t

"he bears

with his ministers."

^^^'odfri

But

f^HJTT

T^ ^ToR^H,

following are other examples

in this sense ^H^

is

ally with the ablative.

Verbs of
*\^im

^^

^^

"ftniST^j

TJUUt ^R[f^t

boasting";

'WT^f "you

as,

"he

is

is

15^t>

consulted

it.

>T%T HT^TTT

"he

harnesses the

separated from the body," more usu-

" he fights his enemies," or l^Rfn:

fcj^iji f^oKP?f^,

"you

boast of your learning";

glory in the fame of others."

V^fqT ^T^, "he swore by his bow."

ofi

*'he placed

f^T^TJ T^BCfiT 'T^I

usually placed after

"the husband meets the wife"; ^^Ji^Prt ?^

horses to the chariot;

faggots

borne on the shoulders."

" the master ^oes in company with the pupU"; ir^nTFTRT if^OTt, "he

tfttri

*ni%I aRf^c^S, "tears flowed through the eyes."

After verbs of " carrying"

on which any thing

d.

in

" he goes on //te

Of "swearing";

as,

SYNTAX OF VERBS.

193

Verbs of ''buying" and "selling" take the instrumental of

e.

U^^l.

g^l^UIH I?^ j<il^nM^?!3TT> ''buy one wise man even

^rftj

fr^Nftw, " he

TTWt 11^^411 TT^

fools";

sells his

price;

tlie

as,

for thousands of

house for a thousand cows."

Dative after the Verb.

All verbs in which a sense of imparting or communicating

194.

any thing

any object

to

is

may

inherent,

take an accusative of the

thing imparted, and a dative of the object to which

it is

imparted.

(Frequently, however, they take a genitive or even a locative of

^m 4)<<*M

the object),

f^nrnr it irnr^niltfw, "

^^ifw, "

he gives sweetmeats to his son ";

he promises a cow to the Brahman";

he owes money to Devadatta

"

*nt vjKHfri
" consign the
,

maiden

";

him," more usually

to

The

following are other examples of the dative

JTrH.

"he

" that is pleasing

my

to

pupils

king," these
^T^iTr^R
"

<*<d4

rf

me

to

"

he

";

kill

J|H<il^

locative.

the

of their

nr*^ jtI^

mother

";

H^^

genitive

of

he

'^^j

jj^

declare this
to

all

the

TW^fw

";

"

^^,

Jiflf
'iTT

with

me ";

7T^ Itfrim^^,

if^ f^^Tf^IR

rendered fit for immortality

is

^'W^wnT

with the locative.

u^^lHf TTi^ " I will

" he makes knoron

f^rowi;

are also joined

,

murder

to the

";

TJ^ TJ^ "fWHTTftr,

";

he has the porver to

them

their destruction

mind on departure," or with the

his

set

mind on

his

sets

ojpin

the

person.
JPT ^TMPT,

^VfT ^r^t?[^, " he incited

'^^^i:^ "SWfff, " he is angry

with his son."

Ablative after the Verb.
195. All verbs may take an ablative of the object from which
any thing proceeds, or arises, or is produced as, H^iifir ^^A^ ^,
" the leaf falls from the tree ";
^^fvt ^nfir JINIK^, " blood flows from
;

^STm*Tr^ jpriarri , "

the body

";

^i!^ 'ra^

^3.ffl,

he wishes "

"

^^

Verbs of
T

Trn JJTTt^

so

much

in

awe
b.

The

palace";
'

giffT<j

rises

from

Hr|^l(^ ^nfir m-4rii> "

(p. 152. a.);

son attains capacity

a.

he

from the lump of clay the

";

" he
"^mii^,

fn^^W
may

f^>^ trvrr ^^TTTi1[^,

";

^^[^

artist

irffMiidH: clitT

makes whatever

from education a per-

went out from the

city."

be joined with the ablative

"fearing'''^

as falsehood

his seat ";

" a

jpjalf

good

man

as,

does not fear death

WX\, "the whole world

stands

of punishment."
following are other examples
P^UlIt

y^J?^

'5mrnt?TfiT,

"he

^T^fffTR.,
tefee* o/f

TTTHTHT^^rsj^t^if,

'''he

descends from

"Vishnu descended from heaven";

i\ie

c(iff<ir|nPT

(causes to descend) the golden bracelet from his

C C

SYNTAX OF VERBS.

194
body";

ftTSrSTl'

speaking";

tJTtnW

^K^ X^

from hell";

"he

cease* /row wickedness";

^^

ftTclt "^TnT^

^l

VlO^^t) "a

^frir^^ri

H liai^\T;f<^ q'| i^ 'Hiip^

"truth

^ffrfTTf UTrafw, " he neglects his

sacrifices ";

cj'^lrm

^'ha

fTOJT,

off

left

son saves his father

vii-tuous

superior to a thousand

is

own interest."

Genitive after the Verb.

The

196.

genitive, in Sanscrit, is constantly interchangeable with

the dative, locative, or even accusative.*

It

however, used to supply the place of the

first

that almost

^^rfw, "

all

may

verbs

after verbs

of

deposits a pledge with

'fl^Vlfri

"

me

consigning

Other examples are

are ignorant of

it,

" he does not hear

me"

(cf.

^STWRi

?"

rf

ofiftjir;^

he

^^

for the accusative, in

^FT

ejppf (for

THMPri',

?T*T

^Tftl

^tTPr)

X(^ ^TSRir Hfri'HlWt^

what one promises

the Greek usage)

TWI

as,

ills

vS^iMtH^^ ^STWT^i 4^1*4^

give to one

";

"

flHt|i|fif,

|;^fT ^"HnfJiT ^ffTt " unexpected

whose wife you are

"one should not

be used for the

fT%^ JR

women "; and

in

'of whom are the righteous afraid?"

the accusative.

as,

trusting

beings."
;

may

It

";

"

or, of

"":

as, ^'jrfVinTTftT

come upon corporeal

a.

"

nobody puts trust

examples such

who

For example, ^ft^W V^

imparted.

is

he gives money to the poor."

locative

especially,

of these cases, so

take a genitive as well as dative of the

which any thing

object to

more

is

1^

to another,";

VRI

"
,

^qj

"

tell

us

^TRRXf ^?rn^,
^t{

"!{

'^nift'fiir,

remember me," or with

"death overcomes us";

ohiyifji, "fire is not saiis/ierf z/;i^A fuel";

HT^,

f^^rfrT Vrf^Hehll

-^Oh^

*T

riU|fri

U|^V(i:> "/or^iive them."

Locative after the Verb.

197.

marked,

The

This case
is

first

is

very widely applicable, but, as elsewhere re-

frequently interchangeable with the dative and genitive.

sense of the locative requires that

it

should

be united

with verbs, in reference only to the place or time in which any

thing

is

done

as,

dwells in the city

fight ";

tion

^^Sft^

ti%

JfrSffw,

";

W;gf^

IT^^,

from the place

"

he sinks in the

firfffir,

" at sun-rise

to

"

mud ";

xft ^^rfir,

**

he

he stands in the front of the

he awakes."

But the

transi-

the object, or recipient of any action,

is

* This vague use of the genitive to express various relations prevails also in
early Greek."

SYNTAX OF VERBS.
and hence

natural,

that verbs are found with the locative of

it is

the object to which any thing

the following examples

the mighty

l(?w\

";

195

imparted or communicated, as in

is

"
t^sft VT

HT inrai

cRn^rftff

bestow not

"I

f'lfSj'IlfH,

money on

my

intrust

affairs to

him
13% ^*(i^<* ^Htl^fK, " he consigns a ring to his son ";
ypq^ .MWClT TiTJOTTt, " he intrusts the burthen of the kingdom
'';

capable minister

man

in the ground

In this sense

on

his back

When ^,

a.

IT^

";

Ut^lJ^

by the

held

" he
b.

strikes

to

clined

"he
"

f{?^

r^

>1^^^

its tail;"

as,

^^,

c(^|a^^ ^Wt'^f^, " he was

drags him by the hair";

seizes or

XT^

'

striking,"

"^

U^ifri,

"he

engaged in a very severe

is

^IMifV W,, "do not busy yourself about other peoples

''

he

good of

la

all

of the fort";

addicted

to objects

the world";

"^ T^>^

^rfirft^

JTt)

of sense ";

^fnfvBR

"he

trft. frPfl'SnTfir,

''^anoint

me

f|| ^"^ehf^ri

rHMTtlr)

to

the

>

"he

yokes

is

TH^,

appointed

two

bulls to

generalship";

TJ^nt

strives to suppress evil-doers."

^TMr) iTWH

f?^,

" such language

TT^rll^, "sovereignty

on a seat";

confides in his

it rolls

same analogy;

follows the

Similarly,

'g^ l(^f^ "cj^^,

are,

^^^r),

%TrnT^

(|m Phai^, "be

Tr>Trt

to sin."

So also verbs of " seizing,"

of his garment."

qi^ohlUl'M JTT

command

it

he placed the wood

mind

applies his

used for "to put,"

^rr^i^, "he

or

"

'HohOit^.

a sleeping man."

the pole";

c.

he

on a heap of ashes."

foot

delights in the

the

he applies his mind to virtue."

x^ \^A*\

"
^IT^ cWiPrf,
is

"

iTrff ^vrfir,

as,

one should place (bury) a dead

**

fVl^xqTrT,

^f^, ''put your hand on the end of

f^M^U

affairs";

"he

Jlfir

Other examples

penance";

>iwf

used

is

skirt

^^ JI^'IPh

";

"to give,"

^^

" he placed his

^^

";

Trt^

to a

suited to

is

is

not suited to a person like me

you";

^I^ "^tnf^^, "he

^U||H '<{|^^, "*t7 thou on a cushion";

enemies";

"tH/yiflt

Wfif, "it falls

^M'M

";

re-

Pcf^yPfiPrf,

at his feet"; MsPri "TT^^,

at the feet."

Change of Case after the same Verb.

^ ^n^F^:

as, f^^ VjTOHTT ^nft

" Vidhura and Kimti announced every thing, the one

198. This sometimes occurs;

^q^^^rjff ,

the other to Gandhari "

Astrashiksha 34. Ed. Prof. Johnson), where the same

verb governs a dative and genitive.

P^miU^
women."

*T

eR^aj:

Tl

to Dhritarashtra,

^^ ^,

Similarly, in the Mitralabha (p. 10.), 9lP^-<iii

"confidence

is

not to be placed in horned animals or

SYNTAX OF PASSIVE VERBS.

196

SYNTAX OF PASSIVE VERBS.

most

Tlie prevalence of a passive construction is the

199.

markable feature in the syntax of

re-

Passive verbs

this language.

are joined with the agent, instrument, or cause, in the instrumental

and agree with the object in number and person

case,*

as,

^\^M

by the wind";
f<|;^<=mf*ll W55|H^nrirt,
" the
" let all things be prepared by him ";
^ff^; ^rrl^uft^'injfNfr,
participle,
as
arrows."
But
the
passive
sun was concealed by

T^ T^nt, "the dust

raised

is

elsewhere observed, usually takes the place of the past tenses of

the passive verb, and agrees wdth the object in gender as well as

number
tears

";

as, ^^rftlT UHl^rilfH ^rftjUT, " (their)

^ (^

w*T

being understood),

" it

eyes were suffused with

was

said

by him."

This

the favourite construction of Sanscrit prose composition, and the

is

love for this idiom is very remarkably displayed in

as the following
iTrafir;

and

'STRTcgriT

^^:

by us

iHHIujril ^%T,

and again,

in one

JIHjHt, "

a.

?r:#?r Wf^ft, "

"let

he

gone to by misery," for |;^

be come by your majesty," for

it

^swrrfiw.

spot," for " let

is

^oF^

^Itlfft, " let

desired,

it is

by

be remained

it

us remain in one spot

by whatever road

such phrases

";

that let

it

TfufJS

be gone."

Active or causal verbs, which take a double accusative, will retain one accusative

when

constructed passively

thus, instead of

but the other accusative passes into a nominative case

M^MlflU "T^T^, "he addressed

Jft

written "(f^ ^r^ mcm(4l(

"3^, "by him

me

in harsh words,"

was addressed

may

be

in harsh words."

SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE.

200.
tive, in

The student must guard against supposing that the infiniSanscrit, may be used with the same latitude as in other

languages.

Its

use

is

very limited, corresponding rather to that

of the Latin supines, as, indeed,

And

posed to indicate.

this

its

termination

restriction in the

um may

be sup-

employment

of a

part of speech so important, might be expected to cripple very

seriously the syntactical capabilities of the language,
that the

any such

power

of

deficiency.

* There are a few

a crime committed

were

not

it

compounding words abundantly compensates

for

Let the student, therefore, accurately distin-

instances of the agent in the genitive case;

by me,"

for JHTI

as,

im

"X^

WJ,

SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD.

between the

ffuish

made

constantly

and the

infinitive of Sanscrit,

we have

In these latter

classical languages.

the subject of a proposition

197

infinitive

or, in

of the

part of speech

this

other words,

standing in the place of a nominative, and an accusative case often

admissible before

We

it.

have

assuming

also

it

present, past, or future time, and

to express

The Sanscrit

completeness in the progress of the action.

tive,

different forms,

completeness or in-

native case to a verb, admits of no accusative before

it,

only express indeterminate time and incomplete action.

occurs

it

and never the

some verb expressed or understood.

And

as the object

may

it

be regarded as equivalent to an indeclinable

substantive, in w^hich the

is

force

two

of

power of governing a
thus, in^

" id audire

an accusative and

cases,

inherent, and which differs from other substantives in

case.

Its

use as a substantive with the

force of the accusative case corresponds to

infinitive

Wherever

object,

of the verb,

dative,

and can

must always be considered as the

it

subject, of

its

infini-

on the other hand, can never be made the subject or nomi-

vs(\A\

cupior where

^iVir

^^iHh, "

one use of the Latin

desire to hear

that,"

all

and audire are both equivalent to

accusative cases, themselves also governing an accusative.

larly,

began

trf^
to

n*^^!. " she

began to weep

and

";

conquer the earth," where *l^h^^

%^

t^

^sri^,

conquest of the earth," would be equally correct.

Simi^ri^, " he

"he began the

But the San-

appears most commonly in the character of a sub-

scrit infinitive

stantive with the force of a dative case

or, in

other words, will

be found in most instances to involve a sense which belongs especially to

the Sanscrit dative, viz. that of the end or purpose for

which any thing

is

done, and which

idiomatic to express by that case

"

he comes to devour the young ones

sent an

army

to fight the

enemy."

it

would often be equally

thus,
";

5n(<*lt^

^TfjT

"^^

Hfr^^

%^

In these cases

^TPraEfif,

HTf^rifti^,
it

"

he

would be

equally correct in Sanscrit to substitute for the infinitive the dative

case of the verbal

noun formed with the

* Bopp considers the termination of the

ff,

and

it is

certain that in the

which would seem

to

affix

infinitive to

Vcdas an irregular

he the dative of the same

ana

be the accusative of tlie affix

infinitive in iT^

affix.

thus, >iHj^lN

See Panini

and |i%
3. 4.

i).

is

found,

SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD.

198
"for the

^TtVTnT. " for the fighting";

eating'"';

be used at

infinitive could not

pugnatum, or

and in Latin the

but either the supine, devoratum,

all,

more properly, the conjunction with the subThe following are

devoreV " ut pugnarenC

still

" ut

junctive mood,

other examples in which the infinitive has a dative force in ex-

pressing the purpose of the action

went

to

comes

to cut asunder

stood), "

the river to drink water

he

able

is

my

bonds

rescue

to

"";

Tn*ft^ "TT^

Jft

w^\

^rrr

me ";

i||^||t^

^T^Rir, "

he

TTTtVcT, "

he

^^^^

^^

^^^

x^

'';

(^rftcT

^^^

being under-

^?^,

^nrsft

"

he

busied himself about collecting together the snares.''

The Sanscrit

a.

rather deserves the

infinitive, therefore,

supine than an infinitive, and in

of a

either an

of

susceptible

its

or passive signification.

active

name

character of supine

passive character, however, like the Latin supine in

In

joined

it is

?/,

is
its

with certain words only, the most usual being the passive verb

1^, "to be
"

able,"

and

derivatives;

its

cannot be cut

the snare

";

tf

thus, 'T1^

"^^V. ^nnVTJ

"^

^t^r., "

%# ^mf

those evils

The following are other instances ih^tt:

" the shed was begun to be built "; u,^ ^rfir^

cannot be remedied."
chKr^cjM

^m^ff:

>T^T^ "ftT^ftnr:

diya,

"
>

112.);

5.

your honour has been selected to be inaugurated

kingdom";

the

to

^fir

Ii^,

done" (Naisha-

"it deserves to be

oji^^nrNTf, "improper to be done"

dignum and Troteiv a/cr^ov).

b. The root ^i|r, " to deserve," when
iM^Os, "deign (or simply

'

the force of the Latin debet;

be pleased')
as, "^

ought not to address you";

to tell us

Hl^^f) r^TT
tf

{ci.

used in combination with an

usually equivalent to an entreaty or respectful imperative ;

as I

"^

as,

our duties."

wfWTF'T

^SffrfVgw

factu in-

infinitive, is

\f^lH
It

ft cf^tR

sometimes has

'^^fff, " such a person

"you ought not

^3T%ftT,

to

bewail him."

The

c.

infinitive is

sometimes joined with the noun

eiiPT,

"desire," to form a

kind of compound adjective, expressive of the " wish to do any thing," and the
final

seeing";

of the infinitive

is

then rejected; thus, ^^cfclH:, -W\,

-"f,

"desirous of

%WCT>Tt, -TT, -JT, " wishing to conquer."

USE AND CONNEXION OF THE TENSES.

201.

PRSSEivT TBirsE.

frequently

go

?''

oR^

used

j^

for

the

"f^jf^, "

This
future

when

tense, besides

its

proper use,

is

"

whither shall

as,

iiTrii i

shall I see thee

fa

?''

USE AND CONNEXION OF THE TENSES.

narration

In

a.

H^T

^i^

^=PfT

commonly used

is

it

" he,

"^ ^,

^^J^lPri

199

for the past tense

having touched the

as,

ground,

touches his ears and says."

It

h.

may

denote habitual or repeated action

as

V^,

W^

||KI^

T3^

WHk

"^ ^^^^<^i.^T^

1R[T

f^nn^

^^t^,

^T^

^TrSTT

^T^fiT, " the deer going there every day was in the habit of eating the

com ";

" whenever he heard the noise

of the mouse then he would feed the cat."

r^W fu

(Cf. the use

The

d.

my

"as long as

fetters."

in^

found after

It is usually

c.

in^

as,

^^tTT rf ^^jjftd

teeth do not break, so long will I

"jTr^

"iT^

oidum).

present tense of the root

^fW

" to sit,"

" remain,"

is

used with the

present participle of another verb to denote continuous or simultaneous action

q^r||

'^

The

e.

"

particle

as, irr^^lffl

202.

^rr^, " he keeps making a slaughter of the beasts

"ojilg

^%.

tHMI'bA^

he

is

in the act of

^, when

'^

coming

after

tlie

monly
an

FOTEUTZAX.

numerous
in

the force of a perfect;

tense

this

properly

128.,

Perhaps

uses.

phrases,

The

where

with the infinitive

It is

as, 'sr^

^^^

not necessarily, "

name
its

any necessary

of this tense

is

we should expect
^|J|ri h4 ^^ *R: ^^TT^

as,

man

made

was making."

most common force

beheld danger actually present, a

most com-

" I
'TrR'^ ^Tefiiit,

no guide to

is

Latin

in
;

has

yet the student must guard

used to denote indefinite past time, without

effort to collect wealth,"

203.

it

that this is its usual force.

connexion with another action

tnjTR

and has been so rendered in

reference to past incomplete action,

supposing

j^

as,

city."

Although

the examples given at pp. 101

";

me."

used with the present, gives

" they entered

rxssT PXtETE&iTE.

against

"TT^

gnaw asunder your

its

that of fitness

to

find

HV(irlil,

oportet

"having

should act in a becoming

manner."
a.

It is also

7J^

^ WCm

^^

rf

Wnf>

"whatever

o|3T?r <*l*^.(^|l1

the case";

words one
b.

employed, as might be expected, in indefinite general expressions

" when the king

^TRrnniiT^S^^nt

may meet

may

be the disposition of any one";

"3^

irii^Mlf^

VfJ^

as,

7^^ XJUT

not himself make investigation of

^SIMHI<i>

"by

uttering unseasonable

with dishonour."

Especially in conditional sentences;

lifwftsr'^ *T

may

V|'.*)ri'<<'4l

ftriH^, "

as,

if

^qf^ ijifT

^^jj

-^

the king were not to

ment, ownership would remain with nobody,

and

all barriers

]I|ri

inflict

k^ \

pimish-

would be broken

USE AND CONNEXION OF THE TENSES.

200
down."

Sometimes the conjunction

"tj

mjvfUt

f^j
c.

ri

The

" were

omitted

is

as,

Vf^, " should

thou go," for 3T5

^nd

" let him eat

'SHBTnT^ Mic^lPrj,

IMPERATIVE.

204.

fioiits," for

and not

do not

as, ^njff

"

must be used

tT

ff^.
used to express necessity, see example,
a. It is

TSjf'T. "pei-mit

me

JTT

I will go";

^n^rT'R ^f'T c^BflH,

-M

(and) I

^i^.
"

com-

rn^^ ^rg^*R.

in prohibition
first

person

^ T55 JI'ad.riH,
SECOivB PRETESXTE.

properly used
of past time

"if

i.e.

me

as,

will kill the villain";

a promise of security

As obscrvcd at

you wiU permit me,

wiU

p. 57., this

go."

tense

is

express an action done at some definite period

to
as,

go,"

you command me

" if

" if you give

is

172.

r.

wiU

" do

sometimes employed in conditional phrases to express contingency

^T<ai rfif^

205.

The

a falsehood."

tell

common

TJ^:

This tense yields the usual force of

remember me."

^H^^

thus,

" or "entreaty''; as, ^ItyP^n^, "take courage";

mand

not be so ";

potential often occurs as a softened imperative, this language, in

with others in the East, being averse to the more abrupt form

"

it

he not subject to another."

^r^TcHT^^

others bewailed king

'TS^,

^^FT^

^TUfri

Dasharatha."

It

"

Kaushalya and the

however,

frequently,

is

employed indeterminately.
206.

as, irra

FIRST ruTTTRE.

f^

207.

or

remote,

tense, although properly indefinite,

to express all degrees

definite

and kinds of

";

w^

futurity,

immediate

^Tr^ 'TT* TTT^ftl, " thou

'sr^^ tTFft* ^^tHfri, " there certainly

or indefinite

sweet water

definite futurity

regions thou shalt obtain

those

rarely found.

This

employed

as,

will see his wife,"

It is

a.

"

tense expresses

is

SECOxrs future.

shalt drink

he

but

";

the fruit of thy desire

is

This

oifiH^ ifi^ cJJtnffi, " in

whatever
208.

sometimes used for the imperative

THIRD PRETERITE.

is

being omitted;

f^TBh,

m "gw^

"do not

This

prohibitive

as, *rT ^r?!?:,

not lose the opportunity";

";

ri^ ^T^trftr,

tcusc properly expresses time

frequently employed to supply the place of the- im-

perative, after the

truth

as,

It is not,

writers, but

as, tj^

^nj^ ^TO, "there lived (in former times) a

however, often used as a past tense by earlier

indefinitely past;

king."

be given that you will give " (do thou give).

is to

"

particle

or Jnw, the augment

"do not make";

rrw

do not be angry

^rr?t

";

mmf^: ^WT, "do

^T^:, "do not

IFT^;, "

injure."

tell

an un-

do not grieve

";

i^"

,,

SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES.

201

Only onc example of

this tense occurs in

BEWSBZcTivs.

209.

the Hitopadesha

the abode of

f^ ^^^^

<*<^.<Flj^rH:. "

happiness."

all

It

may

he constantly be

only used in pronouncing

is

benedictions.

This

coKumoTriLXM.

210.

It

last.

following example from

Manu

" if
^Maj4j^ ^^cjMH^ <4<^M<iij:>

ment,

then

spit ";

or,

tense

is

even

less frequent

than the

used in conditional propositions, as illustrated by the

is

7ff^

XHU ^T^

IflU

M sf

K^ ^^ 'WTR

the king were not to inflict punish-

stronger would roast the weak like fish

the

according to the Scholiast, f^^rm

^SToFficaR.

on a

"would cause

injury."

SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES.
211.

govern the cases of the verbs whence they are

Participles

"anv M^^f|^, " seeing the fowler

"; ^n?^ ''Tt*^. " walking

having
heard
a
noise "; Mifjli^H mlHI
^j-hJ^h ^nR^,
" he went away without drinking water."

derived

as,

"

in the forest";
Jlir:,

Passive Past Participle.

212.

The syntax

plained at

often govern the

the tree

";

and

r. 199.

accusative case

When

used actively

as, 4Hj*^ iH|^<j:

^7^ ift^ " having crossed the road

,

" I reached the city."

But

active use

its

is

";

"

it

may

he ascended

^ n^

^<jm}i:

restricted to neuter

The following are other examples; "qfiBpr TPrffTifn, "the

away "; ^irnft fH<Jw: " the fowler returned "; iff 3j^

verbs.

birds flew
" he

most useful participle has been ex-

of this

p. 137. r. 125.

fell

asleep."

Active Past Participle.

213.

This participle

is

commonly used

and may govern the case of the verb

everything

band";

";

insFt

Tfpft xifin^

1|% tR^

for a perfect tense active,

ias, Tl^ ^TT^T*^, "

he heard

^TTf^sf^TT^nft* " the wife embraced her bus-

^"W^TfT,

"he gave the

the hand of

fruit into

the king."
Indeclinable Past Participles.
214.

They

The importance

of these participles has been noticed, p. 143.

occur, in narration,

more commonly than any

other,

and are

almost invariably used for the past tense, as united with a copulative

conjunction

thus, ir^ 'WTwSr fHftsWT

D D

'T'T

V^

^^

jflf lPfT

"Wt

SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES.

202
?IUT
*

wmi ^T^ ^^.

" having heard this, having thought to himself

having abandoned the goat, having bathed,

this is certainly a dog,'

he went

to his

own

In

house."

all

these cases

we

thus, "

should use in

When

he had
must certainly be a dog.
He then abandoned the goat, and when he had bathed, went to his
own house." It is evident from this example that the indeclinable
English the past tense with a conjunction

heard

he thought to himself that

this,

often stand

participles

it

the place of a pluperfect tense, a tense

in

which does not really exist in Sanscrit.

a.

But although they always

they

may

fifth

sentence of the story at

6.

refer to something past,

frequently be rendered in English

Another though

less

r.

by the

VTT^ "W^

'SrSFn^t^TiT

a sleeping
c.

Prof.

frequent use of them

'^r^ >?%^TT> " a wife

present participle, as in the

is

f^

is

as gerunds in do ; thus,

to he

supported even by doing

" what bravery

"^J^ TT^,

i|)'^'^

p(j;

wise Jy reading the Shastlas";

is

there in killing

man ?"
Bopp

considers the termination of this participle (|^) to be the instru-

mental case of the same

sative.

should be observed that

220.

^IIMI^ ^avtw* >?^f^ Mna^HU, "men become

a hundred wrong things ";

it

affix of

which the

infinitive termination {urn) is the accu-

Wliether this be so or not, there can be

participle bears about

proof ot this

is,

that

it

much

it is

taken up the net

let it

doubt that the indeclinable

of the character of an instrumental case.

And

the

constantly found in grammatical connexion with the agent

in this case; thus, ^ifft TrafWl. (^f^'HI

met together the lion was

little

informed ";

1^3^ f^TTI, "by

;f^j^ '^lc<&^

^T^TT

all

the beasts having

'4^1^ rij

" by aU having

be flown away."

Future Passive Participles.

The usual sense yielded by this participle is that of "

"
ness
or " necessity "; and the usual construction required
215.

that the agent on

whom

by you the attempt

is

not to be made."

times, however, the agent is the genitive case.

* As the Latin gerund

is

This

is

j^m
Some-

as,

Cf. p. 196. note.

connected with the future participle in dus, so the

Sanscrit indeclinable participle in

in ya.

is,

the duty or necessity rests, be in the in-

strumental case, and the participle agree with the object;

iTfflT IT f^^^n, "

fit-

noticed by Bopp.

ya

is

connected with the future passive participle

SYNTAX OF ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS.

a. If the verb

govern two accusatives, one

may be retained after

^, "the tear of the eye

W^HftpQ&ci i^rn ^nPff

is

to

203

the participle ;

as,

be brought to assuagement

by thee."
Occasionally the neuter of this participle

b.
it

does not agree with the object, but

TTT

^TIH ^TnT^j "it

^Wt W^g4 "by you

So also p^TH

The

c.

r.

>

neuter

(from

>{r<4ri<=4

vi) is

it is

"by something

vir<ri<4>

^((hHI

";

tion";

is

it

d. It is not

uncommon

jnTTrt^rrf^^

^Tirat,

where

as well as before;

it,

It

e.

r.

thus, chrflfif ohKiyH

"there must be some

i.e.

must become your companion."

merely in the place of a

to find this participle standing

this

used impersonally,

WHH

as,

'^PTT 553J%T

hunter will go in quest of the deer's

gyr ^fl^I

jsn

'^^^. "when

flrf%^

the people see you they will utter some exclamation."

sentence of the story,

See also the eleventh

220.

would appear that the neuter of this participle

sometimes used

is

future infinitive, without implying necessity or fitness.

"the being about

^jnt,

infinitively,

manner of a

as expressive merely of the indeterminate action of the verb, in the

thus, cii^niil^H

J|*f|<(4:.

" a ruler ought to be possessed of discrimina-

" in aU probability

J|*t1'4 is

thus,

to be entered into the assembly."

future tense, no propriety or obligation being implied;

flesh";

of the verb

to the village," for JHTT XITft

become the cause,"

to be

ftf^^l^IlT hPMiI^U,

J(^ -^wiMlMi ><n4rf4> "

^^\

used impersonally, in which case

thus impersonally used, and in accordance with

190. requires the instrumental after

cause

me

to be gone by

is

is

may govern it in the manner

In such cases Tfif

to deceive";

is

added

H^'cqn ^ftf, "the being

about to die."

SYNTAX OF ADVERBS, CONJUNCTIONS, AND INTERJECTIONS.

The

216.

following examples illustrate the construction of the

adverbs enumerated
tf

be

^am

at

p.

^T^n cR^ XTRi^ftTTf :

made without punishment

";

births

^iti

^^^^ Tr[m[^, "

with his son";

fault ":

time
c);

r. 171.

occurs
thus,

"

""i

inrTf*T

forward

l^e^

" for

^n^,

";

^,

VT^ ^^.

"^Vlft

" for

"for her sake."

with

^nmr, "the

Hon

the

f^tfr,

fell

";

Tnn

"without

^R^ytoRSTTj-

IPffif .

"

from

sake of wealth "

grrft,

some

";

cannot

a hundred

^^ ^, " along

";

fT:^. " creeping out of the hole

from the moment of seeing (him)

WWr:

Chapter VIII.

in

restraint of crime

up to the serpent's hole

rather frequently, and

ffl^fi

" the

f^^, "without cause"; ^HTOVrf

rm<|<^ "wff^

TBTTT IPjfir.

that

^if

or elsewhere

156.,

with the

latitude

(cf.

genitive,

of meaning;

upon him";

iTR

inqrft

SYNTAX OF ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS.

204

"changed

f^sKlftsn,

" not

^fTl^,
"

angry with

the king

money from

w^^

son."

his

" near

^RjftTT,

me"; jR

in his feelings towards

behaving properly towards thee

fiqr,

";

^TV^cTnT

^-4^

";

^n^l^rfk,

my

WJ^, "in

may take an
may govern an

presence";

'wwra

^r^

instrumental

ITT^

ablative

UPT "^xRinn^

investiture let

him not

as,

utter the

"

he receives

"after us."

M'yiil^,

qiHjld> " before others.'^

flllijlrf^

as,

"^l,

thrown before

his father"; jrW ^ft^^ f?Tftpi. "flesh

the dog"; jw

^^rft.

" beneath the tree "; KRf:

^^

^nB^TTf

^TTft. '^srai^P^-

Veda ":

(VwT^l^, " before

or an accusative

as,

KPT n^^TTfRT:. "before twelve years are over."

^^>

fl-

"enough,"

tive particle

as,

^^

is

used with the instrumental, with the force of a prohibi-

" away with

^ffpTT.

fear,"

" do not

fear."

" even," " merely," when compounded with another word

mH,

b-

as,

T^r*rr#

"he

"T ^^rfir,

does not even give an answer";

tT

is

declinable

^r<:^HNI(j ^TH^,

" one ought not to be afraid of mere noise."

c.

TT^JT

and TniT, when used as

and the Latin

that

my

master awake,"

So also f^
in the

if

to

be

is

Tm

must do something

Jl^.i.Ujr

to

lit^. "

must

so act

make my master awake."

cHtP^, " do not you

know

that I keep

used for " that ";

as,

.JHif "^TTlft '^^ ^RlffT ^rtlT

watch

WWUT. fWHi,

a new doctrine, that having killed an enemy remorse should be

felt."

which

often be regarded as a note of interrogation

is

which a sentence is uttered ;

" is any one honoured for mere birth ?"

translated, but affects only the tone of voice in

'TrfirRT^'ir
It

" I

house ?"

f^, "why?" may

c.

i. e.

^UHlffl tpqi

d. ifiT is also

" this

correlatives, are equivalent to the English so that^

thus, Tpqi ^STft atHlF^ "inn

ita ut ;

f^ 'SUftjif

U^ilri,

sometimes has the force of "whether?"

Jl^'lfri '^'iMHchl '^> "let

large a salary, or

whether he

is

unworthy ";

" the minister knows whether the king

217.

The conjunctions

with the indicative

behold

prosperity

me"; "^WT '^

";

as, HHrii fo|SlT

be ascertained whether he

it

iif^

as, Trf^

iff^

is

trftjirar Kt cjftj:,

r^ ^1% f^

as,

T^^

i;ifN< ^^%iT

worthy

to receive so

^PJT!^^

^CrSTT ff

WT,

meritorious or not."

and

ifWw

nm

is

not

^IT, " if,"

are

>T5TfT!r 'T^'rfir,

" if
mTl^id*!^ ^li%,

"if avarice

commonly used

" if

he

there

live
is

he

will

need of

were abandoned who

would be poor.^"
218.

1v^

The interjections fv[^ and ^ require the accusative as,

"woe to the wretch!" and the vocative interjections
;

"TTfTi.

the vocative case;

as, Htt

W^, "O

traveller!"

THE PARTICLE

ITI

ON THE USE OF

WITH THE RECTA ORATIO.

WITH THE

jfif

205

RKCTJ oratiO,

All the languages of the East are averse to the use of the

219.

In Sanscrit

obliqua oratio.

never admitted, and when any

is

it

one relates the words or describes the sentiments or thoughts of

another, the relator invariably represents
tual

words in his own person.

(properly meaning " so," " thus,'')

quoted, and

commas

may

him as speaking

the ac-

In such cases the particle

^fir

often placed after the words

is

be regarded as serving the purpose of inverted

thus,

gp^

fi^tm i

"^^

<^ri;<ji(m

l^fff,

the pupils said, "

we

have accomplished our object," not according to the English or

Latin idiom, " the pupils said that they had accomplished their ob-

So also

ject."

ch(^^e(,lO

relsome," where
actual

own

^ 1^

to be spoken

So again

person.

in the nominative case, as being the

chc^&^ohij) is

word supposed

ntr, your husband calls you " quar-

by the husband himself

tt^tt^ P^HIItl.^^M ^fff

you
where the

my

^fl^Tjft

presence, saying, "

in his

Wi
he

^^
an

H4^^rd, all the birds praise

in

object of confidence,"

particle ^fir is equivalent to " say-

is

ing," and the

word f^Ttnjjni: is not. in the accusative, to agree

with '^mifj^, as might be expected, but in the nominative, as being
the actual word supposed to be uttered by the birds in their owu
In some cases, however, the accusative

persons.
fore ^fir

W[^: ,

as, in

they

part of the

the following example from

man

an ignorant

call

same

Manu

" child."

line it passes into a

is

''sr^

The use

of ^fir is

by no means

the words spoken by another.

what
self.

is

nominative

latter

as, ft[^7(

"^ W

II. 153.

restricted to the quotation of

It often

has reference merely to

passing in the mind either of another person or of one's

When

so employed,

it is

usually joined with the indeclinable

participle, or of

some other part

" suppose," &c.,

and

may

tion that, to which, in fact,

^^CZ\ TRpt

m^H

But in the

JHSI^, but (they call) a teacher of scripture " father."

a.

retained be-

'cl^i^fri

of a verb, signifying, " to think,"

be translated by the English conjuncit

"
TTft^TRT,

may

be regarded as equivalent

having ascertained that

it is

thus,

monkey

" his idea

TftR ^if^,
^^.ff^: ch^nfl^l
was that an increase of wealth ought again to be made "; V5ift^

who

rings the bell "

^^

'TW idri g^n >TnSn

JRftr f%^lR, "
happy in possessing such a wife."
l

reflecting in his miucf that I

The

accusative

is

am

also retained

206
before

THE PARTICLE

ITI

in this sense

as,

^fir

dead."

In

tation is

made

WITH THE RECTA ORATIO.

^ mm,

^in^

these examples the use of

all

"

thinking that he was

^fir

indicates that a quo-

of the thoughts of the person at the time

when

the

event took place.

6.

is

Not unfrequently the

omitted altogether, and

participle;

as, "^T^-fxr

though a child
mortal

";

is

41^1^ 1^

participle "thinking," "supposing," &c.

^fir itself

involves the sense of such a

^n'Hiraft TTBI

ij

!^

not to be despised, saying

m f^ ^ ^

THI

-eij^^l

^fw., "a king even

to ones self he is a

ri^ ,

" either

fection or through compassion towards me, saying

man

a wretched

he

to

through

yourself

af-

what

is."

EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.

The following two

220.

Hitopadesha, will

taken from the 4th Book of the

stories,

conclude

chapter on

the

translation is given to both stories,

analysis

is

subjoined.

Syntax.

and to the

first

literal

a grammatical

All the rules of combination are observed,

but the words are sepai*ated from each other, contrary to the usual
In the two cases where such separation

practice of the Hindus.

is

where a final and initial vowel blend together

one sound, and where crude words are joined with others to

impossible, viz.

irito

form compounds, a dot placed underneath marks the division

g^

K^r^

"There is in the
sacred grove of the sage Gautama a holy-sage named Mahatapah
1.

wftcTT^fWPI

^TW

*<^ .rim
l

gfir:.

(Great-devotion)."
" By him, in the
2.
riHjsftiH.^r^vn^ ^^TMoIi^^IH^K cH4H<;<
^ >J^ ^Ft,
neighbourhood of his hermitage, a young mouse, fallen from the
I

beak of a crow, was seen."

3.

cTift

^JTITfii^

^ ^f^m

flIK.<*^;

^^ftlK, "

Then by

touched with compassion, with grains of wild rice

4.

this,

ridWiil

5.
,

'STf^'!;

^T^>n^ Ui\t^

gf^TTT IT.

"

Soon after

a cat was observed by the sage running after the mouse to

devour

^fin

^fq^

that sage,

was reared."

it

TT

it."

^f^

efficacy

of his

strong cat."

inr.TWT^
jgf^rrr jf^ ^%?t rjiicjs:
mouse terrified, by that sage, through the
devotion, the mouse was changed into a very

>f}in^ -^icjil^w

" Perceiving the

EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.

6.

7g

f^fk inr, ^i; fr.

f^r^ti ^rrrn^ *Tf^ w^
"The cat fears the dog. Upon that it was

f%5T^: ^i^TT^

H<i*i>ril

^gnrr: oRT:,

it

Great

the dread of the dog for a tiger

is

was transformed into a

w^

7.

^mP^

^rfiT

tiger."

'W^

ttPMah/Hn^^

gards even the tiger as not differing at

8.

^rr.

^ W^wr

W^rni

^f^:,
all

J^ ^^,

^arm

-^

changed into a dog.

then

207

"Now

the sage re-

froin the mouse."

"

Then

the persons

all

residing in the neighbourhood, seeing the tiger, say."

^^

9.

mouse
10.

gftRT

iH\HA\

5f^^

'By

^fhr.,

this

holy -sage this

has been brought to the condition of a tiger,'

^r^ ^ ^qm:

ijiT^

^Tgr^^ fx4>riMri

"

>

The

tiger overhearing this,

being uneasy, reflected."

11.

TH^ ^T^

XT^rftraj^. "

disgraceful story of
12.

flHlQ&l-<M

(was about) to
13.

"

gfiTff

kill

inW

m^ ^

gf^rrr ^IPciri^q

As long

as

m i^^mi^^hm,

'^t^^H^^sr

be lived by this sage, so long this

it shall

my

original condition will not die away."

5fH

^^

^H^rit) "

Thus

reflecting

he prepared

the sage."

P<chir^ri

The sage discovering

WFTT -3^

fP^

his intention,

>Tf

^^

saying,

TiiT
*

ff^

T?^ fiT,

become a

again

mouse,' he was reduced to (his former state of) a mouse."

The student will observe

simplicity of the style

in this story four peculiarities

2dly, the prevalence

3dly, the scarcity of verbs

of

1st,

the

compound words

4thly, the prevalence of participles

in

lieu of verbs.
First sentence.

Asti,

" there

is,"

3d

sing. pres. of the root as,

Gautamasya, "of Gautama," noun of the

Munes, "of the

sage,"

Visargah changed to s by

r.

compound formed by the crude noun

r.

29.

the last

neut. (p. 32.).

member, by the

loc.

p. IGl., the first

relative

class,

masc.,

nom.

case.

firet class,

the crude adjective mahci (substituted for

member, by the nom. case of

adverb, p. 151. a.
Vis. remains

by

form of descriptive compound,

tapas, "devotion,"

of the seventh class, neut. (pp. 43. 44.), Visargah being dropped

Nama, "by name," an

member of the

" penance," as being changed to

case of vana, " grove," noun of the

member formed by

inahat), "great"; the last

(p. 31.).

(p. 33.).

compound,

tapas,

Mahdtapd, " great devotion,"

p. 168., the first

masc. gend. gen. case

Tapovane, " in the sacred grove," or

25. a. p. 14.

" grove of penance," genitively dependent

class,

conj., p. 101.

masc. gend. gen. case

first class,

noun of the second

2d

by

r.

Munih, "a
24.

b.

sage,"

by

r.

noun

28. b. p. 14.

noun of the second

EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.

208

"by

Second sentence. Teno,

pronoun

liim," instr. case of the

tat, p. .51. r. 77-

Ashramasannidhdne, " in the neighbourhood of his hermitage," genitively dependent

compound,

mitage"; the
of the

member formed by

p. 161., the first

first class,

by

tena into a,

member by

last

the crude noun dskravia, " her-

noun

the loc. case oi sannidhdna, "neighbourhood,"

The

neut. (p. 32.).

a of this word blends with the

initial

final

of

Mushikashdvakah, " a young mouse," or "the young of

r. 4. p. 7-

a mouse," genitively dependent compound, p. 161., the

crude noun mushika, "a mouse"; the

young of any animal," noun of the

last,

member formed by

first

by the nom.

case of sAafafea, " the

Vis. remains

first class (p. 31.).

the

by

24. a.

r.

Kdkamukhdd, " from the beak (or mouth) of a crow," genitively dependent compound, p. 161.
last,

by the

the

first

member, formed by the crude noun kdka, "a crow"; the

" mouth," noun of the

abl. case of miikha,

being changed to d by

r.

14. p.

11

first class,

neut. (p. 32.),

Brashto, " fallen," nom. case, sing. masc. of

the pass, past part, of the root bhransh, p. 140. n.

ah changed

to o

by

26. a.

r.

Drishtah, "seen," nom. case, sing. masc. of the pass, past part, of the root drish
(?1T )> P- ^^^'

remains by

^^8-

'

r.

24. b.

Tato, " then," adv.

Third sentence.

p. 152. a.

aw changed to o by r. 29. and 26. a.

Daydi/uktena, " touched with compassion," instrumentally dependent compound,

p. 160.

the

by the instr.

first

member formed by

the crude

noun dayd, " compassion "; the

case ofyukta, " endowed with," pass, past part, of the root

Munind,

Tena, see second sentence.

gend. instr. case (p. 33.).

dependent compound,
" wild rice";
Vis. remains

r.

24. a.

by the

sage,"

noun of the second

Nlvdrakanaih, "with grains of wild

p= 161.

the second,

by

"

the

by the

first

member formed by

instr. plur. of

Tadanantaram, "soon

Fourth sentence.

the pronoun

Khdditum., " to

eat,"

infinitive

Anudhdvan, "pursuing
part, paras, of the root

Viddlo,

by

r.

"a

26. a.

cat,"

article,

Munind,

p. 28. r. 46.

case, sing.

after,"

first

the crude

noun nivdra,

first class,

mood

Vis. remains

masc.

class,

after,"

by

r.

24. b.

compound adverb, the

the second

first

by the adverb anantaram,

masc. gend., ace. case (p. 31.).

of the root khdd, p. 85.

"running

dMv, "to

noun of the

Fifth sentence.

masc.

class,

rice," genitively

kana, noun of the

after this,"

tat, " this ";

Mushikam, noun of the

"after."

?.

Sanvarddhitah, " reared," nom. case, sing, of the pass,

past part, of the causal form of the root vridh, p. 141.

member formed with

last,

139.

i/uj, p.

nom.

r.

106. and

r.

200.

case, sing. m^sc. of the pros,

run," with the preposition anu, " after,'' p. 136.

first class,

b.

masc. (p. 31.), nom. case; ah changed to o

see third sentence.

Drishtah, see second sentence.

Tarn, ace. case of the pronoun tat (p. 51.), used as a definite

Mushikam,

see fourth sentence.

Bhitam, "

masc. of the pass, past part, of the root bhi, p. 138.

h.

terrified,"

ace

Aloki/a, " per-

EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.

209

ceiving," indeclinable part, of the root hk, with the prep, a, p. 145. /.

Tapahpra-

bhdvaty " through the efficacy of his devotion " (p. 184. c), genitively dependent com-

pound, p. 161.

the first

member formed by the crude noun

changed to Visargah, by

r.

noun of the

masc.

first class,

nom.

remains by

case,

r.

Tena, see second sentence.

r.

being

abl. case of prabhdva,

Munind, see
" very

Balishtho,

26. a.

masc. of the superlative form of the adj. balin^ "strong"

ah changed

(see p. 47.),

a.

(p. 31.).

Mushiko, nova, case, ah changed to o by

third sentence.
strong,"

and 24.

29.

" devotion,"

tapas,

by the

the second,

by

to o

Fidalah, see fourth sentence.

26. a.

r.

Vis.

Kritah, " changed," " made," nom. case, sing, of the pass, past

24. a.

part, of the root kri, p. 138. b.

Vis.

remains by

24. b.

r.

Sixth sentence. iSfl, nom. case of the pronoun tat (p. 51.), used as a definite

by note

Vis. dropped,

article, p. 28. r. 46.

Kukkurdd, "the dog," noun of the

fearing (p. 193. a.), t changed to

by r.

by

r.

and 24. a.

29.

Kritah, see

24. o.

Vydghrdn, "for the

of the fifth

fifth sentence.

tiger,"

class, r. 63.

noun of the

14.

masc.

(p. 31.), abl. case after

3d

Bibheti, "fears,"

dog,"

nom. case

o. ;

as changed
Vis. remains

(p. 31.).

masc.

fixst class,

changed to n by

case, sing. neut. t

changed to

Vis. remains

(p. 31.).

(p. 31.), abl. case, after

Mahad, "great," noun

15.

r.

neut. (p. 32.), nom. case.

case.

a verb of

sing. pres. tense

Kukkurasya, " of the dog," gen. case

noun of the

nom.

first class,

Vydghrah, nom.

sentence.

r.

Kukkurah, " the

a noun of "fear" (p. 184. g.\

"fear,"

by

Tatah, " upon that," adv. p. 152.

of the root bhi, 3d conj. p. 119.

to ah,

rf

Fidalah, see fourth sentence.

t, p. 14.

first class,

by

d by

r.

14.

adj.

Bhayam,

Tadanantaram, see fourth

r.

Kritah, see

24. a.

fifth

sentence.

Atha, " now," inceptive particle, p. 154.

Seventh sentence.

Apt, " even," adv.

case.

b.

Vydghram,

ace.

Mushikanirvisheslmm, " as not difiering at all from the

mouse," compound adverb ; the

member formed by

first

the crude noun mushika ;

the second by the neut. form of the substantive vishesha, " difference," with
prefixed, see p. 177- b.
p. 107.

Munih,

Pashyati, 3d sing. pres. tense of the root driih, Ist conj.

see fij^t sentence.

Eighth sentence.

nom.

Atah, "then," adv.

case, plur. masc. p. 64. r. 87.

anomalous compound, in

member

its

by

Tatrasthd, " residing in the neighbourhood,"

character resembling a locatively dependent ; the

first class,

(p. 162. Z>.),

the nom. plur. masc. of the participial

" to remain," p. 149. 1.

Sarve, "all," pronominal adj.

p. 152. a.

being formed by the adverb tatra

the second

Vis. dropped

by

r.

28. b.

noun of the

pronoun

first class,

tat (p. 51

.),

noun of agency of the

root sthd,

Jands, " persons," noun of the

used as a definite

article.

masc. gend. (p. 31.) ace. case.

E E

first

" there," or " in that place";

masc. gend. (p. 31.) nom. case, plur. Vis. changed to s

ace. case of the

iiir

by

r.

26. a.

Vydghram,

Tarn,
" tiger,"

DrUihtwd, "having seen,"

EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.

210

indeclinable past participle of the root drish

3d

plur. pics, of the root 7:ad, 1st conj.

Ninth sentence.
ay am,

"by

Anena,

Ayam, " this," nom.

by

Fydghratdm, " the condition of a

ofiF

the

first class (p. 31.), ace. case,

26. b.

r.

Tenth

nl, p.

138.

being changed to ch by

remains by

Vis.

case.

r.

3d
r.

See also p. 32.

161.

ah changed

|,

becomes

VArA\

by r.

^r<||

Sai^yatho, " uneasy,"

24. a,

r.

sing. 1st pret. of the root chint,

26.

tiger,"

by

masc. of the pass. part,

etat,

Chhrutwd, " overhearing," indeclinable

17.

formed by prefixing the preposition saha

r.

case, sing.

noun of

b.

participle of the root shru (y(), p. 143. a.

nom.

tiger," fem. abstract

by

initial

Etach, "this," ace. case, neut. of the demonstrative pron.

sentence.

p. 62. r. 79.,

The

formed from the substantive vydghra, " a

Nltah, " brought," nom.

the affix td, p. 24. xiv.

of the root

Mushiko, nom. case, ah changed to o

case of the demonstrative pron., p. 52.

cut

pronoun

case of the demonstrative

this," instr.

Munind, see third sentence.

p. 62.

26. b.

r.

Vadanti, " they say,"

p. 143. a.

(f^ ),

17.

Vyughrdh,

relative

compound,

to the fem. substantive vyathd, p. Ifi9.

by

to o

10th conj.

Achintayat, " re&ected"

26. b.

r.

the

e;

p. 87.

initial

a cut off by

b.

Ydvad^ "as long

Eleventh Sentence.

See also

pass. part, of the root jiv, p.l46. a.

correlative to ydvat, p. 151

a.

Idam, "

Mama, " of me,"

pron. ayayn, p. 52.

changed to d by

as," adv. p. 151. o., t

Jlvitavyam, " to be

Anena, see ninth sentence.

this,"

lived,"

215.

r.

nom.

c.

nom.

14.

case, neut. of the fat.

Tdvat, " so long," adv.

d.

the demonstrative

case, neut. of

of the pronoun aham, "

gen. case

r.

J," p. 50.

Swarupdkhydnam, " story of my original condition," genitively dependent compound,

p. 161.
r.

83.)

the

by

retained

the

fii"st

nom.

member formed by

first

the sfecond
r.

by the nom.

member formed by

noun of agency kara,

away," 3d

verb paldy, formed by combining the root

Twelfth Sentence.

Iti,

" thus," adv.

"reflecting," indeclinable part, of the

Munim,

r.

200.

past part, of the

root

Hantum, "to

2d

(cf.

neuter, /

sam and

kill," infinitive

Thirteenth sentence.

sam and

p. 174.

219. a.

r.

Samdlochya,

(p. 145./.),

formed

a, pp. 174. 175.

mood

of the root Aon, pp. 85.

case, sing,

(p. 140. o.),

" not," adv.

atm. of the "compound

compound yerh samdbch

Samudyatah, " prepared," nom.

prepositions

fut.

See also

e.

Na,

p. 149. 1.

with the ^re^.pard,

p. 153.

compound verb samudyam

yam with the

sing.

root loch with the prepositions

ace. case.

and 115. and

first class,

the crude noun aklrti, "disgi-ace"; the second by the

Paldyiiihyate, "-will die

by combining the

noun of the

AMrtikaram, " disgraceful," accusatively dependent compound

23.

case, neut. of the participial

p. 153. a.

the crude noun swarupa, "natural form"

case of dkhydna,

masc. of the pass,

formed by combining the

ut.

Mtink, nom. case.

Vis.

changed to

by

r.

25. a.

Tasya,

EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.

"of him,"

gen. case of the pron. tat, p. 51.

211

Chiklrshitam, "intention," ace. cas^,

neut. of the pass, past part, of the desiderative base of the root kri, " to do" (p. 141.
s.),

nom.

case,

ah changed

nom.

by

to o

Uktwd, "sayiS*,"

r. 7.

Vis. dropped

case.

e.,

by

r.

r.

indecl. part, of the

by

r remains

Bhava, " become," 2d

26. a.

r.

p. 153.

Ity answers to inverted commas, see

root bhu, p. 104.

y by

Jndtwd, " discovering,"

or

Punar, " again," adv.

root Jnd, p. 143. a.

to

Gydtwd,

used as a substantive.

Mushiko,

32.

r.

sing, imperat. of the

219., the final

indecl. pai-t. of the root vach, p. 143. a.

" indeed," adv.

Eva,

28. a.

r.

changed

Mushika,

134.

STORY OF THE BRAHMAN AND HIS WEASEL.

"^

JTWfir 7!^-V. ^RPi^

^j^^j^TO

'ItsjiPh

^Ni^H

^n!itn

iiTW^

J)

'smr^

<nirHw

by

r.

^1^

14)

106. and

r.

changed to y by

26. a.

ddridra

is

n)

200.
i)

p. 161. r. 147.

in^

q^tiPrt

*) p. 24.

the preposition jom, p. 138.

1") r.

e) p.

b.

r.

23) r. 85. r. 17.

161. a.

compound.
32) p.

52.

24) p.
29) p.

According to
33)

and

r.

r.

51.

7) r.
0.

and

qimP<rt

oiujjayinl, p. 31.

164.

) p. 177. c.

p. 180. a.

p. 11. r. 17-

16)

201.
it

'i<mrti*^

3)

=) pass, past part, of the root ,

may

^o)

p. 156.

i^)

p. 143.

or

Ht'M ;,

r. 4.

27) r. 4.

anomalous dependent

be regarded as accusatively dependent.

anomalous dependent compound.

34) j.

171.

c.

35)

indecl. part,

of the causal form of the root sthd, with the prepositions vi and ara, p. 145.
36) p.

143. a.

37)

Visargfdi changed to s

part, of the root grom, p. 107. p. 136.

root pad, with vi and a.

cut off by

r. 9.

by

r.

25. a.

38) p.

withaprefixed,p.l74,

changed to sh by

r.

25. o.

v.

123.

Vis.

177.

39)

c.

i.

pres.

4i)p.i4i,2.

40)^.154.

") prgg. part, of yd, with a,

42)

i.

p. 41

i8)r.l54.,

85.

26) r.

3i)

145.

i^)

e.

qA

with

1st pret. of the

1^)

22)

p. 107.

p. 112.

9) p.

12)

p. 23. viii.
^^i)

r.'171. a.

180. a.

^irfiScT

^w^;

cj^V^*flM

^h

25) ggn. case of shishu, p. 35.

124.

101.

^'-f^

wtsppi^

^r^^^yt

2) loc. c.

an abstract noun, fonned according to

20)

<

^^r. ^ftrfir

7.

xv.

p. 118. r. 200.

h^^h

irift-'^

-nic**:

r.

ww^^"^^ ^^^:

inro ir^

125. p. 140.

root chint, 10th conj. p. 126.

28) p.

mr:

fsF^

^n^TTf^: ^Pjiiri'a

p. 101. the final

changed to

inn

At^ltqrrt

43)

The

initial

45) p. 145../'.

EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.

212
**)

complex

compound

relative

descriptive, involving

with prep, upa and a.

^,

) 2d pret. of root
52)p. 143. o.

by r.

7.

53)

56)

")

p. 70. d.

r.

j.

and

a.

66)

whole being the

case, dual of
so)

54)p.i39.

Vis. to s

charana,

by

r.

58) r. 8.

by

r.

59) p.

25. a.

p. 145./. root rup,

63)

with

p. 31., see p. 195. c.

si) y.

26. o.

144. a.

) p.

p. 107.

ni.

64)

(") r.

form of

relative

p. 145. g. root gam,

171.

219. a. the final changed to

55) r.

/,,

*'')

root char, with prep, tn and negative prefix a.

Vis. to s

62)

143.

*^) loc.

p. 74.

p. 52.

p. 145,

root pad, with vi

(p. 171. b.), the

a dependent and an aggregative.

57)

by

p, 142.

107. and p. 199.

Vis. dropped

5.

r.

c.

28. a.

169. a.

Translation.

There

a Brahman,

lives in Oujein,*

bore him (a son).

named Madhava.

His wife

She having stationed the Brahman (her hus-

band) to take charge of the young child, went to perform ablution.

Meanwhile a message came from the king for the Brahman to

On hearing which the Brahman,
perform the Parvana Shraddha.
'

from his natural neediness, thought to himself,

some other Brahman

quickly

none here

is

then can I do

me

dear to

(that I
?

may

will take the

" if I

do not go

Shraddha.

But there

leave) as a guardian to the child,

Come, having stationed

Having

as a son, in charge of the infant, I will go.''

so done, he went.

Presently a black serpent silently approaching

By and

the child was killed by the weasel and torn in pieces.

by

the weasel seeing the

meet him,
at the

his

what

this long-cherished weasel,

Brahman

returning, quickly running to

mouth and feet smeared with blood, rolled himself

feet.
Then that Brahman seeing him in such

Brahman's

a condition, hastily concluding that he had eaten the child, killed

him.

Afterwards no sooner did he come up than he beheld the

infant slumbering safely

and the black serpent lying dead.

Then

looking at his benefactor the weasel, and bitterly repenting (of his
precipitation),

* The

he experienced exceeding

grief.

oldest city in India.

t The Shraddha is a funeral ceremony, consisting of oblations of water and fire

to the gods and manes, and gifts to the officiating Brahmans, performed at various
fixed periods, in behalf of a deceased parent or ancestor, to secure the
tion of his soul.
ancestors.

The Parvana

is

happy condi-

a particular form of Shraddha, in behalf of three

SELECTIONS
IN

PROSE AND VERSE.

Observe, that the greater number of the words in the following

Selections will be found in the Vocabulary to Professor Jj^luiaon's
edition of the Hitopadesha.
in that Vocabulary,

The words
other, as it is
letters

is

it is

And whenever

a word does not occur

given at the foot of the page.

of the text have been printed separately from each

imagined that the permutation of

of itself a difficulty,

unknown

final

cient to retard the progress of the beginner in his

translation.

It

and

initial

in other languages, suffifirst effort

at

seems, therefore, wholly unreasonable and unne-

cessary to increase this difficulty by an useless conformity to the

practice of the natives, in joining together

all

the words in a sen-

tence, until the student has attained a certain degree of proficiency.

When, however, a final and initial vowel blend into one sound,
and when crude nouns are associated to form compounds, separaand in such cases a dot placed underneath

tion is impossible,

marks the

division.

The substance
Vedagarbha and

of the following simple story of the

his pupils, is taken

from a

little

Brahman

book, printed in

Calcutta, called the Sanskritamala.

^nr

II

%^^m^M*

ii

^ %^n5^7TRn ^ra^ ^^cT

jfti.d^

II

"^

^ MitiA'l^i ^^'^'T '"'^^l'^'^* ^il^lil^if ^P2TftnTr[ll

^*ilM,Mm5TftRt f^^rfcf^ fcl^jf^H: MMVil^f

^*iHldi:ilrT%%^^37tT^WItlfTfd,<^l4rd.HmifH
*N

27

26

28

MKMmH,4l^H
^

36

37~v

38

s24

29

TJ^-^TFT

cRW

II

30

40

^39

31

ITHT^:

cT

41

^T^ ^rm^ ^^rrr-'^.MM^u^icT ^ipnm:

p. 161.

1)

147.

r.

s)

2) p.

p. loi.

notet

3;r.i57. p.42.

151. a.

note t-

6) p. 14.

H^FT

ii

dropped by

Vis.

4)

The Vedanta

r.

28. a.

is

the theological part of the Vedas contained in those chapters called Upanishads;

7)

p. 167. b. p. 171.

the Vedangas are the sciences subordinate to the Vedas

Astronomy, &c., see

opposite bank,"

remains by

room,"

"a
I

r.

r.

i.e.

147.

")

a.

ace. case of
i^)

143. a.

12) p.

"')

r. 7.

p. 149. a. p. 171. b.

=) p.

140.

0.

gam

root

144. p. 174.

p. 143. a.

The

-') 'SnTRT'T,

Vis. to *

'^)

153. a. 161. d.

dropped by

dydtdh.

25) p.

*')

r.

^')

147-

28. a.

p.

143. a.

'

lit.

"fame "

by

1.

r.

"he
r.

p. 152. d.

havmg asked,"
r. 4.

asked," p. 142. a.

84.

32)

4'

a teacher

between an dchdrya
'') r.

28. a.

(p. 24.

J.

24. a.

a of the next by

initial

p. 54.

by

22)

T^,

2*)

^i)

fWrf^,

") p. 154.

Vis. remains

^)

Vis.

" a reading-

plur.neut. p. 32.

192. a.

ii.) r.

" from another school,"

</.,

p. 162. a.

and sam (175).

Vis. dropped

p. 153.

" seeing to the

case pi. of

II. 140. 141. for the difference

p. 171- b.

^)

r.

pi.

147-

r.

10)

school,."

1^) ace.

163. a.

(p. 23. vii.), ^qifff,

^)

43. 1.

i^) ace.

nom. case

(p. 174.)

51.

Manu

See

mft^W, " learning"

Vis.

^c)

) lit.

MI^^Uc^l, "a

r.

) p. 76. d. p. 175.

25. a.

147.

r.

r.

note*, and

p. 87.

such as Grammar, Prosody,

87-

a of this word blends with the

and an upddhydya.

'37) p.

p. 43.

p. 49.

with prep, a
24) p_

final

r.

r.

p. 35. r. 54.

"aiTival," TnftWT, "cause,"

by

of the Vedas,"

'^)

*)p. 54.

seeker of knowledge," "student,"

21) p.

2')

II. 105.

"thoroughly acquainted with,"

and 24.

29.

changed to y by

Manu

c.

147.

219.

^) p. 50.

affix tas, p. 152. a.

the final a blends with the

initial

d of

p. 138. 6. p. 174.

^<i|A'^MH5MR

II

42 -v-r

_^_

24

^T%R

i?Tct:

36

47

45

h.mJ^h ^t^^

f^rarFT^

Wr^ ^cTrfp;: ^ ^rr^: w:^*

MMVll^^HrqlMM^:
^FTcTT:

MkV||<?i|*i^

44

/^

^^^^

^3nqf3r%tr

r^

31

46

w^ xft^:

43

II

II

rr^'5^TO^*4lg^dl^^kr^*

^TT^^^

rRT

II

cTFi;

^nj%rr

%^ f% ^in^pm ^Tn?^ %f#rT

^rwra
%^: xRrfhfT: %P^ ^: ^T#rrft: ^cRt-^^: %f^ ^: "SR cRtT^ ^T^Nrml ^n^?

II

45)

for

7J^ SHMiitfiu T#i,

p. 123.

r.

^")'TT>"a

r.

<')

b.

^)

p. 151. .

139.

189.

^2)

se) p.

cell or student's

65)

Vis.

s?)

51.

76) r.

90. a. p. 111.

215. and p. 60.

a,

r.

(,

^i)

r.

r.

8) r.
"'')

54) p.
59)

53.

r.

'4)

')

^s)

r.

jgt

171.

^^) p.

b.

118.

"according to the order,"

anu

(p. 173.), see also p. 142. a.

161

pi.

m.

root

fut.

atm. of

his daily

" having arrived at,"

^i) -gjsf
,

e.

a scholar."

")

^7.

legislators, p. 34.

2d

174.

locative

83.

^p each one,"

p. 113. p. 147. b.

by Manu and other

r.

'^)

p. 139.

") ai-e to be read," nom.

ace. pi. of Trii, "logical treatise."

5i)

p. 142. a.

^pjTTf^^, "having performed

169.

186. o.

^xT^^pT, " sitting down,"

p. 144. c. p. 126.

root sthd, with prep,

31.

p. 138. b.

c.

27.a.

e^)

")

)
4S)

p. 174.

p. 177.

apartment."
r.

c.

" He gave,"

ss)

79.

166. p. 144. a.

') r.

mfTTi " law," as delivered

80)

r.

changed to r by

he performed,"

sam and

144.

47) p.

53) p.

prayers, or religious observances,"

72) r.

199.

r.

ace. pi. neut. p. 32.

p. 88.

ITTTR, "in the morning,"

root t,.#vith

r. 5.

49)

gen. c. p. 35.

171.

4.

r.

2d future,

pret. of root vad.

3)

ii

46)

p. 177.. c.

absolute,

II

42)

TT??r^:

ii

e,

p. 54. r. 85.

*)

nom.

'^)

pi.

of

p. 146.

a^

with adhi,

p.

79.

e.

'

^T^iPMcmK

i)

p. 104.

3)

192. a.

"a

^ wftr^

"

^^r^ ^j^

^'pTh;

wii

Vedas," nom.
r.

%^nH^mi^iH

li

pi.

p. 163.

m.

See root St, p. 114. note

(p. 149. a.)

p. 87.

4)

e.

reader," p. 149. a.

) p.

) r.

27. a.

12) p.

174.

e.

177i")

6.

^)

199.

22) for

e.

of the causal of

48.

^4^1:

any word.
p. 107.

29)

being doubled,
3s)

p. 48.

41) p.

150.

3)

ft.

26)
is

=) p.

^^,

3o) ,.

p. loi.
r.

^)

The doubling
" any,"

37) r.

(r. 157-),

25. a.

28. a.

p. 171. c.
*')

See also p. 152. d.

p. 87. d.

23)

and

gen. case, p. 31. and r,28.

the proper form

162. a.

r. 6.

r. 6.

"to know," with prep, f^,

and r.31.

p. 37.
2) p.

^rq

of a

63.

p. 54. r. 85.

but

'') p.

loc. c. (r.

word
3s) r.

^
49.

pi.

may

r.

i.

p. 37.

p. 151. 5

25)

b.

27)

c.

XG7. b.

2d

pret.

vqc. case,
r.

25. a.

be redundantly added to

-^2)

se)

" answer,"

p. 152.

24)

108.

^qqi

^.^5^

in a distributive sense

'^)

i5)
is)

20) p.

^ith prep,

72.) of ekaika, " each

39. a.

"lecture,"

of ^nimftl^,

p. 142. a.

1*) WI%^, " a student of ^PTfir or law," p. 23. viii.

") p. 145.
I'j) " every day,"
nfiT is often prefixed in this sense, p. 177- b.

21) p.

readers of the

"a lesson,"

h) nom.
")

20.

5)

TTTJ?

p. 153./.

i3) r.

b.

14(5. a.

ace. c.

is

ni,

single," eka

very usual.
40) r,

26. b.

45

44

"without giving," p. 143. a.

143. a.

p. 142.

53) p.

r.

43, p. 182. d.

48) p,

in caus. with prep,

vi, p.

151.

c.

145.

45) r.

151. a.

^i) iost. c.

t.

151.

60)

b.

"of such

57)

nom.

^) for
69) r.

73)

76)

^2)

c. n,

70)]..

65) r.

85.

71) r.

"is recommended,"
p. 172. g.

80) p.

37.

77)
') r.

137.

51

lost in thought," nom. c.

"built with stone,"

p. 140. 0.

15G.

82)

2d

fut. p. 80.

r.

" to go,"
83)

42.,

85)

p. 41.

"to the palace of the king of Benares."

6)

87)

for

144.

c.

^)

b.

^)

c.

r.

61.

p. 104.

"acquisition," p. 185.

7^) 'vg;^,

"tomorrow,"

r.

c.

26. a.

p. 80.

78)

munificent,"

^r|x^ f^T^n^.

F P

171.

152.

67) p.

^r#^,

p.

if,

" the building,"

^i)

r.

p. 35.

26. a.

changed to n by

89)

156.

case of

107,

74) p.

p. 47.

r.

^^ is added to the crude pronouns

72) loc.

ist fat. of ^flOT,

cfuir

" he fixed upon,"

J will declare," 2d fut.

66)

'2)

a being lengthened.

66) p.

157.

proper name, " Hero-conqueror,"

rM.

46)

" to be effected by the outlay of much money,"

^ J^', r.5.

147.

50

having deliberated," root

94.

r.86.

like," gen. pi.

Pit) '^, to express similarity, the final

so)

of Wf^, " mind."

55) r.

p. 76. a.

54)

i80. a.

135.
49) p.

of vach (p. 80.), with prep. If.

59) p.

49

^ ^imttrwTTf #^

^ff^ t:

^rfNr f^miH
44)

48

47

H^ ^1?^ ^ifi^ ^^^ ^If^-^IHI

ftRr^ ^TWqt

47) p.

^v

46

")

r.

p. 76. o.

r.

79) p;
'4)

43.

T^jf^,

15. (see p. 107.)'

20. fp. 112.

**) P-

and

r.

1^-

191. a.

26

1)

on
3)

^T^ ^^^

'

literary topics."

p. 102.

4)

6)

p. 107.

^)

The

(p. 23. xi.)

154.

11) p.

p. 171. b.

case, dual of

when the

TT'ET'^j

123.

r.

12) r.

'")

^^TftR> "a

this

or

r.

157.

n,

word

ace.

case,

fem, p. 23. vui.

180. a.

r.

gives continuity to the action, " as they

is)

28. b.

3d plur. 2d

^)

p. 172. g.

'")

(p. 23. vii.), "signs of regal

pret. of

IJslcfD^,

supremacy,"

"thronged with many people,"

op

(p.

120.) with IJ.

In forming a noun according to

porter."

see p. 175.

resolved into a syllable

is

by the

i)

nom.

p. 23. ix.,

insertion of

take the Vriddlii change required by the rule.

i)

i^)

3d dual, 2d

pret. of l^JT, " to

bow"

u
i")

for

is
i',

^^

(p. 76. c), with

3d dual, 2d pret. of H^, "to ask." According to Wilkins

and Bopp (whose authority was followed at

im^rilfltt

" with various conversations

a double consonant, consisting of two letters of which the last

a mace," " staff,"

prep,

^^^ cRT^

space of twenty-four minutes,"

"supremacy"

V or y, this double consonant

and

^^

ace. case, plur. neut. p. 36. r. 7.

147.

initial is

for y,

"a

repetition of the
*)

107.

14) r.

fN28

'^^*

(p. 146./.), from '^p?, " to be weary," see the force of f^, p. 175.

kept on advancing."
"regal"

^^^

" belonging to mid-day,"

'^)

case of ^5[^,

ace.

"having rested"

or

27

" with conversations on various books of science," or

')

r.

^__^^

d-Hj^K ^^^

hut the form Tnr^a[Wt

is

p. 77./-

and

p. 111.) this

correct according to the Siddhanta

should be

KaumudI

142,

and on the same authority the base mi^^ will be retained throughout this tense.
20) r. 84.
24)

"

21)

p. 152. b.

" the king's presence,"

to lead."

") p. 61.

22)

r.

p. 112.

and

147.
28) p.

2^)

151.

r. 4.

23)

p. 198. c.
29)

gee St, note b. p. 114.

28)

and

p. 175.

2d dual, unperat. of if,

dat. case, p. 43.

<T^T^

^T^ "^I^TR:^:^

cTHt <Nl5!^l ^-^fTTHT:

?T^ >:(N ^*ti(UH

l

^^TR^'^TT^

lry^*%^^Tr^fT^

*4

^ir^ri^*l

H^nTt ^iPw^^l Vhr

^tNt:

r^d.ilMA'MT:

Vf^ <MAnicr5H

^An<?5i : ^-^A'

Trit^
^'')

respect."

plur.

^'^)

10 conj.

(r.

p. 171. b.

39)

^t;^,

JtHlafcfc ,

^i)

c.

See also

188.

r.

"^)

nom.

14.

"beauty"(p. 23.

as the moon."

r.

T?R,

169.

vii.);

^'i)

^, "site"

;j^, "excellence";

"exertion,"

^7)

devoted

r.

m^Kj

" preceded

lit.

mood-of root

'^,

See also p. 197.

126.

by great

" to eulo^^)

notn.

plur. " of a generous disposition."

r. 6. r.

161.

vpmt, "a dialect."

''")

')

is

'jftUH

"a

p. i69. a.

restrained."

^^ "good";

gifted person"

171.

nom.

^3)

sev, p.

41h|, "hand-

b.

r.

45)

mj^

^8)
49)

knowing

]oc. case

of

20.past paragraph); ilJg,

147.

^'^)

of

^rniR, "practice,"

p. 149. 1.
(r.

plur.

^^ passion ";

your subjects."

^, "knowing,"

r.

^2)

^ftf^JfT, " possessing."

"to be honoured," root

large accumulation of fame and riches,"

4o)

(p. 34.).
4i)

to the protection of

the peculiarities of various countries";

multitude."

inf.

ii

"devoted to the sincere (discharge of) religious observances."

" the performer of frequent sacrifices."

"always";

"a

^)

with prep. ^TT,

:ivi

^Jf^

with great respect,"

*""* ^nd a.

'w^it^

^) " began," root

^^)

m%

trrfef^

li

^.^P^dl'M^IM^:

" current," " the current of whose passion

some

r.

1st pret. of

28. b.) p. 23. ix.

*'')

Xlf,

w^

" an order," p. 182.

4H^ T>

gize,"

li

HMK^lPciSiM.sJI ^TRT?TRT^ -qfwr:

%%:

f^H

^<l'^Hi: H^T%to: W^LMl^H.drM<i:

HMl/IRu.-'l^:

e.

140.

^^)
s*)

" possessing a
p. 33. p. 22. vi.

55)

53)

"than royalty,"

p. 167. a.

?) r. 1

(f.

64.

6")

UlfiUr^,

p. 152. a. p.

188./.

e6) r.

" a liWng creature,"

150. 6.) or protector," see

"one by whom

r.

) p. 154.

177. b.

e.

r.

(p. 31.), r. 28. b.

apartments."

" to hear,"
(r.

147.),

r.

192. b.

194.
75)

77)

]87. .

68)

ee)

b.

p.

73)

p. 49.

153./.

p. 144. c.

"the steward,"

1)

r.

76)

78)

74)

65)

root ftf, " tcTcon^

p. 149. 1.

root

^,

"to

68)

Joc.

praise,"

cohis." ace. case, plur.

fern,

^JnT.^, " the inner or private

!'J)pA97.

p. 140. .

8")

causal of

-ssr,
''

p. 208. b.

28. a.

7i)

s ilver

ace. case of

28. a.

ace. case, neut. p. 43. r. 28. a.

w) p. 169. a.

p. 118.

p. 107.

ei) y.

from his being the

TTTqT^

gifts are given," "liberal," p. 169. a.

case of feiffT, " tlie earth," p. 34.

p. 145.

^7) r.

es)

p. 27. iv.

quer," with prep, f^ and f^T., p. 144. a.

67)

217.

fMrfrein, " superiority," p. 24. xiv. p. 188./.

the superintendant of affaire

u^Q jg^j^.4)
145.^.

2) lit.

3)

p.

-f\^

~"^'''

'

^r8rT]r5rr*4i^ifgh<j4^*ii^ *4f^^H'*^i^^'^''^'

IRt^ ^M
IT^

fa

TR^ t^

#^ ^I^I^IMHH

^ItT^

n!^L<MI(|^ cT^ ^^n^ Hj-^ct

^^ ^^

rR2T

'>:il^^ri

%f

cliewables,

"to

J{i^,

12)

and suckables,

i.

^m

is

1^)

?)

>jyfc|^^

voc. case of

here used as a substantive,

')

see

of

r.

188.

anu,

r.

some

')

p. 151. c.

"having

(c.)

" an attendant."

-"-)

root rfa,
24) j-oot

an obeisance being made,"

r.

m<jvjM

^, " to chew

(r. 5.),

"having

arrived, sat
i")

p. 192. c.

iw, " master,"

"a

20)

learned

^mm

" to give,"

hwe
189.

(g.)

^,

"

e)

cans, of bhuj^

i^)

n)

21)

with '^^

pret. of

n)

";

r.

i^)

p. 152.
i)

176. a.

f^.

p. 123.

f^g [j

p. ifis. .

(p. 44.).

" assistance

e.

down," 2d

voc. case, p. 43.

p. 35.

man"

p. 79.

(p. 107.)
27)

TMT

finished," caus. of root ^rpl

assistance in this matter.

112.

food into four kinds, lickables, drinkabks,

""causes to go," "passes," caus. of 2^a, p. 87. d.

effecting

^2J^h^

not unusual in Indian writings,

" to consult," 10th conj.

p. 114.

wmThiht:

xn, " to drink "

This division

Qi.).

eat," r. 108. r. 193. a.

p. 145.
9)

%^n^

" t lick " (p. 147. h.)

"to suck"

ITTf

"^

^WIM<*Ii< f^RTTp^W^

^raj?

Tif Mlfi^iMI

chl^tMl5!H[JH IROf^

cTcT*

f^gtPt*^

^r^iffiirr

^ H^

Htif^-

?Wn (^ dJJbll^l^.'H^I-

^^WT Trfr^teRT^

cT^ ^iiisjm^frr
^)

^"^

<liSl*i:

^T^W:

^N'Mfd

^mH.wiri^HH i^

f^RT^ TI^

chKr^ni

Wt fN^-^

p.

jg

d.

188./,

W(VT, " effecting," " the

"jg inferred," pass, of ma with

23)

with prep. a.

g^n. case, fern, of

ace. case plur. of Xjft^TTeii,

25) p,

ItH^j

202.

f.

" old."

26)

" q^

^0

%^iT^ft^n^TT^

II

cTJ^^ Wif^

W' ^rtt

^pf?T:

^* ^^

MI5^KMrMKc|t|r(

TTfT:

(I

^rd.<Mi2i ^Tf^ ij^

^T?^ 1^

MIMIiLI,^^!r<;*^iU|5i

xraTfT

IRt^RT-

;^ 7T^ 7T^ ^ cf^ ^T#rfH

^m 1^ ^d^ %^ B^ ^ WT*
II

^RTH

^MNi^'^H^^^

case,

struction."

33)

*')

se)

a, p. 145. g.

ment of wages,"

''9)

207.

caus. of '^,

(p. 23. xi.),

M'H\w{

case,

^T^rr^

'*2)

171.

all

four sides," p. 165.

c.

the prep.
'^)

^^)

p. 171.

T^,

r.

177.

b.

39)

c.

^,

"to command,"

root tti^ with sm, upa,

40)

ace. neut. (p. 48.).

) for the pay-

us.

"according to need,"

"i)

p. 205.

" of the same

when compounded with lnOf and Xf^

" of the

same

of the accomplishment of great

oRt^ or treasury," "the

139.

^3) p.
*'^)

f^t^n i, "con^

37)

j..

^2)

r.

171.

c.

" that wliich had been said by the king."

s")

108.

87. d.) with prep. nir.

root f^f^l with prep.

*^)

ace. plur. fem. p. 31.

r.

JRT (p-

f^SI , " a quarter,"

c. ;

6.

"the superintendant of the

for 3[rgT

" to hear,"

"same."

qq

p. i69. a.-loc. case.

3)

r.

"

^|^'|V{, " summons,"

4^)

a.

29)

" completed."

ace. dual neut.

47) r.

^;, "mortar," " lime," p. 103.

ace.

35)

treasurer."

and

^ W^ '^^^ ^
^r%RfHt
w^

^) " cause to be built," caus. of

"stone";

p. 145./.

^T^JTRi

" pointed out."

loc. case plur. p. 45.

^^)'^T^\J!!,

H^

^TivrffcR^: MilMchiO JH^Lchi^.tr^RilfT:

^Rirlf^:
28) loc.

1^%

^':

^\4m\'

part}'."

affairs.

^'^)

r.

159.

54)

class or caste

"

has the force of

"the instrument

%^iT^MH5:MM*

II

g<

^Twr

^UI^

^:

^<^

II

f^WT^ ff

Mto %ff ^
I

cTR^s^l^^K^M^^I^^^^^M'^v^i^miHIrr'rWM^

WT^

TTWl

f^XTFj;

d^l^lril

iniFmi

<T^ "^r^:

^Trh,*i^^R(|'i^l't^^^%t^t:^4^m^<J^M*^*^KH^

59) r.

the

^e)

acc. case, p. 44.

55)

"why

need

we

i)

60) r. 19.

108.

Sama Veda

p. 94,

is

"ma line."

^pnt

is

65)

r.

62) p. 145.

147.

" very charming."

b.

70)

69)

^.

172. g,

140.

^ht^,

68)

77) p. 35.

67)

to be

heard,"

"being astonished,"

"having the hair of

from emotion.

pret. atra. of ^^in (p-76. a.)

78) p.

169. a.

with u,

body

his

" hig eyes shedding tears of (religious) sym-

'2)

yoc. case, p. 41.

imperat. of root Ji, p- 106., a word used in acclamation.

2d

m)

hjs faith and devotion being excited."

"indistinct," or "convulsive,"

76) r.

(p. 34.),
^s) j 39^

64) <jelightfnl

66) p.

a sound of surprise prefixed to

erect with delight," p. 169. a.

pathy," p. 171.

case of ftrf^

the third of the four Vedas, composed in metre, and therefore

always chaunted; TnT "a chaunt,"

p. 147. d.

dat.

57)

be anxious about the success of our affairs?"

79)

j 132.

''*)

and

p. 206.
p. 35.

p. 175.

'3)

7')

Tj^,

2d

sing,

'5) p.

m.

^) 3d sing.

^^

%^^xn^i^

II

^^^

^t f^in^

M<N<^%

II

^nwpft%^

^ ^pan:cRT^ xTR^n^ irfxr:

inw TT^ %^
w^ ^^'w

irficm:

ii

^nf?#tf ^^^iR

^^<=hi'(!<lHi*(

TMT^ chdJld::^?^

cTT^ m^\l<?6

fMrnnpi wpt ^Si^miH ?t^ <*i^chK ?hn

i

^ ^THP^di wt:

xnT5n^

^^i:iT^ TTJTO

p. 167.

with

"^

12) p.

his

9)

167.

case, plur.

195. b.

r.

28)

2d

and

b.

r.

1^)

r.

5)

^tliT,

"a

" hospitality,"

194.
sing.

masc.

")

pret.

^,

of

r.

212.

boat."

e)

inst. case, plur.

" was brought,"

n) 2d pret.

") " after he had per-

p. 23. vii.
a.

28. b.

turn"

"to

"the managing workman,"

TTR. "the opposite bank."

i")

p. 174.

ohi^ghii^

16.

'')

Tpf^, "new."

20) ace. case, plur.

26)

e.

2d

2)
3)

morning exercises (of religionJT^p. 169.

case, fern, of

22) p.

p. 173.

boat-man."

p. 138. b.

20.

formed

p. 156.

4)

of cTlfV^R*

w^,

p. 174.

XfJJ,

b.

^,

with

go

to

Jtif

(p. 106.),

ii

1)

p.

^ni^ cm: ^rr^%fh^<N$<^<=hH^^T^^^wcTi

xT^

^^

^^-iiAm

ch|A^jvriu|*^'>iH5ilM^(^l M'=t.$l^<4t*i^^l^l

root

i'^)

i*)

r.

192:

i6)

6.
i9)

p. 177. c.

masc. of ^BHlfTr, " an architect," " master-builder."

of Mfrfoii, " a hired

labourer,"

sh inserted before

23)

cai^Tof 7/2/; with

?ii,

27)

ace. case, "q^,

"a

letter"; ^^ofi,

20.

imp. p. 107.

-'0

r.

r.

108.

21)

')

p. 140. 0.

"a

writer"

p. 145. d.

gen.

p. 126.
21) aj.g_

by

25) p.

r.

20.

202.

(p. 150.

c.

b.).

wrn fm^ #?^:

"sn^ ^St^

^R^

T3^T ^J'TFT
^Hlg^rH

31

come

T^

hither."

33)

(r.

108.) of caus. of

p. 143, a.

tj^, prose ";

p. 104.

with

5")
^)

J|iii(i,

mr,

^)

''')

p. 35. i".

p. 23. ix.,

"an

r.

letter-carrier," root
38)

p. 143. a.
p. 44.

p. 43,

t-

^)

r.

189.

are to be
^'")

made

from

astrologer,"

im,

from

W^

2d

to

"a

pret.

) having recited,"

137.

P- 118.

37)

him

g^,

3d pret. oi gam, " to go,"

r.

140.

) voc.

*^) p.

64. T.

to enter " (p. 147. b.) caus. of root

caus. of ?s, p. 146. a.

from ^F^i "an hour."

3-^)

^, p. 150. b.
39)

*^) r.
"")

nom. fem. of 'a&f^, "what kind?"

') "

216.

astrologer,"

WrfMir*, "an

<T<T^

11

" verse," p. 171.

p. 176.

^) ace. case of dshis,

f%TO with u, see also

formed by

36)

p. 83. h.

case ofvidwas, p. 44.

*9)

incn:

" for his coming hither," " containing an invitation for

seal"; '^rf^, " stamped."

with prep, a,

^ft|fl^ ^iil|^di

^MHIrMlMpcl^:

32)

p. 147- b.

**)

3d

"to calculate,"

3)

sing.

the astrologer,"

imp. pass.

p. 160.

" a star."
alflfdl^,

G G

b.

p.
'<')

90./.
r. 5.

MI<i^l|<?iiT^fcT^^T^&^I^^R<'^k<^^^i^WK^'ff

^MiPh mRmjIt^

^: x^ ort^:

?T?T:

r.

176.

^^)

mission to depart,"

0)

r.

126.

with

"STT,

6) ace. case, p.
8)
r.

o ^j r^ri
r

151.

minutes.

^ with

r.

1) p.

155.

them

43.

2)

2d

86.

193.

h.

^T^if

is

pret. of "3^,

to be perfonned

"

to go,"

r.

98.

loc.
4)

e-)

42.

them

case of ^r?fT,

3d

^147
"a

day."

decorate," p. 102. p. 174.

jf,

minister,

tlie sex'vants, tlie

is

" per-

plur. imp. of caus. of

" to send," with prep,

"at an auspicious moment," a muhurta

i") r.

auspicious

ace. case of ttjtj^i,

67)
69)

"let

^)

"with

64) p.

s) r. 7.

1st pret. of f^,

priest,"

r.

p. 143. a.

p. 175.

^s)

f^'.

" on the day before that (fixed upon

prep. f%, p. 119.

") "the minister and the others,"

1^)

63)

procure."

')

"i)

108.

b.

68)

b.

"the family

r.

203.

147-

"let

')

fi")

62) p.

"will arrange," root

6)

Ml^% ^WHIT-

rH^rMdX<<=lH

" is to be chosen," " fixed upon," root ^q with

moment," " favourable season."

for the ceremony)."

chl^.chf-

W^ rR ni^ Tnn
5'')

^ ^?^ ^1^

5th conj.

and the

two dandas or

r.

94.

priest,"

forty-eight

applied to any thing wliich carries, p. 150.

r,

157.

'2)

i') r.

by the Brahmans."

performed on entering a new habitation,"

193. a.

'"')

r.

fcijl,

horse,"

r.

c.

25. a.

"having caused the ceremony

"^TCHinT,

157.

"a

"a ceremony

or sacrifice

^<"iA"lMii5mH

II

j|i(<ch

^^

II

^Ririwr ^|Ni^uiit i^twftn^

^fjr^TTftrnrr-

f^ Hi\f^4 '^jrh^i ^HK ^ ^rm h\i^c^

<T^^?r?fn:

HI.MId* ch|W|chK|[<^: MIKdllMh HT^c^^

drMir<^

^E^ixit

mh^Cm*

UsA^Mi

itRt

i^^rrnf

ftrnfN;

%^:

thtr

^^

MRdlfr

^^i win^ ^ irw^:

nroSm M<idi*: ^S^J?^:

ii

Ic^^ill(\lMH*4|chlL^^T]r3n^ldHRhM.t^^l^^^

^J^TxprfcT*
pT. "dancing";

'*)

i7)r. 43.

i)

i.

p. 83.

-i) r.
2s)

209.

26^

"free from

prehension."

" the

Deity,"

dp with
p. 43.
i.e.

vi, p.

182.

"singing";

192. a.

i9) r.

"musical instrument,"

cJtH''^,

iy4. and

r.

'^)

z-^

P- 1^9. a.

or sickness,"p. 164.

"always devoted

184. a.

120.

^3)

^s)

157.

" satisfaction " (p. 23. ix.).

^*)

e. r.

'^^)

36)

')

^^)

34)

r.

171.

p. 199.

e.

6.

151. a.

da with prep.
r.

101.

"the guardian."
all

^TTB^. ap-

"the Supreme Lord,"

" spread abroad," root

ace. case, plur. of ^r<^^Tftll,

") ufiT give the sense of "every,"

" morning, noon, and evening."

pret. of

"free from

^2) loc. case,

" permitted to depart."

p. 104.

ace. case,

gj

p. 149. 1.

161.

to," r. 161.

20)

21)

r.

" a gratuity,"

" together with his retinue,"

"the conqueror of your enemies,"

WPHT
r.

r.

TTftjftT^.

22) r.

i.

iftiT,

Istpret.

that which causes

pra,

II

" a pupil,"

*)" at the three seasons,"

^rg^cTRTK*

II

11

SELECTIONS FROM THE INSTITUTES OF MANU.

ORIGIN OF THE FOUR CLASSES, AND GENERAL VIEW OF THEIR DUTIES.

^^^TpTT^nTmf

TffTP^

Y^ ^I'^kiq;

^i<tj^^rr

Ml^iilMIH ^t^i^^cT

^rrof^ ^r^M^ ^mwcr:

fMr%TS3(;

II

II

II

II

?ii

ii

M^i T^ ^T^ i^iui^iHH^ IR "^

"^ t^^ ^f^ iR "^
^rfw^
I

W^

II

li

^^.^^^??^w:^wf^i
UcfMIH

1^ ^%^

1)

Gen.

W^
5)

2^

masc. " the

xf^^

^^:

5il^^i:

case, sing, of ;fr^, "creation."

masc. " the thigh."

j.

171

c.

1st pret. of

OT, " to

performance of a

This

foot," r. 16.

12)

"summarily,"

merchants."
"servicejj'

lit.

enjoin," 10th conj. p. 87. e

sacrifice."

the causal, p. 87.

)
'")

e.

ace. case of

ace. case of

42.

ii.

and

is)

p. 188. d.

iiffii

is

159.

^) "gj^,

a complex com-

p. 171. 6.

ace. case of

^) r. 7.

^mpT,

uPhaI^, "acceptance."

gcc. case of aj^UahUVj

ofi5ff|^,

"desire to hear," p. 23.

" absence' of envy or grudge,"

19) r.

p. 182.

n.

"usury."

xiii.

d.

i-^)

ace. case of

i) instr.
1^)

case of

p. 188. d.

is from

")

n. "traffic,"

lit.

" the

n.

the lengthening of the a shows that this word

p. 152. a.
1*)

3) r.

pound, the whole being a dependent involving an aggregative,

7)

II

mT:inftRt ^R^i r<4H:

ij?TT^iTTftR:

%^4h% ^to:

VJV^MIH ^^Hl^fl^l

r.

^ liim

^fj^|
is)

196.

"way

r.

of

fem.
fem.

144. a.

HHJHl^dlHK:

II

<jd4ns^

^stIr: ^Sr[^

^^

^lr%f^: n^

ii

^M.MHd ^il^lH^^ ^T^'

%S[3TRf

^^ U^^^iPdH^^

^?rife

^^i^h:

"

II

IIQ.H

THE FIRST OR SACERDOTAL CLASS (oR BRAHMAN s).

Duties of the

Brahman

his Life, as

in the first

Guru

his

^TRW^ ^ TTT^^TO

^ fw^T

<^ HT

p. 44.

19)

p. 37.

cTTT iZTT

^^^riHI

fMw^rpcwrfi^

-j^^ the divine

20)

spirit,

II

So

II

ss

S^

23.

viii.

2;<)

p. 48.

prep, a, p. 144. a.

>)r. 9.

2)

p. 83.
r.

42.

8) r.

)
i.

r.

II

from which

q, "a

r.

9)

(r.

26. a.) of

174.

'")

from

TJT,

VmHlf(^H> " not negligent,"

" to sow,"

7)

2d

sing. pot. of vid, " to

by

protect,"

p. 43.
'

'2) j.

'

things

p 152. a.

"to go," with

divine treasure."
4)

j..

2O8. and

know,"

p. 95.

and

r.

28. b.

" the protector of a treasure ";

") dat. case of

131. 1.

152. a.

") '91^, n.

all

'^^^mr, "possessed of vigour,"

dat. case of ftffVTj,

"to

p. 146. a.

t,

^^fv, "a

caseof^innR. "adetracter."

3)dat.

p. 114.

protector,"

part, of vnp^

nom. case

21)

of root

part,

nom. fem. ofthesuperl. degree of

71.

194.

25)

p. 101.

jndec.

24)

II

II

are supposed to emanate, and to which they return."

22) p.

to

or Preceptor.

f^ ^ ^TT^ ^ -^iTT^^I^t^

cFT

i)

Order {Ashrama) or Quarter of

a Brahmachari, or Student of Religion, subject

'5)

a barren

nom. fem. of fut.

salt soil."

pass,

20

21

22

<i

<?

f^ fi^ fxTcH H^ ^^^:

^T^-ft

^ %^ -^ yR% ^RT^ -qf^ ftR:

HiclMMdil

(T^ f^T^frr: ^imr

18)

16)

p. 161. a.
i^)

p. 52. note.

"divine," p. 23.

^Hliiy

25)

Tff^,

pres. pM-t. atm. of ^nft,

29) r.

pot.

135.

^)

atm. of

sew,

35) p.

177.

66.

22)

nom.
adj.

case,

"gray "

i)

p. 117.

"to

for

serve," "practise."

^0

II

II

"^131

jg i^ej-e

adj.

masc. of ^nftfiT. P-

sing.

and

" relating to Brahma,"

used generally

r.

^2)

25)

124.

2^)

r. 5. r.

nom.

("

US-

seveta

gee verse 62.

P- 149. 2.

case, sing, of

p. 95. note.

20.

own ") and

^)

is

the

p. 23. xii.

23)

the 3d sing,

i.e.

J||\^()q,

^) indec. part, of yam, " to restrain," with prep, s'am

c.

36)

152.

^i)

p. 102.

3d dual

p. 140.

" acquittance," " discharge of a debt."

r.

'^)

gy^^

^^ ^TP^,

*3)

^0)

(as the hair).

p. 113.

39)

I.

^mA?^ ^rfq

n. " barren soil."

" to read,"

com. " at his Guru's."

andwi.

^i) r.
^s)

p. 152. a.

H iS n

'7)-^^, "the Vedas"; ^TT^^, " an expounder," p. 149. a.

viii.

not reflexively.
'21)

1^ ^l|% W^=^

15) r. 6.

23

b.

37) p.

195.

ft.

pres. atm. of

ffl^,

3s)

" born

first,"

" to bear."

w) p. 198. a.

" elder."

^2) p. 37, j*^) r.

180.

02

^^ I^ f^ ^^ cT^: ^ ^WPZT^

^^

II

ii

^8

fw ^^;^ ^rRR^[f?T

rnn i^TTcri

^jsri^:

II

ftRiTH

^rrtj^cTT^TT^^

W^ %^ Tti% v^ f^

^HTf^

ii

ii

^M

ii

II

^^

^p^^n^ f^^TrTt f^r^^ ^XTfT^

^njH -^f^ ^yiTdS^f^T^
p. 90. /. r. 190.

^^)

an

prefix

tive

more

so, as

3d plur.

3) lit.
r.

136.) between

(r.

"^Tl^f^^, "one

'^')

pres.

^ 3d

WpST, "pure," by

r.

**)

smg. pot. atm. of

p. 23. viii.

')

del

nom.

plur. n. of

(r.

123.) with prep, vi, p. 175.

(p.

1) TpiTT,

nom.

sing.

f^I^, " an

'") loc.

149. a.) with prep. apa.

Hf^H ^STTWT

p. 174.

^SrftTTRT,

is

12)

common

masc.

"a

plur.

'^)

r. 7.

ysfjf, belief,"

" purity,"

from

'*)"tobe

gen. plur. of

r. 7.

")

SHM^iPh

root sthd with prep, a, " to

phrase in

driver,"

p. 48.

=^^)

art."

with prep, sam and a.

follow up," "apply";

(r.l31. 2.).

"*)

^S[^VT<T> "possessing

with prep. ,

from

pres. part, of

effort."

remarkable, and the

serves or honours," p. 149. a.

40.

collected," fut. part, of <fa (p. 147- c.)

seizer,"

is

atm. of the root "sn, 1st conj. with prep, sam sni pra.

" desirous to hear,"

124. a.

"a

two prepositions

who

II

This insertion of the nega-

"unpermitted."
the

^THd'^i

the metre would equally admit of ^TfTwrTOTift.

"salutation."
1)

*'')

^^

Manu

for

"to make

from to, "to restrain"

^0

^ Pci%.HH^

ftrf^ Ji^P'ri chP^'T^ci;

^t

TT^RfffTTHTT:

^rli^ ^M<< inPd ^<1n?]MMcf

l

^**41h

<^

WRTOt

")

p.

153./

-^).

of root

^,

1^ p. 109.
')

p. 153. d.

" to go to,"

"to obtain"; com.

')

" incur,"

^S^-

prep, vi and pra.

'^) r.

of the pres. part, of ftf,

30)

3d

siag.

pres.

of

"E^T.,

^f^, " a leather skin."

i^ToB,

" undergone."

5m

with

^,

3s) r.

195. a.

24)

jm

II

^^

Ist conj.
r 195,
5. 4. 77.

171.

r.

of."

i^)

32)

123.

r.

j.

out,"

152. a.

3d

sing. pres.

(p.

139.

2c)

135.

28) r,

with

t.)

nom. case

^f^^
136,

sing,
.

j.

j-eli.

j..

7-

"to disappear gradually."

nnr when compounded with

^^)8eep. ^. 7.

38)

root T(^ with fJT,

25)

fem. " the body."

"to ooze

II

masc. "fire" (nom.

21)

6.

11

II

^rf>T.

**)

^) root f^lT , 6th conj. with

"to be desirous

?8

with prep. "^m.

harass," 5th conj.

^i)

??

1%^ ^

with prep.
20) r.

b.

90

"depraved," pass. part, of ff^

27)

becomes *rre- Panini,

to

grajRr^,

16)

root

191.

133.

gions meditation," p. 152. a.

29)

r.

^'^)

"to

^MhR^ ^I^

^JTFJcT^ ^T#t|^.

case

^JPI^d

f^TrqiT

(I

-gT^jj^^ "obtained,"

"3TT,

"

ggn case of 41^411^,

to fear."

n. "

37)

lit.

root

dishonour."

'

^ 'TtSj^^?^ ^5TR ^ %?itr^

Duties of (he

Brahman

Tj5=r:

^^

ii

ii

in the second Order, or Quarter of his Life,

as a Grihastha, or Householder.

^ ^*

^a^rl%r >jdMiH ^r^r^t^

^^^rt

^l(l<JW ^flfcT

^ 1^ ^ ^^
^TiTt^^riJ^

''9)

p. 113.

and f^WfT,
(r.

ff
'"')

^H.'H^^

making

r. 9.

r.

p.32. t9) p.

90. /.

"i)

p. 143. a.

'")

'^.

^,m." injury."

relative

'
'

it

it

^^)

may

it

^, "noi"
4th conj.

be derived a noun

might be explained, without

ace. case (r. 180. a.) of
^)

" a wife,"

p. 103.

'>)

r.

r.

190.

illustrate the

the

first is

must therefore be translated "has

is

HTT

p. 169. a.

152. a.

These two compounds well

or "is founded in contentment"; the second

F:<<fH^'.

II

of root, IpT,

tliis

'^)

v)

80

and absolute dependent compound

relatively, and as an epithet of TT^,

would be written

y.

JJ<x^<^ > com.

" restrained."

difference between a

pres.

If from

p. 44.

')

i.e.

sing.

II

9^11

ii

p. 175.

"2)

(p- 155. a.)

^TIllTrftt

govern the accusative.

f)^, "not";

3d

i')

"deviating."

''')

ftjrf^r:

''i)r.l31. 2.

19.

the phrase ^f(fu

part."

II

^ p^^ ft^n^:

89. a.), " to be born," with prep.

^HTlfrffr,

^g

f^r^

?b

used

its root,"

not used relatively to f^Tr^nTIt or

must, therefore, be translated as an absolute

dependent, " the root of misery," see

p. 167. .

H H

#^ ^Pft fM f^^ildr-id:

^<ir<H

^rlr^Mflr^^^^^rtFtiHi^i^^ r<4<lTiR: n8^n

^X^H^f^.H

i^'^H^^

'

^K fiR^Ig

MIMMIH ^tNj

^WlP^AchliUI

^f% ^*
^!^ -^MM^AmH ^ #^
H|M*^^

^flrfl

8?

II

II

xi^fTT^f^rxpirf

^^

4K?5fd

W^

^i^Pd

88

II

II

II

8M

II

^^Tpi^^^%?!;^^i
^'^^^^f^^^'^^^^^^f^TOK^:

W^ ^Wt-V^
>2)
ifi)

3d

^R, " own,"

p. 23. xii.

sing. pot. pass,

of

^^

^irfrT

^ra

for

'')

^
i9)

audible reading to one's self of scripture."

" inconsistent,"
21)

from ITO, by p. 149.

also written

%^,

"dress."

Cf. also p. ^0. note 51.

r.
2')

19.
p.

p. 39.
S2)

2>) p.

153./.

33)

TR^, "fruit,"
a superlative.
"heaven."

123.

3?)

e.

and

r.

18.

r.

and

i')

P^J^lVH

p. 120.

^TBTR, " in-

')

" adverse

to,"

ggn. case sing, of ^rfinHT. "family rank."

p. 174.

153,

31) lit.

21)

27)

g.

"the

committed,"

earth,"

" rolling

by

meaning

on," root

36) -jj^^

27. iv.

p. 23. vii,

root sad, p. 107. and

also

ji^ with

plur. of IfR. " a grandson, p. 37.

(r. 7.) p.

Il8sil

123.

174.

'") p.

rf.

" sameness of form," from ^|^q

p. 15. note.

for 4^*j)

^:

?H^^dt

ace. case plnr. of

(r.27. a.) oigo,

34) loc.

p. 112.

20)

26) p.

P- 151. b.

p. 154.

*)

r.

6.

p. 65. b.

a.

22)

nom. case

29)
**)

f.

p. 37.

182.

^)

f^^

" to adhere to," p. 90.

ll8frH

123.

"a cow,"

35)

r.

p. 139. k.

r.

124.

without

" the most grievous," used as

p jgg.

39)

^^^

indecl.

*l^^f^dWK:

II

^9

II

^ ^#R
t^ ^ ^nl^(l H 8b

Hlfid^* ^<.fH<l "^ <<4dMf

%^

?[T

^ TTFT ^

^^

^RTWtfl^ ^TT^

*l^r^^

jj^^lr^flrt

firt -^ ^?rp|(f

fTTR Ni<lt^c(

8<^ll

JH^Ict^Tf'l^^Hfw^

^: ^ ritdw

f^T^ir^

11

ii

mo

ii

^^^MW^VM^FmT(Tr|fT<t%%(T^n5f^

TCT^fWcT^FOTf^^^^^:^:
'^^<^ ^r#^ fJ??^ ^r#r^

^
41)
*^)

f^(T

from

tfta^iJ

"sharp," "cruel," hy

"galling."

4^)

pot. of root
4'J)

r.

r.
>?)

3d

gliim

with prep,

p. 22.

nom. case

135.

This

^O'^- 1^2.

^I^, by
'")

86.

^*)

adj.
>

ut,

"

3d

with
l

p. 23. vii.

^2) r.

sad

tffff,

vii.

>) r.

M?

^1^7^,

"acrimonious,"
<*>)

^s)

15.

162. a.

^,

135. a.

II

) "contempt."

"to

-^)

eat,"

3d

sing,

"perpetual."
"food," from

2d conj.

r.

16.

(p. 107.)

with pra, "to be calm," " contented."

"to receive with pleasure and thankfulness."

ffTWT ^?i%iT^ ^ff, com.

life," p.

II

123.) of root '^i^, 10th conj. "to contemn,"

"belonging to health," formed from

heaven," p. 23.

'<)

*') r.

152. a.

(r.

^fHI*

"belonging to

not (a God)."

^) 3d sing. pot. of root

suig. pot. of root

IW^

is

to utter."

5') p.

MS

IIM^II

a very anomalous compound.

sing, of pres. part.

irraf^y:

not <81Nm

is

rf.

iii.

sing. pot. of tf;^

^ff^nj,

TTfW "there

II

%T^ ^i^#PRj

H#^ ^ MPdH^^^ ^ #^:

"atheism," from

II

23. vii.

^T^tTT,
")

by

p. 23. vii.

'*)

^n^
'''')

not

^*T

not i^J^, "belonging to

W^

V^

^UJ^*^^

^^lA'Prh

Wf^

pel

Pm; Mich a

MM

T^ ^lPrin4M5iH

^TT^

^f?4P^< ^rPT ^^m^ ^ipTJdHM^^^l

Mp^d'^H

ii

vi^4Pd

^^

^ TTTO^mt ^1%
dat.

2)

with

case,

Tf.

commonly

and

p. 33.
^) r.

added to

^
r.

194.

)
lit.

^)

word

in

modem

the manner in which, or the state of

6)

p. 124.

9)

r.

187.

')

"^)

meet with."

12)

return," p, 176,

"

yam (r.

i'')

'")

3d
r.

^l|^^|, "disguise."

^1)

197.

lrep.

apa.

i^)

--')

r.

p. 145.

42. r.71.

i.

ii

II

sing.

Mb

II

M^ll

II

SfO H

%<^

II

of

pot.

(p. 118.)

"preceded by rule"; 17%^

Sanscrit

and

Bengali,

very

is

express

to

done.

is

qafvf, "the act of honouring."

147.

a vessel."

n) root sad with a, "to

is)

atm. of smi, 1st conj. with

sing. pot.

"to cover," with prep, n,

II

with pra, " to bestow."

176. b.

conj.
r.

) r.

88. c.)

3d

II

mind with which, any thing

object," properly "

fit

'*)

feel pride in."

proclaim."

p. 23. vii.

"a

II

>iilnMjMiKch:

152. a.

m^

MP^chl^tTfct

^^ xmt ii%ra ^^ ^1.^i<wf

M^

<T<!;cTfT^^m%^WIsJ)Pd MPdiipHd:

f^W^TT<T ^Tf?T ?T^

II

m%^ ^rM['5n%ra ^5t%ct:

^ ^ ^^n^ ^^^

honoured in

wi,

"

to admire,"

root 'apr, 10th conj. irreg. with

xrft.,

" to

indec. part, of the root f[^, 10th

1^)

'^)

-0 root

^nrf, "deceit."

^, "to seize" (p.]50.

")

r.

Z*.),

123.

with

*4H^f^dmK

^ ^^rlrt ^ grfcT^ vi#r;

T^

'TC^t^
21)

The yamdh,

" moral

or

%^

^ITO ^T#FTf

^M

11

%^Fy:

II

TVul

II

<^A'<)

%b

self-restraint

root >nij/' to serve," " perform,"

with prep.

high.

of
r.

29) r.

"

<55t,

to pain,"

^")

171.

r.

plur. of

69.

ace.

case

^i)

to perish."

^,

39)

30)

c.

135.

r.

4th conj. "

95. and see

3^) r.

nom.

128.

27) 3<j

^%^, "a

''^)

r.

124. a.

ging. pot. of root chi (p. 95.)

kind of ant";

rMMir^(ilUW(^T:,

According to Wilkins, these ant-hills are seen in Bengal eight or ten feet

Com.

conj.

2s)

sa7n.

freedom from

the niyamdh, or " ceremonial duties," are

ablution, fasting, sacrificing, reading of scripture, and religious silence.

zfi)

II

duties," according to the scholiast, are puiity of thought,

chastity, compassion, patience, truth, religious meditation, honesty,

malice, mildness, and

p. 122.

from

3')

^5)

^,

of Hl^iT,

nom. case

p. 27. iv.

gd

32) r.

ging. pres.

p no.,

s^)

153. a.

atm. of >pr

p. 145./.

to destroy," p. 140.

0.

&)

3d smg.

celestial

7th conj. " to eat,"

p. 112.

37)^.17.

"

sin," p. 169. a.

f^sf^,

body," from

^,

10th

pres. atm.

n.

"luminous," formed from VfPS, "light," by

")acc. caseof^"5f^fttT, " having a

"body,"

sing, of the pres. part, of root ift?,

p. 152. b.

r.

"heaven," and

42.

i.

^r^>

Duties of the Grihastlius Wife.

xrfcT^^t^ ^'4^'ril

gen.

1)

2)

nom.

of mflllXII^,

case

dp

of desid. form of

3d

(p. 130.

e.)

^)

formed from

of

it is^

^^,

Com.
lit.

^^,

"skilful."

is

'')

p. 35.

3d

T.

'')

JTifhlj " to
^)

TT^R., "an

p. 169. a.

not free," p. 169. a.

loc.

case of

sing. pot. atra. of root

II

i-^)

^,

'2)

a.

f)

"by

her (understood)
^) inst.

c.

article of

n)

^^f^ -wiiXx

inst.

fem. of

i^)

chief."

>')

"to remain."

"patient," p. 141.

^HT^S^,

transgress,"

" deceased," root ^, " to go," with

conj.

fem.

household furniture."

^j^, "to

"

served,"
p. 152./.

be exalted," " honoured,"

TnTTT

ace. fem. of ^jrn,

^ra, 2d

q^4mri> abl. case "death," p. 165.

part. (p. 136. i.)

"to be

*)

oR^oBTrarfH", "pots," "pans," "crockery," &c.

" whose hand

s^

inst. case, r. 49.

'")

"great," com. Tn<Tn*

1")

II

nom. fem. of pres.

to be (p. 147. d.) XT^^in, cheerful," see p. 203.

deal treacherously with."

'"')

with prep. abhi.

an irregular nominal verb

sing. ]ires. of

^n^,

"one who takes by the hand," "a husband."

"virtuous," p. 46.

fern, of Tfrra',

n Ifl

II

ciSir^H ^nftf?T MPd.^cJi xrt^

root char with prep, upa, p. 147. g.

~>)

n vSO

i^ 'l^^i^5^[^

^r^ i^i

t^VM\

f%N^ ^rflR

^ ^ wf H^k"^

^VJM^

xrf?t

'Tpitci^

i^)

p. 152. b.

j{, p.

^,

"to

138.

I).

"until";

*4HHf^dWK:

11

Brahman

Duties of the

^S

(I

in the third Order, or Quarter of his Life,

as a Vanaprastha, or Hermit.

WRT cl^ ^?n?^ "^f^ ft^ "^

^T^f

^1^1^ fJ^HT^:
^[RH f^TRTH

41d*^<*.H4l

^l^jj^'iJ^^Td^dd:

Brahman

Duties of the

N^<jil^

"Nlfft

^nFffffcT:

^^d|HchW4<*:

>ilHI<,ldl

^Tr5T^-'rR%

^!^ ^:

^Ezn^

II

Ujf^d*

^^

'Tft^

II

H ^If

II

II

^t

II

in the fourth Order, or Quarter of his Life,

as a Bhikslkiit or religious Mendicant.

^r%5 ^

^")

and

^#.

a,

3f')

r.

cjcft^ mni=(;

" a wrinkle."

21) r.

"to have recourse

changed to
2)

Ui^,4

to."

161. a.

27)

r.

-) p. 145./.

197.
24) p.

by the same rule

143.

p. 174.

*)

a, p. 139. c.

from root

from

^,

"to

clfRf

^2) p.

root

^^,

"gone," root

'^)

sleep," p. 149. 1.

" of me."

')

eR

^')

ftr^cnr, n.

10th conj.

^^

(p. 87. e.),

Trft.,

" to

si)

^pr not

(p. 150.

b.),

"to dry up."

')

^^)

t^')

root

2!*)

^rRITfTT,
"

lit.

V^> "the ground";

p. 32.

J;

Tj is
r.

15.

p. 141.

"composed," from dhd

"free from selfishness";

p. 138. b.

p. 45.

^ before a nasal,

" intent on."

3s)

mm

root fsf, Ist conj. with

^-^^ "water,"

viii.

37,

" a habitation,"

with prep. f%,

root "SiT with

^'')

changed to

is

with prep. 'BT^

" easily moved with commiseration."

39)

152. a.

that a final

23)
2:,)

"amicable," from fiT^, "a friend," by p. 23.

with prep, sam and

^TT^:

"a

receiver,

trembling after,"

^^py,

^,

"who

sleeps,"

"not," and v^,

TBT, " severe,"

^,

with f^,

r.

"freed from,"

71
lit.

p. 175., p. 144. a.

wander about," especially as a mendicant.

f^^ ikmt fM ^^HdM^ ^nft^^

^ ^dMlH^^^^dHH

^Sf^^^l

^5fi^

^rfcT^t^ Pdld'^d dj<4*4^d ^i^^

^uptf

irfrrf^^rrf^:

r^^Hiii!if%

^f^^'nftj

"having a TH^ 01" dish,'' P-27.

a oRn*I or water-pot,"
Jffff,

"to expect."

42.

i.

')

"wages,"

>Tfif,

r.

194.

i'^)

r.

119.

14)

nom.

^') '3?Ml'ei^H.,

voot

-gjjt

"eating."

"a

enter," "occupy," p. 139.

p. 23. xii.

24)

^^

-^)

i.

27. iv.

^^,

cRtj, 1st conj.

with
'

^,

^)

of

the

"having

^)

Istconj. with
9) inst.

"to be

(p. 64. a.),

"to curse,"

^]^
22)

II

^TRin^, "immortality," p. 22.

^,

r.

fit

p. 139.

for."

le) lit.

i.

i^)

124.

21)

^oot f^^f with ^TO

vi.

p. 129.

^')

adv. " in private."

and

j..

153.

caus. of

^[j,

"to

"possessed of 33^^, or the quality of passion,"

"element"; ^H\f1> "habitation,"

fr^, "a body formed

tM

hired labourer."

plur. neut. of tlie pres. part, of the passive of

root air with fT, "to cause to cease."

aether."

atm. of root

^)

"

ii

^rfinr^j "opprobrious language."

In)

p. 175.

ti

11

^ '^^

sing. pot.

dat. case of

3d sing. pres. atm. of

ace. case plur, (r. 20.) of

' welfere."
2*1)

'")

h b^ii

fM%^?i;

com.

II

"having a ?[7!3 or staff," p.

8d

r.

')

case of ffTtt'l* "restraint."

1')

-i)

iv.

bo

llb^ll

^w ^i^

^rf^ ^ ^dl<4WH

i:5fW'T

')

f^T^^

five

elements,

earth,

i.e.

fire,

Mrvjcmn^^rifvl-

water,

air,

and

^.^t^H!M'^^,H: wiiHTd v^mi nf^f

^^T^y^Wt v^:

^)^f^^

tif

ii

ii

b^

ii

^Hd:

^fctd^:

^H^^tHt

ii

^^ ^J^:^^^

iibtii

THE SECOND OR MILITARY CLASS (OR KSHATRIYAS;.

The King.

ihI^m ^nd7m4
Hl5'4l

^^
^^<

^Rt^

^t^ ^iflPd

'^'^
i

"^rft^.^Tsf

HIH^-'f

ben

ii

^^ ^^

W^^ ^ ^^T^ ^rl^

ff ^t%-ftH^ ^^ f^^
"^

II

^0

^^^qiTi;

T^7^ '^r^ hI^ <nmh ^i^(1; ioj*

26) r.

182. d.

2) p.

root ^;i with ^ni, "to expel,"

worldly affections."

28)

of ^;ffT, "sin,"

r. 6.

of

ft(fi<rl

r.

69.

3s)

com.

33)

^n^ir(^ri>!4s{ll*)>

mir|^|rf,

"

'^")

for

" belonging to an order"

racteristic," p. 23. xii.

^ef ;r^,

37) r,

171,

j.

" having no Brahman," " without the Brahmanical

with
)

TfHT,

" to unite,"

32)

^)

"prT,

<^^

^,

'"')

p. 139.

"^^, 5th
i.

*2)

conj.

ss)

sign,"

I 1

"cha-

"not," and ^Tf, "theft."

>)

com.

nom. case neut. of V{slllH>

39)

class."

"to prosper,"

r.

94.

^^^j,),, " having no king."

p. 110.

plur.

') inst.

"a

all

neut.

**) ace.

27. a.
i^j^^Tif,

II

"to give up

p. 145. g.

r. 6. r.

p. 27. iv.

com. ^Hf\v.

and

II

" knowledge of the principles of the shastras.

knowledge of self."

"the military body."

") root ^n? with

20.

nom. case neut.

*')

root

^3) p,

tn

177.

f.

90

TT^RffrTTOR* M

\{

^HMI

f^iPCnlT^

Wr^T^^f^-^

cTOT

T^

^^tPtT

TTl

^ ^^

Tjt 'l^ni;

p. 206. b.

"a

nova. plur. of iX^,

p. 182.

king,"

rf.

lit.

nom. case masc. of

p. 149. 2.
*inmr<-V|r|

1)
,

lit.

ffj||ri ,

^|TOT. "punishing"

who
(r.

<^^

^,

nom. case of

uncommon
with H.

6) p,

root
10)

f^,

154,

e_

p. 138. b.

inst. plur.

of ;qjn,

7) r.

"an

^)

203. a.

9) pres.

ii

"6)

root

115.

3) ace.

P- 174.

p. 110. c.

case plur. of

^^

not," and
Properly

TM,

"^uf^, "depending

i')

Grammar

are not

4th conj. atm. " to be shaken,"

part, of the pass, of'ftf^,

act of policy."

177. a.

pres. part, of'sprn? (p. 115.).

root
)

with TiT

" to cut," with fi^, see

2) p,

r.

"paradise,"

*^)

this should be ^ff^lTOlT, see p. 136. c, but such violations of

in metrical composition.

ii

II

attacks on the nftitT or road."

20.)

^m

ii

p. 195. 6.

49)

" a reaper," root

oR^, m. "grass," "weeds."

" one

ii

II

ll<^8ll

"the chief of men."

the place where the three great gods sport.

50)

^?

xrftirPq^:

f^v%^ ^^ fsrf^^ wr ^ n ^b

*'')

II

W^mMH.drMii:

fM ftHirmrr ^ ^:

tI^

rR2i ?T^

^I^

p. 124.

on," "resting on,"

"to

irrigate," r. 124.

'-) fjf^fv^Fir,

"prevention."

'T^RffcTTHR:

11

*4rWlH

^[3TW^ ^I^H

^^

II

ee

^^^^'^TTj: n

;^^ ^ rf wiri ^rfetf^^fJIwTrr ^ill^rR: moon

<<!inHrrt ^^1^ |#i^ ff ^f^ ^:
^T!5^ f? ^^VJri ^ ^R^ i^t%^ ^R^ ^0*^

II

7n%T^

^^I^

^w5?t

^p^ ^^ ^^^ 5

cTT^T^

ftr^^ ff ^Titf?T

II

^t^

^l^

rciPH^Td^d:

So^ n

II

^09 n

^pcrftrrf inn: n
v9

I'

Administration of Justice.

Wt ^fTRT ^]RT

^.'^k^^

^T^ ^^

^^

MlfMdH

rT^

d^l4*4I^H

^^

) r.

210.

1^)

T^^)j [ ^f , "

f^,
2"0

3d

2d

H^,

3d

"to punish,"

sing. pot. of

^i'l^R

.'^)

</.

conj.

"

to lick."

20)

of jftnpy, "liberation."

2^) p. 87. d.

II

11

^?^,

'')

^TSJ. " "*"i

"O"

"deserving

P'"

ace. case

n. "clarified butter," r. 18.

-^f^,

^^
29)

ofi^frt,

root

2g)

"inflicting

im

tft (p.

"a hunter."

194.

23) r.

with f^ and

punishment in a

oi"

legal

manner."

64. a.) here,

"to track."

'2)

it

^")

by '^t^'^,

njnr,

"a

"

spit."

masc. of
i9)

root

21) r.

203. b.

21) p.

isi

ftr, p. 64.

roottj^ in caus. with TiT, "to excite."

devour," "seize upon"; but the scholiast explains

root

^08

SOM

"*)

an oblation of clarified butter mixed with cakes of barley meal."

Com. inrnpr^

31)

II

2d conj. "to eat."

plur. pot. of the pass, of fi?^ , " to break," p. 99.

2^) loc.

^^)

TT<

II

inflict," p. 175.

p. 147.

^,

^T^ "5^:

^?|qf?r:

3) 3d sing. pot. of root i^t with u, "to

punishment," root

'Tn^

c.

c.

p. 136.

27) r.

153.

root jp^, "to

should neglect.'

falling,"

"dropping."

^T^ 1?%

^rr# ^^:

dwict

f? ^ra?"^

^^ "^t^

^i:w5 ^nf^:

^ HT^^s^1[ch^*| ^WHT^ ^wt

cTc?;

^:

^:

cT

w:

w^mr

root Tira,

24)

Tpgif

"to

"to

^)

"; Tfl^,

"to

sit," p.

^i)

^qj^

42)p.99.

iv.

mutilated, defective," p. 23.

47)

vii.

n.
^'*)

25.

3^ ging

"a

^Wre^,

42.

r.

p. 39.

4) p.

2) r.

205. a.

|f8|TJ,

"an

"9)

20.

43) p.

^s)

5)

p. 139.

c.

inspector," p. 149. 2.

soul," ^' the intelligent spirit."

<^^o a

II

^^i

^^^

ii

II

H^

^gf^:

II

T^

root cRT ,

r.

^^9

II

with

"grj

90.

b.,

"one of an assembly";
4o)

p. 203. b.

39)

p.

124.

4^)

178./

so)

^jpj^^g^^

3)

3')

ii

for

j(m,

^jj^;^,

cggg masc. of fofif^^f^, "possessing fofif^^,

199. a.

r.

ii

p^es. atm. of

dart."

lit

g) loc.

the

state of being f%c|i^.

) ace. plur. of -sgw, p. 42. f-

nom. case masc. " having the head downwards."

here "total."
1)

35)

m.

^gpf^g,

II

rf ^i^^TRT

Md^^mMr^rfT

Com. ^^ifH.

extract,"

neuter, "truth."

sm,"p.27.

^^i^Xn^^

pierce," p. 140. n.

" to approaxjh."

" an assembly

^ f^

fe'dH

(p. 107.),

iob

soeii

II

XTM^^nri l^l^cjlTilMf^N:

IT^-?^ ^TWtf^ WiTR

f^

n?T:

ii

^ ^ n^^ ^ ^5T^ f^ ^Fmr

im f^lH

(Tt4

^s^

Jq^ g^gg q ^j-^.

f^^ "not," and jf^, "true,"

u ti^g

jojjgj.

case of ;^,

) gfqf, "

r.

j^^
60.

u blinds'
p. 154.

u t he intemgd ^irit

) nom.

a holy sage," here

it

e.

"

case masc. of

refers to

" the

^ ^^ilrMH: WT^ iRt^ ^^\fH\

^nr%3[

cf^TWR:

THE THIRD OR COMMERCIAL CLASS (oR VAISHYAS).

^rawT

"^

^:

Trt

41^MiH ^?rf^

^ziT?!;

^l<WK^ HliliMI
^

^ JRIl'"'|ii!R

<^i[HI

fMw

^im ^?l?j!rRTTf^ ^T^ TToT Kij^fcT:

^)

^W.

" that

with ^r^, "

1.2)

which one goes

contemn,"

nom. dual of

;B

>im

"

p. 82. e.,

for refuge."

beings."
'")

">)

twilight."

'3)

coral,"

weak "

r.

(r.

f^,
^i)

151. a.

153. b.\

word, without

i. e.

much

"

to

"')

^t^ "wife,"
)

root wir, p. 143. a.

ifv, " sowing,"

know,"

-{fpjf^, n.

^^t

II

2d

^
II

II

>7)

r.

42.

r.

"woven

obvious meaning.

pret. of

inr

n)

r.

151.

4)

loc.

"qftir^, "taking."

2d pret. atm. of
i) r.

16.

23)
2.1)

3d

208.

sing, of
r.

II

a name of Bralima, " the lord of all

cloth."

" dear and cheap."

S^^

the augment being dropped by

of ^TT, " agriculture and trade."

c.

"

to

to

II

21

Hmra

f^^iT^

II

20

Hi^rr^

n^: <\<\s
^T^t^Tpr^ ^

"qft^

x^

22)

jg

153.

(p. 118.)
b.

with
2")

-qft.

U^T^,

in "the price strong and

sometimes joined to another

loc. c. r. 8.

2 ) y.

196.

?8

Ki^MP^drnK

II

II

THE FOURTH OR SERVILE CLASS (OR SHUDRAs).

Vmmi

'jiwFrt 'MvjRhhi

^<:rci^Mi

T^ ^ ^?^ ^^^

^:^riro: ^n::

^T^niTRrjRt f5=n^

"^f^ ^ifdH

Vj^ ^rmrftr*
26)

" possessed of

titude,

by

H\m

p. 23. viii.

" making much of

by

p. 23. vii.

self."

^^^

ii

45.

^o) Joc. c.

v.

27)
2fi)

ii

w^

-^^rglTS-^^ ^^:

fame," p. 27.
28) r.

ii

II

)^?

i^8

II

ii

formed from ftTJ^nW. "final bea-

^7^^ " not," and

^r^^,

''the four classes" collectively,

" proud

"; lit.

from ^Tr%,

TRANSLATION OF THE FOREGOING SELECTIONS FROM

THE INSTITUTES OF MANU.
Introductory Bemarks.

J/HE precise time at which the Institutes of Manii were compiled

Sir William Jones places the date

uncertain.

is

hundred years before

hundred, or about the age of Homer.

reference

to

the time of the

fixes

It will

the translation (verses 69

the Sati, or Indian widow,

is

about twelve

and Mr. Elphinstone about

Christ,

not even

nine

be observed, by a

that the burning of

73.),

hinted

at,

which, of

itself,

compilation of the laws far anterior to the

era of Alexander the Great, the Macedonians having found this

cruel

and revolting

contains cannot

it

custom

prevalent

fail

read the subjoined

most

to strike the

No

of interest and importance.

full

the

at

But whatever may be the date of

invasion.

translation

period

remembered that we are

of the Hindus at these early
importance of a work,
picture

superficial observer as

without admiring the lofty and

entirely

which,

ages,

many

it

and when

it

without historical account

every one must admit the

presenting us

with a complete

of their laws, religion, and social habits,

guide to

matter

one, it is presumed, will

almost Christian tone of morality that pervades

is

of their

this code, the

may

serve as a

points in their political history.

Let not, however, the reader suppose that the translation we

have here given of the most striking passages in these Institutes

intended to serve as a sample of the whole, or he will derive

is

from

its

perusal a very exalted and

a very false notion of the

Hindu morality at this early epoch.

The original work
polluted by numerous rules and prohibitions, having reference
practices which could only have prevailed in a corrupt and

state of
is

to

degraded

state

of moral

feeling.

It should,

in mind, that the compiler of this code,

learned
his

Brahman

of

country, and the

the

day,

collected

opinions of his

moreover, be borne

who was probably some

from the

own

time,

literature

what might

to

of
be

the laws which should regulate the community, rather than what
those laws actually were;

and that he doubtless mixed up with

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED.

36

many

the existing state of things

picture presented

of the

upon questions

ideas

Nevertheless, however

of religion, morality, and law.

minuter parts

own

of his

much

however

to be attributed to the imagination of the legislator, and

much

it

may

the

us in this book are

to

be necessary to soften down the particular features

of the landscape,

taken as a whole,

still,

it

furnishes us with a

very valuable representation of the early condition of the Hindu

And

people.

its

importance will be enhanced, when

it is

remem-

bered that the natives of India at the present day regard

it

not

only as the oldest, but as the most sacred text after the Vedas,

and that

The

Hindu jurisprudence.

furnishes the basis of

it still

work

original

entirely wanting in arrangement, and the

is

preceding extracts have been selected from various parts so as to

give the cream of the whole with as

that the most remarkable feature in

castes

means
the

division

The Sacerdotal
The Servile.
The

1st,

4th,

cial;

the

is

equal,

of the people into four classes or

2d,

The Military

first

" twice-born."

of

3d,

The Commer-

though by no

three classes,

were admitted into one common

common name

continuity and con-

The reader must understand

Hindu society, as depicted in

nexion as the subject would admit.

the Institutes,

much

pale,

and

called

With reference

to

by

them

alone were these Institutes composed, the 4th class being in that
state of degradation

the
the

aborigines
1st,

which would seem to indicate that they were

of the

all

human

Brahmans who formed

beings

it

to

were

they were even superior

the king, and their lives and property were protected by the

most stringent laws.

They were

to

quarters (or orders), living for the

their

preceptors

families

as

As

subject to a conquering race.

or Sacerdotal Class, the

held to be the chief of

to

soil,

for

the

second,

divide their lives into four

first

as

quarter as students with

householders

for the third, as anchorites in the

religious

woods

with

their

for the fourth,

mendicants, wandering from house to house, and

emaciating their bodies by mortification and austerity.

the 2d, or Military Class, although
Sacerdotal, they

enjoyed

much

As

to

inferior in rank to the

great privileges,

and,

inasmuch as the

king and his ministers were taken from their body, must have

been practically the most powerful.

As

to the 3d, or Commercial,

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED.

much

they were not held in

Class,

The

4th,

or Servile

and religious privileges

does not appear that they were the slaves of the

were excluded from

and although
state

esteem, their duties being to keep

the ground, and engage in trade.

cattle, till

37

it

like those of

political

all

Europe, their only duties were

made

to consist

in serving the other three classes.

Mr. Elphinstone notices two great

thus constituted

1st,

the

little

peculiarities in the society

importance attached to the direc-

tion of public worship and religious ceremonies

2dly, the strictness

are regulated, as
vast

tract

if

with which

all

the

actions

by the Brahmans
of the Brahmans

living in a convent, and not scattered over a

of country,

without head or council or ecclesiastical

government.

The annexed
William Jones
distinguished

translation

is

partly

founded upon that of Sir

but although, in some passages, the words of that

oriental

have been followed,

scholar

thought desirable to introduce

many

it

has been

alterations in the present

version.

TRANSLATION.
ORIGIN OF THE FOUR CLASSES, AND GENERAL VIEW OF THEIR DUTIES.
1.
For the sake of the preservation of
Supreme in glory assigned separate duties

all

this creation, the

to those

who sprang

respectively from his mouth, his arm, his thigh, and his foot.
2.

To Brahmans he assigned

the duties of teaching, of reading,

of sacrificing, of assisting at sacrifices, of giving, and

(if

indigent)

of receiving;.
3.

The

(duties) of a Kshatriya are, in

people, giving,

sacrificing,

brief, the

defence of the

reading, freedom from attachment to

sensual pleasures.
4.

To

the Vaishya (he assigned the duties of) keeping cattle,

giving, sacrificing, reading, trading, lending

money

at

interest,

and agriculture.
5.

To

the Shudra, the

Supreme Ruler appointed one

single

duty, the service of these (other) classes ungrudgingly.

6.

Of

animated

created things, the most excellent are those which are

;

of the animated, those endued with intellectual

K K

life

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED,

38
the

of

intelligent,

mankind

Rrahmans

and of men,

the

(or

sacerdotal class).

Of Brahmans,

7.

those

who

are learned

(in

the

ritual)

of

the learned, those whose minds are acquainted with their duty
of those

who

are acquainted with their duty, such as perform

of such as perform

it,

Supreme Spirit,
8. The
seniority
learning

of

who have

those

Bfahmans

priests)

of Kshatriyas (or soldiers) from valour

from sacred

is

merchants and husbandmen) from (abundance

(or

with the

acquaintance

(or

it

of Vaishyas

of)

grain and

money of Shudras (or slaves) from priority of birth alone.

9.
The Brahman, the Kshatriya, and the Vaishya are
;

the

three fwice-born classes (their sacred birth taking place at their

investiture with the

Shudra,

is

thread)

sacred

but the fourth

class,

or

once-born (as being excluded from investiture with the

thread); there

is

no

(except those which are mixed and

fifth class

impure).

THE

FIRST,

OR SACERDOTAL CLASS (OR BRAHMANS).

Brahman

Duties of the

his Life, as a

in the first Order

Guru
10.

am

" I

{Ashrama) or Quarter

Brahmacharl, or Student of Beligion,

Learning,

subject to

of

Ms

or Preceptor.

having approached a Brahman, said to him,

thy divine

preserve me, deliver

treasure,

me

not to a

scorner; so (preserved) I shall become supremely strong.

11.

But communicate

me

to that student

guardian of the treasure, and

self-governed,
12.

Where

whom

who

will

be a careful

thou shalt know to be pure,

and a Brahmachari."
virtue and worldly

means

(sufficient

to

secure

it)

are not found, or diligent attention proportioned (to the holiness

of the subject), in that soil divine knowledge
like

13.

teacher of the

Veda should be

learning rather than sow

it

must not be sown,

good seed on barren land.

willing to die with his

in sterile soil,

even though he be in

grievous distress.
14.

Brahman who

is

the causer of spiritual birth, the teacher

of proper duties, even though a child, becomes

of an old man.

by

right the father

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED.

15.

him

A man

is

39

not therefore aged because his head

is

surely the gods consider as aged, who, though young,

gray
is

well

read in Scripture.
16.

As an elephant made of wood, as an antelope made of

so is an unread Brahman
these three (merely) bear the

leather,

name.
17.

These (following) rules must a Brahmachari observe, whilst

dwelling with his preceptor, keeping

troul, for the
18.

sake of increasing his habitual devotion.

When commanded by

received no

his passions under con-

all

command,

and even when he has

his preceptor,

him always

let

be diligent in reading and

in friendly offices toward his teacher.

19.

teacher, a father, a mother,

to be treated

with disrespect,

though he be much
20.

and an elder brother, are not

by a Brahman, even

especially

irritated.

That trouble which a mother and father undergo in rearing

their children is a debt which cannot be repaid even in hundreds

I

of years.
21.

Let a

parents),

when

man

and on

constantly

are

these three

do

occasions

all

may

what

please

what may please

satisfied, his

these

(his

his preceptor

whole course of devotion

is

accomplished.
22.

Obedience

these

to

three

is

called the highest devotion,

and without their approbation he must perform no other duty.

23.

the

Of (the youth) who

four

aged,

things

habitually greets and constantly reveres

obtain

increase

^life,

knowledge,

fame,

strength.
24.

As a man who digs deep with a spade comes to a spring

who is diligent in serving (his preceptor) attains

of water, so he

the knowledge which lies in his teacher's mind.

25.

Even from poison nectar may be

gentleness of speech
lesson even
26.

from a

taken, even

a believer in Scripture

man

may

of the lowest class.

Therefore the highest virtue, learning, purity, gentleness of

speech, and various liberal arts should be collected

all

from a child

receive a good

by him from

quarters.
27.

In

the

restraint of

the

organs

which

run wild among

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED.

40

ravishing objects of sense, a wise

man

a charioteer in managing (restive)

like

Desire

28.

objects, as

is

never

the fire

satisfied

should apply diligent care,

steeds.

with the enjoyment of desired

not appeased) by clarified butter,

(is

only

it

more vehemently.

blazes

By

29.

addiction to his sensual organs a

man

undoubtedly in-

curs guilt; but having kept them in subjection, he thence attains

heavenly

bliss.

Neither the Vedas, nor almsgiving, nor

30.

sacrifices,

observances, nor pious austerities, ever lead that

felicity

who

strict

to heavenly

inwardly depraved.

is

Having

31.

man

nor

kept

all

his

organs

and obtained command over his heart

of

under controul,

sense

he

also,

accomplish

will

every object, even though he reduce not his body by religious

austerities.

But when one among

32.

single defect his

all

his organs gives way,

by

that

knowledge of divine truth passes away, as water

leaks through (a single crack in) a leathern vessel.

He whose

33.

guarded, attains

discourse and heart are pure and ever perfectly

all

the fruit acquired by a complete course of

studying the Veda.

Let a Brahman constantly shrink from worldly honour as

34.

he would poison, and rather always earnestly desire disrespect as

he would nectar.

For though scorned he may sleep with pleasure

35.

pleasure
life

may

he awake

with pleasure

may

with

he pass through this

but the scomer utterly perishes.

36.

The Brahman who thus without

deviation passes the time

of his studentship, ascends (after death) to the most exalted regions,

and

is

not again subject to birth in this lower world.

Duties of the

Brahman

in the second order or quarter of his

life,

as

a Grihastha, or Householder.
37.

Let a Brahman, having dwelt with a preceptor for the

quarter of his

life,

as a married

man.

38.

pass the second quarter of

With no injury

to

life

in his

animated beings, or with as

own

little

first

house,

injury

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED.

as possible, and without

own

toil to his

41

him accumulate

body, let

riches.

The

39.

alone

(by others) wealth alone

If

is

by some declared

(by some) pleasure and wealth

an assemblage of
40.

good

chief temporal

and wealth

three

all

but the chief good here below

he seek happiness,

let

him be moderate

root in content, and discontent

41.

Let him

daily,

prescribed by the
his ability
42.
all

Veda

is

this is a sure decision,*

tion of riches), pursuing perfect contentment

its

to be virtue

and (by some) virtue

without

is

(in the

acquisi-

for happiness has

the root of misery.

sloth,

perform his peculiar duty

for performing that duty to the best of

he obtains supreme

bliss.

Let him not from carnal desire be too strongly attached to

objects of sense

him wholly abandon

let

all

pursuits that are

incompatible with the study of Scripture.

43.

Let him pass through this world, bringing his apparel, his

discourse,

and his

intellectual

acquirements into conformity with

his age, his occupations, his means, his divine knowledge,

station in

and his

life.

Though sinking (into penury) in consequence of his righteous

dealings, let him never apply his mind to unrighteousness, observ44.

ing the speedy overthrow of iniquitous and sinful men.

45.

Iniquity practised in this world, like the earth, does not

bear fruit at the

moment

cates the author of

46.

to
if

Yes

but advancing

little

by

little it

eradi-

it.

iniquity,

him who wrought

once committed,
it

fails

not of producing fruit

not in his person, yet in his sons

if

or

not in his sons, yet in his grandsons,

47.

Of death and

of vice, vice is pronounced the

since after death a vicious

man

more dreadful

sinks to the lowest depths of hell,

while a man, free from vice, reaches heaven.

48.

Let him, therefore, shun atheism, disbelief of Scripture, con-

tempt of the

deities, malice, hypocrisy, pride,

* This passage

will call to the

mind of the

chapters of the Ist book of Aristotle's Ethics.

anger, and cruelty.

classical scholar

the 6th and 6th

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED.

42

Let him not wound the feelings of others, even though

49.

tated

him not

let

injure another in thought or deed

not even utter a word by which his fellow-creature

irri-

him

let

may

suffer

uneasiness.
50. Let him say what is true, let him say what is pleasing
let
him speak no disagreeable truth, nor let him speak agreeable
;

falsehood: this

a perpetual law.

is

Whatever act depends (for its accomplishment) on another,

that act let him carefully shun
but whatever depends on himself,
51.

to that let

him

diligently attend.

Every thing which depends

52.

(for

its

attainment) on

the

favour of another causes unhappiness, but every thing which de-

pends on one's own individual exertions causes happiness

know

Let him always honour his food, and eat

53.
i

tempt
'

when he

sees

return thanks for

54.

let

him

be in a few words the definition of pleasure and pain.

this to

it

him

let

it,

rejoice,

(praying that he

Excessive eating

may

always obtain

prejudicial to health, to

is

prospect of attaining heaven

it is

without con-

it

and be content, and ever

life,

it).

and to the

destructive to merit, and odious

amongst men
55.

seat

To

therefore,

a guest

who has

and water and

him with
56.

he should by

food,

all

means avoid it.

him

arrived at his house let

such as

may

offer

be in his power, treating

hospitality, according to prescribed rule.

Let him never eat any thing himself which he has not

first

I
;

set before his guest

to fame, to
57.

mere

life,

When
trifle,

and

reverence of a guest

is

conducive to wealth,

to a heavenly reward.

asked, he

should give something, though

it

be a

ungrudgingly, with a cheerful heart, and to the best

of his means, having met with a worthy object of charity.

58.

same

With whatever
spirit,

spirit a

man

bestows any

gift,

with the very

being honoured in return, he shall receive a similar

recompense.
59.

Let not a

man

pride himself on his religious observances

having made a donation

let

merit of devotion

and the merit of almsgiving by ostenta-

is lost,

tiously proclaiming
60.

him never proclaim

it

by

pride, the

it.

Let him not having committed

sin

perform a penance

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED.

under the pretext of

religion, disguising

of

his

crime under mere

women and

bodily austerity, and deceiving (only)

43

the lowest class

men.

He who

61.

being of one character describes himself to the

good as of another

the most sinful wretch in the world, the

is

worst of thieves, a stealer of men's minds.

62.

gion

man

wise

should

since he falls low,

constantly discharge

all

moral

the

though he perform not constantly the ceremonies of

duties,

if,

reli-

performing ceremonial acts only, he

discharges not his moral duties.

Giving pain to no creature,

^3.

let

him, for the sake of obtain-

ing a companion to the next world, accumulate virtue by degrees,

as the white ants (collect the soil into) a hillock.

For neither

64.

man,
world

will

nor mother, nor wife, nor son, nor kinshis passage to the

in

next

his virtue alone will adhere to him.

65.

father,

remain as his companion

Single

is

every living being born, single he passes away,

single he eats the fruit of his good deeds,

and single the

fruit of

his evil deeds.

66.

When

he leaves his dead body,

on the ground,

accompanies his
67.

a log or a lump of clay,

soul.

Continually, therefore, and

virtue, for the

like

his kindred retire with averted faces, but his virtue

by

degrees, let

him accumulate

sake of securing an inseparable associate

with virtue as his companion he will

traverse a gloom,

since

hard

indeed to be traversed.
68.

The man who

is

eminent in

piety,

have been expiated by devotion, such a

stantly

and whose offences

man

does his virtue in-

convey after death to another world with a radiant form

and a body

of. celestial

substance.

Duties of the Grihasthas Wife.

69.

faithful wife,

wishing to attain in heaven the mansion of

her husband, must do nothing unkind to that husband, be he living

or dead.
70.

husband must constantly be served as a god by a vir-

* Sec p, x^. note 24.

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED.

44

As Sax only

tuous wife.

as she

obedient to her lord, so far

is

is

she exalted in heaven.

She must always be cheerful,

71.

her management of

skilful in

the affairs of the house, careful in cleaning the household furni-

and not too lavish in her expenditure.

ture,
72.

She who commits no offence against her

him

to

in

is

devoted

same abode with her husband.

And when her husband

name of another man, but

73.

forgiving

but

mind, speech, and body, acquires high renown in this

world, and in the next the

the

lord,

let

her continue

performing

injuries,

all

dead, let her not ev^en pronounce

is

austerities,

till

her

own

death,

and avoiding every

sensual pleasure.

Duties of the

Brahman

in the third order or quarter of his

life,

as a

Vanaprastha, or Hermit.
74.

When

the householder perceives wrinkles on his body, and

him

his hair gray, consigning his wife to the care of his sons, let

then have recourse to the

forest.

From such food as himself may eat, let him to the best of
ability make offerings and give alms, and with water, roots,

75.

his

fruit,
76.

and other presents

Let him be

let

him honour

all

who

visit his

hermitage.

constantly engaged in the study of Scripture,

patient of extremities, benevolent, composed in mind, a constant

giver but no receiver of

gifts,

tenderly affectionate towards

all

animated bodies.
77.

Not

solicitous for the

means

of gratification, his organs pro-

perly kept in subjection, sleeping on the bare ground, without one

selfish affection,
78.

dwelling at the roots of trees.

Let him emaciate his bodily frame, enduring harsher and

harsher mortifications.
fear

A Brahman

who has banished sorrow and

becomes exalted in the divine world.

Duties of the

Brahman

in the fourth order or quarter of his

life,

as a

Bhikshu, or Beligious Mendicant.

79.

third

Having thus passed

portion

of his

become a Parivrajaka
sensual connexions.

life,

his
let

time

him

(or religious

in

for

the forests during the

the fourth portion of

mendicant),

abandoning

it

all

'

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED.

80.

His hair,
a

dish,

staff,

45

and beard being clipped, bearing with him

nails,

and a water-pot, intent on religious meditation,

him wander about continually without causing pain

let

to

any

creature.
81.

Let him not long for death,

him expect

to sentient beings, he

84.

becomes

for immortality.

fit

Let him bear opprobrious speech with patience,

turn be angry,

By

eating

tary places, let

by sensual
85.

of

when cursed

little

him

let

let

him

him not

utter a blessing.

and by standing and

food,

him suppress

let

man

sitting in soli-

those organs that are hurried

away

objects.

mansion infested by decrepitude and sorrow, the seat

malady,

passion,

life, let

and by abstinence from injury

not treat any one with contempt, with an angry

in his

for

by the gradual

the restraint of his sensual organs,

extinction of affection and hatred,

83.

him not long

his appointed time as a hired servant his wages.

By

82.

let

harassed

transient

by

pains,

haunted with the darkness of

and formed of

earth, such a

mansion

let

him

cheerfully quit.

manner having by little and little abandoned all

earthly attachments, and having by devotion of himself to God
86.

In this

effaced sin,

he then attains the supreme path of glory.

By Brahmans,

87.

placed

in

these

four orders, a (system of)

duty having ten characteristics must be sedulously practised.

Contentment, returning good for

88.

purification, coercion of the organs,

veracity,

evil,

self-command, honesty,

knowledge of

science,

wisdom,

and freedom from anger, form their tenfold system of duty.

THE SECOND, OR MILITARY CLASS (OR KSHATRIYAS).

The King.

By

89.

a Kshatriya (or

man

of the military class),

who has

re-

ceived in due form the investiture prescribed by the Vedas, the protection of

all

The

90.

these (his dominions)

is

to be

made according

nor does the sacerdotal prosper without the military

dotal

and military

in this

to rule.

military class does not flourish without the sacerdotal,

classes,

when

the sacer-

associated together, obtain increase

world and the next.

L L

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED.

46
91.

by

For

the world were without a king

if

fear, therefore

it

would be agitated

Supreme Ruler created a king

the

for the sake

of the protection of all this (universe).

92.

even though a

king,

child,

contempt from an idea that he

must not be treated with

a mere mortal

is

for

he

is

mighty divinity that appears in human shape.

93.

robbers

king should apply

his efforts to the suppression of

all

by the suppression of such wicked men

for

his

fame and

territory obtain increase.

94.

By

the

protection of the virtuous and the extirpation of

monarchs who devote themselves

doers,

evil

to the care of their

subjects attain paradise.

9.5.

thus

As a husbandman

96.

But that monarch who takes a revenue without restraining

the wicked,

he himself
97.

an one the dominions become troubled, and

of such

is

excluded from heaven.

But of him whose realm

his

arm and

like

a tree duly watered.

.98.

plucks up weeds and preserves his corn,

a king destroy the iniquitous and protect his country.

let

free

from

is

terror, the

supported by the strength of

dominions continually flourish

Let him diligently suppress the unrighteous

methods

^by

coercion,

by three
by confinement, and by various kinds of

capital punishment.
99.

If the

king were not with the greatest activity to

punishment on the
fish

on a

100.

101.

would roast the weak

like

spit.

The crow would peck

dog would
nobody,

guilty, the stronger

inflict

all

the

lick the clarified butter

consecrated offering, and the

ownership would remain with

barriers would be broken down.

The whole human

man

ment, for an innocent

of punishment the

race

is

kept under controul by punish-

is difficult

whole universe

to be found

is fitted

through fear

enjoyment of

for the

its blessings.
102.

Injustice

releasing the

man who

is

considered

man who

deserves

it

proper discrimination.

to

attach

to a king as

much

in

deserves punishment, as in punishing the

not

but justice to one

who

inflicts it

with

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED.

Day and

103.

night must he exert

every

47

effort to

gain the

over his passions, since that king alone whose passions

victory

are subdued can keep his subjects also in subjection.

Administration (f Justice.
104.

Neither the king himself nor the king's

officer

ought ever

litigation, or to neglect a law-suit when brought

him by another.
105. As a hunter tracks the lurking-place of the (wounded)
deer by the drops of blood, so must a king investigate the direc-

to

promote

before

tion in

being wounded by iniquity, approaches the

justice,

be wounded by

dart, there those

judges also

it.

Either the court must not be entered, or truth must be

107.

declared

what

by deliberate arguments.

justice lies

and the judges extract not the

court,
shall

which

Where

106.

man

that

is

criminal

who

either remains silent or says

is false.

By

108.

truth

justice advanced

every

witness purified from

is

sin

by truth

is

truth must, therefore, be spoken by witnesses of

class.

109.

The man who, being

arrived in a court of justice, gives an

imperfect account of a transaction, the truth of which he has not

clearly ascertained, shall resemble a blind

man who

eats fish along

with the bones.

110.

O
if

The merit

of every virtuous

good man, since thy

thou speak

act

birth, shall depart

which thou hast done,

from thee

to the dogs,

falsely.

HI. Headlong in utter darkness

shall the guilty

wretch tumble

into hell, who, being asked a question in judicial inquiry, answers

falsely.

112.

The

sinful say in their hearts,

"None

gods distinctly see them, and so does the

113.

alone,"

Though thou
there

resides

thinkest to thyself,
in

thy

sees us."

Yes; the

spirit within their breasts.

good

friend,

bosom an Omniscient

"I am

being,

the

inspector of thy goodness or of thy wickedness.

114.

The

own refuge

own witness; the soul itself is its

tny own soul, the supreme internal

soul itself is its

:

witness of men.

offend

not

SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED.

48

The firmament, the

115.

the

moon, the

sun,

the

earth, the

fire,

waters, the

human

the Judge of departed

heart,

souls, the

wind, the night, the two twilights, and justice, are acquainted with
the conduct of

all

corporeal beings.

THE THIRD OR COMMERCIAL CLASS (OR VAISHYAs).

Let the Vaishya, having

116.

sacrificial

thread,

and having married

to his business of agriculture

Since the

117.

trusted

and

trade,

with the

investiture

a wife,

be always attentive

and the tending of

Lord of the world, having created

to the

human

whole

cattle.

cattle, in-

care of the Vaishya, while he intrusted the

Brahman and

species to the

Kshatriya.

Let him be acquainted with the proper seasons for sowing

118.

seeds,

them

received

and with the bad or good

defects

qualities of land, the excellence or

of commodities, the advantages and disadvantages of diffe-

rent regions.
119.

Of gems,

pearls,

fumes, and condiments,

120.

and coral;

let

him know

all

cloths, per-

the prices both high and low.

men, the best mode of keeping goods, and every thing

connected with purchase and

by

woven

Let him know the just wages of servants, and the various

dialects of

121.

of metals,

sale.

Let him exert his utmost

righteous

means

and

let

efibrts to

augment

his property

him, to the best of his power,

contribute toward the support and nourishment of

all

creatures.

THE FOURTH OR SERVILE CLASS (OR SHUDRAS).

122.

Attendance on illustrious Brahmans, who are householders

and learned in the Vedas,

is

of itself the highest duty of a Shiidra,

and conducive to his heavenly reward.

123.

Pure

(in

body and mind), serving the three higher

classes,

mild in speech, never arrogant, ever firm in his dependence on

the sacerdotal

class,

he

may

obtain the highest class in another

transmigration.
124.

Avoidance of injury to animated beings, veracity, honesty,

cleanliness,

and command over the organs of sense, form the com-

pendious system of duties which

four classes.

Manu

has ordained for

all

the

SCHEME OF THE SHLOKA, OR ANUSHTUBH METRE.

The

Institutes of

This

metre.

poems

are written in the shloka, or anushtubh

commonest

the

is

metres, and

Sanscrit
epic

Manu

that

is

the East.

of

The scheme
6

The

long or short.

mon.

But the

syllable

10

line

may

of

lines
line

of

sixteen

apply equally

11

12

14

13

15

16th, as

ending the

10

may

line, is also

be

com-

be considered as divided into two parts

is

it

must end a word,

an almost universal rule that this

Hence

whetJier simple or compound.

of a

usual privilege

follows that the

two

of

Uth, and 12th syllables

10th,

The

variety

as follows:

is

at the 8th syllable, since

the infinite

which regulate one

1st, 2d, 3d, 4th, 9th,

either

consists

It

syllables each, but the rules

to the other.

of all

which chiefly prevails in the great

final

syllable is

it

conceded

to the 8th also.

The
also,

5th syllable ought always

long

either

and

or

if

short,

last

Every

to

be short.

The

6th

from these

may

be

long then the 7th ought to be long

But oc-

last rules occur.

four syllables form two iambics, the 13th being always

short, the 14th

plete

if

short then the 7th ought to be short also.

casional variations

The

but

always long, and the 15th always short.

shloka,

sentence

in

or couplet of two lines, must

itself,

form

com-

and contain both subject and predicate.

Not unfrequently, however,

in

the

Ramayana and Mahabharata,

three lines are united to form a triplet.

e44

r^

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE

CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF

TORONTO LIBRARY